Abb PLC

Tasnee Identification Code
AA-BBBBBB-CC-DD-EEEFF
FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602)

DATA SHEET FOR MAIN EXTRUDER
Tecnimont Identification Code
3276-GP-VD-050
Plants :
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Location: AL JUBAIL KSA
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
086
Issue
FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602) DATA

SHEET FOR MAIN EXTRUDER
COPERION WERNER & PFLEIDERER

STUTTGART
FINAL ISSUED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
DATE OF ISSUE:
Replaces:
Created from:
01.10.2007
Type / Code
ZSK380 / ZSK70
Jobname
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN

CONNECTION WITH THIS
DOCUMENT
TASNEE LDPE
Job-No.
Doc-Type
Count-No.
Fmt.
Rev.
64019320 . 541 . 0015 . 4 . 03

03
FINAL
Wiebe
Remus
Aichroth
01-10-2007
02
UPDATE
Wiebe
Remus
Aichroth
10-05-2007
01
FIRST ISSUE
Wiebe
Laib
Laib
01-12-2006
Issue
Description
Prepared
Checked
Approved
This document is Tecnimonts property, and cannot be used by others for any purpose, without prior written consent
Date
03


3276-GP-VD-050
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Plants :
Client Ref.: TASNEE
086
Sheet
Issue
ITEM:
Sigla:
REQUIRED QUANTITY:
Quantita richiesta:
GENERAL FEATURES ACCORDING TO:

specifica caratteristiche generali:
3276-NN-SG-000115
GENERAL TESTING SPECIFICATION:

specifica generale prove:
3276-NN-SG-000116
TYPE OF MACHINE FED BY VF DRIVE:

Tipo di macchina azionata dal gruppo a FV:
EXTRUDER MAIN MOTOR
VF DRIVE MAIN EQUIPMENT:

Composizione del gruppo a FV:
MV/MV POWER TRANSFORMER; VF CONVERTER UNIT; AC INDUCTION MOTOR.
AC MOTOR:
Motore in c.a.:
AC THREE-PHASE MV MOTOR, OF CHARACTERISTICS AS PER 3276-NN-SE-020301
CONVERTER UNIT SCHEME:

Schema dellunita di conversione:
Converter HW Diagram
3 BHS 227357 E01
VF OUTPUT UNIT TYPE:

Tipo di unita di uscita a FV:
ACS 6000 Inverter Unit,3 level MV-DTC inverter (IGCTs)
10
UF INPUT UNIT:
Unita di ingresso del UF:
ACS 6000 Line supply Unit,12 pulse diode bridge (without braking)
11
MV/LV POWER TRANSFORMER:

Trasformatore di potenza MT/BT:
5200kVA(2600/2600) WITH TWO MULTI SECONDARY WINDINGS
6-VFD-602
N
3276-NN-SG-000010
SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS - Caratteristiche dellalimentazione

12
SCHEMA:
Configuration:
13
RATED VOLTAGE
Tensione nominale:
13800 +5%
14
NUMBER OF PHASES:
Numero fasi:
No.
15
RATED FREQUENCY:
Frequenza nominale:
Hz
60 +1%
16
SYSTEM NEUTRAL POINT:

stato del neutro:
direttamente a terra
solidly earthed
17
SHORT CIRCUIT POWER:

Potenza di corto circuito:
MVA
Skmax. =
FREQUENCY RANGE
a terra con resistore
earthed through resistor
40kA
(*)
isolato
insulated
Skmin = 1 Sec
REQUIREMENTS ON SUPPLY SIDE - Requisiti lato rete di alimentazione

18
19
ACCORDING TO : IEEE 519
HARMONIC DISTORTION:
Distorsione armonica:
POWER FACTOR
and Shall be within the level specified in IEC- 61000-2-4, table 2 to 5 class2.
> 0.95 (*)
Cosfi
20
EFFICIENCY OF THE CONVERTER / INVERTER AT FULL LOAD:
>98,5 %
Rendimento dellazionamento completo a pieno carico:
CONVERTER CHARACTERISTIC VALUES

21
MAKE :
22
TYPE :
ABB
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
03


3276-GP-VD-050
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Plants :
Client Ref.: TASNEE
23
RATED OUTPUT :
24
OUTPUT VOLTAGE : V
25
MAX. PERMISSIBLE CURRENT : A
26
OUTPUT FREQUENCY : Hz
27
ROTATIONAL SPEED STABILITY : % +
0,1 at rated speed
28
RIPPLE OF OUTPUT CURRENT : %
approx.18 ( at 50 Hz
29
CURRENT INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT : A DC
1.046
29
VOLTAGE INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT : V DC
4.658
30
POWER CONVERTER MAINS SIDE
MVA
FROM
186
TO 3100
989
FROM
3 TO 50 at constant torque; 50 to 65,4 at constant power
[ X ] DIODE
[ ] GTO
[ ] THYRISTOR
[ ] IGBT
POWER CONVERTER MOTOR SIDE

SEMI CONDUCTOR MAKE :
32
[ ] DIODE
INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT MAKE
INSTALLATION
[ ] IN CABINET
[X] THYRISTOR (IGCT)
[ ] GTO
[ X ] U-CONVERTER
[ ] IN OPEN AIR
[ ] IGBT
[ ] I-CONVERTER
Control Cabinets
33
TYPE OF PROTECTION :
34
CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) mm :
2230
1024
500
35
COOLING SYSTEM DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) mm :
1300
1137
854 External heat exchanger)
36
CONVERTER DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) mm :
2161,5/ 2594
37
POWER DISSIPATION WITH NOMINAL OPERATION :
kW
38
POWER IN THE SWITCH ROOM TO BE REMOVED :
NOTE:
Issue
5,312
SEMI CONDUCTOR MAKE
31
086
Sheet
IP 32
kW
4930
X 1037 Without/with fan
78
4,7
IN CASE OF CONFLICT BETWEEN THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS DATA-SHEET AND THE REFERENCED
SPECIFICATIONS, THIS DATA-SHEET PREVAILS.
(*) DATA TO BE PROVIDED BY VENDOR
03

3276-GP-VD-050
Plants :
1.
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
086
Issue
General requirements
The panel shall be self-standing and shall be accessible from front.
The degree of protection of the panel shall be IP32.
The cable entry shall be from bottom of the panel.
The cable length between the motor and the converter panel is less than 300 meter.
Colour of the panel can be as per manufacturers standard.
Earth fault protection of motor and motor connection circuits shall be provided by suitable
device, according to the type of voltage system feeding the motor (IT or TN).
2.
Cooling of Frequency Converter

Water-cooling.
Water/water heat exchanger, including all required ancillary systems and monitoring devices.
Double design implementations of circulating pump and heat exchanger.
3.
Security concept and availability

Drive must reduce the rotation speed in case of attaining the current limit.
Possibility of automatic restart after mains undervoltage.
4.
Interface to the process control

a) Conventional
All inputs/outputs at zero potential and securely isolated (PELV)
Analog signals 4-20 mA
Inputs
Rotation speed required value analog
On/Off
Interlocking
Slower/Faster
Outputs
Rotation speed actual value
Motor current actual value
Torque actual value
Active power actual value
Ready for operation
Fault
Motor rotates
b) Bus coupling
Signals from transformer, converter and motor monitoring, which are necessary for remote
maintenance, are transmitted via bus system. The kind of bus system will be defined
during engineering time.
5.
Operation and observation at the converter

Display or other equipment, which guarantees that all functions, which are necessary for
operation and observation are fulfilled.
Operating levels must be lockable by password or key-operated switches.
Operating hours meter by software
All subsequently metered monitoring is to be represented on the display:
Winding temperature
03

3276-GP-VD-050
Plants :
6.
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
086
Issue
Storage temperatures
Oil and water temperatures
Oil throughput flow
Over/under voltage monitor
Overcurrent monitoring
Rotation/Torque monitoring
Operating hours counter system
Fault initial value recording
Filtering system / Compensation

Filtering system shall be in compliance with warranted values.
The degree of protection shall be IP41 in line with the converter.
The filtering system shall be connected on primary side of the transformer in order to keep the
harmonics within the values (current and voltage) given by the network on 13.8 kV side taking
into account the already existing users for the plant.
The bidder must guarantee this.
03

Converter ACS6000 Main Drive

6-VFD-602
3276-GP-VD-050
Plants :
LDPE 400 KT/Y
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
081
Issue
CONVERTER ACS6000 MAIN DRIVE

6-VFD-602

STUTTGART
FINAL ISSUED FOR

CONSTRUCTION
DATE OF ISSUE:
Replaces:
Created from:
10.05.2007
Type / Code
ZSK380 / ZSK70
Jobname

DOCUMENT
TASNEE LDPE
Job-No.
Doc-Type
Count-No.
Fmt.
Rev.
Q1-A4D-01
64019320 . 542 . 0014 . 4 . 02

01
FIRST ISSUE
Wiebe
Laib
Laib
13-11-2006
02
UPDATE
Wiebe
Remus
Aichroth
10-05-2007
03
FINAL
Wiebe
Remus
Aichroth
01-06-2007
Issue
Description
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Date
03
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE
POWER WIRING DIAGRAM
6-VFD-602
Plants :
LDPE 400 KT/Y
3276-GP-VD-050
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
280
Issue
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE

POWER WIRING DIAGRAM
6-VFD-602

STUTTGART
FOR INFORMATION
DATE OF ISSUE:
Replaces:
Created from:
11.12.2007
Type / Code
ZSK380 / ZSK70
Jobname

DOCUMENT
TASNEE LDPE
Job-No.
Doc-Type
Count-No.
Fmt.
Rev.
Q1-A4D-01
64019320 . 542 . 0030 . 4 . 02

02
FOR INFORMATION
Wiebe
Laib
Laib
11-12-2007
01
FIRST ISSUE
Wiebe
Laib
Laib
02-10-2007
Issue
Description
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Date
02
PROJECT :
Coperion W&P/ Tasnee
ORDER NO. :
0011042645
CUSTOMER :
ODP Helsinki
EQUIPMENT :
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
CONVERTER TYPE :
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
S/N: 403
DOCUMENT :
CONVERTER HW DIAGRAM
F
Rev. ind.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express outhority is strictly forbidden. C ABB Switzerland Ltd 2002
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
35
001
002
page
4
title 2
title 1
001
002
DESIGNATION OF EL. EQUIPMENTS
DESIGNATION BLOCK
CROSS REFERENCES
DESIGNATION BLOCK
DESIGNATION BLOCK

101
102
103
104
105
134
141
161
168
171
178
184
190
192
201
207
261
262
271
275
277
278
304
371
375
391
411
441
454
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
-
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
006
007
008
009
FOR
OF SIGNALS
"FUNCTION OF ITEM"
"FUNCTION OF ITEM"
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
AUX POWER SUPPLY
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
STANDARD I/O
AUX POWER
CONVERTER
OVERVIEW
CONTROL
GUSP / CONTROL
EARTH FLT DETECTION
AUX POWER
CHARGING UNIT
DISCHARGING UNIT
DOOR MONITORING
DOOR MONITORING
COOLING
COOLING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
CABINET TEMPERATURE
FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTIONS
MOTOR SIDE
LINE SIDE
MOTOR SIDE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
INTERNAL SIGNALS
AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
INTERNAL SIGNALS
CAPACITORS
CAPACITORS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INT-BOARD
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
AMC BOARD
PINT-BOARD
INT-BOARD
"HIGHER LEVEL" & "LOCATION"

DIN 40719
DIN 40719
=LSU1 +A01
=COU1 +A02
=INU1 +A03
=CBU1 +A04
=WCU1 +A05
NPBA-12 / =COU1 +A02
=WCU1
=WCU1
SPACE HEATER
=COU1
=LSU1
=INU1
=LSU
=COU / =WCU
=CBU1
DOOR INTERLOCKING
DOOR INTERLOCKING
CABINET
INT-BOARD
=COU / =INU
FT-LINK
FSCD BOARD
CONTROL
=COU1
=LSU1
=INU1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
006
Classification of units
Numbering
1 2 3 4 5
6
+ NN AA NN AA NN .A...N...
+A 01
Rev. ind.
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
Braking Chopper Unit

Capacitor Bank Unit
Control Unit
Excitation Unit
Input Filter Unit
Inverter Unit
Input Reactor Unit
Isolator Unit
Line Supply Unit
Resistor Braking Unit
Terminal Unit
Voltage Limiter Unit
Water Cooling Unit
Cubicle No.
High voltage/group
DESIGNATION BLOCK "FUNCTION OF ITEM"
Qualifying
Symbol
1 2 3
- A NNN AN
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Section
Not used on
Converter level
E
Designation Block "Location"
Qualifying
Symbol
D
Designation Block "higher Level"

Legend
= Active Recitifier Unit
Not used on
Converter level
BCU
CBU
COU
EXU
IFU
INU
IRU
ISU
LSU
RBU
TEU
VLU
WCU
Section
Qualifying
Symbol
1 2 3
4 5
= N AA NN . AAA N
= ARU 1
Section
In ACS6000 Standard wiring diagrams:
Number (extension)
Number
Kind
Page No.: where the master symbol is placed

Exampel: -Q7121
Master symbol
placed on Page 712
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title DESIGNATION OF EL. EQUIPMENTS

DESIGNATION BLOCK FOR
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
006
007
CROSS REFERENCES OF SIGNALS
EXAMPLE : Signal DC+ ON SHEET 111 TO SHEET 112

SHEET 111
=TEU2+A02
-TEU1
DC+
NP
DC-
DC+
NP
DC-
INTERNAL WIRING:
REFERENCE TO RELEVANT STANDARD
DOCUMENT NR.
SHEET 112
3BHS119827E01
112.B1
112.B1
112.B1
111.B8
111.B8
111.B8
=INU2+A09
-INU2
3BHS119827E01
/191.A4
DC+
NP
DC-
SHEET
COORDINATE
/191.A4
SLAVE ELEMENT CAN
BE FOUND ON PAGE 191.A4
SHEET NUMBER
AND COORDINATE
WIRE NR OR NAME
-A4061
-A4011
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
006
007
008
A KIND OF ITEM
KIND OF ITEM
COMBINATION OF APPARATUS; ASSEMBLIES AND SUBASSEMBLIES

REPRESENTING A CONSTRUCTIONAL UNIT WHICH CANNOT BE CLEARLY
CLASSIFIED UNDER ANOTHER CODE LETTER, SUCH AS PLUG-IN MODULES,
FRAMES, INSERTS, PLUG-IN CARDS, LOW-PROFILE ASSEMBLIES,
LOCAL CONTROL UNITS etc.
RELAYS,
MEASURING TRANSDUCERS; THERMO-ELECTRIC CELLS; RESISTANCE

THERMOMETERS; PHOTOELECTRIC CELLS; PHOTOCONDUCTIVE CELLS;
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS; RESISTANCE STRAIN GAUGES;
TRANSDUCERS; REVOLUTION GAUGES; SPEED GAUGES; PULSE GENERATORS
TACHOMETER GENERATORS; LINEAR AND ANGULAR DEFLECTION
TRANSDUCERS; PROXIMITY INITIATORS; HALL-CURRENT GENERATORS;
FIELDEFFECT-ELEMENT POTENTIOMETERS; GAUGES FOR PRESSURE,
QUANTITY, DENSITY, LEVEL, TEMPERATURE; MICROPHONES; PICK-UPS;
LOUDSPEAKERS; LASER.
MOTORS
MEASURING EQUIPMENT,
TESTING EQUIPMENT
CAPACITORS
CAPACITORS OF ALL KIND.
DELAY DEVICES,
STORAGE DEVICES,
BINARY ELEMANTS
DEVICES FOR BINARY AND DIGITAL CONTROLLING; REGULATING AND

COMPUTING SYSTEMS. INTEGRATED CIRCUITS WITH BINARY AND DIGITAL
FUNCTIONS; DELAY ELEMENTS; SIGNAL BLOCKING ELEMENTS;
TIME-DELAY DEVICES; STORAGE AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS, i.e.CORE,
DISK AND MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE DEVICES. SHIFT REGISTERS,
COMBINATIVE ELEMENTS, i.e.AND and OR GATES. DIGITAL DEVICES,
PULSE COUNTERS, DIGITAL CONTROLLERS AND COMPUTERS.
PROTECTIVE
DEVICES
EXAMPLES
MISCELLANEOUS
LETTER
CODE
TRANSDUCERS FROM
NON-ELECTRICAL
QUANTITY TO
ELECTRICAL QUANTITY
AND VICE-VERSA
RESISTORS
FUSES (EQUIPMENT FUSES FOR FEEBLE CURRENTS, SCREW PLUG FUSES,

HH FUSES); OVERVOLTAGE DISCHARGE DEVICES; PROTECTIVE SWITCHES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS; PROTECTIVE RELAYS; BIMETALLIC
TRIPPING DEVICES; MAGNETIC TRIPPING DEVICES; PRESSURE SUPERVISING DEVICES; AIR FLOW SWITCHES; CENTRIFUGAL SWITCHES;
BUCHHOLZ PROTECTION DEVICES; ELECTRONIC DEVICES FOR SIGNAL
SUPERVISION; SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICES; LINE SUPERVISION EQUIPMENT; OPERATIONAL SAFETY DEVICES.
ROTATING AND STATIC GENERATORS AND CONVERTERS; BATTERIES;

CHARGING DEVICES; SUPPLY DEVICES;
CLOCK GENERATORS,OSCILLATORS.
SIGNALLING
DEVICES
OPTICAL AND ACOUSTICAL ANNUNCIATORS; SIGNAL LAMPS, DANGER AND

TIME SIGNALLING DEVICES; CLOCKS; TIME SEQUENCE INDICATORS;
DEVICES FOR MANEUVER REGISTRATION; DROP INDICATOR RELAYS.
NOT USED
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
AMPLIFIERS,
REGULATORS
LETTER
CODE
K
L
M
N
P
Q
EXAMPLES
HEAVY DUTY CONTACTORS; AUXILIARY CONTACTORS; AUXILIARY
RELAYS; TIME DELAY RELAYS; FLASHING RELAYS AND REED RELAYS.
CHOKES, INDUCTION COILS.
DC MOTORS, AC SINGLE PHASE AND 3 PHASE MOTORS
DEVICES FOR ANALOG CONTROL, REGULATION AND COMPUTING;
ELECTRONIC AND ELECTROMECHANICAL REGULATORS; OPERATIONAL
AMPLIFIERS; INVERTING AMPLIFIERS; ISOLATING AMPLIFIERS;
IMPEDANCE BUFFERS; CONTROL EQUIPMENT SETS; MASTER ANALOG
CONTROLLERS; ANALOG COMPUTERS, INTEGRATED CIRCUITS WITH
ANALOG FUNCTIONS.
ANALOG, BINARY AND DIGITAL INDICATING AND RECORDING
MEASURING DEVICES (INDICATORS, RECORDERS, COUNTERS);
OSCILLOSCOPES; DATA DISPLAY DEVICES; SIMULATORS; TEST
ADAPTERS; POINTS FOR MEASURING,
TESTING AND SUPPLY.
MAIN CIRCUIT SWITCHES; SWITCHES WITH PROTECTIVE DEVICES;
CIRCUIT BREAKERS; HIGH-SPEED CIRCUIT BREAKERS; ISOLATORS;
ON-LOAD ISOLATORS; STAR-DELTA SWITCHES; POLE CHANGING
SWITCHES; CONTROLLER DRUMS; DISCONNECTING LINKS; CELL
SWITCHES; PROTECTIVE ISOLATORS; PROTECTIVE ON-LOAD
ISOLATORS; HOUSE-WIRING SWITCHES; PROTECTIVE MOTOR
SWITCHES
OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WHICH ARE NOT LISTED

ELSEWHERE IN THIS TABLE OR CANNOT BE CLASSIFIED UNDER OTHER
GROUPS,i.e.LIGHTING DEVICES, ELECTRICAL FILTERS, ELECTRICAL
FENCES, VENTILATORS, HEATING DEVICES; EQUIPMENT BARRIERS FOR
INDUCTORS
SWITCHING DEVICES
FOR POWER CIRCUITS
GENERATORS,
SUPPLIES
Rev. ind.
ASSEMBLIES
SUBASSEMBLIES
SWITCHES
SELECTORS
TRANSFORMERS
Date
Date
R
S
FIXED RESISTORS; ADJUSTABLE RESISTORS; RHEOSTATS; STARTING

RESISTORS; BRAKING RESISTORS; POTENTIOMETERS; NTC RESISTORS;
PTC RESISTORS; RESISTORS FOR MEASURING; SHUNTS;
HEATING RESISTORS.
CONTROLLERS; SWITCHING INSERTS; PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES;
PIVOTED LEVER SWITCHES; ILLUMINATED PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES;
CONTROL SWITCHES; LIMIT SWITCHES; CONTROL DISCREPANCY
SWITCHES; TEST POINT SELECTOR SWITCHES; CONTROL CYLINDERS;
COPYING SETS; DECADE SELECTOR SWITCHES; CODING SWITCHES;
CONTROL KEYS; DIAL SELECTORS; ROTARY LINE SWITCHES.
MAINS, ISOLATING AND CONTROL TRANSFORMERS; CURRENT AND
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS FOR ALTERNATING CURRENT; TRANSDUCTORS.

2006-09-29
DIN 40719
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
007
008
009
KIND OF ITEM
LETTER
CODE
EXAMPLES
KIND OF ITEM
MODULATORS,
TRANSDUCERS FROM ONE
ELECTRICAL QUANTITY
TO ANOTHER
FREQUENCY MODULATORS; (-DEMODULATORS); (CURRENT-), VOLTAGETO- FREQUENCY CONVERTERS; FREQUENCY- TO- VOLTAGE (CURRENT)
CONVERTERS; ANALOG- TO- DIGITAL CONVERTERS; DIGITAL- TOANALOG CONVERTERS; SIGNAL BUFFER STAGES; DIRECT CURRENT AND
DIRECT VOLTAGE CONVERTERS; DISCRIMINATORS, PARALLEL- TOSERIES CONVERTERS; SERIES- TO- PARALLEL CONVERTERS;
CODING DEVICES; DECODING DEVICES; OPTOCOUPLERS; REMOTE CONTROL
EQUIPMENT.
EQUIPMENT.
TUBES,
SEMI- CONDUCTORS
DISPLAY TUBES; AMPLIFIER TUBES; GAS- DISCHARGE TUBES;

THYRATRONS; MERCURY- VAPOUR RECTIFIERS; DIODES; ZENER DIODES;
TUNNEL DIODES; VARACTOR DIODES; TRANSISTORS; THYRISTORS;
TRIACS,LEDS.
TRANSMISSION PATHS,
WAVE- GUIDES
LINES; CABLES; HOOK- UP WIRES; BUSBARS; WAVEGUIDES; LIGHT

TRANSMISSION CONDUCTORS, COAXIAL LINES; RF- TRANSMISSION PATHS
AND RF- TRANSMISSION LINES; AERIALS; TELECOMMUNICATION LINES.
TERMINALS,
PLUGS, SOCKETS
DISCONNECTING AND TEST PLUGS; COAXIAL CONNECTORS; SOCKETS;

TEST CONNECTORS; MULTIPOLE CONNECTORS; DISTRIBUTING CONNECTORS;
CROSS- CONNECTING BOARDS; TERMINAL BOARDS; SOLDER TERMINAL
STRIPS; JACKS.
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
MECHANICAL DEVICES
BRAKES; CLUTCHES; VALVES; SERVOMOTOR DRIVES; HOISTING DEVICES;

BRAKE LIFTING MAGNETS; AUTOMATIC CONTROL DRIVES; LOCKING
MAGNETS; MECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES; MOTOR- ACTUATED POTENTIOMETERS; PERMANENT MAGNETS; TELETYPE APPARATUS; ELECTRICAL
TYPEWRITERS; PRINTERS; PLOTTERS; OPERATORS PAGE PRINTERS.
TERMINATIONS,
EQUALIZING DEVICES,
FILTERS, LIMITERS,
CABLE TERMINATIONS
RC AND LC- FILTERS; DEVICES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF RADIO

INTERFERENCE AND FOR SPARK QUENCHING; ACTIVE FILTERS; HIGHPASS,
LOWPASS AND BANDPASS FILTERS; FREQUENCY DIVIDING NETWORKS;
ATTENUATING DEVICES.
6
LETTER
CODE
EXAMPLES
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
DIN 40719
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
008
009
101
=LSU1+A01
-LSU1
CONNECTED TO BUSBAR SYSTEM " MIDDLE "
DC+
DC+_A01 102.B1
NP_A01 102.B1
DC-_A01 102.B1
DC-
-E3151
=ACS6000/271.B1
COOLING
=ACS6000/261.B2
Door
supervis
-B3201
=ACS6000/277.D1
CABINET
TEMP.
-W412104 1
BOARD
-A3101
=ACS6000/441.B2
PINT-BOARD
C779
=ACS6000/178.B6
COU
INTERFACE
-S3201_02
-R3023
CONTROL
-G3101
-F3111
=ACS6000/190.D4
BOARD
UF C765
1L1
1L2
1L3
2L3
2L2
2L1
PE
F
Rev. ind.
BUSBAR CONFIGURATION 1

DOCUMENT NR. : 3BHS119885E01
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
1L1_A01
1L2_A01
1L3_A01
2L3_A01
2L2_A01
2L1_A01
102.C1
102.D1
102.D1
102.D1
102.D1
102.D1
PE_A01 102.E1
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=LSU1 +A01
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
009
101
102
101.B8
101.B8
101.B8
DC+_A01
NP_A01
DC-_A01
DC+

NP
DC-
DC+_A02
NP_A02
DC-_A02
103.B1
103.B1
103.B1
L1_A02
L2_A02
L3_A02
103.D1
103.D1
103.D1
PG_A02
PE_A02
103.E1
103.E1
-DOOR_INT
=ACS6000/261.A2
-K281...
-A2451
101.C8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
1L1_A01
1L2_A01
1L3_A01
2L3_A01
2L2_A01
2L1_A01
-A2501
=ACS6000/134.C2
NPBA12
ProfiB
=ACS6000/391.D6
TB820
-A2951
=ACS6000/391.A6
XV C 769
CONTROL
-A2401
=ACS6000/411.B2
AMC
BOARD
=INU:L1
=INU:L2
=INU:L3
=LSU:1L1
=LSU:1L2
=LSU:1L3
=LSU:2L3
=LSU:2L2
=LSU:2L1
-Q1001_1073
=ACS6000/171.A1
AUX POWER
-TERM_X1_2 -X131_132
=ACS6000/141.B2
PROCESS
INTERFACE
-TERM_X4
=ACS6000/201.A1
CBU
INTERFACE
=ACS6000/141.C7
MCB
INTERFACE
101.E8
PG
PE
PE_A01
150 mm
F
Rev. ind.
=COU1+A02
-COU1
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title CONVERTER INTERFACE

MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=COU1 +A02
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
101
102
103
102.B8
102.B8
102.B8
DC+_A02
NP_A02
DC-_A02
DC+
=ACS6000/184.B6
GUSP
CONTROL
=ACS6000/261.D2
DOOR
MONITORING
-E4161
-B4201
=ACS6000/275.B2
COOLING
F
A
B
C
D
102.D8
102.D8
102.D8
L1_A02
L2_A02
L3_A02
102.E8
102.E8
PG_A02
PE_A02
Date
DC-
Name
0
DC+_A03
NP_A03
DC-_A03
104.B1
104.B1
104.B1
PG_A03
PE_A03
104.E1
104.E1
=ACS6000/454.B1
INT-BOARD
=ACS6000/278.D1
CABINET
TEMP.
-A4132
-F4011
-A4133
-F4012
=ACS6000/454.E1
SVA
XVC 767
-A4051
=ACS6000/271.B2
COOLING
NP
BOARD
-A4121
-E4151_53

DOCUMENT NR. :3BHS119662E01
AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION ,CONTROL

-G4101_13
-S4201_03
Rev. ind.
=INU1+A03
-INU1
=ACS6000/454.E1
SCA
XVC 768
=ACS6000/375.B5
FSCD BOARD
=ACS6000/375.B5
FSCD BOARD
PG
PE
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=INU1 +A03
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
102
103
104
103.B8
103.B8
103.B8
DC+_A03
NP_A03
DC-_A03
DC+

NP
DC-
INTERFACE =INU1
-A7101
-V7101
-F7101
-V7102
-F7102
=ACS6000/207.C4
IGCT
INTERFACE CONTROL
-A7091
-S7201_03
D
=ACS6000/201.D4
CHARGING
UNIT
=ACS6000/262.B2
DOOR
MONITORING
-E7151
-B7201
=ACS6000/271.C2
COOLING
103.E8
103.E8
F
Rev. ind.
=CBU1+A04
-CBU1
A
B
C
D
Date
=ACS6000/277.D8
CABINET
TEMP.
/201.A4
/201.A6
=ACS6000/207.D4
IGCT
=ACS6000/207.D5
VLSCD
BOARD
-Z7081
PG
PE
PG_A03
PE_A03
Name
0
-Q7121
=ACS6000/207.C5
VLSCD
BOARD
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
PE_A04
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=CBU1 +A04
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105.E1
103
104
105

-TERM_X1
-TERM_X17
-TERM_X2
-TERM_X18
=ACS6000/161.A2
AUX POWER
400V,60Hz
=ACS6000/141.B1
STANDARD
I/O
=ACS6000/161.C2
SP. HEATER
230VAC
=ACS6000/141.C8
STANDARD
I/O
-TERM-X512
=ACS6000/192.B6
AUX POWER
230VAC
-TERM_X513
=ACS6000/161.A5
AUX POWER
400V_60Hz
-TERM_X515
=ACS6000/161.B5
SP. HEATER
1~ 230V
104.E8
F
Rev. ind.
=WCU1+A05
-WCU1
A
B
C
D
Date
=ACS6000/192.D6
AUX POWER
-G5021
-A5201
=ACS6000/391.D2
TB820
PE
PE_A04
Name
0
-TERM-X511
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER SUPPLY
2006-09-29
=WCU1 +A05
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
104
105
134
=COU1
+A02
-A2451
CUSTOMER
INTERFACE
NPBA_A
NPBA_B
/102.C3
NPBA-12
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
Data
Data
Data
Data
A
B
A
B
N
P
N
P
X2:8 SH
X2:7 DG
TXD
RXD
X2:5 +24V
X2:6 0V
DC
DC
GND
BUS
TERMINATION
ON
OFF
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

PROFIBUS ADAPTER
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105
134
141
*) PROCESS INTERFACE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
-W14102
**) MCB INTERFACE
=WCU1+A05
=COU1+A02
-TERM_X17
/105.B5
-X17 -W14101
1
1
DIGITAL INPUT
=COU1+A02
TERM_X17
-X17 -W04102
1
19
-TERM_X1_2
/102.D4
-X1
3 24VDC
2
4
PROCESS STOP INU1
3
5
4
6
OPERATION
PREVENTED INU1
5
15
6
16
OPERATION
1
17
18
2
EMERGENCY STOP
3
19
20
4
-X2 EMERGENCY STOP
5
71
6
72
EMERGENCY-OFF
73
7
74
8
EMERGENCY-OFF
75
9
10 76
EMERGENCY
11 77
RESET
12 78
EMERGENCY
20
21
22
23
24
2
3
4
5
6
DIGITAL INPUT
TERM_X1_2
-X2
79 24VDC
80
MCB STATUS CLOSED
81
82
MCB STATUS OPEN
31
32
MCB PRE-TRIP
DIGITAL OUTPUT
-TERM_X4
MCB ORDER CLOSE

COMMAND
MCB ORDER CLOSE
RELEASE
MCB ORDER OPEN 1
(OPENING COIL 1)
RESET
DIGITAL OUTPUT
TERM_X4
INU1 OPERATION
PREVENTED
-X4
55
TERM_X18
-X18
-W14105 1/BN
15
56
3/BK16
MCB ORDER OPEN 2

(OPENING COIL 2)
MCB ORDER TRIP
UNDERVOLTAGE COIL
/102.E4
-X4
1
2
3
4
5
***) 7
***) 8
6
9
***) 51
***) 52
10
53
54
***) For trip circuit supervision

if applicable
*) Details
**) Details
F
Rev. ind.
=WCU1+A05
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-TERM_X18
/105.C5
-W14103 1 -X181
2
3
4
5
7
2
3
4
5
7
8
6
9
11
8
6
9
11
12 12
10 10
1/BN13
3/BK14
-W14104
for process connection see document 3BHS123187, Chapter 1.1

for MCB connection see document 3BHS125149
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

STANDARD I/O
2006-09-29
=WCU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
134
141
161
AUX POWER
3x400V / 60HZ
-X1
=WCU1+A05
-TERM_X1
/105.B3
-X1
1
2
3
PE
-Q5003
-TERM_X2
/105.C3
-X2
1
2
PE
-W16101 1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
WCU1_L1 171.A5
WCU1_L2 171.A5
WCU1_L3 171.A5
-Q5004
-Z5001
-X554
-M5541 M -M5542 M
PUMP 1
PUMP 2
-Q5011
-K5451
-TERM_X515
/105.E5
-X515
PE
1
3
SHC_L
168.E7
2
4
PE
F
Rev. ind.
/105.D5
-X513
1
2
3
-Q5001
-TERM_X513
-Q5002
SPACE HEATER
CONVERTER
230VAC
-X2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER
2006-09-29
=WCU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
141
161
168
TRANSP_UNIT 1
-E5011
161.C5
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title INTERNAL SIGNALS

CONVERTER
2006-09-29
SPACE HEATER
SHC_L
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
161
168
171
5
161.A6 WCU1_L1
161.A6 WCU1_L2
161.A6 WCU1_L3
=COU1+A02
-Q1001_1073
/102.D5
-X20
-Q1004
-T1012
.../230V
3
L3
-Q1003
-V1021
-Z1021
-Z1022
WCU
Date
178.C3 Q1061
LSU1
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
-Q1041
-C1026
...28
-C1021
...25
-R1022
-Q2981
24V
271.A1 A02_Q1014
A
B
C
D
-Q1073
-X24_P
I/O Ext. 24VDC
-X24_P2
24VDC
-X24_P1
24VDC
Name
CONTROL
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
GUSP
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION

OVERVIEW
2006-09-29
=COU1
275.A1 A02_Q2981
WCU
-G1211
184.B3 Q1041
I/O
Ext.
-G1201
COOLING
-Q1051
-Q1061
-Q1071
Control PUMP
&
Regul. Valves
192.D2 Q1071
-X230V
Control
184.D3 Q1051_1
-Q1011
-Q1012
-E1011
192.C2 Q1012
-Q1013
-Q1014
L2
-Q1001
-T1021
-V1022
Rev. ind.
L1
201.E2 Q1003
CBU1
COOLING
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
168
171
178
=LSU1+A01
-G3101
=COU1+A02
C
171.E2
Q1061
/101.C2
CONTROL VOLTAGE
-X3
21
-W17801 BN
22
BU
-X311
1
2
PE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title AUX POWER SUPPLY

CONTROL
2006-09-29
=LSU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
171
178
184
=INU1+A03
-G4101_13
=COU1+A02
171.E5
Q1041
/103.C2
-X3
65
-W18401 BN
66
BU
-X411
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
171.E3
Q1051_1
-X3
15
-W18402 BN
16
BU
GUSP
G4101
-G4111
G4102
-G4112
G4103
-G4113
~
~
/207.C2
/207.B2
/207.D2
/207.E2
/190.E2
/190.D2
CONTROL VOLTAGE
G4104
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

GUSP / CONTROL
2006-09-29
=INU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
178
184
190
=LSU1
+A01
-F3111
/101.C6
=INU1
+A03
-G4113
/184.C6
X3.12
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
EAF
X3.11
X3.51
-W19001 A1
X3.52
SH
/454.B1
X1
X2
Sig-In
Sig-Gnd
X3:2 5AF
X3:1
Pwr_In
Pwr_Gnd
A1
TX
-W19002
FO
INT-BOARD
A818
POWER ON
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

EARTH FLT DETECTION
2006-09-29
=LSU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
184
190
192
=WCU1+A05
-TERM-X512
AC
/105.C5
171.C1
Q1012
WCU
-X3
7
-W19201 1/BN
2/BU
-X512
1
2
WCU
230VAC
=WCU1+A05
-TERM-X511
D
AC / DC
/105.D5
171.C2
Date
Name
Q1071
-X3
71
-W19202
WCU 72
1/BN
-X511
1
2/BU
-G5021/(22)
F
Rev. ind.
=COU1+A02
CONTROL VOLTAGE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER
2006-09-29
=COU / =WCU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
190
192
201
=CBU1+A04
-CBU1
=ACS6000/104.A2
=COU1+A02
-X131_132
=CBU1+A04
-Q7121
/102.D5
=ACS6000/104.A4
-X715
1
2
OPEN
3
4
OPEN
3
4
5
6
CLOSED
11
7
8
9
CLOSED
12
10
-W20101 1
-X2
53
54
55
56
-C7011
-C7031
-C7051
-C7012
-A7091
-X2
13
-W20103
14
-X20
4
Q1003
171.E7
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
-W20104
Rev. ind.
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
Name
/104.D2
-X714
1
1/BN
-X710
6
400V
2/BU
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
7
PE
0V
PE
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title CAPACITORS

CHARGING UNIT
2006-09-29
=CBU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
192
201
207
=INU1
+A03
-G4111
DC_+
/184.B6
-V7101
X3.11
X3.51
-W20701 SH
X1.1 (-)
X3.52
A1
X1.2 (+)
/104.C6
/454.B1
-W20703
FO
-W20704
FO
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
-V7102
/104.D6
A1
/184.C6
X3.51
-W20702
X3.52
SH
X1.1 (-)
A1
X1.2 (+)
-F7102
/104.D6
INT-BOARD
A722
A211
DC_NP
=INU1
+A03
-G4112
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
-F7101
/104.C6
A1
X3.12
/454.B1
-W20705
FO
-W20706
FO
INT-BOARD
A723
A212
X3.11
DC_-
X3.12
F
Rev. ind.
=CBU1+A04
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DISCHARGING UNIT
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
201
207
261
=COU1+A02
DOOR MONITORING
-DOOR_INT
/102.B5
230V
-K2814
-X3
10
-W26101 1
=LSU1+A01
DOOR INTERLOCKING
-K2811
-S3201_02
+24V
-X1 9
-W26102
-X312 1
-K2812
1
4/BU
3/BN
10
/101.C3
A2
A1
-X312
-W26105
=INU1+A03
-S4201_03
-W26106
-X412 1
4/BU
3/BN
10
/103.C3
A2
A1
-X412 4
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DOOR MONITORING
2006-09-29
DOOR INTERLOCKING
DOOR_LOCK_1
262.A6
DOOR_LOCK
262.A6
LOOP2_1
262.A5
LOOP2
262.A5
LOOP3_1
262.A5
LOOP3
LOOP1_1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
262.A4
262.A3
262.A3
LOOP1
Rev. ind.
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
207
261
262
-S7201_03
-X712 1
DOOR_LOCK_1
261.F6
261.F6
261.F5
LOOP2_1
261.F5
LOOP2
261.F5
LOOP3_1
DOOR_LOCK
-W26202
4/BU
3/BN
10
/104.D3
A2
A1
-X712 4
-W26207
-W26208
8
BN
BU
F
Rev. ind.
-W26201 1
=CBU1+A04
LOOP3
LOOP1_1
LOOP1
4
261.F4
261.F3
3
261.F3
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DOOR MONITORING
2006-09-29
DOOR INTERLOCKING
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
261
262
271
=COU1+A02
N
L1
/103.D2
-X312
11
2/BU
-W27104
=INU1+A03
-E4151_53
56
2/BU
55
1/BN
54
1/BN
-W27101
=LSU1+A01
-E3151
B /101.C2
-X412
11
12
12
-W27105
=CBU1+A04
-E7151
/104.D2
-X712
11
12
F
Rev. ind.
-X3 53
1/BN
A02_Q1014
171.E1
2/BU
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

COOLING
2006-09-29
CABINET
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
262
271
275
=COU1+A02
A02_Q2981
0V
24VDC
68
63
-W27504
=INU1+A03
-E4161
64
/103.C2
-X413
3
F
Rev. ind.
-X1 67
2/BU
171.E7
1/BN
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

COOLING
2006-09-29
INT-BOARD
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
271
275
277
=COU1+A02
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_LS1
-X1 1
=COU1+A02
+24V
-X2 51
-W27701 1
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_CBU
+24V
-W27717
52
1
=LSU1+A01 -X313 1
-B3201
/101.C3
=CBU1+A04 -X713 1
-B7201
/104.D3
-X313 2
-X713 2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CABINET TEMPERATURE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
275
277
278
=COU1+A02
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_INU
+24V
-X155
56
-W27801 1
=INU1+A03 -X413 1
-B4201
/103.C3
T
F
Rev. ind.
-X413 2
Date
A0
B
C
D
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CABINET TEMPERATURE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
277
278
304
=INU1 INT-BOARD
A304
+A03
A303
-A4121
/454.B1
=INU1 INT-BOARD
A404
+A03
A403
-A4121
-W30401
FO
-W30402
FO
-W30405
-W30406
/454.B1
FO
FO
7
AMC-BOARD =COU1
+A02
-A2401
A704
A703
/411.B2
AMC-BOARD =COU1
+A02
-A2401
A702
A701
/411.B2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title INT-BOARD

2006-09-29
=COU / =INU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
278
304
371
=INU1 INT-BOARD
+A03
A209
-A4121
/454.B1
INT-BOARD
-W37101 FO
-W37102
FO
=LSU1 PINT-BOARD
+A01
RX2
-A3101
/441.B2
PINT-BOARD
TX2
F
Rev. ind.
A724
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
FT-LINK
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
304
371
375
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
PINT-BOARD
TX0
-W37501 FO
PINT-BOARD
TX1
-W37502
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
INT-BOARD
A202
/454.B1
INT-BOARD
=INU1
A201
FO
+A03
-A4121
/454.B1
/441.B2
=INU1
+A03
-F4011
FSCD
/103.C6
=INU1
+A03
-F4012
FSCD
A2
A2
-W37513
-W37514
FO
PINT-BOARD
RX0
FO
PINT-BOARD
RX1
/103.D6
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
FSCD BOARD
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
371
375
391
=COU1
+A02
-A2951
/102.C5
=INU1 INT-BOARD
+A03
A594
-A4121
XV C769 AE101
/454.B1
-W39103
FO
0V
X1.3
24V
X1.2
SIG
X1.1
A1
C
=COU1
+A02
-A2501
=WCU1
+A05
-A5201
/105.E5
TB820
TX2
RX2
/102.C5
-X4
-W39101 FO
-W39102
-X5
TX1
RX1
FO
-X4
-X5
TB820
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
CONTROL
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
375
391
411
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
/102.D4
=COU1
+A02
-A2401
E
F
G
H
RX CH1
TX
A709
A710
RX CH2
TX
A711
A712
RX CH3
TX
A707
A708
RX CH0
TX
AMC BOARD
A705
A706
DSP56311
RX INT0
TX
PANEL &
BUS
INTERFACE
A701
A702
6 X17
RS485
R P T2 S1 S0
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
Name
F M T1 S3 S2
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ICMC0-ASIC
ACS 6000
/304.A6
Date
Date
X1
64
2006-09-29 Title AMC BOARD

MOTOR SIDE
2006-09-29
=COU1
EXTENSION
PORT
/304.A6
A715
A716
RX CH5
TX
A717
A718
RX CH6
TX
A719
A720
RX CH7
TX
X501
FLASH
MEMORY
SUBPRINT
X502
RX CH4
TX
A713
A714
PROM, SRAM
3BHS227357E01
RX INT1
TX
ICMC1-ASIC
Doc. des.
ATD
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A703
A704
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
391
411
441
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/101.C6
E
F
G
H
Date
chwekue
W.Kpfer
RX0
RX1
CHANNEL 1+2
RX2
CHANNEL 2
RX3
RX4
/375.B7
/375.B7
/371.D4
3
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/371.D4
TX0
TX1
CHANNEL 1+2
TX2
CHANNEL 2
TX3
TX4
PINT-BOARD
Name
/375.A2
/375.A2
X11:1
X11:2
X12:1
X12:2
X13:1
X13:2
Date
Date
X14:1
X14:2
X16:1
X16:2
2006-09-29 Title PINT-BOARD

LINE SIDE
2006-09-29
=LSU1
X15:1
X15:2
X21:1
X21:2
X22:1
X22:2
X23:1
X23:2
X24:1
X24:2
3BHS227357E01
X1:1
X1:2
X26:1
X26:2
X2:1
X2:2
Doc. des.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
X25:1
X25:2
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
411
441
454
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
INT-BOARD
3300V
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
/103.C6
/103.C6
=INU1
+A03 SVA, XVC767..
-A4132
9MVA
Date
/103.D6
Name
0
Name
A812
A704
V568
V567
V566
V565
V564
V563
V562
V561
A816
A641
A205
A206
Prepared
Approved
Project name
A208
A705
A203
A805
A204
A804
A210
A814
A202
/375.A3
A815
A201
/375.A3
A715
A714
A531
A592
A541
A302
A551
A402
/207.D7
A212
A723
Doc. des.
A303
/391.A3
A593
A594
A304
/371.B4
/371.A4
A724
A209
A403
/304.A3
7
3BHS227357E01
ATD
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A712
A713
A211
A722
/207.B7
A813
Date
Date
A207
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
chwekue
W.Kpfer
A803
INT-BOARD
MOTOR SIDE
=INU1
ACS 6000
A703
V591
=INU1
+A03 SCA, XVC768..
-A4133
Date
E
F
G
H
A802
/190.E7
A818
A817
A702
/304.A3
A404
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
+24V 2
0V
+24V 1
X1:3
X1:2
X1:1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
V103
V113
441
454
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 CONTROL UNIT

S/N: 403
DOCUMENT :
WIRING DIAGRAM
=COU1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
29.09.2006
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
30
001
002
page
title 1
001
002
4
title 2
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
100
101
102
104
105
106
107
120
121
230
240
245
250
251
252
253
254
281
282
283
285
287
290
291
295
296
298
800
AUX POWER SUPPLY

AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
INU CONTROL
INU CONTROL
INU CONTROL
INTERFACE AMC-BOARD
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER MONITORING
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER CONTROL
INTERFACE UNIT TO UNIT
AUX POWER SUPPLY
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
MAIN CIRCUIT
AC AUX DISTRIBUTION
230VAC AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION
CONTROL
GUSP AND CONTROL VOLTAGE
Line Supply Unit CONTROL
AUX POWER SUPPLY 230VAC/24VDC
230VAC/24VDC DISTRIBUTION
PANEL
AMC-BOARD
PROCESS INTERFACE
COUPLING DEVICE
DIGITAL INPUT MODULE
DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE
DOORLOCK
EXTERNAL DIGITAL INPUT
EMERGENCY STOP
EMERGENCY-OFF
MONITORING
CONTROL UNIT / CAPACITOR BANK UNIT
MOTOR CABINET TEMPERATURE
MCB INTERFACE
MCB INTERFACE
COOLING FAN`S
FUNCTION EARTH
PULSE INTERFACE
POWER STAGE CONTROL
WATER COOLING UNIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
EXTERNAL I/O
FRONTDOOR
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
TB820
DI810 + TU830
DO810 + TU830
DI810 + TU830
DO820 + TU831
CONTROL
PROTECTION EARTH
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
100
AUX POWER SUPPLY

3~400VAC
60HZ
3
PE
1
-W004
-PE 1
-W637 1
-W022 1
-W009 1
-Q1003
1.14
1.22
-Q1001
1
3
5
1
3
5
-W018
-W019
13
21
A1
A2
-W024 1
1
-W636
1
-W025
2
4
6
/290.D8
14
22
2
4
6
-Q1004
1.13 /287.B4
1.21
-W001 1
1
-W002
1
-W003
1.14
1.22
1
3
5
2
4
6
1.13 /290.D4
1.21
-W873 1
-W871 1
-X20 1
-W872 1
T1012_1
NO SAFE LINE
CHARGING
VOLTAGE CBU
TRAFO
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
101.A1
-X20 4
102.A3
102.A3
102.A3
Date
Date

AC AUX DISTRIBUTION
2006-09-29
T1012_2
T1021_U
T1021_V
T1021_W
-W020 1
-W021
101.A1
-W005 1
1
-W006
1
-W007
Rev. ind.
230VAC
DISTRIBUTION
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
100
101
PE
2_0V
-W034 1
-W029 1
-W045 1
-W046 1
-W047 1
-W048
/102.A2
.D3
.C1
11 12 13 14
-PE1 1
-XN
.D1
-PE1 4
A
B
C
D
Date
.E1
-W033 1
-X3 7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
-PE1 3
.E1
-W032 1
-PE 4
-E1011
-W780 1
-X3 53
WCU
CONTROL
230VAC
1.14
1.22
1.13/287.C4
1.21
-W050 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/120.A2
/120.D2
/120.F3
/121.A4
/121.D5
1 2 3 4
.B1
.B1
/281.E1
.E6
/290.E8
.E3
/102.D4 /281.E4
/102.E8
-XN
-W049 1
PE
-X230V
FAZ-C
-W044 1
-Q1014
FAZ-C
/281.A4
/290.D8
-W043 1
1.13/287.D2
1.21
-Q1013
11 12 13 14
FAZ-C
1.14
1.22
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
-Q1012
-W039 1
-W040 1
-W037 1
-W038 1
1 2 3 4
FAZ-C
-W035 1
-W036 1
-X230V
-Q1011
1.14
1.22
/102.A1
.D2
-W030 1
-W031 1
.E1
1.13/287.C2
1.21
-PE1 1
Rev. ind.
0V
110V
120V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V
-T1012
2_230V
100.E7
100.E7
T1012_1
T1012_2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
-W781 1
55
54
56
AIR COOLING
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
100
101
102
A
B
C
D
3
4
5
.E4
-W150 1
-X1021 2C
-W152 1
-W153
.E4
-X1021 3B
3C
-C1021
-X1021 3D
CU
.E4
5D
CU
-W154 1
2
4
105.B1
-X1021 5B
1
3
-R1022
CTRL_-DC
-C1029
-R1021
CTRL_+DC
-W156 1
105.B1
.E4
-W155 1
5E
-W157 1
2
4
101
102
104
Al
5F
4F
3 1
5C
-W161 1
1
3
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
CU
-C1026
5A
-PE1 6
-W158 1
/101.E1
= COU1
+
Al
2
GSP_-DC -W162 1
100.E4
100.E4
100.E4
.E4
.E4
104.B1
T1021_U
T1021_V
T1021_W
-X1021 2F
-X1021 1F
9 7
6 5 4
2A
Doc. des.
-X1021 2B
.E4
-W159 1
GSP_+DC -W160 1
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
104.B1
-Z1021
-Z1022
-V1022
VUO 60-12NO3
-XN
-W144 1
.E7
.B8
.D7
-W141 1
-PE1 5
/101.E1
5D 5A
5E 5B
5F 5C
-X230V
4 5 6
7 9

CONTROL
2006-09-29
4D 4A
4E 4B
4F 4C
1V8
1V7
1V6
1V5
1V4
1V3
1V2
1V1
2N
PE
.B7
.C6
/101.C1 /101.D1
-W581 1 -W582 1
-W140
1 3
-W143 1
4E
-X1021
Date
Date
.E3
.C5
.C8
.D8
.B5
3D 3A
3E 3B
3F 3C
.E6
.D6
.C6
A2
15 /287.C7
25
-W139 1
-V1021
.E4
-W142 1
-X1021 1E
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
.B5
.C8
2D 2A
2E 2B
2F 2C
L3
A1
18
16
28
26
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
.E3
.C5
1D 1A
1E 1B
1F 1C
L1
L2
-W138 1
-W137 1
2W 200V
380V 1W8
400V 1W7
415V 1W6
440V 1W5
460V 1W4
480V 1W3
500V 1W2
690V 1W1
-W136 1
DT
2V 200V
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V
690V
Name
E
F
G
H
VUO 60-12NO3
-T1021
Date
2U 200V
380V 1U8
400V 1U7
415V 1U6
440V 1U5
460V 1U4
480V 1U3
500V 1U2
690V 1U1
-F1021 EMR4-W500-2-C
Rev. ind.
-Q1041
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
1.13/287.C2
1.21
GSP_+DC
GSP_-DC
1+
3-
102.F6
102.F7
24+
-W060 1
-W061 1
-X3
65
66
INVERTER 1
GUSP
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
PULSE INTERFACE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
102
104
105
-W072 1
-W073 1
-Q1051
106.B1
106.B1
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
+DC
-DC
1.13/287.A3
1.21
CTRL_+DC
CTRL_-DC
1+
3-
102.C8
102.C8
24+
-W066 1
-W067
16
-X3
15
INVERTER 1
CONTROL
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
POWER STAGE CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
104
105
106
-W078 1
-W079 1
-Q1061
24+
107.B1
107.B1
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
+DC
-DC
1.13/287.A3
1.21
+DC
-DC
1+
3-
105.B8
105.B8
-W074 1
-W075
22
-X3
21
LSU 1
CONTROL
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105
106
107
-Q1071
1.13/287.B3
1.21
FAZ-2-DC
24+
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
-Q1073
1+
3-
-W092 1
-W093 1
+DC
-DC
1+
3-
106.B8
106.B8
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
120.A2
120.A2
WCU
CONTROL
300VDC
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
SUPPLY48V_P1
SUPPLY48V_N1
71
72
-X3
121.A5
121.A5
SUPPLY24V_P1
SUPPLY24V_N1
-W080 1
-W081 1
Rev. ind.

2006-09-29
WATER COOLING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
106
107
120
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_P2.1 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/240.C2
/251.A2
/298.A2
.E2
/283.A6
/245.D3
/281.A2
-X24_P2
2 3 4 5 6 7
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.B8
-X24_N2.1 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/240.C2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_P2
13
.B5
-W864 1
-X24_P2.1 13
.B7
-X24_N2
.C5
13
-W865 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.D8
/251.A2
/298.A2
/250.E4
.B8
.E2
-X24_N2
.C8
.E3
/250.E4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
/290.C2
14
2 3 4 5 6 7
/290.E5
/285.E7
.D2
/295.C4
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/281.E1
U02
/283.E5
/245.D3
/295.C4
/281.A6
/290.B1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
-X24_P1 4
.B4
-X24_N1 4
2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_N1 1
-W114 1
-W115
.D2
SUPPLY24V_P1 107.E6
-X24_P1 1
.D2
U01
/290.B5
250W
LWN
2660-6
N 2
-G1201
PE 1
-W109 1
-W110
-W111
-X24_N2.1 13
.C7
.C4
-W116 1
-PE1 9
/101.E1
-W117 1
-W118
-X24_P2 4
.B5
-X24_N2
4 14
.C5
-W119 1
-PE1 10
/101.E1
F
Rev. ind.
/101.E1
L 3
-PE1 8
3
SUPPLY24V_N1 107.E6
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
107
120
121
LWN
2660-6
U01
-W124 1
1
-W125
1 2 3 4
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14
-X24_N
1 2 3 4
.B8
-X24_N
.C8
-W123 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14
/285.F1
/282.C2
/283.F1
-X24_P
D
-X24_P
U02
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
/285.D1
/282.B2
/283.D1
-G1211
N 2
PE 1
-W120 1
-W121
-W122
.D5
SUPPLY48V_N1
/101.E1
.D5
-PE1 11
-PE1 12
/101.E1
F
Rev. ind.
5
107.E6
SUPPLY48V_P1
L 3
107.E6
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
EXTERNAL I/O
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
120
121
230
ON - LED ACTIVATION
(MAIN SUPPLY ON INDICATION)
-H2301
EMERGENCY STOP
-W217 1
FAULT/ALARM
X1
NDPI_02
-W221 1
240.C2
-A2511
/251.B2
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
X1
X2
X1
X2
-H2302
-W222 1
-W223 1
-W220 1
CDP312_2
-W213 1
-S2304
24
/285.A4 23
V2
-S2303
14
/283.C2 13
14
/285.A1 22
34
42
X2
-S2302
14
13
-S2301
X1
X2
V1
Name
-W216 1
14
13
REF
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
RES
13
21
33
41
LOC
REM
-A2301
Date
EMERGENCY RESET
DRIVE
-W212 1
A
B
C
D
SUPPLY OFF
X1
X2
FUNC
ENTER
-W224 1
-W225 1
-A2511
/251.B2
L1+ 24V B5
C5
L1- 0V A5
PAR
ALARM / FAULT
LED ACTIVATION
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO06
-A2521
/252.E2
-W219 1
-W218 1
SUPPLY ON
CDP 312R
ACT
B5 L1+ 24V
C5
A5 L1- 0V
B4 L1+ 24V
C4
A4 L1- 0V
PANEL
7
EMERGENCY OFF
RESET LED ACTIVATION
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO07
-A2521
/252.E2
C1_P2_DO05
-A2521
/252.E2
-W214 1
-W215 1
FRONTDOOR
Rev. ind.
OFF - LED ACTIVATION

C1_P2_DO04
-A2521
/252.E2
B6 L1+ 24V
C6
A6 L1- 0V
B7 L1+ 24V
C7
A7 L1- 0V
C1_P1_DI04
C1_P1_DI05
LOCAL ON - ORDER
(PUSH BUTTON)
LOCAL OFF - ORDER

(PUSH BUTTON)
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title INU CONTROL

PANEL
2006-09-29
FRONTDOOR
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
121
230
240
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
230.E2
/120.B7
A709
A710
RX CH2
TX
A711
A712
RX CH3
TX
RX CH1
TX
A707
A708
DSP56311
RX CH0
TX
A705
A706
X17 PANEL & BUS

INTERFACE
RX INT0
TX
RS485
-W589 FO
-W590 FO
R P T2 S1 S0
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
FB_INU_RX
FB_INU_TX
F M T1 S3 S2
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
245.C7
245.C7
A701
A702
-A2401 AMC-BOARD
CDP312_2
Name
-W585 1
-W586 1
Date
-X24_P2.1 4
/120.C7
-X24_N2.1 4
Name
E
F
G
H
CONNECTED TO
=INU
ICMC0-ASIC
Date
Date
X1
64

AMC-BOARD
2006-09-29
EXTENSION
PORT
RX CH4
TX
A715
A716
RX CH5
TX
A717
A718
RX CH6
TX
A719
A720
RX CH7
TX
X501
FLASH
MEMORY
SUBPRINT
X502
-W605 FO
-W606 FO
A713
A714
PROM,SRAM
= COU1
+
TB820_RX
TB820_TX
RX INT1
TX
ICMC1-ASIC
Doc. des.
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
250.C7
250.D7
A703
A704
CONNECTED TO
=INU
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
230
240
245
-A2451
NPBA_A
NPBA_B
CUSTOMER
INTERFACE
NPBA-12
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
A
B
A
B
Data
Data
Data
Data
N
P
N
P
X2:8 SH
X2:7 DG
-X24_P2
-X24_N2
/120.B5
/120.C5
-W624 1
-W625 1
X2:5 +24V
X2:6 0V
DC
DC
GND
TXD
FB_INU_RX
240.E4
RXD
FB_INU_TX
240.E4
BUS
TERMINATION
ON
OFF
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

PROCESS INTERFACE
2006-09-29
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
240
245
250
-A2501 TB820V2
CLUSTER ADRESS
4 5 6
3
7
2
8
1 0 9
F
R
P
Rx1
Rx2
ERx
C
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
BUS
X4
X5
CONNECTED TO
WCU
TB820_RX
TB820_TX
240.E8
240.E8
A2511 251.E1
OUT
SB
L-
SA
L+
-W238 1 -W239 1
-X24_P2 15
/120.B5
-X24_N2
/120.C5
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
15
2006-09-29 Title INTERFACE AMC-BOARD

COUPLING DEVICE
2006-09-29
TB820
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
245
250
251
C1_P1_DI07
INU OUTPUT ISOLATOR SWITCH1

FEEDBACK STATUS CLOSED
INU OUTPUT GROUNDING SWITCH1
FEEDBACK STATUS OPEN
EXTERNAL CTRL SEL
EXT1 / EXT2
C1_P1_DI08
/AUXILIARIES
PROTECTION
ALARM
/AUXILIARIES
PROTECTION
TRIP
SUPPLY
SWITCH
C1_P1_DI11
SUPPLY
SWITCH
C1_P1_DI12
C1_P1_DI09
C1_P1_DI10
C1_P1_DI13
EXCITATION CONTACTOR
FEEDBACK STATUS
CLOSED
C1_P1_DI14
/INU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P1_DI15
/COU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P1_DI16
/287.E4
/287.E2
/282.E3
Doc. des.
/291.E8
/291.E2
6.3A L2+
L2+
L2L2-
-W244 1
-W245 1
OUT
A2521
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
24V_P2_1
24V_N2_1
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
/PROCESS STOP
/230.E5
STATUS
INU ISOLATOR2 OPEN
GROUNDING SWITCH2 CLOSED
/230.E4
C1_P1_DI06
/285.E6
STATUS
INU ISOLATOR2 CLOSED
GROUNDING SWITCH2 OPEN
C1_P1_DI05
LOCAL OFF - ORDER

(PUSH BUTTON)
C1_P1_DI04
-X24_N2
LOCAL ON - ORDER
(PUSH BUTTON)
C1_P1_DI03
/120.C5
2006-09-29 Title CONVERTER CONTROL

2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
/INU OPERATION PREVENTED
/287.E7
-W242 1
-W243 1
BUS
Date
Date
C1_P1_DI02
/120.B5
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
EMERGENCY OFF (LOOP)
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
B1
C1
C10
A1
A10
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
C1_P1_DI01
-W240 1
-W241
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
E
F
G
H
/UNDERVOLTAGE (RELAY)
L1L1-
-X24_P2
A2511
Name
-A2511 TU830
Date
250.D7
A
B
C
D
L1+
6.3A L1+
SUPERVISION
SUPERVISION
Rev. ind.
252.F1
252.F1
252.B1
250
251
252
C1_P2_DO03
C1_P2_DO04
ON - LED ACTIVATION
C1_P2_DO05

C1_P2_DO06
ALARM / FAULT
LED ACTIVATION
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO07
EMERGENCY OFF
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO08

ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
C1_P2_DO09
C1_P2_DO10
UPS ORDER TO ONLINE MODE

( /SHUT DOWN UPS)
C1_P2_DO12
ESTOP IN PROGRESS
(ACTIVATED)
C1_P2_DO11

2006-09-29
DO810 + TU830
C1_P2_DO13
C1_P2_DO14
ORDER ON COMMAND
Doc. des.
C1_P2_DO15
C1_P2_DO16
SUPERVISION
OUT
-W248 1
-W249 1
A2531
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
24V_P2_2
24V_N2_2
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
L2+
6.3A
L2+
L2L2-
C1_P2_DO02

ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
RESET - COMMAND
BUS
-W246 1
-W247 1
Date
Date
/283.B8
C1_P2_DO01
/230.B7
SUPERVISION
/230.B8
IN
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
/230.B5
A2521
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/230.B4
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
C10
A10
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AA
TU830
24V_P2_1
24V_N2_1
Name
E
F
G
H
L1+
6.3A
L1+
L1L1-
-A2521 DO810
Date
251.E8
A
B
C
D
251.A8
251.A8
Rev. ind.
253.E1
253.A1
253.A1
251
252
253
252.F8
252.F8
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
24V_P2_2
24V_N2_2
A2531
Name
-A2531 TU830
Date
252.B8
A
B
C
D
L1+
E
F
G
H
6.3A L1+
Date
SUPERVISION
/LSU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P3_DI03
/CBU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P3_DI04
/CBU CHARGING
OVERLOAD
C1_P3_DI05
CBU GROUND SWITCH FEEDBACK STATUS OPEN
C1_P3_DI06
CBU GROUND SWITCH FEEDBACK STATUS CLOSED
C1_P3_DI07
/EMERGENCY STOP
C1_P3_DI08
BUS
Date
Date
C1_P3_DI09
C1_P3_DI11
/EARTH FAULT
MAIN CIRCUIT ALARM2
C1_P3_DI12
CUBICLE DOOR(S) FEEDBACK STATUS CLOSED
C1_P3_DI13
A.) MCB STATUS OPEN

B.) /MCB1 OK
(PRESIGNAL & TRIPPED & AVAILABLE)
C1_P3_DI14
A.) MCB STATUS CLOSED

B.) MCB STATUS CLOSED
C1_P3_DI15
A.) MCB OK
B.) /MCB2 OK
C1_P3_DI16
/291.E7
/290.E4
/290.E1
/290.E2
/283.E8
/281.E8
/282.E5
Doc. des.
/282.E4
/282.E7
6.3A L2+
L2+
L2L2-
OUT
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
/EARTH FAULT
MAIN CIRCUIT ALARM1
/291.E3

2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
C1_P3_DI10
/291.E4
C1_P3_DI02
/291.E5
-W250 1
-W251 1
/LSU2 (OR /ARU2) CUBICLE

TEMPERATURE HIGH
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
B1
C1
C10
A1
A10
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
C1_P3_DI01
L1L1-
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/ARU3 CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
SUPERVISION
Rev. ind.
A2541
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
254.B2
252
253
254
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
253.E8
Date
A2541
Name
Date
Date
A3
B4
/295.B6
A5
B6
/295.B7
A6
B7
/290.B5
A7
B8
/296.B1
A8
C1_P4_DO03
C1_P4_DO04
MCB -ORDER
CLOSE COMMAND
C1_P4_DO05
/MCB -ORDER
OPEN COMMAND
C1_P4_DO06
/MCB ORDER
TRIP
C1_P4_DO07
RELEASE CBU GROUNDING

SWITCH ELECTRICAL LOCKING
C1_P4_DO08
DRIVE CHARGED
(DC LINK VOLTAGE >
MCB CLOSING LEVEL)
A4
B5
CBU -HV CHARGING ORDER

(HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE)
BUS

2006-09-29
DO820 + TU831
/295.B5
C1_P4_DO02
A2
B3
CBU -LV CHARGING ORDER

(LOW VOLTAGE SIDE)
/290.B6
C1_P4_DO01
-A2541 DO820
A1
B2
IN
/290.B8
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AD
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
TU831
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
B1
OUT
-R2541
Doc. des.
TB807
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
IN
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
253
254
281
DOORS
CLOSED
DOORS
RELEASE
DEENERGIZE
-X24_P1 6
-X230V
/120.B4
-W316 1
22
24
-K2902
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
14
15
A2
-W308 1
LOOP 2
-X3 6
-W310 1
-K2814
4s
-W312 1
-W311 1
A1
A2
11 .D6
21 .D8
31
E
F
G
H
Date
-K2812
-W309 1
18 15 .C6
16
28 25 .D8
26
Name
18
16
4s
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/101.D1
25
.E2
-W324 1
A1
-A2531
/253.B2
A2
14
14
12
24
22
34
32
Date
Date
28
26
12
14
-K2813
26
28
-K2811
-W314 1
-XN
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
-W325 1
A2
18 15 .C6
16
28 25 .C8
26
/290.B2
.E3
GROUND
SWITCH
OPEN
-K2901
25
-K2814
-W323 1
A1
-W313 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
10
LOOP 3
A2
.E3
22
24
21
-K2812
-W327 1
-W326 1
DOOR
CLOSED
-W322 1
A1
A1
-K2811
.E2
11
/290.B2
11 /290.B8
21 /285.C7
31 /285.A6
2006-09-29 Title CONVERTER MONITORING

DOORLOCK
2006-09-29
21
10
9
22
-W329 1
L2+ 24VB13
C13
L2- 0V A13
A2
12
-K2902
-W321 1
11
15
.E3
14
12
21
DOOR
RELEASE
DEENERGIZE
-K2812
32
34
22
-W328 1
-W320 1
31
LOOP 1
11
.E3
11
DOOR 1
-XN
/101.D1
-K2814
A1
DOOR N
/120.C4
11
-K2811
-X24_N1 6
-W303 1
12
-X1 10
-W307 1
K3
16
18
-X3 5
285.A7
-W318 1
24V_P1
K2
/285.D1
-W306 1
-W304 1
-W300 1
-F2851
RELEASE
CLOSED
21
14
22
/290.B2
-X1 8
-W301 1
-X1 9
Rev. ind.
-W317 1
K1
13
21
-S2811
-X24_P1 16
11
/101.C1
-W305 1
-W299 1
SWINGFRAME
MONITORING
13
/120.B4
-W298 1
-X1 7
DOORS
CLOSED
CONTROL
C1_P3_DI13
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
254
281
282
PROCESS STOP
MCB STATUS
CLOSED
MCB STATUS
OPEN
/MCB
( PRESIGNAL &
TRIPPED )
-X24_P
-X2 79
-W331 1
80
81
-W333 1
82
31
-W334 1
32
EMERG_STOP
-X1 3
-W330 1
283.C4
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
/253.B2
A1
12
14
12
14
-A2531
/253.B2
11
-W354 1
-A2531
/253.B2
L2- 0V
-A2531
.C7
L2- 0V
L2- 0V
/251.B2
-W352
11 .D7
21
31
-K2825
L2+ 24VB14
C14
A14
11
-A2511
-W350
L2+ 24VB13
C13
A13
-W346
-K2824
.C6
14
12
24
22
34
32
-W355 1
11
-K2823
.C4
11 .D5
21
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
-W353 1
12
14
12
14
-K2821
-W341 1
L2+ 24VB16
C16
A16
-W351 1
-W347 1
.C3
-W340 1
11 .D4
21
31 /285.B6
14
12
24
22
34
32
-K2825
A2
-W338 1
11 .D3
21
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
A2
-W337 1
L2- 0V
12
11
/121.C8
-K2824
L2+ 24VB15
C15
A15
-X24_N
-K2823
A2
-K2821
-W345 1
A2
A1
A1
-W344 1
A1
-W343 1
-W336 1
Rev. ind.
/121.B8
12
C1_P1_DI13
C1_P3_DI15
C1_P3_DI14
C1_P3_DI16
/PROCESS STOP

A.) MCB STATUS OPEN

B.) /MCB1 OK
A.) MCB OK
B.) /MCB2 OK
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
281
282
283
EMERGENCY-STOP
LOOP (I>> -HW)
/EMERGENCY-STOP
-X24_P2
/120.B5
-X2 75
285.A4
76
-X2 59
60
-X2 17
18
-W367 1
26
28
-W361
-W370 1
-K2833
ESTOP IN PROGRESS
(ACTIVATED)
-A2521 A2521 DO12
19
20
/252.E2
-W366 1
-W368 1
-W369 1
-W866 1
25
.E7
-W363 1
14
/230.C7
-W360 1
-W365 1
K1
K2
K2
K3
K1
K1
K2
K2
K2
0,15s..10min
-W357 1
Date
Name
13
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
-W867 1
/120.C5
42
34
24
A2
PE
14
-X24_N2
A
B
C
D
33
K2
.D1
K3
24
34
K3
-W377 1
-W379 1
-W374 1
-K2831
-F2831
41
.C7
K1
K1
K3
K3
/121.C8
K2
.D1
-W373 1
.C8
33
13
T22
T12
T12
K3
K1
24V
-X24_N
-F2831
14
K2
T34
.C6
S1
X1
X2
T11
BN5930
24VDC
A1
-F2831
K2
.D1
K1
K1
K3
/121.B8
-W356 1
-F2831
13
23
-X24_P
25
.E5
K1
282.B7
-K2831
-W380 1
23
26
28
13
-S2304
-W372 1
13
-W364 1
-W358 1
28
26
.E6
-W378 1
EMERG_STOP
25
-K2832
Rev. ind.
-W359 1
-W371 1
-W362 1
A1
-K2832
A2 0,15s..10min
-W375 1
18 15 /285.C1
16
28 25 .C3
26

EMERGENCY STOP
2006-09-29
A1
A2
A1
-K2833
2s
A2
-W376 1
18 15 /285.C2
16
28 25 .C3
26
-A2531
/253.B2
18 15 /285.C1
16
28 25 .B3
26
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
L1-
ESR
/EMERGENCY-STOP
C8
0V A8
L1+ 24V B8
2
EMERGENCY-STOP
RESET
B12L2+ 24V
C12
A12 L2- 0V
A2531 DI08
/EMERGENCY STOP
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
282
283
285
-F2851
.D1
A
B
C
D
Date
/121.C8
Name
24
41
42
-A2511
/251.B2
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title INTERFACE UNIT TO UNIT

EMERGENCY-OFF
2006-09-29
-Z2852
A1
/120.C4
11
A2
-X24_N1 13
C1_P1_DI02
42
34
K2
-W421 1
K2
14
K2
PE
A2
-W389 1
K1
K1
.D1
K2
24
K1
K3
22
24
A2
-K2851
A1
-F2851
K1
K2
K2
-W427 1
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
K1
-W425 1
-W422 1
K3
-X24_N
-W424 1
.D8
41 .D6
/290.C8
33
23
13
T22
K1
K3
K1
24V
T12
T12
K3
.B7
/281.A6
K2
T34
X2
S1
X1
-W388 1
BN5930
24VDC
-K2852
62
18
16
16
18
15
-W387 1
T11
-F2851
-W401 1
-W406 1
11
A1
D -X24_P
/121.B8
-K2813
/281.E6
61
15
/283.E6
-W386 1
-K2833
/283.E7
61
15
-K2832
-W426 1
-W423 1
.D7
-W409 1
-W385 1
62
16
18
-K2851
K2
K3
-W408 1
-K2831
/283.E5
295.B4
K1
31
-K2823
/282.C4
EMERG_LOOP_OK
-W407 1
-W398 1
-K2852
-K2813
/281.E6
-Z2851
2
1
24
/230.C7
-W399 1
-W395 1
23 24V_P1 281.A7
78
32
34
23
-W394 1
21
77
-S2304
ESR
-W397 1
-W396 1
Rev. ind.
22
/230.C3
EMERG. OFF 1
-W382
-X2 71 72 73 74
-W393 1
-S2301
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
-W390 1 -W391 1
-W392 1
21
-W383 1
-W840 1
-X1 51 52-X2 21
-W381 1
34
32
283.A2
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY RESET
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
31
2
EMERGENCY-OFF
CUBICLES
-W400 1
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
13
21
31
43
53
61
14
22
32
44
54
62
/296.B7 13
/296.C3 21
/296.C6 31
43
53
61
.C6
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
14
22
32
44
54
62
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
/296.C7
/296.C4
/296.C6
.C6
283
285
287
1.13
-Q1051
1.14
/105.C3
-W283 1
-W295 1
1.13
1.13
-W284 1
-Q1061
-Q2981
/298.A2
-W285 1
1.13
-W294 1
1.13
-Q1071
-Q1004
1.14
/100.C7
1.14
/107.C2
1.13
1.13
-W293 1
-Q1041
-Q1014
/104.C3
1.14
1.14
/101.C7
-W280 1
-W297 1
16
18
1.13
-W292 1
-Q1012
-F1021
/101.C4
1.14
/102.A1
15
-W296 1
1.13
-W279 1
-Q1011
1.14
/101.C2
C1_P1_DI12
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
TRIP
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
/251.B2
C1_P1_DI11
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
ALARM
Date
MONITORING
2006-09-29
Date
L1- 0V
-A2511
L1+ 24V B1
C1
A1
L2- 0V
/251.B2
L2+ 24V B11
-A2511
L2- 0V
/251.B2
C12
A12
-A2511
L2+ 24VB12
C11
A11
-W289 1
-W278 1
Rev. ind.
1.14
1.14
/106.C4
C1_P1_DI01
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
285
287
290
CBU GROUNDING
SWITCH CLOSED
CBU - HV
CHARGING ORDER
CBU - LV
CHARGING ORDER


(HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE)

(LOW VOLTAGE SIDE)
-A2541 C1_P4_DO07 -A2541 C1_P4_DO02

/254.E3
A1
/120.B4
-K2902
A1
B1
A2
-W441 1
/281.E6
-W448 1
33
-X24_N1 17
K1
A
B
C
D
Date
C1_P3_DI07
C1_P3_DI05
/CBU CHARGING
OVERLOAD
Name
/253.B2
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
/253.B2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-X24_N1 12
/120.C4
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
-XN
-W443 1
-X2 11
24V
L1-
L1+ 24V B7
C7
L1- 0V A7
-A2531
1
2
-W451 1
-W442 1
-W439
-Z2901
/100.C5
L1-
C6
0V A6
-A2531
A1
1.13
/100.C5
12
-Q1003
-Q1003
-W437 1
L1+ 24V B6
/101.C1
C1_P3_DI06
/253.B2
-X230V
C5
0V A5
-W436
-A2531
-W449 1
-K2902
.B2
K2
/285.D1
-W438 1
24
22
.B2
-F2851
-W445 1
K3
L1+ 24V B5
-K2901
-W444 1
-W435 1
21
11 .D3
21 /281.B4
31 /281.C7
11
-W434 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
1.14
11 /281.D6
21 .D2
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
34
/120.C4
14
12
A2
-W432 1
-W433 1
-K2813
A2
A2
-K2901
B2
-X24_P1 12
-W431 1
-W447 1
-W450
12
14
/120.B4
-W430 1
Rev. ind.
-X24_P1 17
A7
-W428 1
/254.E3
56
B7
54
55
-W429 1
-A2541 C1_P4_DO01
/254.E3
-W440 1
-X2 53
RELEASE CBU
GROUNDING SWITCH
ELECTRICAL LOCKING
A1
CBU GROUNDING
SWITCH OPEN
11
/101.D1
12
13
12
14
24V
TO CBU
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
287
290
291
LINE SIDE
CONTROL
LINE SIDE
-X1 1
1
2
61
8
MOTOR SIDE
DC LINK
(CBU)
LSU1
-W463 1
CBU
2
INU1
-W465 1
62
65
-W458 1
66
-X2 51
52
-X1 55
56
-W459 1
-W456 1
-B2911 KTO 1140

0...60C
C >
-W455 1
-W457 1 -W461 1
-W462 1
-W464 1
-W466 1 -W467 1
-W460 1
-W468 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
-A2511
/251.B2
L2+ 24VB15
C15
L2- 0V A15
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B3
C3
L1- 0V A3
-A2531
/253.B2
L2+ 24VB16
C16
L2- 0V A16
-A2511
/251.B2
L1+ 24V B1
C1
L1- 0V A1
Rev. ind.
6
LINE SIDE
C1_P1_DI16
C1_P3_DI03
C1_P3_DI02
C1_P3_DI01
C1_P3_DI04
C1_P1_DI15
/COU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/LSU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH

TEMPERATURE HIGH
/ARU3 CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/CBU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/INU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
290
291
295
A
MCB -ORDER
CLOSE COMMAND
/MCB -ORDER
OPEN COMMAND
/MCB ORDER
TRIP
-A2541 C1_P4_DO04 -A2541 C1_P4_DO05 -A2541 C1_P4_DO06
285.A8
-W516 1
-X24_P1 15
A6
A5
A4
-W520 1
EMERG_LOOP_OK
B6
/254.E3
B5
/254.E3
B4
-W521 1
-W517 1
-W518 1
/120.B4
-X24_N1 15
/120.C4
-W801 1
CONNECTED TO
INU
MCB
-K2952
-K2953
-W526 1
-W527 1
A1
-K2954
A2
-W525 1
A1
-K2951
A2
SIG X1.1 -W524
-K2950
A1
A2
24V X1.2 -W523
A1
A2
0V X1.3 -W522
A2
-W519 1
A1
-A2951 XV C769 AE101
-W528 1
A1
E
14
24
34
F
Rev. ind.
/254.E3
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
11 /296.C2
21 /296.D2
31 /296.D2
14
24
34
11 /296.C1
21 /296.D1
31 /296.D1

MCB INTERFACE
2006-09-29
CONTROL
14
12
24
22
34
32
11 /296.E3
21 /296.D3
31 /296.C3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
14
24
34
11 /296.D7
21 /296.D7
31 /296.C7
14
12
24
22
34
32
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
11 /296.E5
21 /296.D5
31 /296.C5
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
291
295
296
MCB
ORDER CLOSE
A
MCB
ORDER OPEN 1
COIL : (+)
MCB
ORDER OPEN 2
MCB
ORDER TRIP
(-)
DRIVE CHARGED
(DC LINK VOLTAGE >
MCB CLOSING LEVEL)
-A2541 C1_P4_DO08
/254.E3
-K2851
A8
B8
/285.D7
14
14
-W554 1
-W905 1
-W532 1
-K2852
-W533
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
34
31
31
/295.D7
32
-W544 1
-W552 1
-K2953
/295.D7
24
-W551 1
-W908 1
14
11
-K2954
/295.D7
11
-W550 1
-W542 1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-K2953
14
12
14
12
/295.D8
-W534 1
-W902 1
-K2953
/285.D8
-W545 1 -W543 1
-W906 1
11
34
31
/295.D6
-K2852
21
21
24
/295.D8
-W553 1
21
-W546 1
-K2952
/295.D5
/285.D7
-K2954
-W537 1 -W535 1
-K2950
-K2851
32
22
-W536 1
/295.D8
34
32
/285.D8
-W549 1 -W909 1
31
31
21
21
22
-K2954
-K2852
-X4 2
/295.D6
-W903 1
-W529 1
/285.D7
-W548 1
22
24
21
21
24
31
/295.D6
-K2851
-K2952
/295.D5
34
-K2951
-W547 1
-W541 1 -W907 1
-W538 1
-W904 1
-W530 1
/295.D6
-K2950
/295.D6
31
14
/295.D5
-W531 1
-K2951
-K2952
-K2950
34
32
11
/295.D6
-W540 1
22
24
-K2951
11
14
-W539 1
13
/285.D8
Rev. ind.
13
-W555 1
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
10

MCB INTERFACE
2006-09-29
52 51
53
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
54
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
295
296
298
-X24_N2
/120.C5
-X24_P2 7
1+
3-
-Q2981
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
>
0..60C
-W570 1
-W576 1
-B2981 KTS 01141
-W574 1
-W579 1
-W571 1
-X1 57
-W575 1
-W580 1
58
63 64
67 68
-W578 1
-W573 1
INU
-W577 1
-W572 1
CONNECTED TO
M
=
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
M
=
Name
M
=
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
M
=
Date
Date
-M1
M
=

COOLING FAN`S
2006-09-29
-M2
-M3
M
=
-M4
M
=
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
RD
BU
-M4
RD
BU
-M3
RD
BU
-M2
-E2982
RD
BU
RD
BU
RD
BU
-M1
RD
BU
RD
BU
-E2981
Rev. ind.
/120.B5
-W568 1
-W569 1
1.13/287.A4
1.21
M
=
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
296
298
800
=COU1
DC+
DC-
=INU:L1
=INU:L2
=INU:L3
=LSU:1L1
=LSU:1L2
=LSU:1L3
=LSU:2L3
=LSU:2L2
=LSU:2L1
PG
PE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title MAIN CIRCUIT

FUNCTION EARTH
2006-09-29
PROTECTION EARTH
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
298
800
COMPONENT :
E
DOCUMENT :
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
ACS 6000 WATER COOLING UNIT

S/N: 403
WIRING DIAGRAM
=WCU1
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
22.09.2006
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
16
001
002
title 1
4
title 2
001
002
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
500
501
502
520
521
522
523
540
541
545
554
571
573
574
AC AUX DISTRIBUTION /
SPACE HEATER
POWER SUPPLY
COUPLING DEVICE
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
INTERNAL DIGITAL INPUT
WATER COOLING PUMP
THERMOSTAT
WATER COOLING CONTROL
EXTERNAL DIGITAL OUTPUT
COOLING FAN`S
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
-
COOLING CONTROL
CONTROL
TB820
DI810 + TU830
DO820 + TU831
AI810 + TU830
3 - WAY VALVE
HEATING
F
Rev. ind.
page
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
500
AUX POWER SUPPLY

3~400VAC
60Hz
COOLING PUMP 1
COOLING PUMP 2
POWER SUPPLY
COU
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
1
3
5
1
3
5
2
4
6
FN258-16/29
Cy
R1
Cx
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
CONNECTED TO
COU
554.A4
554.A4
554.A4
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
R2
R1
-W017 1/BN 2/BU 3/BK

-W020 1
-X513 1
2
3 -PE1 1
/502.C7
MOT2_U
MOT2_V
MOT2_W
MOT1_U
MOT1_V
MOT1_W
554.A2
554.A3
554.A3
L3_OUT
Cy
L2_OUT
L1_OUT
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
-W010
Cx
Cx
-W006
E_IN
3*480VAC/16A
-Z5001
E_OUT
-W014 1
-W015
-W016
L3_IN
1.13 /540.A3
1.21
1.14
1.22
A2
2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A1
L2_IN
/541.D4
-Q5004
13
21
13
21
A1
-Q5003
/540.A6 14
22
1
3
5
1.13 /540.A1
1.21
1.14
1.22
-Q5002
/541.D3
-W011 1
-W012 1
-W013 1
-W007 1
-W008 1
-W009 1
L1_IN
-W003 1
-W004 1
-W005 1
1
3
5
/540.A5 14
22
-F5001..3
2
4
6
-Q5001
Rev. ind.
-X1 1 2 3 PE
-W001
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
COOLING CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
500
501
230VAC
50/60Hz
A
-Q5011?
1/BN
2/BU
-PE1 2
/502.C7
2
4
-W031
1
3
FAZ
32
34
12
14
-W033 1
1
-W034
31
/545.D6
11
-K5451
-W035 1/BN
2/BU
GNYE
-X515 1 2
3 4
PE
CONNECTION
BOX
-E5011
SPACE HEATER
CONVERTER
F
Rev. ind.
-X2 1 2 PE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
SPACE HEATER
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
500
501
502
WCU CONTROL
300VDC
-
-PE1 5
.C7
2/BU
GNYE
-W043
1/BN
-PE1 3 -X511 1
.C7
-W059 1
-PE 2
.D7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
U02
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
U01
-PE1 1
250W
24V
LWN
2660-6
-G5021
PE
/500.E6
/501.B4
.B2
.B8
-W046 1
-W047
-W048 1
-W049
-W050
-W051
1
1
-PE
1
.B8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUNDING BAR
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
24V_N2
574.B2
574.B2
24V_P2
24V_N1
520.E4
520.E4
24V_P1
Rev. ind.
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
POWER SUPPLY
2006-09-29
CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
501
502
520
TB820V2
CLUSTER ADRESS
4 5 6
7
3
2
8
1 0 9
F
R
P
Rx1
Rx2
ERx
X4
Tx2
Rx2
X5
CONNECTED TO
COU
Tx1
Rx1
BUS
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
521.E1
24V_P1
-W064 1
24V_N1
521.A1
521.A1
24V_N1
-W063 1
502.E2
502.E2
24V_P1
A5211
OUT
SB
L-
SA
L+
Rev. ind.
-A5201
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
COUPLING DEVICE
2006-09-29
TB820
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
502
520
521
-W065
-W068
-W067
24V_N1
24V_P1
L1+
L1+
L1-
Name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
C2_P1_DI02
WCU PUMP 1
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
C2_P1_DI03
WCU PUMP 2
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
C2_P1_DI04
WCU EXPANSION TANK L

(COOLING LIQUID
LOWLEVEL)
C2_P1_DI05
WCU EXPANSION TANK LL

(COOLING LIQUID
LOWLOWLEVEL)
C2_P1_DI06
WCU COOLING LIQUID

LEAKAGE/FLOW DETECTION
C2_P1_DI07
WCU COOLING LIQUID

LEAKAGE DETECTION
C2_P1_DI08
BUS
C2_P1_DI09
WCU CHILLER FAULT
C2_P1_DI11
WCU CHILLER ALARM
C2_P1_DI12
/WCU PROTECTION
SWITCH ALARM
C2_P1_DI13
/WCU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C2_P1_DI14
C2_P1_DI15
Doc. des.
6.3A
/540.D6
/554.C7
/554.D7
/540.D8
/545.D2
L2+
L2+
L2L2-
OUT
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
A5221
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
C2_P1_DI16
/540.D5
C2_P1_DI10
/540.D3
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
WCU CHILLER CONTACTOR

FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
/540.D1
Date
Date
WCU PUMP 2
THERMAL PROTECTION RELAY
STATUS CLOSED
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
C1
A1
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
WCU PUMP 1
STATUS CLOSED
L1-
C2_P1_DI01
SUPERVISION
24V_P1
-W066
TU830
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
Date
24V_N1
-A5211
A5211
Name
E
F
G
H
6.3A
SUPERVISION
520.E7
Date
520.E7
A
B
C
D
520.D7
Rev. ind.
523.A1
523.A1
522.B2
520
521
522
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
521.E8
Date
A5221
Name
/541.B7
A5
B6
/541.B8
A6
B7
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
DO820 + TU831
A7
B8
A8
C2_P2_DO03
WCU COOLING PUMP 1

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO04
WCU COOLING PUMP 2

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO05
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

ORDER OPEN
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO06
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

ORDER CLOSE
COMMAND
A4
B5
MOTOR SPACE HEATER

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
/541.B4
C2_P2_DO02
BUS
A3
B4
Date
Date
/541.B3
CABINET SPACE HEATER

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
A2
B3
C2_P2_DO01
-A5221 DO820
A1
B2
IN
/545.B6
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AD
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
TU831
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
B1
C2_P2_DO07
C2_P2_DO08
WCU CHILLER
ORDER ON
COMMAND
OUT
A5231
Doc. des.
523.E1
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
521
522
523
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
521.A8
521.A8
522.B7
Date
WCU COOLING WATER

TEMPERATURE (EXTERNAL)TRANSDUCER
C2_P3_AI05
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
SUPERVISIONTRANSDUCER
C2_P3_AI06
C2_P3_AI07
Doc. des.
C2_P3_AI08
TB807
522
523
540
-W073 1 24V_P1
-W074 1 24V_N1 545.C5
545.E5
OUT
-R5231
= WCU1
+
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
IN
L2+
L2+
L2L2-
/545.D3
6.3A
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
FAIL SAFE E-OFF SUPERVISION
/554.E7
C2P3 SIGNAL AI7
/554.E5
C2_P3_AI04
/554.E4
MUX.
BUS
2006-09-29 Title
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
2006-09-29
AI810 + TU830
WCU COOLING WATER

TEMPERATURE (INTERNAL)TRANSDUCER
/554.E3
-W071 1
-W072 1
Date
Date
C2_P3_AI03
/554.E2
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
WCU COOLING WATER PUMP

OUTPUT SIDE PRESSURETRANSDUCER
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
C2_P3_AI02
L1+
L1+
L1L1-
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
B3
B4
C3
C4
A3
A4
B5
B6
C5
C6
A5
A6
B7
B8
C7
C8
A7
A8
B9
B10
C9
C10
A9
A10
B11
B12
C11
C12
A11
A12
B13
B14
C13
C14
A13
A14
B15
B16
C15
C16
A15
A16
C2_P3_AI01

INPUT SIDE PRESSURETRANSDUCER
24V_P1
24V_N1
TU830
AI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AE
IN
Date
WCU COOLING WATER

CONDUCTIVITY-TRANSDUCER
-A5231
A5231
Name
E
F
G
H
6.3A
1.13
13
1.14
1.14
-Q5741
/574.B4
-Q5003
/500.C4
14
-Q5002
/500.C2
14
-Q5003
/500.C4
1.14
-Q5002
/500.C2
13
1.13
1.13
1.13
-Q5011
1.14
-W095 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
-W092 1
-W093 1
-A5211
/521.B2
-A5211
/521.B2
-W097
-A5211
/521.B2
L2+ 24VB13
C13
L2- 0V A13
-W090 1
-W091 1
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
-A5211
/521.B2
L1+ 24V B1
C1
L1- 0V A1
-A5211
/521.B2
-W088 1
-W089 1
L1+ 24V B3
C3
L1- 0V A3
-W086 1
-W087 1
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
Rev. ind.
-W162 1
C2_P1_DI01
C2_P1_DI02
C2_P1_DI03
C2_P1_DI04
C2_P1_DI13
WCU PUMP 1
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 2
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 1
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 2
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
/WCU PROTECTION
SWITCH ALARM
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
523
540
541
WCU CONTROL
230VAC
60Hz
A6
B6
A5
B5
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

WCU 3-WAY VALVE
ORDER OPEN
ORDER CLOSE
COMMAND
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO05 -A5221 C2_P2_DO06
-A5221
/522.E3
/522.E3
A4
B4
-W160 1
WCU COOLING PUMP 2

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO04
-A5221
/522.E3
A3
2
230V~_N
230V~_L
-X512 1
WCU COOLING PUMP 1

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO03
-A5221
/522.E3
B3
-W101 1
-W102 1
-W103 1
C
-W100 1
-W106 1
-W108 1
-W107 1
-W109 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
WATER COOLING PUMP
2006-09-29
3 - WAY VALVE
11 .D7
21 .D8
31
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
21
22
24
-W110 1
554.A1 CLOSE_230V~_L
-K5542
.D6
554.A1 230V~_N
-W105 1
11
-K5542
.D6
554.A1 OPEN_230V~_L
-W104 1
-K5542
A2
-Z5412
12
14
A1
A1
-Q5003
/500.C4
A2
-Z5411
A2
-Q5002
/500.C2
A1
Rev. ind.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
540
541
545
B1
zero span
I
523.A8
24V_P1
-W158 1
-W159
-W116 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
C2_P3_AI06
/WCU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Date
A2
U I
MUX
C2_P1_DI14
E
F
G
H
-K5451
B11
B12
L2+ 24V
C11
C12
L2- 0V A11
A12
-A5231
/523.B2
L2+ 24VB14
C14
L2- 0V A14
A1
-W113 1
-W114 1
-A5211
/521.B2
Rev. ind.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4-20mA
-50-100C
2
3
-B5631
-B5451 KTO 1140

0..60C
>
A1

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
-A5221 C2_P2_DO01
/522.E3
PT100
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
523.A8
24V_N1
14
12
34
32
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
THERMOSTAT
2006-09-29
HEATING
11 /501.D3
31 /501.D3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
541
545
554
PE
-X554 U1
V1
W1
PE
-X554 U2
500.E4
MOT2_W
500.E4
MOT2_V
500.E4
MOT2_U
500.E2
MOT1_W
500.E2
MOT1_V
500.E2
MOT1_U
541.F7
541.F7
3
V2
W2
PE
-M5542
-B5523
Ref. to SW Doc. No. 3-9556-901

-B5503
-B5502
-B5501
bar
4...20
mA
4...20
mA
C2_P3_AI01
WCU COOLING WATER
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
5 6
7 8
9 10
U I
MUX
C2_P3_AI02
script_ecscad
Prepared
W.Kpfer
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/523.B2
U I
MUX
-A5231
/523.B2
U I
MUX
L1- 0V
-A5231
L1+ 24V
/523.B2
L1- 0V
-A5231
B7
B8
C7
C8
A7
A8
3 4
B5
B6
C5
C6
A5
A6
9 10
L1+ 24V
U I
MUX
7 8
L1- 0V
L1+ 24V
/523.B2
1 2
L1+ 24V
-A5231
L1- 0V
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
-W122 1 2
3 4
B3
B4
C3
C4
A3
A4
-X551 5 6
C2_P3_AI03
C2_P3_AI04
WCU COOLING WATER
OUTPUT SIDE PRESSURETEMPERATURE (INTERNAL)TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
2006-09-29 Title
Date
2006-09-29
Date
L1+ 24V
L1- 0V
WCU COOLING LIQUID

WCU COOLING LIQUID

LEAKAGE DETECTION
-A5211
-X552
24VDC 10
LS 11
0V 12
5
/521.B2
4...20
mA
-X553 1
-A5211
2
3
-B5504 -B5524 -B5525
bar
4...20
mA
-W161 1
/521.B2
A8 C8B8
-X552
24VDC 7
LF
8
9
0V
C2_P1_DI07
-M5541
C2_P1_DI08
A7 C7B7
4
5
6
-A5231
/523.B2
L1+ 24V
L1- 0V
B9
L2+ 24V B10
C9
C10
L2- 0V A9
A10
-K5541
Rev. ind.
-X553 4
OPEN_230V~_L
CLOSE_230V~_L
230V~_N
541.F8
U I
MUX
C2_P3_AI05
WCU COOLING WATER
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
545
554
571
PROCESS STOP
NOT USED
/EMERGENCY-STOP
/EMERGENCY-STOP
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
6
EMERGENCY-STOP
RESET
( OPTIONAL )
EMERGENCY-OFF
RESET
( OPTIONAL )
MCB STATUS
CLOSED
8
MCB STATUS
OPEN
/MCB
( PRESIGNAL &
TRIPPED )
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
CONNECTED TO
COU
F
Rev. ind.
-X17
PE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
554
571
573
CONNECTED TO
COU
CONNECTED TO
COU
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
-X18
PE
MCB
ORDER CLOSE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
MCB
ORDER OPEN 1
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
MCB
ORDER OPEN 2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
INU OPERATION
PREVENTED
MOTOR 1
MCB
ORDER TRIP
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
571
573
574
-Q5741
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ_DC
1.13/540.A8
1.21
1+
3-
>
M
=
-M2
M
=
-M3
-M4
M
=
RD
BU
RD
BU
RD
BU
-M1
2/BU
-E5741
RD
BU
-W156
1/BN
-B5741
-W155 1
M
=
F
Rev. ind.
502.E2 24V_P2
502.E2 24V_N2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
COOLING FAN`S
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
573
574
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 INVERTER UNIT
DOCUMENT :
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM
F
Rev. ind.
disclosure to third parties without express outhority is strictly forbidden. C ABB Swizerland Ltd 2002
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-25
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R. SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-24
03-10-14
07.05.04
06-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
No. of sh.
17
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
1
2
4
5
400
401
402
403
404
405
410
411
412
413
415
416
420
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OVERVIEW
LOCAL DC LINK
OVERCURRENT MONITORING
PHASE-LEG L1
PHASE-LEG L2
PHASE-LEG L3
EMC FILTER
AUX POWER SUPPLY
GATE UNIT POWER SUPPLY
PULSE CONTROL AND
AC CURRENT AND DC VOLTAGE
AIR TO AIR HEAT EXCHANGERS
FAN SUPPLY INT- BOARD
DOOR MONITORING
H
H
E
E
F
E
E
E
H
E
E
H
H
G
G
DC - MEASUREMENT
CURRENT MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT INTERFACE
MEASUREMENT
CABINET TEMP. MONITORING
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-24
03-10-14
07.05.04
06-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
DC+
DC_NP
DCDC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
UNIT BEFORE
Connection to DC bus depends on drive configuration

C
*)
L1
L1
*)
L2
L2
UNIT BEFORE
*)
L3
L3
TERMINAL UNIT
SEE CONVERTER
HW DIAGRAM
OPTION
PG
NEXT UNIT
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
=COU or TEU
Details see circuit diagram overview on page 5
PG
PE
PE
*)
*) Earthing connection points
F
Rev. ind.
NEXT UNIT
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-24
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
-VC1
-C1
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-C2
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-L4051
XDC_+
-G4021
-VC2
-L4011
-R4022/3
-R4024/5
-R4001
-A4001
Option
-C4001.1
-C4001
-R4053
-C4001.2
Phase Frame
-L4012 XDC_-
-R4052
-C4053
Date
Name
E 03-06-24 S.SCHLEGEL
F
G
H
-C4052
-R4002
DC_+
DC_-
-R4051
-C4051
Name
Date
A
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C 01-08-07 P. OBERLE
D 01-08-09 S.SCHLEGEL
DC_NP
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
-R4034/5
Phase L1
-RS1
-R4032/3
-G4031
01-03-05
01-04-02
-VC2
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-RS1
Doc. des.
-R4042/3
-G4041
-VC2
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
-R4044/5
Phase L2
-C1
Title
-L4052
-VC1
-C2
-VC1
-C1
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-L4053
Phase Frame
L1
L2
L3
Last sh.
4
5
400
-RS1
Phase L3
Phase Frame
= INU
+
Lang. E
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
-C2
A
DC_+
HVD
-U4001 XV C770 AE01
X2_1
-A4001
X2
DC_NP
X2_3
-W40008 UDC 413.B2
DC_NP
402.C1
DC_-
401.D1
OPTION LOCAL DC LINK

-W40004
DC_-
-R4001
X2_5
-C4001
-W40002 BK
C4001.1
DC_NP
C4001.2
-W40003 BK
-W40005
BK
-R4002
DC_-
F
Rev. ind.
DC_+
401.A1
BK
-W40001 BK
DC_+
Name
Date
A
B 01-07-25 R. SEILER
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
LOCAL DC LINK
DC - MEASUREMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
5
400
401
-W40101 BK
A
400.A8
DC_+
-L4011
XDC_+
402.A1
-F4011 FSCD
S2
402.A7
Tx
Tx
5V
20V
50V
100V
110V
A1
CL_+
S1
A2
BK
-W40106
FSCD_EXT_+
-W40102 FO
D
400.F8
DC_-
-L4012
FSCD_+
=NEXT_UNIT
412.A4
XDC_-
402.F1
-F4012 FSCD
BK
-W40109
5V
20V
50V
100V
110V
402.F7
S1
A1
CL_-
S2
A2
-W40103 BK
Tx
Tx
-W40108 BK
FSCD_EXT_-
-W40104 FO
F
Rev. ind.
-W40105 BK
Name
Date
A
Date
Name
F 03-10-14 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
FSCD_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
=NEXT_UNIT
412.A5
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
400
Cont.sh.
402
Sh.no.
401
X1:1 (-)
411.E2
GU_VF1U_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4022
-VC1
CL_+
403.A7
U
DC_NP
405.A1
403.C1
CL_XDC_-
403.F7
403.F1
-W40203
1
VF1.1
403.A1
-R4023
-W40202
GU_VF1U_1
411.E2
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
a
VF1U
XDC_+
412.E2
-W40204
411.E2
GU_VF2U_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
400.C8
DC_NP
412.E2
VF3U
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
411.E2
GU_VF3U_1
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E2
GU_VF3U_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR2
-VN1
-RS1
-C1
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2U_1
411.E2
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2U
412.E2
XCL+
XPH
DC_NP
-VN2
-C2
-VR3
CL_+
-W40201
c
-G4021
401.B4
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4U_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VC2
-R4024
-W40205
XDC_401.D8
401.E4
XDC_-
Name
Date
A 13.03.01 S.SCHLEGEL
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L1
411.E3
-VR4
-W40208
-R4025
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4U_1
411.E3
-W40206
VF4.A1-VF4 A1
c
412.E3
VF4U
Rev. ind.
401.A8
-W40207
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
401
402
403
411.E4
GU_VF1V_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4032
-VC1
X1:1 (-)
VF1.1
XDC_+
404.A1
CL_+
404.A7
V
DC_NP
405.C1
404.C1
CL_XDC_-
404.F7
404.F1
-W40303
-R4033
GU_VF1V_1
411.E4
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
VF1V
CL_+
-W40301
-G4031
412.E3
-W40302
-W40304
XCL+
GU_VF2V_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
-RS1
-C1
XPH
DC_NP
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E5
GU_VF3V_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR3
-VN2
-C2
GU_VF3V_1
411.E5
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
a
VF3V
412.E4
DC_NP
-VN1
411.E5
-VR2
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2V_1
411.E5
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2V
412.E3
402.C8
402.A8
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4V_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VC2
-R4034
-W40305
XDC_402.F8
402.F8
XDC_-
Name
Date
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L2
411.E5
-VR4
-W40308
-R4035
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4V_1
411.E5
-W40306
VF4.A1-VF4 A1
c
412.E4
VF4V
Rev. ind.
402.A8
-W40307
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
402
403
404
X1:1 (-)
411.E7
GU_VF1W_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4042
-VC1
VF1.1
-R4043
-W40402
GU_VF1W_1
411.E7
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
a
VF1W
-W40403
412.E4
CL_+
-W40401
c
-G4041
403.A8
XDC_+
-W40404
XCL+
GU_VF2W_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
403.C8
DC_NP
412.E5
VF3W
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
411.E8
GU_VF3W_1
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E8
GU_VF3W_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VN1
-RS1
-C1
411.E7
-VR2
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2W_1
411.E7
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2W
412.E5
XPH
W
DC_NP
DC_NP
-VN2
405.D1
405.F1
-C2
-VR3
8
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4W_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VC2
-R4044
-W40405
XDC_403.F8
403.F8
XDC_-
Name
Date
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L3
411.E8
-VR4
-W40408
-R4045
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4W_1
411.E8
-W40406
VF4.A1-VF4 A1
c
412.E5
VF4W
Rev. ind.
403.A8
-W40407
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
XDC_-
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
403
404
405
1
402.C8
-L4051
-T4051
L1
=TEU OR COU *)
IU_IU_M
IU_+
413.C2
413.C2
413.C2
+
M
-
-Z4051
3
2
-W40501 1
B
403.C8
-L4052
-T4052
L2
=TEU OR COU *)
+
M
-
3
2
-W40502 1
-W40511
-L4053
IV_IV_M
IV_+
-T4053
-C4051
-W40512
-C4052
-C4053
413.D2
413.C2
413.C2
L3
=TEU OR COU *)
BK
BK
DC_NP
Name
Date
A
C
DC_NP
Date
Name
F
G
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
-W40540
Title
BK
-W40509
BK
-W40508
3
2
-W40503 1
IW_IW_M
IW_+
Phase Module Frame
404.C8
BK
-W40507
-W40506
-R4053
-R4052
-R4051
-W40505
BK
BK
-W40504
+
M
-
404.C8
Rev. ind.
-W40510
EMC FILTER
CURRENT MEASUREMENT
413.C2
413.C2
413.C2
*) SEE CONVERTER HW DIAGRAM
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
404
405
410
411.A7
GUSP3_0V_2
-W41027
BK
Prepared
Approved
Project name
U0
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
GNYE
BU
BN
GUSP3_+27V_2 -W41019 BK
L 3
411.A8
GUSP3_0V_1
411.A7
N 2
PHASE L2
GUSP3_+27V_1 -W41017 BK
PHASE L1
411.A8
-W41016 BK
411.A5
GUSP2_0V_2
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
411.A5
GUSP2_+27V_2 -W41015 BK
-W41014 BK
=COU
PE
GUSP2_0V_1
=COU
411.A5
BN
GUSP2_+27V_1 -W41013 BK
L 3
BU
-X411 PE
411.A5
-W41012 BK
GNYE
-W41002
GUSP1_0V_2
N 2
-W41001
411.A2
LXN
1604-6
411.A2
GUSP1_+27V_2 -W41011 BK
-W41010 BK
-G4102
GUSP1_0V_1
LXN
1604-6
411.A2
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
U0
Date
Name
F
G
H
GUSP1_+27V_1 -W41009 BK
-G4101
-W41026
BK
Name
Date
A
C
411.A2
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
-G4103
5
PE
BU
BN
PHASE L3
GNYE
6
7
BN
=COU
=COU
CONTROL
BU
L 3
GNYE
N 2
PE
PE 1
-W41004
-W41023 BK
-W41024 BK
-W41025 BK
U02
413.E2
412.A8
412.A8
ADCVI_+24V
INT_+24V
INT_0V
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
U01
-W41021 BK
-W41022 BK
L 3
LWN
2660-6
-W41029
BK
= INU
+
Lang. E
ADCVI_0V
ADCVI_-24V
N 2
-G4104
Doc. des.
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
413.E2
413.E2
-W41003
U0
AUX POWER SUPPLY
-W41020 BK
LXN
1604-6
Title
-W41028
BK
01-03-05
01-04-02
-W41018 BK
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
PE
410
405
411
-W41030
PE
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
PHASE L3
PHASE L2
410.F5
410.F6
410.F5
410.F6
3
5
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP2 -W41110
X1.1 GUSP2_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP2_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP2_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP2_+27V_2
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
DC
AC
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
0V
+27V
FO
412.A3
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
Title
GU_VF2V_1 -W41109
GU_VF2V_2 -W41109
=VLU_RBU/BCU/3
2) =VLU_RBU/BCU/4
GU_VF3V_1 -W41106
403.D1
GU_VF3V_2 -W41106
403.D1
GU_VF4V_1 -W41107
403.E1
GU_VF4V_2 -W41107
403.E1
403.C1
403.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
=CBU_DIU/3
1) =CBU_DIU/4
GU_VF1V_1 -W41108 SH
403.B1
GU_VF1V_2 -W41108 COAX
403.B1
1 2
01-03-05
01-04-02
410.F3
410.F4
410.F3
410.F4
-G4112
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
Date
Date
410.F1
410.F2
410.F1
410.F2
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP1-W41105
X1.1 GUSP1_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP1_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP1_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP1_+27V_2
PHASE L1
DC
AC
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
0V
+27V
FO
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
412.A3
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
Date
Name
F
G
H
GU_VF2U_1 -W41104
GU_VF2U_2 -W41104
=VLU_RBU/BCU/1
2) =VLU_RBU/BCU/2
GU_VF3U_1 -W41101
402.D1
GU_VF3U_2 -W41101
402.D1
GU_VF4U_1 -W41102
402.E1
GU_VF4U_2 -W41102
402.E1
402.C1
402.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
Only used for INU1

=CBU_DIU/1
1) =CBU_DIU/2
GU_VF1U_1 -W41103 SH
402.B1
GU_VF1U_2 -W41103 COAX
402.B1
2) In case of VLU/RBU/BCU
-G4111
3) In case of one or two LSU

4) In case of two LSU
1 2
Name
Date
A
1) In case of DIU
F
Rev. ind.
-G4113
0V
+27V
X1.1 GUSP3_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP3_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP3_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP3_+27V_2
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
DC
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP3 -W41115
AC
410
411
Last sh.
412
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
= INU
+
Lang. E
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
FO
412.A3
SH
COAX
1 2
GU_VF2W_1 -W41114
GU_VF2W_2 -W41114
=LSU1_EAF/1
3)=LSU1_EAF/2
GU_VF3W_1 -W41111
404.D1
GU_VF3W_2 -W41111
404.D1
GU_VF4W_1 -W41112
404.E1
GU_VF4W_2 -W41112
404.E1
404.C1
404.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
Doc. des.
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
=LSU2_EAF/1
4)=LSU2_EAF/2
GU_VF1W_1 -W41113 SH
404.B1
GU_VF1W_2 -W41113 COAX
404.B1
402.E1
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
403.B1
403.D1
Date
Date
404.A1
01-03-05
01-04-02
404.B1
VF4U
-W41204 FO
VF1V
-W41205 FO
VF2V
-W41206 FO
VF3V
-W41207 FO
VF4V
-W41208 FO
VF1W
-W41209 FO
VF2W
-W41210 FO
VF3W
-W41211 FO
VF4W
-W41212 FO
A812
A704
A703
V568
V567
V566
V565
V564
V563
V562
V561
A816
A641
A205
PWF_GUSP3
411.E8
A206
PWF_GUSP2
411.E6
411.E3
A803
A207
PWF_GUSP1
A813
A208
IOC1
A705
A203
IOC2
413.B7
A805
A204
FSCD_+
401.C7
A804
A210
FSCD_-
401.F7
A814
A202
VLSCD/FSCD_EXT_+ =UNIT_BEFORE
A815
A201
VLSCD/FSCD_EXT_- =UNIT_BEFORE
413.B7
If pos. 34 =2
In case of double VLU
for INU1 & INU2
A531
A592
A541
A302
A551
A402
A715
A714
1) FB+
1) CTRL+
1) FB1) CTRL-
A211
A722
A212
A723
Doc. des.
ATDD
MCB
=COU
2) FT_LINK_TX
=NEXT_UNIT FT_LINK_RX
=UNIT_BEFORE
2)
VLU_LINK_TX
ADCVI_D_RX
ADCVI_D_TX
ADCVI_C_RX
ADCVI_C_TX
AMC3_B_RX
A303
A593
A594
A304
A724
A209
A403
AMC3_B_TX
AMC3_A_RX
AMC3_A_TX
A404
413.C7
413.C7
413.C7
413.C7
=COU
=COU
=COU
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A712
A713
VLU_LINK_RX
only for INU1 or

If pos. 34 = 2
In case of double VLU for INU1 & INU2
PULSE CONTROL AND

404.E1
-W41203 FO
V591
Title
404.D1
VF3U
A802
403.E1
-W41202 FO
Diode Supervision 1 =LSU 1

Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
403.A1
VF2U
A818
A817
A702
402.D1
-W41201 FO
only for INU1
INT-BOARD
UFC760BE42
/ BE142
Date
Name
F
G 04-05-10 P.OBERLE
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
402.B1
VF1U
-A4121
2) In case of semi-redundant INU connected to INU-PUB/PFF
If you have a
Double INU + LSU,
make this conection
Name
Date
A
1) Connected to VLU/CBU (DIU), RBU or BCU
402.A1
F
Rev. ind.
=COU
= INU
+
Lang. E
+24V 2
0V
+24V 1
X1:3
X1:2
X1:1
INT_+24V
INT_0V
-W41213
410.F8
410.F8
411
412
Last sh.
413
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
V103
V113
A4
A6
-W41311 FO
-W41301 FO
IOC2
IOC1
A8
A1
-W41302 FO
-W41303 FO
ADCVI_C_RX
ADCVI_C_TX
A9
A2
-W41304 FO
-W41305 FO
ADCVI_D_RX
ADCVI_D_TX
400.B5
405.B7
405.B7
405.B7
405.E7
405.E7
405.E7
405.C7
405.C7
405.C7
UDC
UF C762 AE101
-A4132
X21
9
IU_+
IU_M
IU_-
X3:1
X3:2
X3:3
IW_+
IW_M
IW_-
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
IV_+
IV_M
IV_-
X6:1
X6:2
X6:3
SVA
XV C767
FOR VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT
sub-D
-A4133
SCA
+24V XV C768
FOR CURRENT
-24V ADJUSTMENT
X7:1
X7:2
X7:3
412.A4
412.A4
412.A6
412.A6
412.A6
412.A6
A10
A3
X8:1
X8:2
X8:3
410.F8
410.F7
410.F7
F
Rev. ind.
-A4131
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
ADCVI_+24V
ADCVI_0V
ADCVI_-24V
Date
Name
F
G
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
Prepared
Approved
Project name
+15V
-15V
+5V
GND
+24V
0V POWER
-24V SUPPLY
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
Doc. des.
MEASUREMENT
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
412
413
415
Rev. ind.
Name
2
3
PE
1) FROM COU OR UNIT BEFORE
14
1) 2)
21
1) 2)
GNYE
PE
2) TO NEXT UNIT IF NOT LAST UNIT
-W41505
BN
BU
13
-W41503 BK
GNYE
20
-X412
M
-M2 1~
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41504
BN
BU
-X412
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X412
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
M
-M1 1~
-X4151
230VAC
-X412
-W41502
12
11
BK
BK
-X4152
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-W41501
>
-E4151
Date
Name
E
F
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
OPTION
0...60C
Date
-B4151 KTS 01141
A
B
C
D
4
-E4152
Date
Date
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X4154
M
-M2 1~
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41506
BN
BU
GNYE
-W41507
BN
BU
GNYE
22
15
PE
23
16
PE
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
Title
M
-M1 1~
03-10-10
03-10-14
-X4153
-E4153
Doc. des.
M
-M2 1~
= INU
+
Lang. E
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X4156
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41508
BN
BU
GNYE
-W41509
BN
BU
GNYE
24
17
PE
25
PE
18
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-X4155
M
-M1 1~
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
413
415
416
OPTION
A
24VDC
4
RD
BU
1
2
-X4161

1
2
-W41601
1) 2)
1
2
-X413
-E4161
RD
BU
M
=
F
Rev. ind.
1) 2)
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-10
03-10-14
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
415
Cont.sh.
420
Sh.no.
416
DOOR 1
MONITORING
DOOR 2
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
MONITORING
>
32
BK
BK
-W42005
-X413
10
5
9
DOOR_LOCK
4
8
LOOP 2
-W42004
22
21
0..60C
-B4201 KTO 1140
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
A2
11
2
6
-W42003
2
2
-X412
-W42002
ACTUATOR
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
C
-W42001
A1
14
22
-S4203
13
21
14
22
-S4202
13
21
-S4201
12
=COU
1)
=COU
DOOR_LOCK
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
1)
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 2
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
LOOP 3
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 3
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
LOOP 1
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R. SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
E 03-06-24
F 03-10-14
G 07.05.04
H
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
DOOR MONITORING
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
416
420
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 LINE SUPPLY UNIT, 12 PULSE
DOCUMENT :
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
01-07-23
01-08-10
02-07-09
02-10-23
Name
R. SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-25
03-10-30
07.05.04
05-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
No. of sh.
12
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
POWER STAGE
300
PHASE-LEG 1L1/2L1
301
PHASE-LEG 1L2/2L2
302
PHASE-LEG 1L3/2L3
302A
RECTIFIER SNUBBER CIRCUIT & CROWBAR
E
HOKES
310
PULSE INTERFACE
311
DIODE BRIDGE SUPERVISION
315
320
DOOR MONITORING
G
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
01-07-24
01-08-10
02-07-09
02-10-23
Name
R. SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-25
03-10-30
07.05.04
05-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
1
2
4
DC BUS middle
DC+
UNIT BEFORE
DC+
DC-
DC-
DC BUS front
OPTION
DC+
DC+
DC_-
DC_+
DCDC_-
DCDC_+
CABLE
DC_NP

C
=COU or TEU
-1L1 *)
2L2
-2L3
2L3
UNIT BEFORE
F
A
B
C
D
Date
YE/GN
2L3
TERMINAL UNIT
SEE CONVERTER
HW DIAGRAM
-W401
OPTION
Name
-W402
PG
PG
PE
PE
Date
Name
E
F
G
H 05-07-06 P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-25
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
NEXT UNIT
2L1
-2L2
Pipe behind -T3018
2L2
-2L1
YE/GN
2L1
1L3
Pipe behind -T3008
1L3
DC_NP
1L2
-1L3
DC_-
1L2
1L1
-1L2
DC_+
1L1
Rev. ind.
NEXT UNIT
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
2
4
5
XDC_+
-V3006
-V3007
-V3016
-V3017
-V3026
-V3027
-C3021
-V3005
-V3008
-V3015
-V3018
-V3025
-V3028
-R3021
-L3021
DC_+
1L1
1L2
1L3
C
XDC_NP
-V3004
-V3001
-V3014
-V3011
-V3024
-V3021
-R3022
-V3003
-V3002
-V3013
-V3012
-V3023
-V3022
-C3022
-R3023
DC_NP
D
2L1
2L2
2L3
XDC_-
F
Rev. ind.
Date
A 19.07.01
B 01-08-10
C
D 02-10-23
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
POWER STAGE
-L3022
DC_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
4
5
300
XDC_+
XDC_+
-W30013 BK
310.F5
310.F5
T3007_2
T3007_1
-T3008
c
a
-V3005
-V3007
rd
302A.C4
310.F6
310.F6
T3008_2
T3008_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
rd
-V3008
-W30007 BK
-W30008 BK
RC_+_0P
XDC_NP
310.F3
310.F3
T3001_2
T3001_1
wt
XDC_NP_C1
-W30012 BK
XDC_NP_C2
-T3002
c
a
-V3003
XDC_NP
310.F4
310.F4
T3002_2
T3002_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
wt
rd
-V3002
XDC_-_C
XDC_-
301.F2
XDC_-
Date
Name
F
G
H
301.C1
301.C2
-V3001
rd
-W30010 BK
Name
Date
A
B 01-08-10 S.SCHLEGEL
C 02-07-09 S.SCHLEGEL
301.C2
-W30003 BK
-W30004 BK
2L1
8
7
6
5
-V3004
4
3
2
1
-T3001
-W30011 BK
-W30001 BK
-W30002 BK
301.A2
-W30005 BK
-W30006 BK
1L1
wt
Rev. ind.
-V3006
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-T3007
XDC_+_C
RC_+
302A.B4
301.A1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L1/2L1
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
301.F1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
5
300
301
-W30113 BK
-T3018
c
a
-V3015
310.F7
310.F6
T3018_2
T3018_1
XDC_NP_C1
XDC_NP_C2
wt
rd
-V3018
-W30101 BK
-W30102 BK
-V3014
-T3011
310.F4
310.F4
T3011_2
T3011_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
-W30111 BK
XDC_NP_C1
-W30112 BK
XDC_NP_C2
-T3012
-V3013
XDC_NP
302.C1
302.C2
-V3011
rd
310.F5
310.F5
T3012_2
T3012_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
wt
rd
-V3012
-W30110 BK
XDC_-_C
XDC_-_C
302.F2
XDC_-
XDC_-
Name
Date
A
302.C2
-W30103 BK
-W30104 BK
2L2
300.F7
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-W30107 BK
-W30108 BK
300.C7
rd
300.C7
302.A2
-V3017
XDC_NP
XDC_+_C
302.A1
-W30105 BK
-W30106 BK
1L2
wt
T3017_2
T3017_1
8
7
6
5
310.F6
310.F6
4
3
2
1
-T3017
c
a
Rev. ind.
XDC_+_C
-V3016
7
XDC_+
300.A7
300.F8
XDC_+
300.C8
300.A8
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L2/2L2
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
302.F1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
300
301
302
-T3028
c
310.F6
310.F6
T3028_2
T3028_1
8
7
6
5
wt
rd
-V3028
-W30207 BK
-W30208 BK
XDC_NP_C1
XDC_NP
XDC_NP_C2
-V3024
-T3021
310.F4
310.F3
T3021_2
T3021_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
-V3021
rd
wt
rd
-W30203 BK
-W30204 BK
2L3
-T3022
-V3023
302A.E4
RC_-
310.F4
310.F4
T3022_2
T3022_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-V3022
-W30220 BK
XDC_-_C
XDC_-
XDC_-
Name
Date
A
302A.C2
-W30201 BK
-W30202 BK
RC_-_0P
302A.C4
301.F7
4
3
2
1
301.C7
rd
301.C7
-V3027
XDC_NP
302A.B2
-W30205 BK
-W30206 BK
wt
T3027_2
T3027_1
310.F5
310.F5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-T3027
1L3
-V3025
Rev. ind.
XDC_+_C
-V3026
7
XDC_+
301.A7
301.F8
XDC_+
301.C8
301.A8
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L3/2L3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
302A.E2
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
301
302
302A
IF LSU 14MVA
DC+
DC+
DC+
DC+
XDC_+
302.A8
-W30209 BK
RC_+
300.A3
RC_+_0P
300.C3
RC_-_0P
302.D3
-L3021
-C3021
-W30210 BK
-R3021
C
-W30211 BK
XDC_NP
302.C8
XDC_NP
-R3023
-W30212 BK
-W412104 BK
-W30213 BK
-R3022
DC_NP
CABLE TO NEAREST
UNIT EQUIPPED WITH
NP-BAR
-W30217 BK
EAF2
311.A5
-W30216 BK
EAF1
311.A5
-W30214 BK
-C3022
XDC_-
OPTION
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
302.E3
-L3022
IF LSU 14MVA
IF LSU1
302.F8
RC_-
IF LSU2
-W30215 BK
Rev. ind.
IF LSU2
IF LSU1
OPTION
DC-
DC-
DC-
DCE
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-05-07
03-06-25
Title
RECTIFIER SNUBBER CIRCUIT

& CROWBAR CHOKES
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
302
302A
310
Rev. ind.
Name
Date
A 01-07-24 R. SEILER
C
-A3101
= NEXT_UNIT FT_LINK
X23:1
X23:2
X24:1
X24:2
X26:1
X26:2
X1:1
X1:2
X2:1
X2:2
-W31016 BK
BK
1
N
L
X25:1
X25:2
-W31015
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
X22:1
X22:2
11
T3018_1
T3018_2
10
12
Doc. des.
301.C4
301.C4
X21:1
X21:2
-W31001 BN
BU
GNYE
PULSE INTERFACE
ATDD
3BHS119885E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
302.C4
302.C4
T3028_1
T3028_2
=COUx
=COUx
T3008_1
T3008_2
X16:1
X16:2
-X311 1
2
PE
PE
300.C4
300.C4
X15:1
X15:2
LWN
1902-6
T3017_1
T3017_2
X14:1
X14:2
-G3101
301.B4
301.B4
X13:1
X13:2
-W31030
T3027_1
T3027_2
X12:1
X12:2
U0
302.B4
302.B4
X11:1
X11:2
PE
T3007_1
T3007_2
FT_LINK= UNIT_BEFORE
-W31014 BK
Title
300.B4
300.B4
-W31002
1
2
-W31003
1
2
-W31004
1
2
-W31005
1
2
-W31006
1
2
-W31007
1
2
-W31008
1
2
-W31009
1
2
-W31010
1
2
-W31011
1
2
-W31012
1
2
-W31013
1
2
FSCD+= UNIT_BEFORE
FSCD-= UNIT_BEFORE
LOGIC
T3012_1
T3012_2
01-03-06
01-08-07
301.E4
301.E4
T3022_1
T3022_2
Date
Date
302.E4
302.E4
T3002_1
T3002_2
300.E4
300.E4
T3011_1
T3011_2
301.D4
301.D4
T3021_1
T3021_2
302.D4
302.D4
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
T3001_1
T3001_2
CHANNEL 1
RX0
RX1
CHANNEL 1+2
RX2
CHANNEL 2
RX3
RX4
CHANNEL 1
TX0
TX1
CHANNEL 1+2
TX2
CHANNEL 2
TX3
TX4
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
300.D4
300.D4
PINT
DD C779 BE02
Date
Name
F
G
H
= NEXT_UNIT FSCD+
= NEXT_UNIT FSCD-
= LSU
+
Lang. E
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
302A
310
311
302A.D7
302A.D7
CONFIGURATION
WITH
3/5MVA
IF
NO
DC
SAFE
LINE
VOLTAGE
-V3111
VUO 60-12NO3
C
-T3111
EES 50
X230:1
X40:1
OR
SUPPLY
1
3
-W31103
BK
4
5
6
-W31105
BK
7
9
-F3111
EAF
UF C765 AE102
BK
-W31104
BK
-W31106
Sig_In
Sig_Gnd
X1
X2
COAX
X40:2
X3:2 5AF
X3:1
SH
X230:2
OTHER
DRIVE
TX
=INUx
(to
Master
Int-Board)
Pwr_In
Pwr_Gnd
S1
ON
OFF
SH
ALL
A1
1234
1150V
825V
660V
500V
2 PE
-W31102
COAX
-W31101
INU
230V
-X314 1
OPTION
-X173
BN
BU
YEGN
POWER ON
CONFIGURATION
E
=INUx
=INUx
F
Rev. ind.
=INU
DRIVE
SINGLE
EAF1
EAF2
-C3111
IF
Name
Date
A 01-07-24 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
E
F 03-10-30 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
310
Cont.sh.
315
Sh.no.
311
OPTION
A
230VAC
1) 2)
1) 2)
12
M
-M1 1~
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
Date
E
F
G 07.05.04
H
Name
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
14
PE
GNYE
BN
BU
-W31505
2L1
L
BN 2L2
N
BU 2PE
YE/GN
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
-X3151
-E3151
1L1
L
BN 1L2
N
BU 1PE
YE/GN
BN
BU
-W31504
>
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
KTS 01141
0...60C
-B3151
PE
-X312
21
-X312
-X3152
-X312
13
BK
GNYE
-W31502
BK
-W31501
BK
-W31503
20
-X312
11
Rev. ind.
M
-M2 1~
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-30
03-10-31
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
311
Cont.sh.
320
Sh.no.
315
DOOR
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
MONITORING
-B3201 KTO 1140

0..60C
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
21
A2
11
>
ACTUATOR
32
22
A1
14
22
-S3202
13
21
-S3201
12
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
BK
-W32006
-X313
BK
-W32005
6
10
3
7
2
6
TO COU OR LOOP 3
NEXT UNIT
TO COU OR LOOP 1
NEXT UNIT
-W32003
FROM COU OR LOOP 3

UNITBEFORE
-X312
FROM COU OR LOOP 1

UNIT BEFORE
-W32001
=COU
=COU
FROM COU OR DOOR_LOCK

UNIT BEFORE
1) DOOR_LOCK
FROM COU OR LOOP 2

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 2
NEXT UNIT
UNIT BEFORE
1) DOOR_LOCK
Rev. ind.
Name
Date
C
Date
Name
F
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
DOOR MONITORING
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
315
320
F
Rev. ind.
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 CAPACITOR BANK UNIT
DOCUMENT :
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
No. of sh.
16
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
1
2
4
5
6
700
701
703
705
708
709
710
712
713
715
720
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
CBU CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW CAPACITORS ARRANGEMENT
BALANCING RESISTORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
GROUNDING NETWORK
CHARGING UNIT
DISCHARGING UNIT
EARTHING ISOLATOR
CONTROL EARTHING ISOLATOR
DOOR MONITORING
I
I
I
F
G
F
F
F
E
F
F
E
H
I
G
ACTIVE ISOLATION MEASUREMENT
AUXILIARIES
F
Rev. ind.
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DCDC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
NEXT UNIT
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
DC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
=CBU
Additional CBU
depends on
drive configuration
UNIT BEFORE
DC_+1
DC_NP1
DC_-1
DC_+1
DC_NP1
DC_-1
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
PG
PG
PE
PE
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-25
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
NEXT UNIT
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
Rev. ind.
UNIT BEFORE
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
DC_+
-A7091
OPTION
OPTION
-K7201
-A7101
OPTION
-R7001
-V7091
-V7095
-V7092
-R7003
In case
of 3 rows
CBU
-C7011/...
-V7096
-R7101
-V7101
-C7101
AUX.
DC_NP
-T7091
-Z7081
OPTION
-R7002
-V7093
-C7102
-L7081
-R7081/2
-V7097
-Q7121
-C7081/2
PG
-V7098
-V7102
-R7102
In case
of 3 rows
CBU
-R7004
-V7094
PE
-R710B1/...6
DC_-
F
Rev. ind.
-R710A1/...6
Name
Date
A
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
4
5
6
<= row 1
<= row 3
<= row 1
<= row 3
=CBU right
<= row 2
=CBU left
B
*)
*)
page 701 =>
-C7011
-C7012
-C7013
-C7013
-C7012
-C7011
<= page 701
page 703 =>
-C7031
-C7032
-C7033
-C7033
-C7032
-C7031
<= page 703
page 705 =>
-C7051
-C7052
-C7053
-C7053
-C7052
-C7051
<= page 705
2 rows CBU
2 rows CBU
3 rows CBU
3 rows CBU
- CBU left, right, 2 rows or 3 rows depends on drive configuration

- Quantity of capacitors see converter HW diagram
*) Fill up direction: The CBU is filled up with capacitors starting with -C7011, then following the arrows
F
Rev. ind.
<= row 2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-20
03-10-24
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
700
Sh.no.
DC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
NEXT UNIT
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
In case of
2 rows CBU
DC+
DC_NP
DC-W70001
BK
-R7001
2
-W70003
-W70002
BK
-R7002
1
-W70004
BK
BK
-W70005
BK
-R7003
1
2
-W70003
-W70002
BK
-R7002
2
1
-W70006
BK
-R7004
1
2
-W70004
BK
BK
DC_+1 701.A2
DC_NP1 701.C2
DC_-1 701.E2
CHARGING
UNIT
E
709.A8
DC_+
709.E8
DC_-
Date
A 28.03.01
B
C 01-07-26
D 01-08-10
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
703.A2
703.C2
703.E2
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
705.A2
705.C2
705.E2
DC_+4
DC_NP4
DC_-4
710.A1
710.C3
710.F1
DC_NP7
DC_NP8
708.A2
708.A6
DC_+6
DC_NP6
DC_-6
712.B3
712.B3
712.B3
OPTION
TO LSU IF CBU IS NEAREST TO LSU
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
CAPACITOR
BK
-R7001
2
1
DIU
-W70001
EARTH
GND
ISOLATOR NETWORK
In case of
3 rows CBU
Rev. ind.
UNIT BEFORE
DC_NP
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
BALANCING RESISTORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
700
701
A
DC_+1
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+1
700.C8
-C7011
-C7012
-C7013
C7011.1
C7012.1
C7013.1
DC_NP1
DC_NP1
C7011.2
C7012.2
C7013.2
E
700.C8
DC_-1
DC_-1
OPTION CONNECTED TO NEIGHBOURING CBU
*) Quantity of capacitors see converter HW diagram
F
Rev. ind.
700.C8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
700
Cont.sh.
703
Sh.no.
701
A
DC_+2
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+2
700.D8
-C7031
-C7032
-C7033
C7031.1
C7032.1
C7033.1
DC_NP2
DC_NP2
C7032.2
C7031.2
C7033.2
E
700.D8
DC_-2
DC_-2
F
Rev. ind.
700.D8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
701
Cont.sh.
705
Sh.no.
703
A
DC_+3
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+3
700.D8
-C7051
-C7052
-C7053
C7051.1
C7052.1
C7053.1
DC_NP3
DC_NP3
C7052.2
C7051.2
C7053.2
E
700.D8
DC_-3
DC_-3
F
Rev. ind.
700.D8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
703
Cont.sh.
708
Sh.no.
705
1
A
-Z7081
OPTION
OPTION
DC_NP7
700.E8
DC_NP8
BK
700.E8
BK
GNYE
-W70811
GNYE
-W70810
BK
-W70807
-C7082
-X716 1
-C7081
-W70809
BK
-W70806
-W70804 BK
=COU
BK
-W70805
BK
-R7082
-R7081
-L7081
-F7081
-W70803 BK
-W70808
BK
-W70802
Rev. ind.
-W70801
PG
PG
PE
PE
Name
Date
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
GROUNDING NETWORK
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
705
708
709
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
-W70908
-W70907
-W70906
700.F1
a
a
c
c
a
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
DC_-
-V7098
-W70909
Name
700.E1
-V7097
-V7094
E
DC_+
-V7093
a
*) used for 400V
-X2 2
-X710 1
2
3
=COU
4
(depends
on supply
5
voltage)
6
7
=COU
PE
-W70902 GNYE
PU180/63/E 3.3kVA
5kVA
690V
3900V
575V
500V
460V
415V
380V *)
0V
0V
PE
/720.E8
A2
A1
-W70904
-W70901
BK1
BK2
BK3
BK4
BK5
BK6
BK7
-X2 1
-K7201
-V7096
-W70903
a
-V7092
-T7091
Date
A
B 02.04.01
C 01-07-26
D 01-08-10
-V7095
Rev. ind.
-V7091
OPTION
-W70905
-A7091
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
CHARGING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
708
709
710
-W71024
VLSCD
XV C724 BE
B1
A1
OF1
A2
OF2
B2
-R710A6
-W71034
-W71041
-R710A5
-W71033
-W71032
-R710A2
-W71042
-W71007
-W71003
-F7101
-W71023
-R710A4
-W71031
-R710A3
-W71022
-W71021
-W71001
DC_+4
-R710A1
FB+/3
=INU
-X7 1
-W71010
-W71011
=INU
OPTION 1, 2 NOT USED

1 to 6 capacitors installed
in the complete converter
=> -R710A1,-R710A2
=> -R710B1,-R710B2
(-)
CBU_DIU/2
X1.2
(+)
-W71012
X1.1
=INU
=INU
OPTION = Option1+Option2
=> -R710A1...-R710A6
=> -R710B1...-R710B6
=INU
-W71013
-C7102
-V7102 A1
CTRL-/3
-W71014
DC_NP4 -W71008 -X7 2
CBU_DIU/3
X1.1
(-)
CBU_DIU/4
X1.2
(+)
700.E8
-C7101
-W71040 GNYE
-W71015
1
=INU
OPTION = Option1
=> -R710A1...-R710A4
=> -R710B1...-R710B4
CBU_DIU/1
-R7102
-W71016
-W71017
=INU
-R7101
-V7101 A1
CTRL+/3
OPTIONS Discharging resistor:
PE
PE
-X7 3
-W71009
700.E8
-R710B2
-W71006
DC_-4
Name
Date
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
-R710B6
-W71038
VLSCD
XV C724 BE
B1
A1
OF1
A2
OF2
B2
-W71043
-R710B5
-W71037
-W71036
-R710B4
-W71028
-W71035
-R710B3
-W71027
-W71026
-R710B1
-W71025
-F7102
-W71005
Option 2
Option 1
Rev. ind.
Option 2
Option 1
700.E8
5
-W71002
OPTION
-A7101
-W71044
FB-/3
=INU
-W71004
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DISCHARGING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
709
710
712
DC_+6
DC_NP6
DC_-6
-W71201 BK
-W71202 BK
-W71203 BK
-W71204
GNYE
PE
A1 A2
1
3
5
7
2
4
A
B
C
-Q7121
6
8
/713.D2
/713.D3
/713.D4
/713.D5
700.E8
700.E8
700.F8
/713.E7
PE
F
Rev. ind.
OPTION EARTHING ISOLATOR
A
B
C
D
Date
28.03.01
02.04.01
01-07-26
01-08-10
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
EARTHING ISOLATOR
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
710
712
713
COU1
290.B3
COU1
290.D6
-W71308
10
-F7131
2
-W71315
BK
-W71307
-W71306
BK
BK
BK
-W71305
-W71304
-W71303
BK
BK
BK
-W71302
-W71301
BK
(+)
-W71316 BK
(+)
-X715 1
-S7131 S1
E
GROUNDING
SWITCH
OPEN 1
Name
Date
A
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
Date
Name
F
G
H 05-12-01 P.OBERLE
GROUNDING
SWITCH
OPEN 2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
GROUNDING
SWITCH
CLOSED 1
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
GROUNDING
SWITCH
CLOSED 2
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
S2 H1
BK
BK
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71310
X2
-Q7121
/712.C5
21
-W71309
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71314 BK
22
-W71313 BK
X1
13
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71311
BK
-W71312
BK
14
Rev. ind.
COU1
290.B2
BK
A1 A2
-Q7121
/712.C5
LAMP TEST
UNLOCK
GROUNDING
SWITCH
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
712
713
715
OPTION
A
230VAC
1) 2)
1) 2)
12
BK
M
-M1 1~
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
Date
E
F
G 07.05.04
H
Name
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
14
PE
GNYE
BN
BU
-W71505
2L1
L
BN 2L2
N
BU 2PE
YE/GN
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
-X7151
-E7151
1L1
L
BN 1L2
N
BU 1PE
YE/GN
BN
BU
-W71504
>
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
KTS 01141
0...60C
-B7151
PE
-X712
-X7152
-X712
21
13
-X712
GNYE
-W71502
BK
-W71501
BK
-W71503
20
-X712
11
Rev. ind.
M
-M2 1~
P.OBERLE
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-30
03-10-31
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
713
Cont.sh.
720
Sh.no.
715
DOOR
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
HIGH VOLTAGE
RELAIS
0..60C
I
J
K
L
Date
Name
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
BK
X2
=COU OR CBU
=COU OR CBU
A1 A2 /709.A6
-W72007
BK
X1
-W72006
-W72031
PE
-X714
-K7201
1)

UNIT BEFORE
1)
TO COU OR LOOP 2
NEXT UNIT
UNIT BEFORE
FROM COU OR LOOP 2

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 3
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 3

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 1
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 1

UNIT BEFORE
Option:
1 door cubicle
PE
BU
-X713
6
10
3
7
-W72004
BN
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
21
A2
11
2
6
-W72003
32
22
A1
12
14
22
>
-W72002
-X712
-W72001
KTO 1140
ACTUATOR
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
13
21
13
21
-B7201
-S7203
-S7202
14
22
-S7201
-W72004
BK
-A7091
Option:
2 doors cubicle
-W72030 PE
OPTION
CHARGING UNIT
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DOOR MONITORING
AUXILIARIES
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
715
720
EXTERNAL HEAT EXCHANGER
FOR ACS6000
6E-1701A/B
Plant:
LDPE 400 KT/Y
3276-GP-VD-050
Client Ref.: TASNEE
Sheet
114
02
Issue
EXTERNAL HEAT EXCHANGER

FOR ACS6000
6E-1701A/B

STUTTGART
FOR INFORMATION
DATE OF ISSUE:
Replaces:
Created from:
12.12.2007
Type / Code
ZSK380 / ZSK70
Jobname
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN CONNECTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
TASNEE LDPE
Job-No.
Doc-Type
Count-No.
Fmt.
Rev.
64019320 . 542 . 0020 . 3 . 02

02
FINAL
Wiebe
Laib
Aichroth
12-12-2007
01
FIRST ISSUE
Wiebe
Remus
Aichroth
19-04-2007
Issue
Description
Prepared
Checked
Approved
Date
No.
Design change
Date
Design
Appr.
F2
APPROX 1360
312
V77
E1
V61
V75
V60
F3
V11
V78
E2
V63
V62
V16
V76
V13
623
26
V12
V32
V15
V85
70
V18
V83
392
10
150
270
710
191
312
1137
271
168
V19
854
V17
1100
V84
V86
V20
35
16
)
(x4
235
V14
REM:
555
3-3617-001 FLOW DIAGRAM

4-3617-050 LIST OF COMPONENTS
Z2
WEIGHT EXCL. WATER APPROX: 560KG

WEIGHT EXCL. WATER APPROX: 580KG
POS 1: FINE WATER INLET, FLANGE ANSI 2"

POS 2: FINE WATER OUTLET, FLANGE ANSI 2"
POS 3: RAW W ATER INLET, WITH COUNTER FLANGE ANSI 3"
POS 4: RAW W ATER OUTLET, WITH COUNTER FLANGE ANSI 3"
POS 5: VALVE ISO-Rp 1, FOR CIP CONNECTION
POS 6: DRAIN VALVE HOSE 12
This document must not be copied without

our written permission and the contents
thereof must not be imparted to third party
nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
Contravention will be prosecuted.
ABB Power Technologies AB
Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved.
980
DIMENSION TOLERANCE ACCORDING TO

SWEDEWATER STANDARD 9-3001
Appr.
Design
Drawn
TI
EN
EN
Date
2007-03-06
AXELTOFTAVGEN 170
BOX 265
ABB SCHWEIZ AG
ACS6000 HEAT EXCHANGER
WATER COOLING SYSTEM
HEAT EXCHANGER UNIT
S-261 23 LANDSKRONA
SWEDEN
Issue
Date
2007-03-06
1
Scale
Project No.
3617
1:2
Drawing No.
1-3617-210
PHONE: +46 418-45 07 00
FAX: +46 418-120 19
ABB Automation Products GmbH

Lampertheim
Large Drives & Machines
Frequency Converter
Documentation
(as built)
Dept. / Author
Date of issue
Lang.
APR/AVLD Wiebe
13.07.2007
en
Printdate
ABB ref. No.
APR/VLD 253 528
Customer ref. No.
Document name
Rev. / revised by
Page
Order no. 422 / 46175789
Converter_final docu_253528.doc
-/-
1/3
Project:
Tasnee LDPE
Adjustable-speed drive system for ZSK 320 Main drive
Table of contents
Chapter
Description
ACC1 +ACS 600 Documentation
Document no.
Rev.
ACC1
ACC1 Dimension Drawing
3BFA 6803AT01
AC800 Coperion G2000 Panel Interface signals
3BFT 6903AT
G2000 Instructions for Downloading
3BFA 2400106
G2000 Programming Instructions MVDT
3BFA 24011006
Operation of the G2000
3BFA 24011201
ACC1 Componenten Liste
3BFA6803AT
AC800 Tasnee Hardwired Interf. Signals
3BFA6803AT
AC800M_Controller Hardware
3BSE019193R201
AC800 Tasnee Software Diagram
3BFA6803AT
NORPower 4000 Instruction for Installation
15299-1
NOR Power 4000 Techn Specification
05200-1
V1.1
A
Users manual ACS 6000

1.1
Safety
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.2
Transportation, storage and disposal
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.3
Mechanical installation
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.4
Electrical installation
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.5
Information on commissioning
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.6
Operation
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.7
CDP control panel
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.8
Maintenance and troubleshooting
3BHS212794 ZAB E01
1.9
Operating instructions ACS 6000 with Line Supply

Unit (LSU)
3BHS212800 ZAB E01
Appendixes
A
Water cooling unit

Users manual water cooling units
3BHS135738 ZAB E02
Data sheets water cooling units
3BHS124234 ZAB E01
List of components water cooling units
4-4197-050
Options:
L:\VLD_Large Drives\AUFTRGE\253528_Coperion_Tasnee\PAO 9_Techn. Unterlagen, Dokumentation\9.11 DOCU\As Build

Docu\Chapter 3_Frequency converter\Converter_final docu_253528.doc

Lampertheim
Frequency Converter
Documentation
(as built)
Dept. / Author
Date of issue
Lang.
APR/AVLD Wiebe
13.07.2007
en
Printdate
ABB ref. No.
APR/VLD 253 528
Customer ref. No.
Document name
Rev. / revised by
Page
Order no. 422 / 46175789
-/-
2/3
Profibus Adapter Module
3BFE 64341588
Gray encoder board
ZAB 3 BHS 205451
DDCS Branching unit
3BFE 64285513 R 0125
ACC1
ACC1 Dimension Drawing
3BFA 6803AT01
AC800 Coperion G2000 Panel Interface signals
3BFT 6903AT
G2000 Instructions for Downloading
3BFA 2400106
G2000 Programming Instructions MVDT
3BFA 24011006
Operation of the G2000
3BFA 24011201
ACC1 Componenten Liste
3BFA6803AT
AC800 Tasnee Hardwired Interf. Signals
3BFA6803AT
AC800M_Controller Hardware
3BSE019193R201
AC800 Tasnee Software Diagram
3BFA6803AT
NORPower 4000 Instruction for Installation
15299-1
NOR Power 4000 Techn Specification
05200-1
Mechanical drawings
Layout drawing
3BHS224276
Paulinia line up
3BFA5814AT01
Terminal unit
3BHS196575
Water cooling unit
3BHS196601
Base frame
3BHS199089
Electrical diagrams
Setting list of protection devices
3BHS22427D01_322
Utility consumption list
3BHS224268
Converter HW diagram
3BHS224281E01
Standard wiring diagram control unit
3BHS224279E01
Standard wiring diagram cooling unit
3BHS224278E01
Standard wiring diagram inverter unit
3BHS119662E01
Standard wiring diagram line supply unit
3BHS119885E01
Standard wiring diagram terminal unit
3BHS119836E01
Standard wiring diagram capacitor bank unit
3BHS119828E01
Parts list
ACS 6000 Electrical part list
V1.1
3BHS208495
Test reports
Factory acceptance test (FAT) converter
Serial No. 173


Lampertheim
Frequency Converter
Documentation
(as built)
Dept. / Author
Date of issue
Lang.
APR/AVLD Wiebe
13.07.2007
en
Printdate
ABB ref. No.
APR/VLD 253 528
Customer ref. No.
Document name
Rev. / revised by
Page
Order no. 422 / 46175789
-/-
3/3
Cooling system performance test

G
Quality assurance
Certificates IQNET and SQS
9-3360-601
3BHS130299 ZAB E01
Signal and parameter table

Will be handed out by the commissioning engineer
after commissioning

!
!
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
&
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
&&
&
'()
'+
(
''
'
)
'' (
-
"
*!$
*%
"
'
''
'
)
'
( *!$
'
'
'
'
, '++'
, '++'
,
(
'
'
%
!
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
"
. (' )+
/ ,
*%
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
"
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
+
+
+
+
&(
1' (
"
&
*%
&, ( +2 +
&, ( +2
&'
+2 +
&'
+2
' ( )
+ &#) .' 3 +
+ &#) .' 3
* +
&' 4
&' 4
%
5
'
*#& ' (
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
# -
*'++'
"
&
1' (
*%
# .
)5!)22 0
# -
( "&
+6
& +
&
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
&
"/
0
&2 (
+ " /10
&' (
/#0
& )
2
/20
& '
(
&)
/(0
06 &)
.')
6( 0
7')
( '+ ,'
( .')
3
&
) 1' (
! ) 5 2' /
9 )
:
9! '22 (:
9!
2
(:
4 "
% .
&+' 1 (&; +2
&+' 1 (&< +2
&+' 1 (&1 +2
0 . . .
2.
+2
( ' .
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
$
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
"
&
4 "
5
' 1&; +2 +
' 1&; +2
' 1&; +2=!
4 "
2
' 1&< +2 +
' 1&< +2
' 1&< +2=!
4 "
4
' 1&1 +2 +
' 1&1 +2
' 1&1 +2=!
&
&
&
'
( (
+1' (&
) 1' (&
1' (
'
,' (
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
6 %
#%
*7
!
"#
(
4'
'
"
&
,
(
&
) 1' (&
5
+6
!1
!
(
&
!1 22 (
'
(
&
) 1' (&
# .
)5!,* '
!
'
&
+1' (
) 1' ("
&
) 1' (
&
7
*
2&' (
&
7
2&
"
# ,
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
%
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
> ?
*. 2 >*?
2 '
2
"
"#
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
" 0$ #$& ./ 6 .//2 34&3/
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& -./// (' $ +'
"
$% "
$! + #$ * ($ "+-
!" $0
'(,
+ #
#$& .1 2 .//2 34&15,
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
"
%&
&
''
)
'
)
& '
& '
%& '
%&
'
''
(
)*
& &
+ %
'
, -% . /0 1
4
(
4
!
&
4
(
'
2 +
'
24+
3 4 (
&
41
#15 4
'
6 2'
3 &
'
&
&
3
' )*
.
&
" 8
2
" 89
2
"! 8 %
2
"# 8 9 6 29'
"/ 8 " 8 $; 29
' ).
& $-%$ 3
' ).
& $-%$ 3
&
: 0 $-%$ 3
& $-%$ 3
6
%
.
''
.)
& <3
& 6
+,-7
= 7
7(
&
&
'
"
"
+
#
"
'
&
%& '
>
)
"
>7 ;
( 6
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
"
!
+'
+ %
).
?
& ' ?
( 7
2 @' ?
&
@;;;
'3
+ %
()
! 9
+ %
). + %
# 4& : &
/
&
?
:
'
2)
& ( ;D
' ) '' (
0
B
& 6 A
& ( 7
C>
)
&
3
D 2 @( @'
'& . & &
'
3
4& : & &

7(
'
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
&
& '
' &
4
"
&
' &
2 ''
& ( ;D
4 ' )
'
E 9
&
''
3 ; 4& : & &

D2 @
@;;;
3
7(
(
'& . & &
'
&
'
7(
&
+
&
& &
%&
1
'
& '
'
() '
& '
!3
D7(
'
&
'
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
"
"
9
%&
#
+
()
( 7
$!%#
&'(&)
&
'%
#
'
!# 3
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
"
$5 9 +3
6 7
637
%&
8,
0
6
4
5 %
0 %F
! "
#$% ! #$& '
)#* +,!$
%$& - + ./((0((1
$2
)3*
, #
#$& (/ (4 .((1 0-&./* " 2$
#$& .4 00 .((. 00&05
"
!
!
"# $ !
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
!
"
!
&
&
&
*&+&
'
) &
) &
(
,
,
,%
)
+
'(
(
..#
,-
%
,
)
+ )+& +& -
- - )+ '
++'0
) &
( # *
# *(
1 & 2 3&
$
4 - &
&
&
&
5& &
&
& *' 6
7
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
.& &
4 '
1 &
&
&
)
3&
/0
"
& &6
)' 6&
"& & 3&

6& <= 6 6& &
&
&-
- - 1 3 +& 8 3
+ & 6& )
&
6&
6&
4 & 4 6?
++'
1
3
&
: 6&
$
6& &
&
6&
&
& &
'
89 :
+9+ 39 - &
& 6& 3 ( -& &5& '
';
- 6&
)
) &
1? +& & =
- -)
> 6&
) & = 46 6
++' &&- &: 6& &&&
#
6& < ) @& ) )& &
)
+ 6 ) & 3' 6 ) &
++ 4 6
&
'
1 2
"& & 3&
@& #
& -& + A + 6
-- & >
%
#
3 %
((
%
%
&++ 6&
- - 5&
=- B 6 &
&++ 6&
- - 5&
=- B 6 &
& &++' &5& '
& ) @&
5&)
&
5&
>
@ 5&
>
* 5&
>
*
)& &
&>
%
$&+ 4 6& +
6& &C = 46 6 6 +- 3& &- &-> 6&'
3&
@& (4 - 4
D 6 & 6&
&
6& &C = +' 6&
&
5&
&
1 & - 5&
- 5& ) &
& +
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
&-
112
&3 " 4
&C ( +-&
) +&
&
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
%
&# 6 *7118
&
$&+ 4 +
) &+ )
&
'(
6&
) &
= 46 6
&+
&-
+ 3 +
&
- &&- &-
&
++ ++ 4
&
4 < ) )& +'
'(
) &
6 5&
3& 6& <&- : 6& 4 & ) &+
& E
- )+ '&1EAF
6& 4 &
& E
% - )+ '&6& 2
1EAF
6& 4 &
& E
- )+ '&6& 2
1EAF
6& 4 &
& E
, - )+ '&6& 2
1EAF
6& 4 &
& E
- )+ '&6& 2
1EAF
6& 4 &
AC
3& CC G, 6
+
- )+ '&- 6& 2
1 1EAF
6& 4 &
2 3&
- 5& - )+ '&- ) &+ *&
2
1 1EA
6
3&
- 5& AC )+&>
&+ 6 % - 5&
2
1F% 1EAF%
2 3&
& - )+ '&- ) &+
*& 2
1 1EA
6
3&
&
2 3&
&C
& - )+ '&) &+ *& 2
1 1EA
6
3&
&C
&
6&
*&+&
6
1
6
1
6
1
6
1
6
1
'
&
&+ 6 4 )
3+ &
- )+ '
* ++&
6 & 6 5& +' & + 3
4 ) &
) &
"#$ %&' ?
46 6 &&- &!" )
!"
&# + &
"#$ %&'
&C
&>
!"
"#$ %&'
(
) & > 6
&
& 6 - 5&
&
6 & 6 5&
) &
-+
"#$ %&'
) &
&+&
!" ? )
&+-
)+&>
/ #
&
5&
6
) &
5&
6
) &
5& % 6
) &
+&
%
+ 3
&
&+ 3
4 + 3
&+ 3
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
!"
*%
&C
)+&>
) & > 6
&
) &
&+&
&+-
/ #
5&
6
) &
5&
6
) &
5& % 6
) &
!"
&# + &
&C
"#$ %&'
) & > 6
4 + 3
&+ 3
) &
&+&
&+-
)+&>
/ #
+&
5&
6
) &
5&
6
) &
5& % 6
) &
&
%
+&
&
&+ 3
&
3& - &
& 6
) &
&+ 3
4 + 3
&+ 3
<& ) &+ 4 < ) )& +'
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
,
&# 6 *7118
'
,
(
-
H) &
-
.-
+ )+&
' +
6
6 - )+ ' )
&&&
&&-&- ) &+
- - )+ '
3+&
+ # +
& & ++'
() &
+'
6 -&
5&
) &
* & - - )+ '(
) &
& / &+ &-0 & 6 6& ! &C )+&>
- 5& - & B 6 5& 4 & )&
& - )+ '&&+ &- 4 3& 6 --& 3' &+' &
) & *&+&
) &
+ 3 +) &
6 - 3+&
+ )+&
) &
& - )+ '&6& )
& 3&+ 4 + - 5&
) &
+ &+&
) &
' - B &&- - 3+& &5& '
) &
& 3' &
+,$# -*- . "/ &+,$# ( '

!"+0. !0120. ." 0. , 03' 2', '#
/+,/ +,/" - '!/
!"+0. 4!0120. ." /' 5 0$"2$" 60. &0# '!/
#+7 8- +" 0$"2$" "#$ 0# &' - ' 1 '.+., "/'" #+7 0 .9" /'7
"/ +. +!'"0#%!0120. ."-
,%
.-
+&
++'0
*&+&
3' + <
4 6
+&
6&
&
&5& ' ) )& '
+& +
& 6 &C
'6 ;
&
&
& 3+&- H) )& '

' 4
6 -&
- )+ ' 6 & & 3+&-(
) & 3& -& 6 --&
-&+& &
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
( # *
&+
4 -
+,$#
&- 3' -&

&
= && !
-*-
& )&
6& ) &
6 4
+'
&'$ " " 12 #'"$#
+ 2 ': 0& "#'. &0#1 # -
&
&4
++ )6 &
&-
&
?)6 & & )? !
&
?)6 & & )?
)% AJE ?)6 & & )?
- - ;/'
" 12 #'"$#
:3@&
107 "/
3&
++
+ 3& &
+- 6 4 + <&
6 & & )&

6
&
3&
) &-
1'#<
&
6& )6
5&-=
!
&
) &
&
+ 2 ': -
"& 5& ++ 6& /K C0 H & )&

!
& % 6&
)' &&-&) &
6&' & &&-&-
- -
& B
&->
)
+,$#
&
3& 6 4 = 6& & 3@&
+,$#
& )&
& - )+ '
-&+& &
6& -& + ) & &&

& & )&
& - )+ '
!0120. ." -
&-= 6& 4 & 6&'

6
) & K 6 -& +
& & )&
&
B
6& ) &=
&& $ 6 +7 - ) &
&& B &&-&-= ) &
&
+
3&
3&
&-
6& & & @

&- + <& !
&4
& ,
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
&
112
&3 " 4
6& ) @&
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
I
&# 6 *7118
+,$# - - '+. "#'. &0#1 # + 2 ': =+"/ 2/'

+',.0 "+! '"' '# # 107 -
" 12 #'"$#
'.
01
+,$# - - ;#0> !" =+"/ "=0 1'+. "#'. &0#1 # '. =+"/ 2/'
" 12 #'"$# -
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
,-
# *(
A5& -&
A5&
)+ '
+ 3 +) &
) & +&
) & A5&
)+ &-
&
-& & &5& = 46 6
&
) &
E*
+ ) & 3'
<&= 4 ++
3& 5 &4&+4 ' 3& )+ &4 <
+,$# ?-*- /+ +' 0, + $

&0# +"+., 7 ." &+.+"+0. - '!/ 7 ."
/'
+&& # ." " " ( '3
@ 7+!
A( @ 7+! .'1 A '. @ '#1
"A- $' : 0. : @ 7 '1 A 4&+ .
+"+.,- +" !0## !" 7+!
.'1 &0# '!/ @ 7 ." &+.+"+0.A !0120. ."( @ 7 ." 0110.A( 7 ."
#+7 *A( 7 ." #+7 A "!-
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
L
&# 6 *7118
.& & + &- ++ 6&

+ = 46 6 & &
&&-&- 46& &
) &+
&
&
-4 *
0110. 0.! 2" &0#
1 &2
3&
6&
&
&
&
&
&+ &
3&
&+ &
&+ &
&
&
H =
H
4 -
&
&
- ) &
&
-! +
"E
5& B +
+ < ' 6
7
$
4 - &
&
4 -
I
L
6& 3+& 3&+ 4

3&
H
3& L
5
&
& & 5&- 3'

6
) &
& -& +&3&
- &
#+7 -
- - 5& &+&
&
1 &L
((
L
L
L
L%
#
&+ + < 4 - 4
5& &+&
4 &&
& &+&
4 -
&+
K 5&*&+K "& &
&*&+K -
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
6-
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
&
&
((
#
&+ + < & 4 4 -
&+1 <K K %
,
I
L
%
,
%
,
I
L
%
,
%
G
%
,
)
* K "E- K "E- K "E
"E
&
"E
+ &
"E+ &
"E) 4&
" - K " - K " %- K " - K " ,- K " - K " I- K " - K " L- K " - K " - K " - K & " - K & " - K & " %- K & " - K & " ,- K & " - K " &
K " &
K & " &
K 2
K - & ) C
K - & ) C
& & )
"4"4"4-
)& 4 ) &+
"E (% 4 "E ( 4 &
"E
3&
"E
&
"E
(5 + &
"E
(5 + &
"E
4&
&
&
& %&
& ,&
& I&
& L&
&
&
AC
&
AC
&
AC
& %AC
&
AC
& ,AC
&
&4 &4 AC
&4 &
&
3&
CK & )&
&
CK & )&
&
&
& & )&
&
)E
)E
)E
& K & K & K -
E & )
& )
K & )
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
<K
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
5&
&
&
((
7
2
"
"
.
,
I
$&
$&
6
6
*
%
,
%
%
%
%%
%
%,
%
%I
%
%L
%
%
%
% %
%
% ,
%
,
I
L
%
,
,
,
,
,%
,
,,
,
'
+
++-
& - 5&
3&
5&
6
5&
- '
5& 6
+
& )&
&
5& ++
& )&
&
5& ++
& )&
&
5& 3&
& )&
& (A 5& 3&
& )&
& 2 (A 5& 6
&
& )&
&
5& 6
&
& )&
&
5&
4 5& 4 &
4 5& )&&+5 + &
5& + +5 + &
5&
&
+5 + &
5& 5 + &
+5 + &
5&
+
4 5&
+
4 5&
+
4 -%
5&
+4 5&
+4 5&
+4 -%
5&
+4 5&
&
& & 4
5&
+
4 5&
+
4 5&
+
4 -%
5&
+4 5&
+4 5&
+4 -%
5&
+4 5&
&
& & 4
5& % +
4 5& % +
4 5& % +
4 -%
5& %
+4 5& %
+4 5& %
+4 -%
5& %
+4 5& % &
& & 4
5&
+
4 5&
+
4 5&
+
4 -%
5&
+4 5&
+4 5&
+4 -%
5&
+4 5&
&
& & 4
5& , +
4 5& , +
4 5& , +
4 -%
&
&
K
K
*)&&1 &
+ &
+
K
+
K
+
K
+K
+K
+K
+K
&
+
K
+
K
+
K
+K
+K
+K
+K
&
% +
K
% +
K
% +
K
% +K
% +K
% +K
% +K
% &
+
K
+
K
+
K
+K
+K
+K
+K
&
, +
K
, +
K
, +
K
+
+
& )
& )2
& )
& )
-
-%
-%
K
-%
-%
K
-%
-%
K
-%
-%
K
-%
"
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "

)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
6
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
)
N
C
C
C
C
%$!
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
,I
,
,L
,
,
,
, %
,
, ,
%
,
I
L
& *' 6
, +K
, +K
, +K
, +K
, &
+
K
+
K
+
K
+K
+K
+K
+K
&
I +
K
I +
K
I +
K
I +K
I +K
I +K
I +K
I &
-%
K -%
-%
K -%
-%
K -
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
5&
,
,
,
,
,
+
+
+
+
&
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
&
I +
I +
I +
I
+
I
+
I
+
I
+
I &
4
4
4
4
-%
& & 4 4 4 -%
4 4 4 -%
4 & & 4 4 4 -%
4 4 4 -%
4 & & -
4 -
4 -
4 -
7
((
I
I
I
I%
I
I,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
+
+
+
+
+
+
& O&
&
6
& '
&.
&
&
& *& -
+
+
+
+
+
+
"
%$!
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "
)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
'&( / , 0!1
112
&3 " 4
+ '&
+
6
+- '
+6
+
&
+ & -
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
%
&# 6 *7118
&3-$-)
-
6 8
6*8
"
!
"
"
5&
--&+>
--&- A5& -&
+ )+& -
& + 4=
& 6 6=
) = AC
+)
H)
)- &
= ) &
+
& 3+&= & 3+&#-
,
I,
%# P
#
%$!
'&( / , 0!1
# P
%# P
3+&
"
%&' # %&( ")*+'& % ,) $% " "

)"+*%$ ) % -% ")%. ,-#&
'3"% ")*.
- %" %&( 0! 9 0119 2(:2. $ 3&" %&( 02 2 0112 /(0;
112
&3 " 4
<-
,
L,
&
)5
''- 5 - $% +*%-) $ ,)
50111
&# 6 *7118
"
!"
$
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
'
%
( $ ))
* +,
%
' *
%
! )
.(
%
! )/
% .(
%
* '
$ ))
1 %
1 %
/ $
1 %
-'
&
0
$
$ ))
#
'
#
0
#
-'
%
)
-4
! '
$ ))
%
!
'
)
&
7 +
" 8 /%(
(
%
%
)
#
#
#
%
( $ ))
0
0
0
2
2
3
3
5
%
%
&
%
&
%
&
( &
0
2
3
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
( &
( '
8 %
( &
( / (
%
()
&
%
/ (
%
&8 % 9 '
( ' : /
8 %
'
+ 9'
)
%9 & /
%
,( '
/
7$ ,(
% /
8 % /
'
% )
/ :
: /
) /
4
/
/ +
%9
&
! %
'
& )
%
( $ ))
& )
( '
/
/ ( '
( /
' *
))
: / ;-<
'
(
/
(> &
:
/ (
&/ ( '
6*
%
/
* 7!= . 8 % + :
9
'
$ )) ? /
/ &/ / (
/ / (
))
/
'
( $ ))
/
+,(
%
$6 *
7* +,(
' :( &
%
/ / (
))
/ / (
(
% 9 :/ /
(
)
/ ( '
( ))
(
> & ( 4 @$ )) A
)?
* +,
/
/
/ ( '
C .8 % /
/
))
/ (
/ :
/ : + : / / (
( +,(
%
( &
))
B /
(( '
.
.
.
.
(9 (9
: ( &9
( '
9'
&
(
&
(+
(
& )
&/
'
%
(( '
.
.
.
.
) : /%
: / (
)
)
+
:
(
!
.
.
.
) : /%
: / (
+
:
(
#
.
.
.
!
) : /%
: / (
+
(
)
(( '
& %
"
(
(( '
$
:
(
(
(( '
% & '
()
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
.
.
.
/
+,(
) : /%
: / (
+
%
:
(
(
(( '
))
)
) : ( & )
)
/ :
)
'
)
/
'
)
) : /%
: (
: / ( (
'
> 1 : / &/?
)
+ 8
>
$ ))
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
*+
.
'
)
.
.
.
.
.
'
) : /%
: / (
4
))
,
: ( & )
)
/ :
)
% / / &/
) /
: (
8 %
#
.
'
) : /%
:
: / ( (
))
,
!
.
.
.
.
% / / &/
.
.
.
.
-'
/
)
: (
(
%
>
/
9 !$ $,'
&
0
) : /%
: / (
+
))
: (
(
)
%
(
+
!
(
.(
% :
'
) % $ ))
&
' (
('
% +%
%> &
#? (
)
(
)
.%
( ) :/
)
% ( : / ( 4 $/ 8 ( +
'
@ ))
A+
"%
&@
A
(( : /
' :
)
9 :/ /
%
(
% ) !
)
(
% (: /
( @(
A .+
' - / :
'
)
& 4 / (
%
) ' % :
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
/ (
(
/
&
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
)/
% .(
/ (
)
#*
%> &
/
%9
/
&
' % )
&(
' (
' (
)
.(
% / (
%
) $ ))
.
% (: /& % 4
(
'
* '
/
'
9 /
' :
(: /
)
/ )
+ (
( :/
E: 8
E /
+%
& %8 % "
/
)) ( ( E: 8
E / (
%: /
8 %
/
& )) & /
8 ( +
/+
+
&9
$ ))
(1 2
))
(
+ :
/
9+
"
$ %
9 /
'
&
/ !$3
(
% @
>( ' ?
)
#
'( )
1
( /
$ ))
(
*$ %
/
(
& )
)
/ (
@( : A9 / /
A, 4
%
:
/
))
%
!
!
!#
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
1 %
$6 *
7-
$6 *
,8 %D *
C ,8 %D *
$6 *
!* *-
-$ -!*- ,8 %D
;-<
6*
+,(
'
; ,8 %D ;
-; - .8 %D ;
B; ,8 %D ;
;$ -!*- ,8 %D
+,(
6 ,8 %D ;
$6 *
'
'
'
* 7!= ,8 %D $/ &
* 7!= ,8 %D $/ &
-;6 ,8 %D ;
( '
( '
))
))
% + 8: (
: (
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
1 %
/ $
1 %
.
.+
/
/
( ' (
/
8 %
8 %
( ' (
8 %
/ !
8 %
%
& )) +
( $ ))
( '
8 %
.+
/ :
)
/ +
/ (
))
%,
&
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
$ ))
%
)
)1
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
-4
,1 *+
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
'
/1
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
$ ))
&
01 4
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
'
!
%
'
1!
/ ( '
*
*
/ :
&
(
'
/ (
'
'
'
%
&
(
'
( :
% :
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
&
1!
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
&
"1 !
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
7 +
&
7 +
)
+
' : (
& > &
$1 !
%
( &
+ ' : (
( &
(
' :9
: &
(
+ /
+
5? @ ' A / :
& > &
& 9
@
:
' , (
' A/
( &
&
+ && ( ' 9 :/ / / '
(; ( ' , ((
%
%
+
( &
?
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
(61 !
((1 !
17
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
" 8 /%(
( &
()1 !
% &
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
# -'
%
/
)
C
:
'
& (
%
%
) & (
( (
' (
( )+ / &
(
+
%
%
)
)
(,1
,
(
)
(
(
% (
!
))
9 :/ /
/
%
(C
%.
)(
% !
( ( ' :/ /
%
/ ' +
' !
(%
) &
)
+
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
(/1 '
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
'3"%",&
5
!
$
-
7 8
758
9"
/
'
! (
%,
4
( (
-' (
%
!$3
!$3
0
(
( -'
(( (
#
#
#
2
(
9
:(
(
%
0
20
!
#
#" !
#'( $ #') * &+
,#- ."$'& (') / . 01+220+2
'3 . 4 56++
,5-
"&#
#') 01 * 0++* 2*)++- % 3'
%
&
#') 0+ / 0++* 21)1/
1
1
1
1
1(3)
ABB
COMPONENT LIST
3BFA6803AT611
PROJECT:
STRUCTURE:
I.D.:
POSITIONS
TASNEE COPERION
EHKE
ACC1
ITEM
CODE
A10
SWITCH+WATCHDOG BOARD; NWIO-01
64168533
ABB
A11
A12.1
A12.2
AC800 CONTROLLER; PM861AK01

D-BUS MODULE; CI858K01
PROFIBUS ADAPTER; CI854AK01
CEX-BUS TERMINATOR; TB850
MODULEBUS CABLE TK801V006
TERMINAL UNIT; TB805
TERMINAL UNIT; TB806
MODULEBUS TERMINATOR; TB807
OPTICAL CABLE (WATCHDOG-AC800M)
3BSE018157R1
3BSE018135R1
3BSE030220R1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB Sweden
ABB
Norelco
ABB
6
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
ABB
ABB
ABB
ABB
ABB
ABB
ABB
ABB
HIMA
A14
PANEL; G2000 24VDC
A121...A123,A141,A151,A161
A131, A132
A121... A123
A131, A132
A141
A151
A161
TERMINAL UNIT; TU830V1

TERMINAL UNIT; TU831V1
DIGITAL INPUT 2x8CH; DI810
DIGITAL OUTPUT 8x1CH; DO820
ANALOG INPUT 1x8CH; AI830
ANALOG OUTPUT 1x8CH; A0810
ANALOG INPUT 1x8CH; AI810
MODULEBUS TERMINATOR; TB807
A50, A51
SAFETY RELAY H 4135 24VDC
3BSC950089R2
3BSE008534R1
3BSE008536R1
3BSE008538R1
3BSE013234R1
3BSE013235R1
3BSE008508R1
3BSE008514R1
3BSE008518R1
3BSE008522R1
3BSE008516R1
3BSE008538R1
07.02.2007
Rev. 2
QUANTITY
MANUFACTURER
2(3)
ABB
COMPONENT LIST
3BFA6803AT611
PROJECT:
STRUCTURE:
I.D.:
POSITIONS
TASNEE COPERION
EHKE
ACC1
ITEM
CODE
G11
POWER SUPPLY; 100-240VAC/24VDC;

SD822 230/24C-5A
POWER SUPPLY; 200-240VAC/24VDC;
SD823 230/24C-10A
ABB
ABB
F10
F11
F12-F13
F14
MCB S262 2X10A/C 6KA,STO

1
1
2
1
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
F21

AUXILIARY CONTACT S2-H20
1
3
ABB STOTZ
ABB
F21
F22, F24
F23

1
2
1
5
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
ABB
F100
F101.1, F101.2
FAULT CURRENT SWITCH; DFI 2x40A/30mA

DIN-SOCKET SUKO 651165
2
2
AEG
GENERAL ELECTRIC
F111, F113, F115

F112
F114

3
1
1
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
ABB STOTZ
G12
07.02.2007
Rev. 2
QUANTITY
MANUFACTURER
3(3)
ABB
COMPONENT LIST
PROJECT:
STRUCTURE:
I.D.:
POSITIONS
TASNEE COPERION
EHKE
ACC1
ITEM
F41
PROTECTION SWITCH MS450-45 36-45A

AUXILIARY CONTACT MS450 HK4-11
K41
3BFA6803AT611
CODE
QUANTITY
5
MANUFACTURER
ABB
1
1
ABB
ABB
CONTACTOR A50-30-11 22KW 1s+1a,ABB
ABB
Q10
LOAD SWITCH OT63E3,ABB

AUXILIARY CONTACT(1no),ABB
1
1
ABB
ABB
Q141
FUSE SWITCH 3-P,OS125D12,ABB

AUXILIARY CONTACT OA1G10(1no),ABB
AUXILIARY CONTACT OA3G01(1nc),ABB
NH-FUSE GL500V 00-100A
1
1
1
3
ABB
ABB
ABB
ETI
TERMINAL WPE 4 101010 YELLOW/GREEN

TERMINAL WPE10 101030 YELLOW/GREEN
TERMINAL WPE16 101040 YELLOW/GREEN
TERMINAL WDU2.5 102000
TERMINAL WDU4 102010
TERMINAL WDU10 102030
TERMINAL WDU16
1SA M45 0000 R1006
07.02.2007
Rev. 2
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
WEIDMULLER
! "#
"
$ %
&
'
!
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
$ '
+$
'
+$
!
$ ' +$ +$
'
+$ +$
" #
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
!( (
(-..
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
(
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
&
7
2
=
5
3
8
4.
44
41
47
42
4=
45
4
9
+-4.
)!"$
"
2>1.
"
(( ;
<
&
4
1
7
2
=
5
3
-
2>1.
? .>47.. 4@
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
'& &
'
'
:
%(
:
7
2
%
%
.
.
.
3
-
4
1
7
2
=
5
3
-
'-1.
'
<
<
(
:
>%
>#
>*
>
>+
?
: ("5... %
"
+
: ("5... %
"
%
)@6@
%
)@6@
(
&
>%
>#
>+
?
: ("5... %
"
<&
.7<
?
.2<
A 42.
A 4=.
.3<
'-1.
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
,
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
'& &
4
1
7
2
=
5
3
-
2>1.
2>1.
2>1.
%
%
%
& 2>1.
& 2>1.
& 2>1.
? .>47.. 4@
? .>41.B
? .>4..3
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
*
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
" #
$
$
" -
. $
''
$
$
'/
()
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *' "#
45&22, " 6$ #$& 41 7 1..3 47&28
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (-.. # " $$ (' $ +'
*
/
"
(
+ $ + #$ * ($ "+0
!" '(,
+ #
#$& 12 3 1..3
ControlIT
AC 800M Controller Hardware
Hardware and Operation
Version 1.1
Users Guide
ControlIT
$&0&RQWUROOHU+DUGZDUH
Hardware and Operation
Users Guide
3BSE 019 193R201
127,&(
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
ABB Automation Products AB. ABB Automation Products AB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this document.
In no event shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages
of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for
incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB Automation Products ABs written
permission, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
&(0$5.,1*
This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
75$'(0$5.6
IndustrialIT,
ControlIT and
OperateIT
are registered trademarks of ABB Ltd, Switzerland.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SamDisk Corporation, U.S.A.

Foundation Fieldbus is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation, U.S.A.
Modbus is a registered trademark of Gould Electronics Inc., U.S.A.
PROFIBUS-DP is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International (P.I.).
Siemens and all Siemens-products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Siemens AG, Germany.
Copyright ABB Automation Products AB 2001.
3BSE 019 193R201
$&0&RQWUROOHU+DUGZDUH8VHUV*XLGH
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
7$%/(2)&217(176
&KDSWHU,QWURGXFWLRQ
1.1
About This Book ....................................................................................................1
1.2
Product Overview...................................................................................................4
1.2.1
Product Scope......................................................................................15
1.2.2
AC 800M Controller - Key Features..................................................15
1.3
Prerequisites and Requirements ...........................................................................16
1.4
Related Documentation and Media ......................................................................17
1.5
Conventions..........................................................................................................19
1.6
Terminology .........................................................................................................20
&KDSWHU,QVWDOODWLRQ
2.1
Site Planning ........................................................................................................23

2.1.1
Site Selection and Building Requirements..........................................23
2.1.2
Cables ..................................................................................................25
2.1.3
Power Supply ......................................................................................26
2.1.4
Enclosures ...........................................................................................28
2.2
Mounting of AC 800M Modules on DIN-rail......................................................29
2.3
Installing the Processor Module PM860/TP830 ..................................................36
2.4
Installing the Interface for PROFIBUS-DP, CI851/TP851 ..................................41
2.5
Installing the Interface for FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1,

CI852/TP852 ........................................................................................................43
2.6
Installation of Interface for RS232-C, CI853/TP853 ...........................................45
2.7
Installation of CEX-bus........................................................................................46
2.8
Installation of Power Supply SD82x....................................................................47
2.9
Installing the Mains Breaker Unit ........................................................................48
2.10
Installation of Voting Device SS822 ....................................................................52
2.11
Installation of External Battery Module SB821...................................................53
2.12
Installation of I/O Modules ..................................................................................53
2.13
Installation in ABB Cabinets ...............................................................................54
2.14
Mounting Dimensions ..........................................................................................58
3BSE 019 193R201
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
&217(176FRQWLQXHG
&KDSWHU&RQILJXUDWLRQ
3.1
General Information............................................................................................. 61
3.2
Connection of the Control Builder M .................................................................. 61
3.3
Connection to a Control Network ........................................................................ 62
3.4
Communication Possibilities ............................................................................... 63
3.5
I/O Systems.......................................................................................................... 64
3.6
Power Supply System .......................................................................................... 66

3.6.1
Powering Modules in Cabinet............................................................. 67
3.6.2
Powering Field Equipment outside Cabinet ....................................... 68
3.6.3
Powering from External +24 V d.c. Source........................................ 69
&KDSWHU2SHUDWLRQ
4.1
AC 800M Controller (PM860) ............................................................................ 73
4.2
Start-up................................................................................................................. 75
4.3
Start Modes .......................................................................................................... 76
4.4
Verification of Satisfactory AC 800M Operation ................................................ 76
&KDSWHU0DLQWHQDQFH
ii
5.1
Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule ..................................................... 79
5.2
Changing the Battery ........................................................................................... 80
5.3
Module Change On-Line ..................................................................................... 86
5.4
Corrective Maintenance Procedures .................................................................... 86
5.5
Fault Finding Procedures ..................................................................................... 88

5.5.1
Fault Finding the PM860 Processor Module ...................................... 88
5.5.2
Fault Finding the Internal Battery / SB821 External Battery ............. 89
5.5.3
Fault Finding the PROFIBUS-DP - CI851 ......................................... 89
5.5.4
Fault Finding the FOUNDATION Fieldbus - CI852 .......................... 90
5.5.5
Fault Finding the On-board RS232-C Channels - CI853 ................... 93
3BSE 019 193R201
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
&217(176FRQWLQXHG
$SSHQGL[$6DIHW\,QVWUXFWLRQV
A.1
General .................................................................................................................95
A.2
Warnings and Information Symbols in the Text Margin ......................................95
A.3
Personnel and Process Safety...............................................................................95
A.4
Machine Safety.....................................................................................................97
A.4.1
Before replacing I/O Modules.............................................................97
A.4.2
Maintenance ........................................................................................97
A.4.3
Operating Environment .......................................................................98
$SSHQGL[%+DUGZDUH0RGXOHV
B.1
PM856/PM860 and TP830 - Processor Module ..................................................99
B.2
CI851 and TP851 - PROFIBUS-DP Interface ...................................................105
B.3
CI852 and TP852 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Interface ..............................109
B.4
CI853 and TP853 - RS232-C Interface ..............................................................113
B.5
Power Supply Modules - Types SD821, SD822 and SD823 .............................117
B.6
SS822 Voting Unit - (for Redundant Power Supply) .........................................125
B.7
TC562 Modem Module - (Westermo MD-12DC) .............................................127
B.8
SB821 External Battery - AC 800M Memory Back-up.....................................129
B.9
DIN Rail - TS 35/7.5 ..........................................................................................130
B.10 Cabinets..............................................................................................................130
B.11 Miscellaneous Equipment ..................................................................................137
B.11.1
TB850 Terminator for CEX-bus (Male)............................................137
B.11.2
TB851 Terminator for CEX-bus (Female) ........................................138
B.11.3
CEX-bus Extension Cable - Type TK850 .........................................139
B.11.4
Tool Cable - Type TK212..................................................................139
B.11.5
Al-Profile Support For DIN Rail.......................................................140
$SSHQGL[&3RZHU&RQVXPSWLRQ
C.1
General ...............................................................................................................141
C.2
Current Consumption and Power Dissipation....................................................142
3BSE 019 193R201
iii
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
&217(176FRQWLQXHG
$SSHQGL['5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV
D.1
Recommended Components .............................................................................. 145
$SSHQGL[('LUHFWLYH&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
E.1
Electro-magnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 149
E.2
Low-Voltage Directive (LVD) ........................................................................... 149
$SSHQGL[)(QYLURQPHQWDO'DWD
F.1
Environmental Data for Automation Products within ABB .............................. 151

F.1.1
Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions ....................... 152

F.1.1.1
iv
Industrial Environment............................................... 152
F.1.2
CE Compliance ................................................................................. 154
F.1.3
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions ......... 155
F.1.4
Installation Requirements ................................................................. 157
F.1.5
The Laying of Field Cables .............................................................. 157
F.1.6
Types of Field Cables........................................................................ 157
F.1.7
Lightning Strike Protection............................................................... 158
F.1.8
Inductive Load Suppression.............................................................. 158
F.1.9
Environmental Friendly Product Design .......................................... 158
3BSE 019 193R201
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
,//8675$7,216
Figure 1-1.
Example of an AC 800M Controller with a S800 I/O Module...................5
Figure 1-2.
PM856/860 - General View ........................................................................6
Figure 1-3.
PM860/TP830 Assembly - General View ..................................................8
Figure 1-4.
PM860 - Functional Block Diagram...........................................................9
Figure 1-5.
Example of AC 800M/S800 I/O Interconnection .....................................11
Figure 1-6.
PM860 Connectors for Optical Modulebus ..............................................12
Figure 1-7.
Ethernet Address - Identification Label....................................................14
Figure 2-1.
Baseplate Locking Device ........................................................................31
Figure 2-2.
DIN-Rail Mounting of AC 800M/S800 I/O Module ................................31
Figure 2-3.
AC 800M Controller - Side View .............................................................32
Figure 2-4.
Separating the Baseplates .........................................................................33
Figure 2-5.
Module Baseplate - Alpha Code Lock Arrangement................................35
Figure 2-6.
Supervision Signals from SS822 ..............................................................37
Figure 2-7.
Installation of Mains Breaker Assembly ..................................................49
Figure 2-8.
TB850 Terminator for CEX-bus (male)....................................................50
Figure 2-9.
TB851 Terminator for CEX-bus (female).................................................51
Figure 2-10. SS822 - Used in Redundant SD821 Configuration ..................................52

Figure 2-11. Wall Cabinet - Single Power Supply Arrangement ..................................54
Figure 2-12. Wall Cabinet - Dual Power Supply (Local/Field) Arrangement...............55
Figure 2-13. Floor Mounted Cabinet (Horizontal Module Arrangement).....................56
Figure 2-14. Floor Mounted Cabinet - (Vertical Module Arrangement) .......................57
Figure 2-15. Ventilation Requirements - Minimum Mounting Dimensions .................58
Figure 2-16. PM860 - Location of Battery Isolator Tag ................................................59
Figure 3-1.
Example of AC 800M Controllers Connected to a Control Network.......62
Figure 3-2.
Electrical and Optical Modulebus Configuration .....................................65
Figure 3-3.
Power Supply Options for AC 800M Modules ........................................70
Figure 3-4.
Powering Field Equipments......................................................................71
Figure 5-1.
PM860 - Right-hand Cover Removal .......................................................81
Figure 5-2.
PM860 - Internal Battery Location ...........................................................82
Figure 5-3.
SB821 External Battery Module - Cover Removed .................................85
Figure B-1.
PM860/TP830 ...........................................................................................99
3BSE 019 193R201
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
Figure B-2.
Block Diagram - CI851 .......................................................................... 107
Figure B-3.
Block Diagram - CI852 .......................................................................... 110
Figure B-4.
Block Diagram - CI853 .......................................................................... 114
Figure B-5.
SD821 Connections for 2.5 A Power Supply ......................................... 118
Figure B-6.
SD822 Connections for 5 A Power Supply ............................................ 119
Figure B-7.
SD823 Connections for 10 A Power Supply .......................................... 120
Figure B-8.
PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 - Block Diagram ........................................ 121
Figure B-9.
SS822 Voting Unit Connections ............................................................. 125
Figure B-10. TC562 (MD-12DC) Modem................................................................... 127

Figure B-11. DIN Rail TS 35/7.5 - Dimensions ......................................................... 130
Figure B-12. RM550 Floor Mounted Cabinet - Dimensions ....................................... 132
Figure B-13. RE820 Wall Mounted Cabinet - Dimensions ......................................... 134
Figure B-14. RE820 Mounting holes........................................................................... 135
Figure B-15. TB850 Terminator for CEX (male) ........................................................ 137
Figure B-16. TB851 Terminator for CEX (female) ..................................................... 138
Figure B-17. Cable characteristics ............................................................................... 139
Figure B-18. Al-Profile for DIN Rail Support............................................................. 140
vi
3BSE 019 193R201
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
7$%/(6
Table 1-1.
AC 800M Release History ........................................................................16
Table 1-2.
Related Documentation.............................................................................17
Table 1-3.
Related Media ...........................................................................................19
Table 1-4.
Terminology ..............................................................................................20
Table 2-1.
External Mains Supply - Fuse Rating .......................................................27
Table 2-2.
Factory Pre-set Alpha Codes ....................................................................34
Table 2-3.
TP830 CN1 and CN2 Connections ...........................................................39
Table 2-4.
TP830 COM3 Connections.......................................................................39
Table 2-5.
TP830 COM4 Connections.......................................................................40
Table 2-6.
CI851 - PROFIBUS-DP Connector ..........................................................42
Table 2-7.
CI852 and TP852 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Connector...........................43
Table 2-8.
CI853 RS23-C Interface - COM1 and COM2 Connectors.......................45
Table 3-1.
Interfaces Available on the CEX-bus........................................................64
Table 4-1.
PM860 - LED Indications.........................................................................73
Table 4-2.
PM860 - Switches and Push buttons.........................................................74
Table 4-3.
PM860/TP830 - Connectors .....................................................................75
Table 4-4.
AC 800M Controller - Verification of Satisfactory System Operation ....77
Table 5-1.
Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule ..........................................79
Table 5-2.
PM860 - Fault Finding Procedure ............................................................88
Table 5-3.
Internal / SB821 External Battery - Fault Finding....................................89
Table 5-4.
PROFIBUS-DP CI851 - Fault Finding .....................................................89
Table 5-5.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus CI852 - Fault Finding ......................................90
Table 5-6.
On-board RS232-C Channels CI853 - Fault Finding ...............................93
Table B-1.
Back-up times .........................................................................................102
Table B-2.
CI851 - PROFIBUS-DP LED Indicators................................................106
Table B-3.
CI851 PROFIBUS-DP Interface Specifications .....................................108
Table B-4.
CI852 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 - LED Indications ......................... 111
Table B-5.
CI852 Foundation Fieldbus Interface Specifications.............................. 111
Table B-6.
CI853 RS232-C - LED Indications.........................................................115
Table B-7.
CI853 - RS232-C Communication Interface Specifications...................115
Table B-8.
Power Supply Units - Fuses and Protective Devices ..............................122
3BSE 019 193R201
vii
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
Table B-9.
PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 - Technical Data......................................... 123
Table B-10. PSUs SD821, 822 and 823 - Mounting Dimensions ............................. 124
Table B-11.
SS822 Voting Unit - Supervision Data ................................................... 126
Table B-12. SS822 - Technical Data and Mounting Dimensions............................... 126

Table B-13. TC562 - Technical Data.......................................................................... 128
Table B-14. Transfer Distance (Cable 0.3mm2/42 pF/m) .......................................... 128
Table B-15. RM550 Floor Mounted Cabinet - Technical Data .................................. 131
Table B-16. RE820 Wall Mounted Cabinet - Technical Data .................................... 133
viii
Table C-1.
AC 800M Mounted in ABB Cabinet - Fuse Requirements.................... 141
Table C-2.
Typical Current Consumption and Power Dissipation Data for

AC 800M Modules ................................................................................. 142
Table C-3.
PM860 Current Supply to CEX-bus and Modulebus ............................. 142
Table D-1.
Recommended Components - PROFIBUS-DP ...................................... 145
Table D-2.
Recommended Components - FOUNDATION Fieldbus ....................... 145
Table D-3.
Recommended Components for Control Networks ............................... 146
Table D-4.
Recommended Components - Miscellaneous ........................................ 147
Table D-5.
Recommended Components - Process Cables ....................................... 148
Table F-1.
Industrial Environment ........................................................................... 152
Table F-2.
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions............... 155
3BSE 019 193R201
AC 800M Controller Hardware Users Guide

Section 1.1 About This Book
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 About This Book

This book describes the hardware platform AC 800M, together with the controllers
and associated modules that may be connected to the hardware platform in order for
it to become the AC 800M Controller. It also provides detailed descriptions on how
to install, configure, operate and perform the necessary maintenance on all
the equipment that make up the AC 800M Controller.
For information about the controller software, please refer to the manual
$& 0&&RQWURO6RIWZDUHDQG7RROVSee Section 1.4, Related Documentation
and Media.
AC 800M contains two CPU modules PM856 and PM860. The hardware data and
functionality for these modules are the same but running performance are different.
In this manual RQO\30LVPHQWLRQHG in text, figures and tables except for the
first part of Chapter 1.2 3URGXFW2YHUYLHZ$&0*HQHUDO and for
Appendix B.1
How to Use This Book
Chapter 1, Introduction
Provides an overview of the hardware platform AC 800M together with information
on related documents. This chapter also provides a list of product versions,
conventions, and a short glossary of related terms & acronyms.
3BSE 019 193R201

Chapter 2, Installation
A guide to the various installation activities such as:
Planning the installation (including site selection)
Building requirements
Environmental considerations concerning hazardous locations
Grounding requirements
Mounting dimensions.
Chapter 3, Configuration
Provides information on the hardware configuration for the AC 800M Controller.
Chapter 4, Operation
Includes information on start-up and shut-down procedures together with
verification procedures for the AC 800M Controller.
Chapter 5, Maintenance
Contains information relating to the AC 800M maintenance requirements.
It is intended to provide system and module fault-finding procedures together with
module specific maintenance procedures. The information contained in this chapter
is aimed at the Maintenance/Service Engineer level.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.1 About This Book
Appendix A through Appendix F.

These appendices provide important information relating to:
Safety Instructions
Module/Component Technical Data Sheets
Current Consumption/Heat Dissipation
Commercially Available Components
EMC/LVD Directives.
Information relating to Load Calculation, Memory Calculation, Halt Codes, System

Messages can be found in the Control Software documentation.
Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Symbols
This publication includes :DUQLQJ, &DXWLRQ, and ,QIRUPDWLRQ symbols where

appropriate to draw the readers attention to safety-related or other important
information. It also includes a symbol for 7LSV to provide useful hints to the reader.
The symbols should be interpreted as follows:
Warning indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in SHUVRQDOLQMXU\.
Caution indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in HTXLSPHQWRU
SURSHUW\GDPDJH.
Information alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
Tip indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use a
certain function.
3BSE 019 193R201

Although :DUQLQJ hazards are related to personal injury, and &DXWLRQ hazards are
associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that
operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, it is
important to comply fully with all :DUQLQJ and &DXWLRQ notices.
1.2 Product Overview

AC 800M - General
AC 800M can be defined as a hardware platform to which may be connected

individual hardware modules that, depending on the specific module configuration
and operating system selected, can be programmed to perform multiple functions.
Once configured, the AC 800M hardware platform effectively becomes
the AC 800M Controller.
The hardware modules which form the AC 800M Controller are:
Processor module
CPU Units: PM856/PM860
Baseplate: TP830
Communication interfaces modules for different protocols (CI851/852/853)
Power supply modules, providing various power output level

(SD821/822/823)
Battery back-up modules (SB821).
When equipped with the specified Control Software, the AC 800M Controller will
act either as a stand-alone process controller, or as a controller performing local
control tasks in a control network consisting of many interconnected controllers,
operator stations and servers.
To the AC 800M Controller various I/O systems can be connected either directly
(S800 I/O) or via Profibus-DP.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.2 Product Overview
The AC 800M is delivered without Control Software. To provide the controller

with Control Software it will first be necessary to load the firmware and create
the application separately by using the Control M Builder engineering tool.
The AC 800M Controller consists of a selection of modules mounted on horizontal
DIN rails, which can if required, be housed within an enclosure. The majority of
modules consist of a base mounting plate with a removable cover which are
attached to each other by means of screws. The baseplate, which is always mounted
on the DIN rail, carries the majority of the connections to the processor, power
supplies and communication interfaces, as well as those to the external buses and
systems.
The AC 800M Controller is designed to be a cost-effective, low maintenance
solution for applications ranging from small Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
to advanced Distributed Control systems (DCS) control applications.
AC 800M
Communication
interface
I/O System
Processor
module
S800 I/O
module
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDQ$&0&RQWUROOHUZLWKD6,20RGXOH
3BSE 019 193R201

LED
Status
Indicators
Battery
Isolator Tag
INIT
Push button
Rx/Tx
Optic Ports
Tx/RX
Status
Indicators
External Battery
Supply Socket
Power Supply
and
Supervision Signal
Socket (SS822)
CN1/CN2
Ports
DIN-rail
Locking Device
COM3/COM4
Ports
)LJXUH 30*HQHUDO9LHZ
3BSE 019 193R201

PM860/TP830 Processor Module - General
Physically, the PM860/TP830 Processor Module consists of two basic parts:
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Module (PM860), with CPU and Power Supply
boards
Baseplate (TP830), housing the module termination board
Refer to Figure 1-4. PM860- Functional Block Diagram. The CPU board contains
the MPC860 CPU, 8 Mbyte RAM, 2 Mbyte Flash PROM, controllers for all built-in
communication interfaces, real-time clock, LED indicators, INIT push button and
a CompactFlash interface.
The main function of the power supply board is to generate an isolated, short circuit
proof +5V and +3.3V supplies for the PM860 and I/O modules. The board also
contains opto-isolated RS232-C drivers/receivers for the service port together with a
back-up battery holder for memory/real time clock, (RTC).
The termination board, housed in the TP830 Baseplate, is where the majority of
the external connections takes place. It is grounded to the DIN-rail by means of
the metallic components of the housing. The termination board is provided with
screw terminals for power supply and redundant power supply monitoring,
RJ45 connectors for the control network and serial port, a connector for the service
port, the electrical Modulebus and the CEX-Bus.
All modules on the CEX-bus and the electrical Modulebus are powered by
the 24 V d.c. connected to the TP830 Baseplate.
It is possible to connect a S800 I/O cluster directly to the Modulebus plug located on
the right hand side of the TP830 Baseplate. The optical Modulebus port on the CPU
module allows for connection of up to seven additional S800 I/O clusters. A cluster
may consist of up to 12 x S800 I/O modules giving a total of 96 x S800 I/O
modules. S800 I/O modules can also be connected to the AC 800M Controller via
PROFIBUS-DP.
The processor module has a communication expansion bus connector located on
the left hand side of the TP830 Baseplate. This CEX-bus provides for extending
the on-board communication ports with additional communication modules.
PROFIBUS-DP, FOUNDATION Fieldbus and dual RS232-C ports are some
examples of module types available for connection to the CEX-bus.
3BSE 019 193R201

CPU Module
PM860
Cover Release Screw
Cover
Assembly
CEX-bus
Socket
Modulebus Socket
Fuses
CEX-bus/Modulebus
Baseplate
TP830
)LJXUH 3073$VVHPEO\*HQHUDO9LHZ
3BSE 019 193R201
Power
d.c.
+3.3V d.c.
System and
user mem.
Optical
CEX-bus
+5V d.c.
Electrical

Modulebus
controller
CEX-bus
controller
Battery
External
battery
+BV
(+3.3V)
CompactFlash
CPU
Communication
controllers
ID
prom
INIT
Logic
Ethernet
Ethernet
RS232
RS232
B
R
CN1
4
CN2
COM3
COM4
)LJXUH 30)XQFWLRQDO%ORFN'LDJUDP
3BSE 019 193R201

Figure 1-5 provides examples of the various ways to connect the S800 I/O modules.
It can be seen, by reference to the top right area of Figure 1-5, that connected to
the electrical Modulebus of a AC 800M Controller is 1 cluster (or group) of
modules, (maximum number of modules per cluster is 12). However, to the optical
Modulebus, a further 7 clusters, each cluster comprising of up to 12 modules, can be
added, thus achieving a total count of 96 modules per AC 800M Controller when
using only the Modulebus.
However, to the left on Figure 1-5, can be seen a PROFIBUS-DP segment, which
allows for a large increase in the numbers of modules connected to each AC 800M
Controller. Here the segment is shown as having a Fieldbus Communications
Interface (FCI) unit (type CI830), connected to the PROFIBUS-DP network.
The use of FCI modules allows the selection of modules from several I/O families.
The expansion modules available removes any restrictions on the number of I/O that
can be connected, thereby creating the situation that the upper limit could possibly
be in the several hundreds of thousands.
For further examples please refer to the relevant documentation for respective
I/O system.
10
3BSE 019 193R201

Max 6 Modules
Max 12 Modules per Cluster
C1851
C1853
PROFIBUS-DP FOUNDATION
Fieldbus H1
PM860
CPU
DI810
AI810
DO810
Electrical Modulebus Cluster

See
Note 2
Optical
TB820
1 Segment of
PROFIBUS-DP
DI810
AI810
AO820
See
Note 1
To 6 Additional Optical
Modulebus Clusters
Optical
CI830
DI810
AI810 AO820
See Note 3
TB820 DI810
Optical
AI810
AO820
Additional stations
up to maximum of
32 stations per Segment
Repeater Unit
Note1 - Maximum 7 clusters. Max 200 m between clusters.

Note 2 - Central S800 I/O. Maximum 96 modules.
Note 3 - Remote S800 I/O. Maximum 24 modules/station,
24 x 32 =768 modules per segment.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRI$&06,2,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3BSE 019 193R201
11

Modulebus
The Modulebus has an electrical and a fibre-optical interface, which are logically
the same buses. A maximum of twelve I/O modules can be connected to
the Electrical Modulebus and up to seven clusters can be connected to the fibreoptical Modulebus. The fibre-optical interface is intended for local distribution of
I/O clusters and for connection of engineered and standard drives.
Figure 1-6 provides details of the fibre optic connectors, together with
the PM860 optical Modulebus ports.
PM860
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
CN1
CN2
COM3
L+
LSA
SB
COM4
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Rx
Tx
Simplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Front View
)LJXUH 30&RQQHFWRUVIRU2SWLFDO0RGXOHEXV
12
3BSE 019 193R201

Control Software
The software used by the AC 800M Controller is named Control Software.

This name does not stand for a specific software package, but is merely a generic
name for the scope of functions used in a controller. These functions are provided
by:
The hardware functions (supervision, communication buses, I/O buses)
The firmware functions loaded into the controller (real time executive system,
real time clock, redundant communication)
The application program loaded into the controller (library functions,

communication protocols)
The license management that defines what part of the total scope of functions
that you can use in a specific controller.
To produce an application, it is necessary to use an engineering tool called Control

Builder. This tool is extremely versatile, having many useful functions in addition to
system configuration.
Control Builder, with its functions and controller firmware can be found on
the following Compact Disc (CD):
&RQWURO,7IRU$&0&
Ethernet Address
ABB Automation Products has provided each TB830 Baseplate with a unique
Ethernet address, (Media Access Control (MAC) address). This provides every
CPU with a hardware identity which in future releases can be used by a license
management system.
This functionality takes the form of two identification addresses which reside in
the Flash memory of the TP830 Baseplate. The lowest address, (a 12 character Hex
code), is located on a adhesive label attached to the TP830 Baseplate and is used by
the licensing management system. The remaining address is the lowest +1.
See Figure 1-7 for label location details.
Refer to &RQWURO%XLOGHU6WDUWLQJXSDQG,QVWDOODWLRQ see Section 1.4, Related
Documentation and Media, for details on how to load the software and to use
the Ethernet, (MAC), address.
3BSE 019 193R201
13

SE00263650
ETHERNET: 00-00-23-0A-00-8E
)LJXUH (WKHUQHW$GGUHVV,GHQWLILFDWLRQ/DEHO
14
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.2.1 Product Scope
3URGXFW6FRSH
This document describes the various processor modules, communication modules,
power supplies and enclosures (cabinets & racks) that make up
the AC 800M Controller. It also provides information on how to install, operate and
maintain the hardware. For information on the Control Software, please refer to
the manual$&0& &RQWURO6RIWZDUHDQG7RROV. See Section 1.4, Related
Documentation and Media.
AC 800M Controller - Key Features

The key features of the AC 800M Controller are:
Flexibility, the AC 800M Controller can be ordered as a free standing unit(s),

housed in ABB cabinets, or as individual units which may be mounted in
accordance with the customers own requirements
Modularity, allowing for step-by-step expansion
Simple DIN-rail attachment/detachment procedures, using the unique slide

& lock mechanism
Fast, simple faultfinding procedures available via module/channel LEDs
IP20 Class protection without the requirement for enclosures
Allows for the use of low-cost, sealed enclosures due to extremely low module
heat dissipation, even at ambient 40C (104 F)
All modules are fully EMC certified
Connection of up to 192 I/O signals, via Electrical Modulebus, is available
Connection of up to 1344 I/O signals, via Optical Modulebus, is available
Connect a large amount of I/O, via PROFIBUS-DP
The AC 800M can be used as an FF Linking Device
Connect Custom protocols of up to 13 Serial communication RS232-C ports
Built-in battery back-up of memory up to 1 month
External battery back-up option (min.18 months) available
3BSE 019 193R201
15

Product Release History
The AC 800M hardware platform has been allocated a version number starting at
1.0. This version number is required to keep the configuration of all modules and
components, on the AC 800M platform, together and will act as a reference in the
future between different documents. As the AC 800M hardware platform
configuration grows in future releases, the version number will increase
accordingly.
Table 1-1 shows the product version release history of AC 800M.
7DEOH $&05HOHDVH+LVWRU\
Version
Description
1.0
Initial AC 800M release.
1.1
PM856 and CI852 are added
1.3 Prerequisites and Requirements

The minimum pre-requisites for an AC 800M Controller are as follows:
16
1 x Processor Module PM860/TP830
1 x 24 V d.c. Power Supply Module, (for example SD821 24 V d.c. @ 2.5 A.).
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.4 Related Documentation and Media
1.4 Related Documentation and Media

Table 1-2 details the documentation and media applicable to
the AC 800M Controller. Table 1-3 details the media associated with
7DEOH 5HODWHG'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
Category
Hardware
Title
S800 I/O General
Information and
Installation
S800 I/O Modules and
Termination Units
Description
Users Guide
Describes the general installation and
configuration for the S800 I/O system.
Users Guide
Describes the standard I/O modules and
termination units in the S800 I/O system.
S800 I/O Modules and Users Guide

Termination Units, with Describes I/O modules and termination
Intrinsic Safety Interface units with I.S. interface within
the S800 I/O system.
S800 I/O Fieldbus
Communication,
Interface for
PROFIBUS-DP
FOUNDATION
Fieldbus, Wiring and
Installation
3BSE 019 193R201
Users Guide
Describes the PROFIBUS-DP FCI within
the S800 I/O system.
Users Guide
Describes how to install and wire
a FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1.
Terminal Diagrams
AC 800M
Gives information about the inputs/outputs

of the AC 800M modules. The diagrams
can be used as templates for a connection
diagram.
Terminal Diagrams
S800 I/O
Gives information about the inputs/outputs

of the S800 I/O modules. The diagrams can
be used as templates for an I/O connection
diagram.
17

7DEOH 5HODWHG'RFXPHQWDWLRQ&RQWLQXHG

Category
Software
Title
Control Builder M
Beginners Handbook,
Starting up and
Installation
Description
Users Guide
Installation and start-up of the various
software packages that are contained on
the Control Builder CD.
This manual also provides a tutorial
on how to create applications.
AC 800M/C Control
Software and Tools
Users Guide
AC 800M/C
Communication,
Protocols and Design
Users Guide
Describes the different communication
protocols that can be used with
the Control Software and gives information
on how to design a network.
AC 800M/C Control
Functions, Alarm,
Analog Control and
Controllers
Users Guide
Describes all functions available within

the Control Software.
Provides information on the handling of

alarms and analog control
AC 800M/C
Users Guide
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Details how the
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 is
integrated in the controllers and the
OperateIT A platform
AC 800M/C Controller
Users Guide
Integration, Engineering Describes how to connect and configure
Methods
the controllers with the OperateIT A platform
18
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.5 Conventions
7DEOH 5HODWHG0HGLD

Category
Internet
Title
PROFIBUS Web Site
Standard, commercially available

PROFIBUS-DP documentation.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Web Site
Standard, commercially available

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
documentation.
(Fieldbus Online)
ControlIT for AC 800M/C
Media
Description
Control Builder, Functions &

Firmware on a CD.
1.5 Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this document for the presentation
of material:
In a syntax rule statement or example, a word inEROGIDFH represents a reserved

keyword or string.
References to other documents are in LWDOLF.
Control Builder M is normally called just Control Builder or CB in this

manual.
3BSE 019 193R201
19

1.6 Terminology
The following is a list of terms and acronyms used in this document.
7DEOH 7HUPLQRORJ\
Term/Acronym
20
Description
AC 800M
A hardware platform comprising units and modules that

may be configured to provide a controller that will fulfill
specific requirements.
AC 800M Controller
Any controller constructed from the modules and units

connected to the AC 800M hardware platform.
Cabinet
The outer case of a piece of equipment (a packaging

option), for example, Controller cabinet.
CB, Control Builder
Control Builder M, an engineering tool used to configure

and program the AC 800M controller.
Central I/O
Input/Output modules, mounted on a DIN-rail, and

connected to the AC 800M controller via Modulebus.
CEX-bus
Communication Expansion Bus, (for communication

modules).
CF or CompactFlash
CF and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisc Corp.
Controller
Computer-based unit for digital and/or analog control.
COTS
Commercial Off-The-Shelf availability
CPU
Central Processing Unit. A functioning unit consisting

primarily of a microprocessor and memory.
DCS
Distributed Control System.
DIN-rail
Industry standard Top Hat type mounting rail.
EMC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable/Programmable Read-Only Memory.
Ethernet
Network cabling system according to IEEE802.3.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 1.6 Terminology
7DEOH 7HUPLQRORJ\&RQWLQXHG

Term/Acronym
Description
FCI
Fieldbus Communication Interface.
FF
FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Standard based on

IEC 1158-2.
GSD
GSD file - Device description file (Gert Stamm Datei), a

standard PROFIBUS file containing standard
PROFIBUS-DP parameters & memory maps.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
LVD
Low Voltage Directive.
MAC
Media Access Control (Ex. MAC layer in IEE802.3 =

transceiver + cable).
Module
A hardware unit, with or without accommodated

software.
MTU
Module Termination Unit
Node
In general, a point in a data network.

In application, a logically addressable unit directly
connected to the Plant or control network, such as,
controller, process station and operator station
OCS
Open Control System.
PELV
Protected Extra Low Voltage (power supply).
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller.
PROFIBUS-DP
Open, vendor-independent fieldbus for time-critical

communication between controllers and distributed
peripherals.
PROM
Programmable Read-Only Memory.
3BSE 019 193R201
21

7DEOH 7HUPLQRORJ\&RQWLQXHG

Term/Acronym
22
Description
RAM
Random Access Memory, normally a read/write memory

of random access type is assumed.
Redundancy
The existence of more than one capability of an item

(system, equipment or component) to perform its
intended function.
Remote I/O
Input/Output modules connected to a controller via a

fieldbus.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage (power supply).
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
3BSE 019 193R201
&KDSWHU ,QVWDOODWLRQ
This chapter contains guidelines for planning the installation of
an AC 800M controller system, (refer to Section 2.1.1, Site Selection and Building
Requirements). This section does not provide a complete list of measures to be
taken with respect to the environment and other on-site conditions.
The equipment should be adapted to the actual application by means of a thorough
and correctly scoped system definition, ordering procedures and design
requirements. This chapter also describes practical on-site installation procedures,
specific to AC 800M modules, (refer to Section 2.2 onwards).
2.1 Site Planning

2.1.1 Site Selection and Building Requirements
The AC 800M system is designed for use within demanding industrial
environments. This section provides information on the standard requirements
regarding the location/building(s) in which the AC 800M Controller system will be
stored or installed.
Most applications require no special arrangements regarding the environment
therefore installation according to the normal rules will suffice. Occasionally
however, consideration must be given to specific protection measures to be taken
with respect to particular situations.
3BSE 019 193R201
23

Chapter 2 Installation
When planning a control system installation, please consider the following points:
24
Temperature:
It is important to note the local ambient air temperature as well as that

within any enclosures. Lower temperatures mean increased system
reliability and availability.
The expected lifetime of wet, electrolytic capacitors and most

semiconductors will be greatly reduced should the maximum permitted
temperatures be exceeded.
Vibration:
For normal vibration it is recommended that floor enclosures/cabinets

stand on a sound, level floor surface, and that wall enclosures/cabinets are
mounted on sound, vertical walls.
Should the AC 800M system be installed in a control room, adjacent to

large machinery such as shakers or large presses where frequent major
vibrations will occur, shock absorbers or an isolation pad may be required
to protect the system equipment. Shock absorbers will normally protect
the equipment from sustained low-level vibrations (these are vibrations
that are perceptible, but not unduly excessive).
It is recommended that additional fastening screws are used in order to

prevent noise generation by any vibrations present.
If vibrations or shock are a major factor, further consideration must be

given to more extreme measures to reduce the problem.
Cooling:
Cooling of the electronics is achieved by self-convection.

The AC 800M modules are designed for wall mounting and must be
mounted horizontally on a DIN-rail to avoid generating high temperature
within the modules themselves.
At an ambient temperature of 40 C (104 F), it is possible use

the ABB cabinets, (RM550 or RE820) without the requirement for any
additional cooling equipment, such as fans.
3BSE 019 193R201
AC 800M Controller HardwareUsers Guide

Section 2.1.2 Cables
Room lighting should be independent of the power source used for

the equipment in the room. A battery-powered emergency lighting system is
recommended.
A well-developed process connection, with or without marshalling facilities.
Grounding by an effective net of copper bars.
Cable routing with respect to standard installation rules.
Availability of power and other necessary utilities.
Standards and legal regulations that must be observed.
Free space in front of the cabinet. In addition, consider how much space is
required to fully open the cabinet doors. For safety reasons there must always
be adequate space available, even with the doors in the fully open position.
For additional information regarding design considerations, refer to Appendix C,

Power Consumption.
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
The AC 800M modules are intrinsically EMC compatible according to

the CE marking rules.
For additional information regarding Electro-Magnetic Compatibility, refer to
Appendix E, Section E.1 Electro-magnetic Compatibility (EMC).
2.1.2 Cables
The Laying of Field Cables
There are no special requirements for the laying of field and communication cables
connected to AC 800M, except for:
Cables for short-distance communication without modems should always be

routed 10 cm (4) away from other cables.
All cables connected to AC 800M should be run 30 cm (12) away from power
cables not belonging to AC 800M, and 10 cm (4) away from cables belonging
to class 4 of relevant international immunity standard.
3BSE 019 193R201
25

Type of Field Cables
Shielded cables must always be used for the following applications:
Communications
High-frequency pulse transmission
Low level analog signals, for example, PT100 and thermocouples
Analog applications with a system accuracy of 12 bits or more.
For other applications it is possible to use unshielded cables. Signal and return
conductor are always to be located in the same cable.
Lightning Strike Protection
Industrial installations and power plants are normally provided with well-integrated
grounding nets installed together with the power distribution system. In installations
with this type of grounding system, it is not necessary to install additional lightning
strike protection facilities unless using overhead wiring or suspended cables in an
outdoor environment.
Large dispersed plants such as water supply installations and oil refineries will
however, have an inadequate grounding system installed and therefore signal cables
may be routed above ground. In such cases, it will still be necessary to install
suitable lightning strike protection equipment.
Should any cables be discovered outside the grounding system (even for short
distances, such as 10 m (9.1 yds)), it will be necessary to install lightning strike
protection equipment.
2.1.3 Power Supply

Under normal circumstances, the power supply required by AC 800M Controller
and associated field equipment can be obtained from the plants standard
120/230 V a.c.mains supply.
Mains Net Filter
It is not necessary to use mains net filters when using the SD821/822/823 power
supply modules.
26
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.1.3 Power Supply
Safety Switch
A safety switch must be installed in the immediate vicinity of a controller

installation to allow for immediate WRWDO power supply disconnection to
the equipment, should the need arise. However, the prime function of the safety
switch is to provide a means of isolating the power supply completely during
periods of maintenance on the equipment.
Install the safety switch in a location where it is both easily accessible and clearly
visible, that is, outside any enclosure/cabinets.
Protective Earth
Always install a protective earth connection on equipment connected to

a 230 V a.c supply.
Fusing of External Mains Supply Cable
For a standard AC 800M Controller configuration, housed within a floor or wall

mounted cabinet, see Table 2-1 for the recommended fuse rating for the external
mains supply.
7DEOH ([WHUQDO0DLQV6XSSO\)XVH5DWLQJ
Fuse Rating
Fuse Type
10 A
Slow to Rupture
Should the configuration be other than that stated, detailed instructions for
calculating current consumptions can be found in the relevant I/O manuals.
For the AC 800M Controller, refer to Appendix C, Power Consumption.
3BSE 019 193R201
27

Uninterruptable Power Supply
The SD82x series of power supply modules easily handle short power interruptions
(<20 ms) that can normally occur within any industrial environment. Despite this,
it is sometimes necessary to protect certain applications against brief voltage
failures by the installation of an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) device.
The AC 800M controller will shut down safely in event of a power failure.
During the down time, the current supply of the application memory and the system
clock is backed up by the internal battery supply. In systems subject to long non
operational periods, it is recommended that an external battery back-up unit is
installed. When the power supply is reconnected, the AC 800M Controller will
re-start and run the application as normal.
If the effects of unexpected shutdowns are not permissible, it is highly
recommended that the AC 800M Controller is fully protected by receiving its
supply from an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) source.
2.1.4 Enclosures
General
The AC 800M and S800 I/O modules are of protection class IP20 and each module
is individually CE-marked. They can be used without any additional enclosure but
due to normal industrial environment it is recommended to use a higher protection
class than IP20 by adding a suitable enclosure.
Normally the use of an additional enclosure will not influence the EMC
characteristics of the controller.
Enclosure Mounting
When mounting the controller enclosure, it is important to provide certain minimum

distances from the enclosure to the walls and the ceiling in order to provide
satisfactory ventilation. For further details, refer to the enclosure documentation.
If the enclosure is provided with removable wall cladding, it is important to ensure
that this wall cladding remains fitted on any enclosure which may be adjacent to
other enclosures containing equipment not belonging to the AC 800M Controller
and its connected S800 I/O.
28
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.2 Mounting of AC 800M Modules on DIN-rail
ABB Cabinets
As a suitable enclosure, ABB recommend the following two cabinets, which have
been specially adapted for mounting the AC 800M Controller and the S800 I/O.
Both are sealed with protection class IP54 and can support the Controller and
S800 I/O modules without the requirement for additional cooling equipment.
RM550 - Floor mounted cabinet
RE820 - Wall mounted cabinet.
For further information on ABB cabinets, refer to Appendix B, Section B.10

Cabinets.
2.2 Mounting of AC 800M Modules on DIN-rail

As the AC 800M modules (CPU and communication interfaces) are cooled by
self-convection, it is important that they should only be mounted on a horizontal
DIN- rail.
Each baseplate has a locking mechanism that contacts the metal backplate to
the DIN-rail which provides an effective ground connection. The DIN-rail operates
as a very effective grounding bar for the complete system.
The additional tags for screws located in lower part of the baseplate serve no
electrical function. They are provided for use should extra fastening be required
within environments subject to excessive vibrations.
The DIN-rail must be firmly attached to a suitable conducting mounting surface, by
means of suitable screws which must be positioned every 100 mm (4 inches) along
the DIN-rails length.
Ensure that the AC 800M Controller and associated modules are electrically
isolated before attempting to mount them on a DIN-rail!
3BSE 019 193R201
29

Mounting Procedure for PM860, CI851, CI852 and CI853 Modules, Complete
with Baseplates
Before mounting any processor module or communication interface onto

the DIN-rail, carefully read the installation instructions provided with the
equipment. The electronic module and baseplate are supplied as a single unit and
there is no requirement to separate them during the mounting procedure.
To mount the modules on the DIN-rail, it is only necessary to use a flat bladed
screwdriver, having a 1mm (0.04 in.) thick blade which fits securely into
the baseplate locking screw. For further details on the mounting procedure
refer to Figure 2-1.
Use the procedure detailed below to mount the baseplates, complete with modules:
1.
Rotate the locking device to the 23(1position (1) and hook the upper lip, to
the rear of the module baseplate, securely over the upper edge of the DIN-rail
and gently snap the baseplate fully into the mounting position.
2.
Rotate the locking device to the 6/,'(position (2). Now gently slide the
module along the DIN-rail to the desired mounting position and gently attach it
to the adjacent module baseplate using the connector plugs and sockets.
Ensure that the baseplates plugs and sockets are fully aligned when the modules are
about to be interconnected or damage to the pins will occur. Under no
circumstances use excessive force!
3.
When interconnection is complete, rotate the locking device clockwise to

the /2&.('position (3). The baseplate is now fully locked into position and
has a good ground connection to the DIN-rail.
It is essential that the locking device is positioned in the /2&.(' position to

avoid possible problems caused by vibration and/or intermittent grounding.
For further visual information on mounting AC 800M Controller modules,
30
3BSE 019 193R201

1. OPEN
2. SLIDE
3. LOCKED
)LJXUH %DVHSODWH/RFNLQJ'HYLFH
Lugs for extra screws

to provide secure
mounting in locations
subject to vibration
)LJXUH ',15DLO0RXQWLQJRI$&06,20RGXOH
3BSE 019 193R201
31

)LJXUH $&0&RQWUROOHU6LGH9LHZ

Removing Modules Complete with Baseplates
Ensure that the AC 800M modules are electrically isolated before removing them
from a DIN-rail!
Use the procedure detailed below to remove a module, complete with baseplate:
1.
Isolate the power supply to the controller modules.
2.
Remove any detachable cables from the appropriate module baseplate.
3.
Rotate the locking device tothe6/,'( position (2), on the module baseplate
to be removed.
Note that the SLIDE sequence must be carried on the module baseplates, adjacent to
the module which is to be removed, in order to provide adequate access and removal
space.
4.
32
Gently ease the module/baseplates sidewards in order to release the contacts on

the module baseplate being removed.
3BSE 019 193R201

5.
Turn the locking device anti-clockwise to 23(1 position (1) and ease
the module baseplate outwards and upwards at the base. Lift the module to
remove it from the DIN-rail.
The module baseplates can easily be disconnected from each other by simply using
a flat bladed screwdriver and gently easing it between the two modules,
F
R
Rx1
F
R
Rx/Tx
Tx1
RTS
F
R
P
B
Rx2
Tx2
INIT
CI851
CI853
COM1
COM2
PM860
CN1
CN2 COM3 COM4
)LJXUH 6HSDUDWLQJWKH%DVHSODWHV
3BSE 019 193R201
33

Module to Baseplate Alpha Code Lock
The baseplates have incorporated a two part, pre-set Alpha code locking device
which, due to the fact that the modules are very similar in design, prevents the
installation of an incompatible type of module onto baseplate, should the Alpha
codes not agree. All identical module types will have the same, factory pre-set,
two letter alpha code installed prior to delivery.
The following module types have two part, pre-set Alpha code locking devices
installed:
7DEOH )DFWRU\3UHVHW$OSKD&RGHs
Module
Key Position 1
Key Position 2
CI851 PROFIBUS-DP
Interface
CI852 FOUNDATION
Fieldbus H1 Interface
CI853 RS232-C Interface
S800 I/O Series
Various - refer to
Product/User Guide
Various - refer to
Product/User Guide
For further details on pre-set Alpha codes, refer to the relevant module
documentationSee Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
Care must be taken to ensure that the correct module is matched with the correct
baseplate, or damage to the equipment will occur. Should force appear necessary
when installing a module onto a baseplate, this is a positive indication that the
Alpha code lock/module compatibility may be incorrect.
Refer to Figure 2-5 for further details of the Alpha code lock arrangement.
The mechanical keys are delivered pre-set and must not be altered. This is done to
prevent the removable interface to be placed on the wrong type of baseplate.
34
3BSE 019 193R201

Pre-Set
Alpha Code Keys
)LJXUH 0RGXOH%DVHSODWH$OSKD&RGH/RFN$UUDQJHPHQW
3BSE 019 193R201
35

2.3 Installing the Processor Module PM860/TP830

Use the procedure detailed below to install the processor module along the DIN-rail:
1.
Remove the bus terminations from the sides of the processor module.
2.
Mount the processor module, communication interfaces (on the CEX-bus to

the left of the processor module) and S800 I/O modules (on electrical
Modulebus to the right of the processor module).
3.
Press them gently together and make sure that the Modulebus and the CEX-bus
is correctly connected, via the connectors on the baseplates and MTUs.
4.
Reinsert the bus terminations into the modules farthest away from the PM860
processor module.
5.
36
a.
For the CEX-bus TB850 (TB851 if cable TK850 is used), see Figure 2-8
and Figure 2-9.If no modules are used on the CEX-bus, no bus
termination is required.
b.
For the Modulebus TB807, refer to the S800 I/O documentation,

(see Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media). If no modules are
used on the Modulebus, no bus termination is required.
Connect cables to the TP830 Baseplate as follows:

a.
The power leads and, if applicable, power supervision signals from SS822
to the screw terminals SA and SB, refer to Figure 2-6.
b.
The Control Network cables to CN1 (single connection) or CN1 + CN2

(redundant connection).
c.
Serial protocol to COM3.
d.
The Control Builder to COM4 with the cable TK212.

(If needed for changing IP address e.t.c) Otherwise connect
the Control Builder to the Control Network.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.3 Installing the Processor Module PM860/TP830
)LJXUH 6XSHUYLVLRQ6LJQDOVIURP66
3BSE 019 193R201
37

6.
Connect the optical Modulebus to the optical contacts on the PM860, see
Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-6. Information regarding optical cable selection and
cable lengths is provided in the S800 I/O documentation, refer to Section 1.4,
Related Documentation and Media.
Note that the connection to the optical Modulebus is carried out in the same way for
the CPU module PM860 as for the Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) in
S800 I/O.
7.
The PM860 is supplied with an internal back-up battery, in place, at delivery.

One side of the battery is isolated with a small plastic insulating tab marked,
To be removed for connecting the battery. To activate the battery this plastic
tab must first be removed by gently withdrawing it, (this can be achieved
without loosening any of the securing screws). Refer to Figure 2-16.
Do not remove the plastic tab until the controller is powered-up in the normal way.
The CPU memory will start to consume battery power immediately the plastic tab is
removed as no power supply is connected to the CPU.
Communications Ports
CN1 and CN2
The control network connects to one or two RJ45 connectors depending on single or
redundant network option. CN1 and CN2 are RJ45 ports for Ethernet.
Use a RJ45 connector for IEEE802.3 (Ethernet) for connecting with a category
5 Shielded Twisted Pair cable (STP class 5).
The IEEE standard language is a class 5 cable 10/100Base-T/TX max 100 m
(109 yds). The STP is suitable only in non industrial (office) environment. Only use
STP in a protected environment to connect to the Commercial Off-The-Shelf,
(COTS), Ethernet components, (HUBS/Transceivers/on so forth), that convert to
optical fibre. ABB recommend the use of optical fibre in an industrial environment,
for example use 62.5/125 100Base-FX with max distance 1500 m (1640 yds).
38
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.3 Installing the Processor Module PM860/TP830
7DEOH 73&1DQG&1&RQQHFWLRQV

Pin
Designation
Direction
Description
TD+
Out
Transmit Data (plus)
TD-
Out
Transmit Data (minus)
RD+
In
Receive Data (plus)
4-5
Not used
RD-
In
Receive Data (minus)
7-8
Not used
Housing
Shield
Shield
COM3 Port
The COM3 is an RS232-C port with modem signals. This port is used for serial
protocols such as Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI or the customers own design.
7DEOH 73&20&RQQHFWLRQV
Pin
3BSE 019 193R201
Designation
Direction
Description
RTS
Out
Request To Send
DTR
Out
Data Terminal Ready
TD
Out
Transmit Data
0V
Signal ground
0V
Signal ground
RD
In
Receive Data
DCD
In
Data Carrier Detect
CTS
In
Clear To Send
Housing
Shield
Shield
39

COM4 Port
The COM4 port is a RS232-C port that is opto-isolated and without modem signals.
Connect Control Builder to this port when connecting directly to the controller,
without the need use the remote tool connection, via the Control Network.
7DEOH 73&20&RQQHFWLRQV
Pin
40
Designation
Direction
Description
Not used
Not used
TD
Out
Transmit Data
0V
Signal ground
0V
Signal ground
RD
In
Receive Data
Not used
Not used
Housing
Shield
Shield
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.4 Installing the Interface for PROFIBUS-DP, CI851/TP851
2.4 Installing the Interface for PROFIBUS-DP, CI851/TP851

The CI851 receives its power supply from the PM860 processor module via
the CEX-bus and therefore does not require any additional external power source.
Use the procedure detailed below to install the CI851/TP851:
1.
Mount the module on the DIN-rail, (refer to Section 2.2 and 2.3 ).
2.
Install a connector on the PROFIBUS-DP cable. Connect the cable screen to

the ground terminal within the connector, the screen will then be grounded
via CI581. A connector with a switchable built-in bus termination is
recommended.
3.
Connect the PROFIBUS-DP cable to the contact on the baseplate.
4.
If this is at the end of the PROFIBUS-DP cable, switch the bus termination
ON. However, if this is not at the end of the bus cable, leave the bus
termination switched OFF.
PROFIBUS-DP Connection
Connection of the PROFIBUS-DP is by means of the 9-pin female D-type

connector located on TP851.
3BSE 019 193R201
41

Installation of PROFIBUS-DP
7DEOH &,352),%86'3&RQQHFWRU

PIN
Designation
Description
Shield
Shield/protective ground
Not Used
B-line
Receive/Transmit Data B-line
RTS(TTL) Indicates direction
RTS(TTL) Indicates direction
GND Bus
GND Bus
+5 V Bus
For terminating resistors
A-line
Receive/Transmit Data A-line
Not used
For installation of the fieldbus, the recommended certified fieldbus devices and
related components, refer to the352),%86'3GRFXPHQWDWLRQ, see Section 1.4,
Related Documentation and Media. Shielded twisted-pair cables must be used for
connecting the PROFIBUS-DP.
Additional information about PROFIBUS-DP and other suitable components is
available, on the Internet, at the PROFIBUS User Organization web site.
42
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.5 Installing the Interface for FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, CI852/TP852
2.5 Installing the Interface for FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1,

CI852/TP852
The CI852 receives its power supply from the PM 860 processor module via
the CEX-bus and therefore does not require any additional external power source.
The CI852 does not supply power to any field devices on the FF H1 bus.
An AC 800M Controller connected to a CI852 constitutes a FOUNDATION
Fieldbus linking device.
1.
Mount the module on the DIN-rail (see also Section 2.2 and 2.3 ).
2.
Install a connector on the FOUNDATION Fieldbus cable. Connect the cable

screen to the ground terminal within the connector, the screen will then be
grounded via CI582.
3.
Connect the FOUNDATION Fieldbus cable to the contact on the baseplate.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Connection
Connect the FF H1 bus to the male DB9 connector, located on the TP852 Baseplate.
7DEOH &,DQG73)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV&RQQHFWRU
Pin
3BSE 019 193R201
Signal Function/Designation
1-5
Not used
6 FB-P
Receive/transmit data line, positive polarity
7 FB-N
Receive/transmit data line, negative polarity
8-9
Not used
43

The use of shielded twisted-pair cables for FOUNDATION Fieldbus is

recommended, refer to Appendix D, Recommended Components.
Additional information on how to design a fieldbus (connectors, cables and devices)
can be found in Users Guide, FOUNDATION Fieldbus, Installation and Wiring.
Refer to Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
A catalog containing references to suppliers, devices, services and other fieldbusrelated items is available, via the Internet web site, for FIELDBUS ONLINE.
For field devices that require power from the fieldbus, special power supplies must
be connected to the data wires, (in the same way as a field device). Only power
supplies with particular impedance characteristics, specially designed for
FOUNDATION Fieldbus must be used, as short circuits of the fieldbus signals
could occur. The power supply modules SD82x must not be used for this purpose.
44
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.6 Installation of Interface for RS232-C, CI853/TP853
2.6 Installation of Interface for RS232-C, CI853/TP853

CI853 receives its power supply from the PM860 processor module via
the CEX bus and therefore does not require any additional external power source.
1.
Mount the module on the DIN rail (see also Section 2.2 and 2.3 ).
2.
Connect the cable (maximum 15 m (16.4 yds)) to the contact on the baseplate.
Connect the cable screen to the ground terminal within the connector,
the screen will then be grounded via CI583.
3.
If cable lengths longer than 15 m (16.4 yds) are required, a short distance
modem, TC562, must be used. If used, mount the modem on a DIN-rail in a
suitable position, connect a 24 V d.c. power supply to the modem and connect
the cable,TK853V01, from CI853 to the TC562 modem input terminals.
4.
Connect the TC562 modem output terminals to the outgoing cable.
The TC562 modem can be used for the following distances/speeds:
Up to 1000 m (1093 yds) with transmission speed 19200 bit/s
Up to 12000 m (13123 yds) with transmission speed 1200 bit/s.
Connectors
Connect the RS232-C channels to the RJ45 connectors marked COM1 and COM2
on the TP853 Baseplate.
7DEOH &,56&,QWHUIDFH&20DQG&20&RQQHFWRUV
3BSE 019 193R201
Pin
Designation
Direction
1-9
Description
See COM3 on PM860
45

2.7 Installation of CEX-bus

The CEX-bus is used for connection of communication interfaces to the
PM860 CPU module and is located on the left side of the processor module
baseplate (TP830).
A bus termination unit must always be fitted to the last unit on the CEX-bus, as
shown in Figure 2-8. A TB850, (male), CEX-bus termination unit is supplied with
each PM860/TP830 processor module.
However, should the configuration require the use of a TK850 extension cable, as
shown in Figure 2-9, a TB851, (female), CEX-bus termination unit is required and
must be fitted to the last baseplate in the sequence. A TB851, (female), CEX-bus
termination unit is supplied with each TK850 extension cable.
TK850 CEX-bus Extension Cable
Only one TK850 CEX-bus extension cable may be used in a CEX-bus. The length
of the cable is 0.7 m (2.3).
46
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.8 Installation of Power Supply SD82x
2.8 Installation of Power Supply SD82x

Use the procedure detailed below to install the power supply modules SD821,
SD822 and SD823.
1.
Mount the selected module onto the DIN-rail at required position.
2.
Set the mains switch on the front of the power supply module to the required
input voltage setting
a.
115 V for 110 - 120 V a.c.
b.
230 V for 220 - 240 V a.c. (default position at delivery).
3.
Connect the mains supply to terminals L(ive) and N(eutral).
4.
Connect the protective earth to the terminal PE.
5.
Connect the output cable to terminals L+ (+24 V) and L- (0 V).
The L- output (0V) (see Figure 2-10) of the power supply units can be used without
being grounded. When equipment is delivered, installed in cabinets,
the L- output (0V) is not grounded. If grounding is required, the power supply units
L- output (0V) can be grounded directly or via a suitable resistor.
All terminals marked L+ are internally connected within the power supply module.
The same applies for terminals marked L-.
3BSE 019 193R201
47

2.9 Installing the Mains Breaker Unit

The mains breaker unit is supplied as separate components which must be mounted
on a DIN-rail in order to form a complete assembly. Different distribution options
are available but, for the sake of simplicity, the installation described covers
the redundant power supplies/independent power supplies option.
See Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4.
Use the procedure detailed below to correctly install the mains breaker unit:
1.
Mount the components of the mains breaker unit onto the DIN-rail, close to the
incoming power supply, in the following order listed below, (from left to right),
and as shown in Figure 2-7.
a.
A DIN-rail end-stop (1).
b. The terminal for the incoming protective earth (2).

The protective earth terminal (2) is fitted with a knife-like device to provide
automatic grounding onto the DIN-rail
c.
The 2 terminals for the incoming Live and Neutral mains power (3).
These terminals are equipped with built-in jumpers which, if necessary,
may be opened to provide complete mains input power isolation.
d.
The miniature mains breaker unit (4).
e.
The protective earth distribution terminal (5).
f.
The mains distribution terminal block (6), depending on the required

configuration.
g.
A DIN-rail end-stop (1).
2.
Connect the incoming mains, protective earth terminals, mains breaker and
distribution terminals as shown in Figure 2-7.
3.
Install the two required links (7), fuse-holders (8) and jumpers (9), onto
the distribution terminals. Fit the required fuses into the fuse-holders,
(glass-tube type, 5 x 20 mm (0.2 x 0.8 inch)).
Removing the fuse-holders or the jumper connections will provide a visual

indication that the power supply has been disconnected. The fuse-holders have
built-in red LED to provide an indication of a ruptured (defective) fuse.
48
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.9 Installing the Mains Breaker Unit
PE - Green/Yellow
4
2
5
6
7
1
8
PE - Green/Yellow
PS2
MAINS
PE - Green/Yellow
PS1
PE - Green/Yellow
)LJXUH ,QVWDOODWLRQRI0DLQV%UHDNHU$VVHPEO\
3BSE 019 193R201
49

TB850 Terminator for CEX-bus
Terminator
TB850
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
PM860
CPU module
CI851
CI851
)LJXUH 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;EXVPDOH

A TB850, (male), CEX-bus termination unit is supplied with each package
(PM860K01) of the PM860/TP830 processor module.
50
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.9 Installing the Mains Breaker Unit
TB851 (Female) Terminator for CEX-bus, (when TK850 cable is used)
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Rx/Tx
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
PM860
CPU module
CI853
CI852
CI851
COM1 COM2
TK850 Cable
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Rx/Tx
CI853
CI853
CI852
COM1 COM2
COM1 COM2
Terminator
TB851
)LJXUH 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;EXVIHPDOH
3BSE 019 193R201
51

2.10 Installation of Voting Device SS822

The voting device SS822 is used to connect 2 redundant power supplies to a
common load. The 2 redundant power supplies may be connected to completely
separate mains supplies or connected to the same mains supply, (as shown in
Figure 2-10), depending on the system configuration requirements.
Use the procedure detailed below to install the voting device SS822:
1.
Mount the voting device SS822 onto the DIN-rail adjacent to the power
supplies.
2.
Connect the voting device to the selected power supply modules,

(SD821/822/823), in required configuration. Refer to Figure 2-10.
SA
SB
L+ L+ LOK
L-
L+ L+ LOK
SD821
N
PE
L-
SD821
N
PE
Supervision
signals to
PM860/TP830
OK+ F OK+ F
A
SS822
A+B+L+ L+ L-
L+
Mains
Input
L-
Protective Earth
+24V
0V
)LJXUH 668VHGLQ5HGXQGDQW6'&RQILJXUDWLRQ
52
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.11 Installation of External Battery Module SB821
2.11 Installation of External Battery Module SB821

Use the procedure detailed below to connect the external battery module:
1.
Mount the external battery module SB821 at a suitable position on

the DIN-rail.
2.
For connecting the external battery module, SB821, use the 2 m (2.2 yds) cable
TK821V020. Plug one end into the battery module and plug the other end of
TK821V020 into the external battery supply socket of the PM860 CPU
module,see Figure 1-2.
3.
It is necessary to remove the internal battery from the PM860 when using
an external battery source in order to avoid reducing the available memory
back-up time due to the batteries being connected in parallel.
Do not connect the TK821V020 cable until the AC 800M Controller has been
powered-up normally. If no normal power supply is connected to the PM860 CPU
module, the CPU memory will immediately start to consume battery power if
the cable is connected.
Remember to always install a fresh internal or external battery at the end of
the installation phase, as the original battery will have been heavily used due to
frequent blackouts during the system installation.
2.12 Installation of I/O Modules

For further detailed information regarding mounting, removing or releasing
procedures for I/O Modules, refer to the documentation for the appropriate
I/O system.
3BSE 019 193R201
53

2.13 Installation in ABB Cabinets
Modulebus
Expansion
Cable
Aluminium
Profile
Cable
Duct
Mains Breaker
Unit
SD821
24 V Distribution
Terminals
)LJXUH :DOO&DELQHW6LQJOH3RZHU6XSSO\$UUDQJHPHQW
54
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.13 Installation in ABB Cabinets
Mains Breaker
Unit
SD821
(Modules)
SD821
(Field)
24 V Distribution
(Modules in Cabinet)
24 V Distribution
(Field Equipment)
)LJXUH :DOO&DELQHW'XDO3RZHU6XSSO\/RFDO)LHOG$UUDQJHPHQW
3BSE 019 193R201
55

SD822
Redundant
Power
Supply Units
(Field
Equipment)
Mains
Breakers
SS822
Voting
Units
SD822 Redundant
Power Supply Units
)LJXUH )ORRU0RXQWHG&DELQHW+RUL]RQWDO0RGXOH$UUDQJHPHQW
56
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.13 Installation in ABB Cabinets
TB820
TB820
Mains Breaker
Unit
24 V Distribution
SD822
)LJXUH )ORRU0RXQWHG&DELQHW9HUWLFDO0RGXOH$UUDQJHPHQW
3BSE 019 193R201
57

2.14 Mounting Dimensions

To maintain adequate cooling airflow through the AC 800M Controller modules,
obstructions must not be placed within 50 mm (2) above and 25 mm (1) below
the modules. Always mount the DIN-rail horizontally. Refer to Figure 2-15.
>50 mm (2.0)
Unobstructed areas
>240 mm
(9.4)
>25 mm (1.0)
>50 mm (2.0)
Unobstructed areas
>25 mm (1.0)
)LJXUH 9HQWLODWLRQ5HTXLUHPHQWV0LQLPXP0RXQWLQJ'LPHQVLRQV
58
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 2.14 Mounting Dimensions
Battery
isolator tag
To be removed
for connecting
of the battery
)LJXUH 30/RFDWLRQRI%DWWHU\,VRODWRU7DJ
3BSE 019 193R201
59

60
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.1 General Information
&KDSWHU &RQILJXUDWLRQ
*HQHUDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
Using the engineering tool, Control Builder, it is possible to configure hardware
(I/O and communication modules), and make application programs with control
languages according to IEC61131-3. You can compile and run programs off-line as
an aid to process simulation before finally downloading an application to the
controller. The Control Builder offers a set of options each with its own set of
properties. Simply select the option that corresponds most closely to the system
requirements. For further information, refer to Section 1.4, Related Documentation
and Media.
Control Builder Documentation - for configuration information
Control Software Documentation - for available functionality.
The Control Builder Online Help facility provides detailed step-by-step information
on the procedures to be taken when creating an application for
&RQQHFWLRQRIWKH&RQWURO%XLOGHU0
The Control Builder, installed in a PC, is normally connected to
the AC 800M Controller. It is connected via the Control Network and the CN1 or
CN2 ports on the controller. This is displayed in Figure 3-1.
Alternatively you can connect the Control Builder via the COM4 port (RS232-C) on
the AC 800M Controller. Use the tool cable TK212 and a serial port on the PC.
Note, if the firmware in the AC 800M is not running correctly, then it is likely that it
is not possible to use the CN1 and CN2 ports. Regardless, the connection via the
COM4 port is always available.
3BSE 019 193R201
61

Chapter 3 Configuration
&RQQHFWLRQWRD&RQWURO1HWZRUN
The Control Network is a private IP network domain for both real time data and
general system communication between industrial computers. It is scalable from a
very small network with a few nodes, to a large network containing a number of
Network Areas and many hundreds of nodes.
Controllers mounted
in cabinets
AC 800M
AC 800M
AC 800M
AC 800M
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
AC 800M
AC 800M
AC 800M
I/O
I/O
I/O
STP
STP
Within industrial environments, only

use STP cable where full control of
the cabling is available.
Only use
STP inside
areas with
common
grounding
STP
FO or STP
Hub
WARNING
FO or STP
Switch
Hub
USE FO GENERALLY
FO
USE STP EXCEPTIONALLY

INDUSTRIAL
ENVIRONMENT
FO = Fibre Optic link

STP = Shielded Twisted Pair Link
NON-INDUSTRIAL
ENVIRONMENT
Switch
USE STP GENERALLY
Control Builder
Operator Station
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRI$&0&RQWUROOHUV&RQQHFWHGWRD&RQWURO1HWZRUN
62
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.4 Communication Possibilities
It can use different and mixed link implementations such as Fast Ethernet and PPP.
It provides for full redundancy to achieve high network availability.
The AC 800M controller is always connected to the Control Network via a STP
(Shielded Twisted Pair) cable. Should the local environment be of the industrial
nature, the AC 800M / Control network connection must be converted over to
a Fibre Optic (FO) cable. This is achieved by installing a Switch/Hub which has
both optical and electrical ports. Refer to Figure 3-1.
The Control Network is described in $&0&&RPPXQLFDWLRQ3URWRFROVDQG
'HVLJQ. Refer to Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ3RVVLELOLWLHV
Located on the processor module (PM860/TP830), are the following
communication ports which are available for the following functions:
CN1 and CN2 are used for connection to the Control Network. Both are RJ45
ports for Ethernet (IEEE802.3) and connection is normally achieved by using
category 5 shielded twisted pair cable, (STP class 5). However, as previously
stated, within industrial environments it is recommended that all STP cable are
converted to optical fibre.
For a single network CN1 RU CN2 is used.
For a redundant network ERWK CN1 and CN2 are used.
Details on cable selection, hubs, switches and so forth, is provided in this

manual, see Appendix D, Recommended Components.
COM3 is a RJ45 port for RS232-C with modem signals. Example of protocols
are Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI or to the customers own design. Please
refer to the &RQWURO6RIWZDUHGRFXPHQWDWLRQfor additional detailed
information. Refer to Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
COM4 is a RJ45 port for connection of service tools (see Chapter 3.2).
The port has no modem signals.
By adding communication interfaces to the CEX-bus, the number of protocols and

processor module ports can be expanded. The available CEX-bus interface
quantities are shown in Table 3-1.
3BSE 019 193R201
63

7DEOH ,QWHUIDFHV$YDLODEOHRQWKH&(;EXV

Number of Interfaces on CEX-bus
Interface
Maximum
CI851
(PROFIBUS-DP)
CI852
(FOUNDATION Fieldbus)
CI853
(RS232-C)
Total
Number of ports per

Interface
1
6
For information relating to available serial protocols for the CI853 interface,
see COM3 above.
,26\VWHPV
There are two methods of connecting I/O systems to the AC 800M controller:
Modulebus for the S800 I/O modules only.
PROFIBUS-DP for all I/O systems and modules that are equipped with an
adapter suitable for PROFIBUS-DP connections.
The S800 I/O modules can also be connected via the Fieldbus Communication
Interface CI830.
List of supported I/O systems and modules is found in $&0&&RQWURO6RIWZDUH
DQG7RROV, see Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
Modulebus
The Modulebus in the AC 800M controller consists of one electrical unit and one
optical unit:
64
Electrical Modulebus, (see Figure 3-2) - 1 cluster (group), having a maximum

of 12 S800 I/O modules connected.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.5 I/O Systems
Optical Modulebus, (see Figure 3-2) - 7 clusters (groups), with maximum

7 x 12 S800 I/O modules connected.
This provides a total of 8 clusters (groups), with a maximum 8 x 12 = 96 S800 I/O

modules connected to an AC 800M Controller.
Optical
Modulebus
Electrical
Modulebus
PM860
Local
TB820
Remote
TB820
Maximum of 7
clusters (groups)
Optical
Modulebus
TB820
Maximum of 12 x I/O modules
)LJXUH (OHFWULFDODQG2SWLFDO0RGXOHEXV&RQILJXUDWLRQ
3BSE 019 193R201
65

PROFIBUS-DP
A PROFIBUS-DP segment, capable of providing up to 32 nodes, can be directly

connected to a PROFIBUS-DP Interface module, type CI851/TP851.
This PROFIBUS-DP segment can be further extended using repeater units.
Via a gateway, PROFIBUS-PA can be connected to PROFIBUS-DP. For further
details refer to 6WDQGDUG352),%86GRFXPHQWDWLRQ, which is available at the
PROFIBUS internet site.
To the PROFIBUS-DP it is possible to connect the following I/O systems:
S800 I/O and/or S800L I/O via Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)
CI830, refer to 6,2GRFXPHQWDWLRQSee Section 1.4, Related
S200 I/O and/or S200L I/O via Fieldbus Adapter 200-APB12, refer to
6,2GRFXPHQWDWLRQ SeeSection 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
I/O systems from non-ABB manufacturers can be connected to

PROFIBUS-DP, however, refer to the relevant manufacturers documentation.
GSD files with configuration data for the I/O modules is imported to
the Control Builder via a dedicated GSD Import Tool.
Note that the total number of I/O modules to be configured within a controller can
be restricted depending on the module range parameter of your license. The license
management is fully described in&RQWURO%XLOGHU%HJLQQHUV+DQGERRN6WDUWLQJ
XS ,QVWDOODWLRQrefer to Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
For further information relating to the various I/O systems, refer to Section 1.4,
Related Documentation and Media.
3RZHU6XSSO\6\VWHP
The configuration of power supply system for an AC 800M controller is very
straightforward.
Configurations
Figure 3-3 shows a series of simple circuit diagrams to indicate the various
possibilities for connecting the incoming mains power, via the mains breaker,
66
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.6.1 Powering Modules in Cabinet
the power supply modules and the SS822 voting devices, to the 24 V d.c.
distribution terminals.
The AC 800M Controller and its I/O system are normally located in one or several
enclosures or cabinets. The cabinet housing the AC 800M Controller can also
contain I/O modules connected to the controller via the electrical modulebus, the
optical modulebus or the communication interface for PROFIBUS-DP.
Cabinet containing the AC 800M controller
In this cabinet power can be needed for
3RZHULQJ0RGXOHV which means power to the electronic circuitry on each

module in the cabinet.
3RZHULQJ)LHOG(TXLSPHQW which means power to equipment, relay contacts

etc. which are located outside the cabinet but connected to the inputs/outputs of
the I/O modules in the cabinet.
It is strongly recommended to
use power supply in HDFK cabinet for Powering Modules (only when cabinets
are mounted side by side, power to the modules can be taken from another
cabinet)
use VHSDUDWH power supplies for Powering Modules and Powering Field
Equipment, refer to Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13.
Cabinet containing I/O system
Use the same recommendations as above if no other information is given in

the I/O system documentation.
3RZHULQJ0RGXOHVLQ&DELQHW
This power supply is connected only to modules within the cabinet such as
PM860 which also powers all communication interfaces (via the CEX-bus) and
all S800 I/O modules connected to its electrical modulebus.
TB820V2 (optical modem for S800 I/O) which also powers all
S800 I/O modules connected to its electrical modulebus.
3BSE 019 193R201
67

CI830 (PROFIBUS-DP interface for S800 I/O) which also powers all
S800 I/O modules connected to its electrical modulebus.
PROFIBUS-DP adapters for other I/O systems (depending on how the supply
arrangement is done for the I/O modules it can be necessary to connect power
to each I/O module).
Communication modems located in the cabinet.
The main configuration rule for this power supply is that the cables carrying the
24V never go outside the cabinet.
3RZHULQJ)LHOG(TXLSPHQWRXWVLGH&DELQHW
This power supply is intended for supplying power to process signals and
equipment located outside the cabinet.
Interferences
Powering field equipment from a power supply located in the AC 800M Controller
cabinet often requires the use of long 24 V d.c. cables which can easily pick up local
interference and direct it straight back to the power supply modules. Follow the
rules about Field Cables, given in Section 2.1.2, Cables, when installing the cables.
Short-circuit at the power supply output
The SD82x series power supply has no extra energy reservoir at their outputs.
In case of a short-circuit the output voltage of the power supply will fall rapidly.
Short-circuits (even if fuses are installed in the 24 V d.c. distribution system) or
large load changes can produce unwanted voltage dips in the power supply.
To avoid any influences on the AC 800M Controller from any of the field
equipment, it is strongly recommended that separate power supplies are installed
(refer to Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13).
Sectioning the field equipment
If the field equipment connected to an AC 800M Controller are to be sectioned into

groups so that a power fail in one group is not allowed to influence the power to
68
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.6.3 Powering from External +24 V d.c. Source
other groups then it is recommended to use one power supply for each group of field
equipment.
To use fuses in the 24 V d.c. distribution system will not work properly. If a shortcircuit occurs in one group the power supply voltage will most likely drop before
any fuse is blown and consequently all groups will have a voltage drop in their
supply.
Cable protection
Fuses in the 24 V d.c. distribution system for cable protection only can be used.
Allow the power supply (which has an output current limitation at overload/short
circuit situations) to have a spare capacity of at least 3-4 times the rated current
value of the largest fuse connected to the power supply and remember to include the
resistance of long cables in the calculation.
Connection alternatives
The power supply for field equipment can be connected in the same manner as that
used for connecting and powering the AC 800M modules, see Figure 3-3.
It should be pointed out however, that the same Mains Breaker Unit can be used to
control and isolate both power supplies or, alternatively, independent Mains
Breakers can be used on each spur, see the examples shown in Figure 3-4.
3RZHULQJIURP([WHUQDO9GF6RXUFH
The AC 800M Controller can be powered from an external +24 V d.c. source.
This source is often common for many different equipments in a plant area and can
result in long power cables to the AC 800M Controller. Furthermore heavy load
changes can cause variations of the controller supply voltage and it can be necessary
to take precautions against low voltages to prevent controller malfunction.
If there is a risk that the +24 V on the power terminals of PM860 can be lower than
19.2 V for more than 1 ms, an energy reservoir must be used for Powering Modules
(refer to chapter 3.6). The recommended solution is to use a d.c./d.c. converter in the
controller cabinet. This converter can also provide an isolation between the
AC 800M supply and the external d.c. source and eliminate grounding problems
between the controller and other parts connected to the same source.
3BSE 019 193R201
69

Single Power Supply
Supply to
Modules
SD
82x
Mains
Mains Breaker
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Power
Supply
Redundant Power Supplies

SD
82x
Mains
Supply to
Modules
Mains Breaker
SS
822
SD
82x
Voting
Device
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Power
Supplies
Redundant Mains Power Supplies

SD
82x
Mains 1
Supply to
Modules
Mains Breaker
SS
822
SD
82x
Mains 2
Voting
Device
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Mains Breaker
Power
Supplies
)LJXUH 3RZHU6XSSO\2SWLRQVIRU$&00RGXOHV
70
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 3.6.3 Powering from External +24 V d.c. Source
Supply to
Modules
Mains
SD
82x
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Mains Breaker
Independent
Power Supplies
Supply to
Field
Equipment
SD
82x
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Supply to
Modules
SD
82x
Mains
Mains Breaker
Independent
Power Supplies
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
Supply to
Field
Equipment
SD
82x
Mains Breaker
Independent Mains
Breaker Units
24 V dc
Distribution
Terminals
)LJXUH 3RZHULQJ)LHOG(TXLSPHQWV
3BSE 019 193R201
71

72
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 4.1 AC 800M Controller (PM860)
&KDSWHU 2SHUDWLRQ
This chapter describes the operation of the AC 800M Controller, comprising of a
PM860 CPU module together with various optional modules, (refer to Appendix B,
Hardware Modules, for additional technical information on the optional modules).
$&0&RQWUROOHU30

Equipped with Control Software, the basic PM860/TP830 hardware modules,
mounted on the AC 800M hardware platform, constitutes an AC 800M Controller.
LED Indications
7DEOH 30/(',QGLFDWLRQV

Engraving
F (ault)
Color
Red
Function
Normal state - OFF

Re-start (INIT) illuminates F(ault)
temporarily.
Software program may also operate it.
R (un)
Green
Normal state - ON
Re-start (INIT) extinguishes R(un)
temporarily. At restart the (INIT) push
button is pressed (3 sec. or more) until
R(un) flashes.
Software program may also operate it.
P (owok)
Green
Normal state - ON
When illuminated, provides an indication
that dc/dc converter in PM860 is generating
valid +5 V and +3.3 V d.c. supply
voltages.No software control.
3BSE 019 193R201
73

Chapter 4 Operation
7DEOH 30/(',QGLFDWLRQV&RQWLQXHG

Engraving
B (attery)
Color
Function
Green
Normal state - ON
Illuminated when condition of internal or
external battery is satisfactory.
The LED is controlled by a software battery
voltage test - BATTOK (1).
Tx
Yellow
Data Transmission
CN1 + CN2
COM3 + COM4
Flashes in synchro with Tx traffic
Rx
Yellow
Data Reception
CN1 + CN2
COM3 + COM4
Flashes in synchro with Rx traffic
(1) The software performs cyclic battery voltage level tests via a dedicated input for controlling the
LED.The battery provides back-up power to the application memory and the real time clock
during power down. The battery is either accessible via the cover panel of the PM860 or
connected externally to the external battery connector. The battery voltage is tested by the SW.
The voltage is common for both internal and external battery. For this reason, ensure the
internal battery is removed when using an external battery, as having two batteries connected in
parallel will result in greatly reduced capacity.
Switches and Push buttons
7DEOH 306ZLWFKHVDQG3XVKEXWWRQV

Engraving
INIT
Type
Manual Push
button
Function
Initiates
1. Cold Restart if INIT is pushed less than
2.5 seconds.
2. Controller Reset if INIT is pushed more
than 3 seconds.
74
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 4.2 Start-up
Connectors
7DEOH 3073&RQQHFWRUV
Engraving
Function
External Power Supply Connection

L+
+24 V d.c.supply
L-
0V
SA
Redundant Power Supply monitoring input

Redundant Power Supply monitoring input
SB
External Battery Connection
SH
Shield (Screw Connector)
B+
Battery Positive (Screw Connector)
B-
Battery Negative (Screw Connector)

Modulebus Connection
Tx
Data Transmission Port (Optical)
Rx
Data Reception Port (Optical)

Note -Duplex or Simplex optical cables may be used.
MODULEBUS
Provides expansion of I/O module capability.
CEX-BUS
Provides extension of on-board communication ports.
6WDUWXS
For information about:
Firmware download
Controller IP address
Downloading application
Updating firmware
Refer to &RQWURO%XLOGHU%HJLQQHUV+DQGERRNSee Section 1.4, Related

3BSE 019 193R201
75

Chapter 4 Operation
6WDUW0RGHV
Warm Start
The tasks controlling the application starts. Variable values are initialized unless
they are marked 5HWDLQ or &ROGUHWDLQ.
To initiate a warm restart, disconnect the power supply for a few seconds.
The warm restart function will automatically be initiated on power restoration,
following a power failure.
Cold Restart
The application program is restarted. Variable values are initialized unless they are
marked &ROGUHWDLQ.
To initiate a cold restart, the Controller must be restarted by briefly pressing
the INIT push button, (less than 2.5 seconds).
Controller Reset
The system is stopped. The application program and the variables are erased.
To initiate Controller reset, press the Controller INIT push button (more than
3 seconds) until the Run LED begins to flash. A controller reset must be performed
if the system is in an undefined position and consequently unavailable to the user.
9HULILFDWLRQRI6DWLVIDFWRU\$&02SHUDWLRQ
In order to check that the AC 800M Controller is operating satisfactorily after
start-up, refer to Table 4-4, AC 800M Controller - Verification of Satisfactory
System Operation, which is provided to assist the Operator to assure themselves
that the AC 800M Controller plus all associated modules is operating correctly.
76
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 4.4 Verification of Satisfactory AC 800M Operation
Check the status of each LED indicator and compare it against the criteria listed in
the table. If the status is other than that listed, refer to Section 5.5, Fault Finding
Procedures.
7DEOH $&0&RQWUROOHU9HULILFDWLRQRI6DWLVIDFWRU\6\VWHP2SHUDWLRQ
AC 800M
Controller
Status
LED Indicator
Status
303URFHVVRU0RGXOH
F(ault) Red LED must be OFF
OK
R(un) Green LED must be ON (Steady)
OK
P(owok) Green LED must be ON (Steady)
OK
B(attery) Green LED must be ON (Steady)
OK
&,352),%86'30RGXOH
OK
OK
&,)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV0RGXOH
OK
OK
&,56&,QWHUIDFH0RGXOH
OK
OK
3BSE 019 193R201
77

Chapter 4 Operation
78
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.1 Preventive Maintenance Frequency Schedule
&KDSWHU 0DLQWHQDQFH
This chapter provides details of the preventive an corrective maintenance
requirements for the AC 800M Controller together with fault finding procedures for
both the system and individual units.
:DUQLQJBefore attempting any maintenance or fault finding procedures, read the
Appendix A, Safety Instructions. Failure to do this could lead to situations where
personnel are placed in danger and/or damage caused to equipment.
3UHYHQWLYH0DLQWHQDQFH)UHTXHQF\6FKHGXOH
7DEOH 3UHYHQWLYH0DLQWHQDQFH)UHTXHQF\6FKHGXOH
Frequency
Equipment
Procedure
At Regular, User
Defined,
Intervals
Complete
System
Carry out a visual inspection of all system

hardware, connectors and wiring. Inspect
for the following:
Physical damage and deterioration
Security of attachment
Condition of connectors and wiring
LED function
Correct any defects found.
2 Years
PM860
Internal Battery
(if fitted)
Change battery
Refer to Section 5.2, Changing the Battery
(Internal Battery)
5 Years
SB821
External Battery
(if fitted)
Change battery
Refer to Section 5.2, Changing the Battery
(External Battery)
3BSE 019 193R201
79

Chapter 5 Maintenance
&KDQJLQJWKH%DWWHU\
Internal Battery
The internal battery is mounted within the PM860 CPU module. As the battery is
the non-rechargeable type, it is important that battery is changed on a regular basis
to confirm its serviceability, refer to the Maintenance Frequency Schedule for
further details. Removal of the right-hand cover exposes an engraved detail on
the battery housing indicating the correct battery polarity arrangement. See
Figure 5-1 and 5-2.
Battery Type - Low rate lithium battery, 3.6 V, 950 mAh.
Size - ANSI Size AA / IEC size R6
Lithium Content - 0.3 g
When using an SB821external battery source it is important that the PM860 internal
battery is removed completely from its housing. Failure to do this will result in a
shorter than expected back-up time, as the both batteries will be connected in
parallel. In addition, supervision status is only provided for one battery.
It is possible to replace the internal battery with the AC 800M Controller on-line.
However, the usual safe working practices must be observed at all times.
However, a battery change must be carried out if any of the following circumstances
occurs:
When the PM860 B(attery) LED is flashing or completely extinguished.
When multiple or extended periods of supply power blackout have occurred.
When extended periods of system downtime have occurred, that is,

maintenance or malfunction.
For reasons of safety, only change the battery when the AC 800M is powered up.
80
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.2 Changing the Battery
Captive Screw
Cover
Internal
Battery
Holder
)LJXUH 305LJKWKDQG&RYHU5HPRYDO
3BSE 019 193R201
81

Use the procedure detailed below to change the internal battery

1.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, release the PM860 right-hand cover captive

screw and lift off the cover.
2.
Identify and remove the internal battery.
3.
Insert a serviceable battery in position, ensuring that the battery polarity and
orientation is correct.
4.
When power is re-established, ensure that the B(attery) LED is illuminated.
5.
Refit the PM860 right-hand cover and tighten the captive screw.
6.
Dispose of the redundant Lithium battery in an approved way.
F
R
P
B
INIT
Internal
Battery
+
-
PM860
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
CN1
CN2
Tx
Rx
COM3
Tx
Rx
COM4
)LJXUH 30,QWHUQDO%DWWHU\/RFDWLRQ
82
3BSE 019 193R201

SB821 External Battery Module
The external battery is mounted within the SB821 External Battery module.
As the battery is the non-rechargeable type, it is important that battery is changed on
a regular basis to confirm its serviceability, see Maintenance Frequency Schedule.
Removal of the external cover exposes the battery and battery housing. See
Figure 5-3. Take care to ensure that the polarity and orientation is correct when the
battery is replaced.
Battery Type - Low rate lithium battery, 3.6 V, 16 Ah.
Size - ANSI Size D / IEC R20
Lithium Content - 5.6 g
When using an SB821external battery source it is important that the PM860 internal
battery is removed. Failure to do this will result in a shorter than expected back-up
time, as both batteries will be connected in parallel. In addition, supervision status is
only provided for one battery.
However, a battery change must be carried out if any of the following circumstances
occurs:
When the PM860 B(attery) LED is flashing or completely extinguished.
When multiple or extended periods of supply power blackout have occurred.
When extended periods of system downtime have occurred, i.e. maintenance or

malfunction. For reasons of safety, only change the battery when the AC 800M
is powered up.
3BSE 019 193R201
83

Changing the Battery in a SB821 External Battery Module
Use the procedure detailed below to change an external battery.
84
1.
Disconnect the SB821 module cable connector.
2.
Release the SB821 module from the DIN rail.
3.
Carefully remove the SB821 module cover and identify the external battery.
4.
Read and comply with the Warning label / text located on the external battery.
5.
Carefully remove the external battery.
6.
Insert a serviceable battery in position, ensuring that the battery polarity and
orientation is correct. For further details on the battery, see Section B.8, SB821
External Battery - AC 800M Memory Back-up.
7.
Replace the cover, mount the unit on the DIN rail, and reconnect the cable
connector.
8.
When power is re-established, ensure that the B(attery) LED is illuminated.
9.
Dispose of the redundant Lithium battery in an approved way.
3BSE 019 193R201

SB821 3.6V Lithium Battery Unit

Note the warning
text on the battery.
!
X1
B- B+ SH
)LJXUH 6%([WHUQDO%DWWHU\0RGXOH&RYHU5HPRYHG
3BSE 019 193R201
85

0RGXOH&KDQJH2Q/LQH
With change on-line means adding or removing modules in a controller without
disturbing the execution of the running application program.
Modules are connected to the CEX-bus and to the electrical Modulebus (S800 I/O).
&(;EXV
Communication interfaces
CI851, CI852 or CI853
Must not be changed on-line
Baseplates for CI85x
0RGXOHEXV
S800 I/O modules
Can be changed on-line
Module Terminal Units (MTU:s)
&RUUHFWLYH0DLQWHQDQFH3URFHGXUHV
Changing Fuses - Modulebus and CEX-bus
Use the procedure detailed below to change the TP830 internal Modulebus and
CEX-bus fuses:
1.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, release the two PM860 cover spring-loaded

captive screws.
2.
Carefully lift off the PM860 CPU module.
3.
Identify both the Modulebus and CEX-bus fuse-holders which are mounted on
the TP830 Baseplate, to the right-hand side.
4.
86
Upper Fuse-holder - Modulebus - fuse 2 AF
Lower Fuse-holder - CEX-bus - fuse 3.15 AF
Using a flat bladed screwdriver, carefully unscrew the fuse-holder containing

the defective fuse.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.4 Corrective Maintenance Procedures
5.
Remove the defective fuse.
6.
Insert a serviceable fuse into position and replace the fuse-holder.
Upper Fuse-holder - Modulebus - fuse 2 AF
Lower Fuse-holder - CEX-bus - fuse 3.15 AF
7.
Refit the PM860 CPU module and tighten the spring-loaded captive screws.
8.
Ensure that the appropriate LED is illuminated.
3BSE 019 193R201
87

)DXOW)LQGLQJ3URFHGXUHV
)DXOW)LQGLQJWKH303URFHVVRU0RGXOH
7DEOH 30)DXOW)LQGLQJ3URFHGXUH
Fault
F(ault) LED is ON
Possible Cause & Corrective Action

Controller Re-start, (INIT), in progress
Wait for Controller restart to finalize.
If condition persists:
R(un) LED is OFF
Check that the CEX-bus fuse is serviceable
Check for a module failure,

(CI851/CI852/CI853), on the CEX-bus. See
Fault Finding, Table 5-4, 5-5 and 5-6.
No application loaded on the Controller
Load application
Restart Controller (INIT push button)
Controller application failed
B(attery) LED is flashing
Reload application
Restart Controller (INIT push button)
Battery power (Internal or External) is below an

acceptable level or non-existent.
Install new battery.
External battery cable disconnected.
Connect external battery cable
See Fault Finding Table 5-3.
88
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.5.2 Fault Finding the Internal Battery / SB821 External Battery
)DXOW)LQGLQJWKH,QWHUQDO%DWWHU\6%([WHUQDO%DWWHU\
7DEOH ,QWHUQDO6%([WHUQDO%DWWHU\)DXOW)LQGLQJ
Fault
B(attery) LED indicator on

PM860 CPU Module is
flashing
Possible Cause and Corrective Action
Renew the PM860 internal battery

OR, (If Fitted)
Check external battery connections.

If condition persists
The system time is incorrect

following a power failure
Renew the SB821External Battery module
Ensure that the software installed supports

the real-time clock.
Renew the SB821 External Battery module.
)DXOW)LQGLQJWKH352),%86'3&,
7DEOH 352),%86'3&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ
Fault
Neither R(un) nor F(ault)
LEDs are ON

The CI851 board is in the process of being restarted or configured. Allow time for this to finalize
If the condition persists, and all other modules on
the CEX-bus have non-illuminated LEDs:
3BSE 019 193R201
Check the CEX-bus fuse inside the PM860

CPU module
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the PM860

CPU module
Replace the CI851 module
89

7DEOH 352),%86'3&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ&RQWLQXHG

Fault
F(ault) LED is ON
Check all cables and connectors for damage,

loose or incorrect terminations.
R(un) LED is flashing
Repair as necessary
Check that the relevant units are sending data.

Check if the CI851 board is in the process of
being restarted or configured. If so, allow time for
this finalize.
If the condition persists:
Halt the application program and initiate a

restart.
Replace the CI851 board.
)DXOW)LQGLQJWKH)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV&,
7DEOH )281'$7,21)LHOGEXV&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ
Fault
R(un) and F(ault) The CI852 board is in the process of being restarted or
LEDs are not ON configured. Allow time for this to finalize
If the condition persists, and all modules on the CEX-bus have
non-illuminated LEDs:
Check the CEX-bus fuse inside the PM860 CPU module
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the PM860 CPU module
F(ault) LED is ON Use the Control Builder software to demand status information
from the CI852 module and proceed accordingly:
90
Initiate a reset signal (INIT) from the PM860 CPU module
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.5.4 Fault Finding the FOUNDATION Fieldbus - CI852
7DEOH )281'$7,21)LHOGEXV&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ&RQWLQXHG

Fault
One or more field
devices appear to
be slow to
respond or
completely dead

1. A device may be:
Incorrectly addressed
Connected with incorrect polarity
Faulty and causing breakdown or heavy loading of the

network
2. The fieldbus cable may:
Be damaged causing a short-circuit, breaks or grounding

of the data wires, (possibly intermittent)
Be incorrectly terminated
Contain sections having reversed polarity due to incorrect

connections
Cause supply voltage drops due to damage or bad

connections
3. The network power supply may be faulty
The network
problem is
proving very
difficult to solve
Rectify the network power supply
Give consideration to possible activities within the plant, such

as maintenance or repair work, which may be causing the
problem. Having totally ruled this out, then proceed as follows:
Check the d.c. supply voltage in powered networks by means
of a digital voltmeter having an input capacitance of less than
1000 pF.
3BSE 019 193R201
91

7DEOH )281'$7,21)LHOGEXV&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ&RQWLQXHG

Fault
The network
problem is
proving very
difficult to solve
(continued).

Examine the communication signals for abnormalities by
means of an oscilloscope.
The oscilloscope must be a differential or battery operated

type.
Any probes used must have a minimum of 1 MW input

resistance, and less than 1000 pF input capacitance.
Disconnect sections of the network, including the Ethernet

port via the PM860 CPU module, until it is reduced to a size
that functions correctly.
92
A hand-held fieldbus master unit should be used to

connect at different points of the network.
Reconnect the sections one at a time in order to locate the

unserviceable section. In the worst possible case, it may
be necessary to remove devices one by one to identify the
offending item.
The cables may be examined by using the ohmmeter,

(resistance), function of a digital voltmeter, having first
isolated the power supply and disconnected all other
devices.
For large networks, a network analyzer should be

employed. It must however be suitable for use with
FOUNDATION Fieldbus networks.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section 5.5.5 Fault Finding the On-board RS232-C Channels - CI853
)DXOW)LQGLQJWKH2QERDUG56&&KDQQHOV&,
7DEOH 2QERDUG56&&KDQQHOV&,)DXOW)LQGLQJ
Fault
The PM860 is transmitting and

the Tx1/Tx2 LEDs are flashing,
but the connected device is not
receiving data
Check that the communication

interface cable is attached.
Check the hand-shake signals.
Check that the baud rate, parity, and

the number of data and stop bits are
as specified by the connected device
Check that the hand-shake procedures

are as specified at both ends
Check that the driver routines are

adequate, both in the controller and in
the connected device
Disconnect power to the controller

and, after a short wait, power-up again
Halt the program and initiate a reset

signal (INIT) from the PM860 CPU
Module
OR
The connected device is
transmitting, but the Rx1/Rx2
LEDs are not flashing
The Tx/Rx signals are flashing
concurrently with the
transmission, but the messages
are not being received correctly
by the connected device.
3BSE 019 193R201
93

94
3BSE 019 193R201
6HFWLRQ$ *HQHUDO
Appendix A Safety Instructions
A.1 General
Always comply with the following Safety Instructions when installing and
operating an AC 800M Controller system, in order to minimize the risks of injury to
personnel and/or damage to the equipment. Local statutory regulations, should they
be stricter, must always take precedence over the following Safety Instructions.
The Safety Instructions are classified as mandatory reading for all suitably qualified
personnel intending to operate the AC 800M Controller.
$ :DUQLQJVDQG,QIRUPDWLRQ6\PEROVLQWKH7H[W0DUJLQ
Observe the symbols for warnings and information located in other Chapters and
Appendices of this manual. The symbols are placed in the left margin, adjacent to
paragraphs requiring special attention. An explanation of the symbols can be found
by referring to Chapter 1, Introduction - Use of Warning, Caution, Information, and
Tip Symbols.
$ 3HUVRQQHODQG3URFHVV6DIHW\
7$.(&$5($7$//7,0(6 - This will prevent accidents from occurring and
help protect valuable equipment.
A control system is a general tool which can be used to perform control of various
processes. Responsibility for attaining and maintaining a satisfactory level of safety
must therefore rest with the personnel who engineer, operate and maintain the
equipment. It is important that they have an intimate knowledge of, all the control
functions available, the inherent safety risks that may be involved in the process,
and possess the imaginative ability to anticipate situations in which accidents may
occur.
3BSE 019 193R201
95
$SSHQGL[$ 6DIHW\,QVWUXFWLRQV
Observe the following Safety Instructions:
96
Take care when:
Units are fitted or removed
Cables are connected or disconnected
Units are reset or switched to manual operation.
The AC 800M Controller system should be shut down before such actions are
taken.
Never connect the mains power supply to the equipment during installation
work.
Take extreme care when the mains power supply is connected the system, as it
is capable of causing injury or death to a human being.
Ensure that all personnel operating or maintaining the installation knows the
exact location of both the equipment safety isolating switch and the mains
power supply isolating switch and exactly how to operate them.
When the sub-sections of the process are checked and a test run has been
performed, a responsible person must check out interlocking chains, and so
forth. All concerned personnel must be fully informed regarding test runs that
are to be performed.
Process technicians are to be present when testing and operating the process
objects.
Never operate any System Initialization push buttons if any uncertainty exists
about exactly what occurs, within the system, during initialization. $/:$<6
&+(&.),567
Remember at all times, that the control system can be controlled from a remote
engineering station, connected at another node, via Control Network.
Remember, the AC 800M Controller will start automatically when voltage is

applied.
3BSE 019 193R201
6HFWLRQ$ 0DFKLQH6DIHW\
The level of safety can be improved considerably by taking steps to bring the
process to a safe state when power supplies, communication links or parts of the
control system fail. Such steps may, for instance, require the installation of valves or
relays which automatically return to a fail-safe position.
$ 0DFKLQH6DIHW\
Observe the following safety rules:
To avoid discharges of static electricity, ground both yourself and any tools
used before handling printed circuit boards and other sensitive pieces of the
equipment.
All electronic devices are sensitive to the ESD (electrostatic discharge) effect.
To avoid accidental damages while handling printed circuit boards, it is
recommended a wrist strap, earthed to the chassis, is worn. The wrist strap
must have a built-in protective resistor.
Anti-static, conductive plastic bags must to used to store and transport

the PC boards when in transit.
$ %HIRUHUHSODFLQJ,20RGXOHV
All procedures for replacing I/O modules can be found by referring to the relevant
I/O documentation.
Removing or replacing I/O modules with the system power connected can cause
injury to personnel and damage to equipment. It is therefore vital that total
disconnection of the power supply takes place, on the process side, before removal
or insertion of I/O modules takes place.
$ 0DLQWHQDQFH
It is recommended that a suitable supply of spare components in maintained in stock
to prevent avoidable periods of system downtime.
Ensure that back-up copies of the current application program are made, at regular
pre-determined intervals, to prevent avoidable periods of system downtime.
3BSE 019 193R201
97
$SSHQGL[$ 6DIHW\,QVWUXFWLRQV
$ 2SHUDWLQJ(QYLURQPHQW
Before the AC 800M Controller system is brought on-line, investigate which
environmental conditions are applicable. The following points are very important:
The product must not be exposed to conditions which exceed those values
stated in the relevant technical specifications.
The product must not be used in an environment where it is exposed to strong
electrical interference. Electrical machines can produce interference which
exceed the permitted levels for the equipment, for example, during repair work.
All products must be handled with appropriate precautions with regard to
electrostatic damage.
Important Software Check
Use the systems fault-monitoring facilities to prevent accidents or mishaps

occurring.
If in any doubt, $/:$<6&+(&. before executing any changes.
Important Hardware Notice
'2127under any circumstances,disconnect the power supply to a system

which is functioning normally. Always use the correct system shut-down
procedure prior to disconnecting the power supply.
Signal Noise Due to Cables
Cables which may cause electrical interference, (for example, power supply cables),
must not be installed adjacent to bus cables carrying fast digital signals. Ensure that
a minimum distance of 10 cm (4) is provided between them when installed inside
cabinets.
Hazardous Electrical Supplies
Operational and maintenance procedures, during which personnel may come into
contact with high-voltage supplies, should only be carried out by those personnel
that are fully trained in the maintenance of electrical equipment within those
environments and are fully aware of all the risks involved.
98
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.1 PM856/PM860 and TP830 - Processor Module
$SSHQGL[% +DUGZDUH0RGXOHV
% 3030DQG733URFHVVRU0RGXOH
.H\)HDWXUHV
MPC860 Microprocessor running at 48 MHz.

8 MByte RAM with internal or external battery
back-up facility.
12 x S800 I/O modules can be connected to the
electrical Modulebus.
Four on-board communication ports:
-CN1 + CN2, Ethernet ports (IEEE 802.3,
10Base T)
-COM3, serial port (RS232-C) with modem support
-COM4, serial port (RS232-C) for service tool
Basic communication is extendable by the addition
of up to 6 additional communication interface
modules.
)LJXUH % 3073
The data for PM856 are the same as for PM860 except for performance of
application program execution.
3BSE 019 193R201
99
7HFKQLFDO'DWD
0HPRU\
The CPU module incorporates:
2 Mbytes of system Flash PROM
8 Mbytes of SDRAM (5 Mbytes available for the application program and

3 Mbyte used for executable firmware).
CompactFlash card connector (not used in AC 800M, version 1.0 or 1.1).
3RZHU,QSXW&RQQHFWRU
Four pin, screw connector L+, L-, SA and SB.

3RZHU6XSSO\5HTXLUHPHQWV
Inputs designated L+ and L-: 24 V nominal, variation between 19.2 V d.c.

and 30 V d.c.
+HDW'LVVLSDWLRQ
5 W typical
10 W typical
(incl. full supply to Modulebus and CEX-bus,

see Appendix C, Power Consumption)
&XUUHQW&RQVXPSWLRQ
180 mA typical
(300 mA max.)
100
(excl. supply of Modulebus and CEX-bus,

see Appendix C, Power Consumption)
3BSE 019 193R201

5HGXQGDQW3RZHU6XSSO\6WDWXV,QSXWV
Inputs designated
SA, SB
Max input voltage
30 V
Min. input voltage for high level
15 V
Max input voltage for low level
8V
These inputs are status inputs and the threshold levels are limits for logic
0 or 1 on the inputs, they are not power fail limits.
3RZHU5HVHUYRLU
The CPU module has an internal power reservoir, lasting for 5 ms, which is
sufficient for the CPU to make a controlled power down.
&1 &1(WKHUQHW&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
Communication speed
10 Mbit/s
Signal levels
IEEE802.3, 10Base -T
Connector
RJ45
&206HULDO&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
Max communication speed 115 200 baud

Signal levels
RS232-C signal levels
Connector
RJ45
Modem support
Yes
3BSE 019 193R201
101
&206HULDO&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
Max communication speed 115 200 baud

Signal levels
RS232-C signal levels
Connector
RJ45
Modem support
No
(OHFWULFDO0RGXOHEXV
I/O capacity - 1 x S800 I/O base cluster with up to 12 x S800 I/O modules.
Max 24 V supply current - 1.0 A (short circuit proof, fuse 2 A fast).
24 V supply variation, follows the input power at L+.
Max 5 V supply current - 1.5 A (short circuit proof).
Optical Modulebus
I/O capacity up to 7 x S800 I/O clusters each with 12 modules.

&(;EXV
Max number of communication interfaces: 6.
Max 24 V supply current: 2.4 A (fuse 3.15 A fast).
%DWWHU\%DFNXS
The memory content is backed up with either an internal battery, or an external

battery unit (SB821).
7DEOH % %DFNXSWLPHV
6RXUFH
102
%DFNXSWLPH
Internal battery
Minimum 1 month (720 hrs)
External battery
Minimum 18 months
3BSE 019 193R201

'DWDIRULQWHUQDOEDWWHU\
Battery type:
Low rate lithium battery 3.6 V, 950 mAh.
Battery size:
ANSI size 1/2 AA, IEC size 1/2 R6.
Lithium content:
0.3 g.
'DWDIRUH[WHUQDOEDWWHU\
See SB821
(OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\DQG(OHFWULFDO6DIHW\
PM860/TP830 meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.

For more information regarding safety, please refer to Appendix A, Safety
Instructions.
3HUIRUPDQFH'DWD
The CPU modules PM856 and PM860 have the same internal design. They differ
only in performance when executing an application program.
Using the same application program in PM856 and PM860 the difference in
execution time can be expressed as:
Execution time in PM856 = 2 *Execution time in PM860
Example: If a certain application program has an execution time of PVLQ
30, the same application program will have an execution time ofPVLQ
30.
0HFKDQLFDO'DWD
3URWHFWLRQ5DWLQJ
IP20 according to EN60529, IEC 529.
3BSE 019 193R201
103
0RGXOH6L]H
Width
119 mm (4.7)
Height
186 mm (7.3)
Depth
135 mm (5.3)
(When not mounted, the CEX-bus contact will

protrude an additional 4 mm (0.16))
Width is measured along the DIN-rail, depth is measured from wall and height is
measured vertically inclusive lock mechanism.
0RGXOH:HLJKW
104
1100 g (2.4 lb)
(package PM856K01 with PM856, TP830 and

bus terminations)
1100 g (2.4 lb)
(package PM860K01 with PM860, TP830 and

bus terminations)
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.2 CI851 and TP851 - PROFIBUS-DP Interface
% &,DQG73352),%86'3,QWHUIDFH
.H\)HDWXUHV
Provides one PROFIBUS-DP port, (a DB9 female

connector located on the TP851 Baseplate).
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
Simple DIN-rail mounting

The CI851 handles cyclic read and write messages to
the slaves on the PROFIBUS-DP. The minimum cycle
time can be 1 ms, however, but this will depend on
the baud rate used and the number of attached slaves.
By using repeaters it is possible to connect a maximum of
124 nodes to one PROFIBUS-DP (32 nodes are permitted
on one segment).
Pre-set, two letter Alpha code lock installed in module
base to prevent incorrect mounting of non-compatible
components.
'HVFULSWLRQ
CI851
The CI851 / TP851 is used for connecting to remote I/O.

Via an external gateway on PROFIBUS-DP, field instruments
(on PROFIBUS-DP) can be connected to AC 800M.
The TP851 Baseplate has one female DB9 connector for
connecting PROFIBUS-DP. The baseplate has a code lock
that prevents the installation of an incorrect type of module
onto the TP851 Baseplate.
The CI851 expansion module contains the CEX-bus logic,

a communication module and a d.c./d.c. converter that
supplies the appropriate voltages from the +24 V supplied,
via the CEX-bus.The PROFIBUS-DP must always be
terminated at the two outermost nodes. ABB recommend the
use of connectors with built-in termination, as the fieldbus
will always be terminated, even if totally disconnected from the unit.
3BSE 019 193R201
Front View
CI851 / TP851
105
,QGLFDWRUV
7DEOH % &,352),%86'3/(',QGLFDWRUV

Designation/Color
106
Function
F(ault) /Red
Error detected in the module. Controlled by the

Control Software. Set and cleared by the
Hardware during Reset of the controller.
R(un) /Green
Operating. Controlled by the Control Software.

Cleared by the Hardware during Reset of the
controller.
Rx/Tx /Yellow
Transmission to or from the module.
RTS /Yellow
Request to transmit from the module.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.2 CI851 and TP851 - PROFIBUS-DP Interface
)XQFWLRQDO%ORFN'LDJUDP
Communication
Extension Bus
Communication
Extension Bus
+24V
D.c./d.c.
converter
Bus interface
+5V
Communication module
AnyBus -M PROFIBUS-DP
Communication Extension Module
Communication Extension Baseplate
Communication line
)LJXUH % %ORFN'LDJUDP&,
3BSE 019 193R201
107
7HFKQLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQ
7DEOH % &,352),%86'3,QWHUIDFH6SHFLILFDWLRQV

Item
Value
Type Designation
CI851 and TP851
Type
DP Master Class I
Protocol
PROFIBUS-DP
Transmission rate
See CB (9.6, 19.2, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500,

3000, 6000,
or 12000 kbit/s)
Galvanic isolation
Yes
Status indicators
Run normally green, FAIL exceptionally

red, the two traffic indicators RTS and
RX/TX are yellow flashing controlled by
the traffic pace.
Connector
DB9, female
Current consumption
150 mA typical (200 mA max.)
(from CEX-bus 24 V d.c.)

Heat dissipation
3.6 W typical
Capacity
Max 32 loads
Protection Rating
IP20 according to EN60529,

IEC 529
Weight
700 g (1.5 lb)
Dimensions
W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm
(package CI851K01 with

CI851 and TP851)
(W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D 5.0 inches)
108
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.3 CI852 and TP852 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Interface
% &,DQG73)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV+,QWHUIDFH
.H\IHDWXUHV
One FOUNDATION Fieldbus port provides

a communication speed of 31.25 kbit/s (FF H1)
F
R
Rx/Tx
Transformer isolated
No power consumed from the FF H1 bus
No power is supplied to the FF H1 bus
Pre-set, two letter Alpha code lock installed in module base
to prevent incorrect mounting of non-compatible
components.
'HVFULSWLRQ
The CI852, is used for connecting the FOUNDATION Fieldbus

H1 (FF H1) to the AC 800M. The FF H1 has a communication
speed of 31.25 kbit/s and is intended for remote connection of
field instruments. The CI852 is connected, via a transformer,
to the bus and as such neither supplies nor consumes electrical
power from the bus.
CI852
The number of field instruments that can be connected, via the

CI852, depends on the physical limitations in the FF H1
network together with any limitations in the software.
Refer to the software documentation regarding the software
limitations.
The FF H1 bus enables the re-use of the existing cabling for
4-20 mA analog signals. This means that the cables often
become the dominant dimensioning factor.
Connection of an FF configurator tool can be made directly
to the FF H1 bus.
3BSE 019 193R201
Front View
CI852 / TP852
109
See also, )281'$7,21)LHOGEXV:LULQJDQG,QVWDOODWLRQand $&0&)281'$7,21

)LHOGEXVsee Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
Functional Block Diagram
Communication
Extension Bus
Communication
Extension Bus
+24V
D.c./d.c.
converter
Bus interface
+5V
Communication module
with FOUNDATION
fieldbus interface
Communication Extension Baseplate
Communication line
110
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.3 CI852 and TP852 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Interface
Indicators
The CI852 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 interface has the following LED indicators.
7DEOH % &,)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV+/(',QGLFDWLRQV
Indication/Color
Function
F(ault) /Red

Control Software. Set and clear by the Hardware
during Reset of the controller.
R(un) /Green

controller.
Rx/Tx /Yellow
Transmission to or from the module
Technical Data
7DEOH % &,)RXQGDWLRQ)LHOGEXV,QWHUIDFH6SHFLILFDWLRQV

Item
Description
Type designation
CI852 and TP852
Type
- Foundation Fieldbus H1 master and link

schedule
- Note the complete controller has a HW capability
necessary for a Foundation Fieldbus linking
device
Number of channels
Single channel Foundation Fieldbus H1 (31.25

kbit/s)
Protocols
Foundation Fieldbus H1 via port on CI852
Transmission rate
31.25 kbit/s (FF H1)
Allowed node address
20 - 247
Galvanic isolation
By means of transformer
3BSE 019 193R201
111
7DEOH % &,)RXQGDWLRQ)LHOGEXV,QWHUIDFH6SHFLILFDWLRQV&RQWLQXHG

Item
112
Description
Status indicators
Red LED for error

Green LED for run
Yellow LED for traffic
Connector
Male 9-pin D-type connector
Current consumption from

CEX-bus 24 V
Heat dissipation
3.4 W typical
Protection Rating
Weight
700 g (1.5 lb)
Dimension
W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm (W 2.9 x H 7.3 x D

5.0 inches)
Refer to Section 2.14, Mounting Dimensions.
(package CI852K01 with

CI852 and TP852)
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.4 CI853 and TP853 - RS232-C Interface
B.4 CI853 and TP853 - RS232-C Interface

Key Features
Two RS232-C ports implemented with RJ45 connectors,

located on the TP853 Baseplate, (act as an extension of
the onboard RS232-C port on PM860 should more
RS232-C ports be required).
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Modem support
Tx2
Rx2

Transmission speed selectable between 75 baud and
115200 baud.
Ready-made Software options for several protocols
Pre-set, two letter Alpha code lock installed in module
base to prevent incorrect mounting of non-compatible
components.
'HVFULSWLRQ
Provides an RS232-C channel with full modem support for

each of the COM1 and COM2 ports. A modem (for example
TC562) will be required if the cables extend beyond 15
meters.
CI853
COM1
COM2
Front View
CI853 / TP853
3BSE 019 193R201
113
)XQFWLRQDO%ORFN'LDJUDP
Communication
Extension Bus
Communication
Extension Bus
+24V
D.c./d.c.
converter
Bus interface
+5V
Microprocessor with
FPROM, SRAM,
Dual Port RWM and
two serial interfaces
Communication Extension Base plate
Communication lines
114
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.4 CI853 and TP853 - RS232-C Interface
Indicators
7DEOH % &,56&/(',QGLFDWLRQV

Indication/
Color
Function
F(ault) /Red

Control Software. Set and cleared by the
Hardware during Reset of the controller.
R(un) /Green

controller.
Tx1 /Yellow
Lit if transmission to the COM1 port.
Rx1 /Yellow
Lit if receiving from the COM1 port.
Tx2 /Yellow
Lit if transmission from the COM2 port.
Rx2 /Yellow
Lit if receiving from the COM2 port.
Technical Data
7DEOH % &,56&&RPPXQLFDWLRQ,QWHUIDFH6SHFLILFDWLRQV

Item
Description
Type
Double unisolated RS232-C ports with modem

signals.
Number of channels
2 channels
Communication
CI853
Protocol
Determined by software, application and licenses.

Intended for Modbus, Siemens 3964R, COMLI
and custom designed protocols. Please refer to
CB for details.
3BSE 019 193R201
115
7DEOH % &,56&&RPPXQLFDWLRQ,QWHUIDFH6SHFLILFDWLRQV&RQWLQXHG

Item
116
Description
Transmission rate
Selectable in steps from 75 to 115200 baud.

75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000,
2400, 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200 baud.
This range of transmission rates can be limited by
the software protocol used, please refer to
documentation for the communication protocol.
Galvanic isolation
Unisolated
Status indicators
Run normally green, FAIL exceptionally red, the

four traffic indicators Rx and Tx are yellow
flashing controlled by the traffic pace.
Connector
Two RJ45 connectors on TP853
Current consumption
(from CEX-bus 24 V d.c.)
Heat Dissipation
2.4 W typical
Protection Rating
Weight
600 g (1.3 lb)
Dimension
W 59 x H 185 x D 127.5 mm (W 2.9 x H 7.3 x

D 5.0 inches)
For further information see Section 2.14,
Mounting Dimensions.
(package CI853K01with
CI853 and TP853)
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.5 Power Supply Modules - Types SD821, SD822 and SD823
B.5 Power Supply Modules - Types SD821, SD822 and SD823

Key Features

Parallel connection permitted for load sharing
Class I Equipment, (when connected to Protective Earth, (PE))
Over-voltage Category III for connection to primary main TN network of
Installation Category III
Protective separation of secondary circuit from primary circuit.
Secondary outputs;
SD823 = 24 Volts d.c. regulated @ 10 A
SD821 = 24 Volts d.c. regulated @ 2.5 A
Accepted for SELV and PELV applications

Safety Classification
The Power Supply Units, (PSU), are designed to meet all the applicable electrical safety data stated
by the EN 50178 harmonized European Standard Publication and the additional safety and function
data required by EN 61131-2 and UL 508.
The secondary output circuitry is accepted for SELV or PELV applications.
SELV according to EN 50178, EN 60950 and VDE 0100 Part 410.
For PELV applications; in accordance with EN 50178.
Protection Rating
IP20 according to EN 60529, IEC 529

Protective Class I according to EN 50718; 3.56
3BSE 019 193R201
117
110 mm (4.3)
50 mm (2.0)
103 mm (4.1)
97 mm (3.8)
SD821
L PE
230
44 mm
(1.7)
(4.9)
125 mm
L+ L+ L- LOK
Mains Voltage
Selection Switch
(115 / 230)
)LJXUH % 6'&RQQHFWLRQVIRU$3RZHU6XSSO\
118
3BSE 019 193R201

110 mm (4.3)
103 mm (4.1)
65 mm (2.6)
97 mm (3.8)
SD822
N
230
L PE
44 mm
(1.7)
125 mm
(4.9)
L+ L+ L- LOK
Mains Voltage
Selection Switch
(115 / 230)
3BSE 019 193R201
119
110 mm (4.3)
120 mm (4.7)
103 mm (4.1)
125 mm
(4.9)
97 mm (3.8)
SD823
N
L PE
OK
L+ L+ L- L-
44 mm
(1.7)
115V
230V

3RZHU6XSSO\8QLWV7\SHV6''HVFULSWLRQ
ABB recommend the use these robust and reliable power supply units, (PSUs), for providing power
to the AC 800M Controller, when connected to an industrial mains network of installation category
III. All three PSUs can be used for both non-redundant and redundant applications, as well as load
sharing functions.
The three PSUs were designed as switch mode power converters, that is, converting a.c. mains
supply voltage to a regulated 24 V d.c. output. The three converters have rated output capacities
as follows:
SD821 = 24 Volts d.c. regulated @ 2.5 A
120
3BSE 019 193R201

The mains input voltage is set to either 115 V or 230 V by means of a switch mounted on the front
face of the module. The factory default for this switch is in the 230 V position.
The output voltage of all three PSUs is, as stated, a regulated, low noise, 24 V d.c. A green LED,
mounted on the PSU front panel, indicates that the output circuit is providing the correct output
voltage level. The double connectors, provided on the 24 V d.c. output terminals, allow for the
connection of more than one equipment.
A surge current limiter within the PSU circuit, provides a soft-start feature. The controlled power-on
of a PSU therefore, will not trip fuses or earth-fault circuit breakers. In addition, the normal
disturbances that occur within an industrial main network will not cause any transient fault
conditions or trips to occur.
This means that the surge current limiter will effectively reduce the peak inrush current, caused by a
power disruption, to a level that the PSU can tolerate.
This soft-start, surge current limiter facility provides ease of design for the system power
distribution circuits.
X1
X2
Fuse
L+
LED
L+
LL-
PE
Chopper
)LJXUH % 368V6'DQG%ORFN'LDJUDP
3BSE 019 193R201
121
Insulation of Power Supply Units (PSU)
Basic with protective conductor. The primary circuit is separated from all other live circuit by
reinforced insulation.
Rated insulation voltage Primary to Secondary 300 V a.c.
Dielectric test voltage 3000 V a.c. (EN 60950).
Fuses and Protective Devices
Internal primary main fuses are arranged to meet the requirements of electrical safety publications
for connection to the Phase - Neutral terminals of primary main network; TN network, 1 (one) fuse.
Recommended primary external fuse:
Micro Circuit Breaker (MCB) 10 Amperes, characteristic B.
7DEOH % 3RZHU6XSSO\8QLWV)XVHVDQG3URWHFWLYH'HYLFHV
Fuse
SD821
SD822
SD823
Primary: Internal fuse
3.15 AT
4 AT
6.3 AT
Primary: Recommended external fuse (1)
10 A (1)
10 A (1)
10 A (1)
Secondary: Short circuit
<5 A
<10 A
<20 A
Secondary: Over-load protection
3 A> I
I <5 A
6 A< I
I< 10 A
12 A< I
I<20 A
Secondary: Over-Voltage protection
32 V typ
29 V typ
35 V typ
(1) Microcircuit Breaker (MCB), Characteristic B
122
3BSE 019 193R201

Technical Data
7DEOH % 368V6'DQG7HFKQLFDO'DWD

Parameter
SD821
SD822
SD823
Converter Converter Converter
Rated output current (A)
2.5 A
5A
10 A
Rated output power
60 W
120 W
240 W
Rated output voltage
24 V
24 V
24 V
Rated input power
160 VA
70 W
280VA
135 W
690 VA
265 W
Mains/input voltage, nominal
115/230 V
a.c.
115/230 V
a.c.
115/230 V
a.c.
Mains voltage variation allowed
85 - 110%
85 - 110%
85 - 110%
Mains/input voltage,
max. a.c.= 45-65 Hz
138/275 V
a.c.
138/275 V
a.c.
138/275 V
a.c.
Surge; Primary peak current at power on
25 A
15 A
30 A
Power Factor (at rated output power)
0.47 typ
0.5 typ
0.5 typ
Heat dissipation
8.6 W
13.3 W
26.7 W
Efficiency factor
87% typ
90% typ
90% typ
Output voltage regulation at max. current
+-2%
+-2%
+-2%
Ripple (peak to peak)
25 mV
25 mV
30 mV
Secondary voltage holdup time at mains

blackout
>20 ms
>20 ms
>20 ms
Maximum output current
5A
10 A
20 A
3BSE 019 193R201
123
7DEOH % 368V6'DQG0RXQWLQJ'LPHQVLRQV

Parameter
SD821
Converter
Dimensions, Width 50 mm (2.0)
SD822
Converter
SD823
Converter
65 mm (2.6)
120 mm (4.7)
HxD = 125 x 110

mm (4.9 x 4.3)
124
Mounting spacing
W mm
10 mm (0.4)
15 mm (0.6)
15 mm (0.6)
Mounting spacing
H mm
25 mm (1.0)
25 mm (1.0)
25 mm (1.0)
Weight (lbs)
600 g (1.3 lb)
700 g (1.5 lb)
1100 g (2.4 lb)
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.6 SS822 Voting Unit - (for Redundant Power Supply)
B.6 SS822 Voting Unit - (for Redundant Power Supply)

Redundant Power Supply Configurations
The SS822 Voting Unit has been specifically designed to be employed as a control unit within
a redundant power supply configuration. The output connections from two identical Power Supply
Units, (PSUs), are connected to the SS822 Voting Unit, see Chapter 3, Configuration, Figure 3-3
and Figure 3-4.
The SS822 Voting Unit separates the redundant PSUs, supervises the voltage supplied,
and generates supervision signals to be connected to the computer system. Green LEDs, mounted
on the front panel of the SS822, provide a visual indication that the correct output voltage is being
delivered. Simultaneously with the green LED illuminating, a voltage free contact closes the path to
the corresponding OK connector. SS822 Voting Unit trip levels, (2 off), are factory preset,
see Table B-11 SS822 Voting Unit - Supervision Data, for details.
110 mm (4.3)
103 mm (4.1)
50 mm (2.0)
97 mm (3.8)
SS822
A+B+L+L+L-
44 mm
(1.7)
(4.9)
125 mm
OK+ F OK+ F
A
B
)LJXUH % 669RWLQJ8QLW&RQQHFWLRQV
3BSE 019 193R201
125
7DEOH % 669RWLQJ8QLW6XSHUYLVLRQ'DWD

Supervision Data
SS822
Voltage, low trip level (for decreasing 22 V

voltage)
Voltage, low trip hysteresis
0.7 V
Voltage, high trip level for rising

voltage
30 V
High trip hysteresis
0.7 V
Contact rating a.c.
Max. 120 V and max. 0.5 A
Contact rating d.c.
Max. 28 V and max. 1 A;

min. 1 mA, recommended min. 5 mA
7DEOH % 667HFKQLFDO'DWDDQG0RXQWLQJ'LPHQVLRQV

Parameter
SS822 Voter
Rated output current (A)
20 A
Rated output voltage
24 V
Rated input power
500 W
Mains/input voltage, nominal
2 x 24 V d.c.
Mains/input voltage, max
35 V d.c
Heat dissipation
10 W
Output voltage regulation at max.

current
0.5 V lower than input
Maximum output current
35 A (Overload)
Protection Rating
IP20 according to EN60529, 7IEC 529
Dimensions, Width
50 mm (2.0)
HxD = 125 x 110 mm

(4.9 x 4.3 inches)
126
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.7 TC562 Modem Module - (Westermo MD-12DC)
7DEOH % 667HFKQLFDO'DWDDQG0RXQWLQJ'LPHQVLRQV&RQWLQXHG

Parameter
SS822 Voter
Mounting spacing W mm
10 mm (0.4)
Mounting spacing H mm
25 mm (1.0)
Weight (lbs)
800 g (1.8 lb)
% 7&0RGHP0RGXOH:HVWHUPR0''&

TC
U
J
)LJXUH % 7&0''&0RGHP

'HVFULSWLRQ
The TC562 Short Distance Modem module can be used both for point-to-point communication and
for communication over a distance between different equipment or modules, for example between a
computer and a printer or a robotic device. ABB recommend their use when the distance between
modules/equipment exceeds 15 m. For further details refer to documentation from the manufacturer,
Westermo.
Using a modem allows the distance between equipment to be as much as 18000 m, and can provide
a data transmission speedof up to 38400 bit/s, depending on the distance. The modems are
manufactured to be simply mounted onto a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
The transfer between the modems take place along two twisted-pairs, one at full/half duplex and
the other at simplex. The transfer distance is totally dependent of the cables resistance and
capacitance. ABB recommend a cable area of minimum 0.2 mm2 with a capacitance between
40-80 pF/m within an industrial environment.
3BSE 019 193R201
127
In a office environment, ABB recommend a cable area of minimum 0.14 mm2, and the capacitance
of between 40-100 pF/m. Use a shielded cable in a heavily industrial environment and a unshielded
cable in a office environment. A shielded cable is often given a higher capacitance and therefore will
provide a higher data transmission speed.
7HFKQLFDO'DWD
7DEOH % 7&7HFKQLFDO'DWD

TC562 - Short Distance Modem
Manufacturer - Westermo - MD-12DC
Type
Transfer
Asynchronous, full/half duplex/simplex
Power Supply
24 V DC (Min. 12 V DC - Max 36 V DC)
Power Consumption
3W
Dimension
55 x100 x 128 mm (2.2 x 3.9 x 5.0 inch)
Weight
400 g (0.9 lb)
7DEOH % 7UDQVIHU'LVWDQFH&DEOHPPS)P
128
Meter (yds)
bit/s
1000 (1094)
19200
2500 (2734)
9600
5000 (5468)
4800
8000 (8749)
2400
12000 (13123)
1200
18000 (19685)
600
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.8 SB821 External Battery - AC 800M Memory Back-up
% 6%([WHUQDO%DWWHU\$&00HPRU\%DFNXS
'HVFULSWLRQ
The SB821 battery module is used as an external

power supply to provide extended memory
back-up for the AC 800M Controller.
The module is DIN-rail mounted and provided
with a separate connecting cable, (TK821V020),
which is 2 meters, (2.2 yds), in length.
7HFKQLFDO'DWD
Type
Lithium battery,
low rate
Nominal Voltage
3.6 V
Capacity
16 Ah
Back-up Time
Min.18 Months
Amount of lithium
5.6 gram
(0.18 oz.)
SB821
6L]H
IEC R20 (33 x 60 mm)
ANSI Size D (1.3 x 2.4)
0HFKDQLFV
Module dimensions in mm (inch):

Width
85.6 mm (3.4)
Depth
51 mm (2)
Height
136 mm (5.4)
Weight
600 g (1.3 lb) (package with SB821,

battery and
TK821V020)
3BSE 019 193R201
SB821 3.6V Lithium Battery Unit

Note the warning
text on the battery.
!
X1
B- B+ SH
129
% ',15DLO76
The figure below shows the profile and dimensions in mm (inch.) of the DIN Rail TS 35/7.5.
The normal supplied length is 2 meters (6.6), (to standard DIN 46 277, EN 50 022).
7.5
(0.3)
7.5
(0.3)
35
(1.4)
6
27
(0.2)
(1.1)
15
(0.6)
10
(0.4)
)LJXUH % ',15DLO76'LPHQVLRQV
% &DELQHWV
ABB recommend the following two models of Cabinets for the enclosure and mounting of
the AC 800M Controller plus associated modules and equipment:
130
RM550 - Floor Mounted Cabinet
RE820 - Wall Mounted Cabinet.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.10 Cabinets
50)ORRU0RXQWHG&DELQHW7HFKQLFDO'DWD
7DEOH % 50)ORRU0RXQWHG&DELQHW7HFKQLFDO'DWD

Cabinet Type
Characteristics
RM550
Cabinet(1) Dimensions WxDxH
840 x 512 x 2125 mm

(31.5 x 13.0 x 40.1)
Cable Entry
214 x 275 mm (8.4 x 10.8)
Weight(2)
156 kg (344 lb)
Doors
Double
(1) The dimensions includes door and rear plate. If lifting angles are used add 53 mm on the height.
(2) The weight does not include equipment to be installed within the cabinet.
3BSE 019 193R201
131
2125
(84)
840 (33)
A-A
512 (21.2)
14 (4x) Mounting Holes
702 (27.8)
419 (15.7)
)LJXUH % 50)ORRU0RXQWHG&DELQHW'LPHQVLRQV
132
3BSE 019 193R201

0RXQWLQJWKH50&DELQHWWRWKH)ORRU
Four holes, located in the base of the cabinet, are provided to allow attachment of the cabinet to
the floor. When attaching the cabinet to the floor, use size M13 fixings (nuts and bolts or expansion
bolts). Each bolting point features two D14 mm holes for the M13 fixtures. If drilling is necessary,
ensure that dust and other foreign matter does not enter any equipment that may be already mounted
in the cabinet. Please note the minimum distances, (as stated below), from cabinet to walls and
ceiling. If necessary, use washers as a packing between the floor and the cabinet base, to level the
cabinet prior to final installation. The use of large diameter plain washers is recommended to ensure
the maximum connection area between the cabinet base and the expansion bolts threads.
0LQLPXP'LVWDQFHVIRU0RXQWLQJ
These minimum distances are a free space, 150 mm (5.9) high between the top of the cabinet and
the ceiling or the underside of any beam, duct or similar structure over the cabinet. If you have
cables entering the cabinet from above, the space available should be at least 1000 mm (39.4) high
to provide an adequate working space. The distance between the rear and the sides of the cabinet and
an adjacent wall shall be no less than 40 mm (1.6). This will ensure adequate ventilation in and
around the cabinets.
5(:DOO0RXQWHG&DELQHW7HFKQLFDO'DWD
7DEOH % 5(:DOO0RXQWHG&DELQHW7HFKQLFDO'DWD

Cabinet Type
Characteristics
RE820
Cabinet(1) Dimensions WxDxH
800 x 330 x 1020 mm

(31.5 x 13.0 x 40.1)
Cable Entry
See Figure B-13 for dimensions
Weight(2) Cabinet
46 kg (101 lb)
Doors
Double
(1) The dimensions includes door and rear plate. If lifting angles are used add 53 mm (2.1) on the
height.
(2) The weight does not include equipment to be installed within the cabinet.
3BSE 019 193R201
133
25 mm (1)
1000 mm (39.3)
1020 mm (40.1)
773 mm (30.4)
800 mm (31.5)
330 mm
(13)
719 mm (28.3)
A-A
FL 21
FL 21
255 mm
(10.4)
230 mm
(9.1)
300 mm
(11.8)
637 mm (25.1)
)LJXUH % 5(:DOO0RXQWHG&DELQHW'LPHQVLRQV
134
3BSE 019 193R201

(0.4)
D=17mm
(0.67)
998mm (39.3)
D=10mm
D=10mm (0.4)
773mm (30.4)
)LJXUH % 5(0RXQWLQJKROHV
3BSE 019 193R201
135
0RXQWLQJWKH5(&DELQHWRQD:DOO9HUWLFDO6XUIDFH
Four D10 holes, one located at each rear corner of the RE820 cabinet, are provided to allow
attachment of the cabinet to a wall or vertical surface. Note the minimum distances for mounting,
(as stated below), from the cabinet to adjacent walls and ceiling, prior to measuring and marking
the intended drilling points.
Using a spirit level, ensure that the cabinet will be level on the wall, prior to drilling any mounting
holes. When attaching the cabinet to the wall, use size M10 fixings (nuts and bolts or expansion
bolts). When drilling, take steps to ensure that dust and other foreign matter does not enter any
equipment that may be already mounted in the cabinet.
If necessary, add washers as a packing between the wall stand-off mountings and the cabinet
backplate, to level the cabinet prior to final installation. Use wall stand-off mountings, as required.
The use of large diameter plain washers is recommended to ensure the maximum connection area
between the cabinet and the expansion bolts threads.
0LQLPXP'LVWDQFHVIRU0RXQWLQJ
These minimum distances are a free space, 150 mm (5.9) high between the top of the cabinet and
the ceiling or the underside of any beam, duct or similar structure over the cabinet. If cables entering
the cabinet from above, the space available should be at least 1000 mm (39.4) high to provide
an adequate working space.
The distance between the rear and the sides of the cabinet to any adjacent wall shall be no less than
40 mm (1.6). This will ensure adequate ventilation in and around the cabinets. Use wall stand-off
mountings, as required.
136
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.11 Miscellaneous Equipment
% 0LVFHOODQHRXV(TXLSPHQW
% 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;EXV0DOH
TB850 Terminator for CEX-bus.
Terminator
TB850
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
PM860
CPU module
CI851
CI851
)LJXUH % 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;PDOH
3BSE 019 193R201
137
% 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;EXV)HPDOH

A TB851 (female) Terminator for CEX-bus is required when a TK850 extension
cable is used.
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Rx/Tx
F
R
Rx/Tx
RTS
PM860
CPU module
CI853
CI852
CI851
COM1 COM2
TK850 Cable
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
F
R
Rx/Tx
CI853
CI853
CI852
COM1 COM2
COM1 COM2
Terminator
TB851
)LJXUH % 7%7HUPLQDWRUIRU&(;IHPDOH
138
3BSE 019 193R201

Section B.11.3 CEX-bus Extension Cable - Type TK850
% &(;EXV([WHQVLRQ&DEOH7\SH7.
An extension cable, (length 0.7 meter (2.3)), complete with connector (type DB25P- metal
housing). Used to provide connectivity to Communication Interface modules between adjacent
DIN-rails.
% 7RRO&DEOH7\SH7.
7HFKQLFDO'DWD
&RQQHFWRUV
One 9-pole female D-type connector

One 8-pole RJ45 plug connector
:HLJKW
125 g (0.3 lb)

/HQJWK
3.0 m (9.84)
AC 800M
RJ45 plug
RTS 1
DTR 2
TD 3
0V 4
0V 5
RD 6
DCD 7
CTS 8
Shield
8 CTS
6 DSR
2 RD
1 DCD
50V
3 TD
4 DTR
7 RTS
Shield
PC
Female 9-pin,
D-type connector
)LJXUH % &DEOHFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
3BSE 019 193R201
139
% $O3URILOH6XSSRUW)RU',15DLO
All modules comprising the AC 800M controller are mounted on DIN rails
(type: TS 35/7.5). However, the DIN rail itself is not rigid enough to support the
modules on its own. For that reason a support, such as an Al-profile, which has been
specifically designed for supporting DIN rails is recommended (see Figure B-18).
Refer to price list for additional information.
The key features of the Al-profile are:
Simple mounting features.
No drilling required, profile incorporates pre-formed channels suitable for selftapping screws.
Provides secure mounting in locations subject to extreme vibration, see

Figure 2-2.
Rigid, non-flexible construction.
Easy fit, press-in cable retaining duct
Pre-formed
channels
Al-profile
DIN rail
Cable Duct
)LJXUH % $O3URILOHIRU',15DLO6XSSRUW
140
3BSE 019 193R201

Section C.1 General
$SSHQGL[& 3RZHU&RQVXPSWLRQ
& *HQHUDO
At 40 C (104 F) ambient, it is considered unnecessary to calculate the heat
dissipation requirements for a standard AC 800M Controller with
S800 I/O configuration, mounted within ABB floor or wall mounted cabinets.
For a standard AC 800M Controller configuration, housed within a floor or wall
mounted cabinet, the recommended fuse rating for the external mains supply
is as follows:
7DEOH & $&00RXQWHGLQ$%%&DELQHW)XVH5HTXLUHPHQWV
)XVH5DWLQJ
10 A
)XVH7\SH
Slow to Rupture
Should the configuration be other than that stated, detailed instructions for
calculating current consumptions can be found in the following text.
The tables below present the current consumption and power dissipation of all
relevant hardware modules included in AC 800M Controller
Use this information:
When dimensioning the supply requirements of an AC 800M and S800 I/O

configuration
When calculating the power loss generated in a cabinet.
The values given in the tables are typical and adapted to these kinds of applications.
It is assumed that 70 percent of the channels on a module are active simultaneously.
3BSE 019 193R201
141
& &XUUHQW&RQVXPSWLRQDQG3RZHU'LVVLSDWLRQ
&XUUHQW&RQVXPSWLRQDQG3RZHU'LVVLSDWLRQ
Refer to Table C-2 for typical current consumption and power dissipation data for
AC 800M modules.
7DEOH & 7\SLFDO&XUUHQW&RQVXPSWLRQDQG3RZHU'LVVLSDWLRQ'DWDIRU
$&00RGXOHV
&XUUHQWDW9
Module
7\SLFDO
3RZHU'LVVLSDWLRQ
0D[
7\SLFDO
5HPDUNV
0D[
PM860
180 mA
300 mA
5.0 W
8.0 W
CI851
150 mA
200 mA
3.6 W
5.0 W
CI852
140 mA
200 mA
3.4 W
5.0 W
CI853
100 mA
150 mA
2.4 W
3.6 W
(1)
(1) These figures are for the PM860 alone. For current consumption data relating to the CEX-bus and
the Modulebus modules, see Table C-3 below.
The PM860 supplies the following currents to modules on the CEX-bus and
the Modulebus.
7DEOH & 30&XUUHQW6XSSO\WR&(;EXVDQG0RGXOHEXV
Bus
+5V
(1)
Modulebus
max. 1.5 A
CEX-bus
Not Applicable
+24V
max. 1.0 A
max. 2.4 A
(1) Corresponds to additional 0.5 A on +24 V.
Maximum current on +24 V supplied to PM860 (incl. supply of Modulebus and

CEX-bus) is:
8
0,18 --- + 1,0 + 2,4 + 0,5 = 4,2 A
5
142
3BSE 019 193R201

Section C.2 Current Consumption and Power Dissipation
Due to transfer/conversion losses in PM860 when full currency supply to

Modulebus and CEX-bus is used, the power dissipation of PM860 increases
with 5 W to a total of 13 W.
&DOFXODWLRQV
1.
Calculate the current requirements on each bus, (Modulebus and CEX-bus).

Ensure that the limits detailed in Table C-3 are not exceeded. Data relating to
TB820 and CI830 can be located in the 6,2GRFXPHQWDWLRQ. See Section
1.4, Related Documentation and Media.
2.
With a maximum of 6 modules on the CEX-bus, the current requirements will

be within the stated limits, therefore there is no requirement to check against
Table C-3.
3.
Calculate the current consumption at 24 V, for each electrical Modulebus,

by adding:
,m = ,(24V) + ,(5V) x 0.3
4.
To calculate the requirement for a specific power supply unit, add all the 24 V
current consumptions, as follows:
,tot = ,m1 + ,m2 + .... + ,modules Table C2 + ,CI830 + ,TB820
3BSE 019 193R201
143
144
3BSE 019 193R201

Section D.1 Recommended Components
$SSHQGL[' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV
' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV
All of the recommended components, listed below, were successfully used during
ABBs exhaustive testing phase, prior to the launch of the AC 800M Controller.
7DEOH ' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV352),%86'3
Component
PROFIBUS-DP
Description
No specific PROFIBUS-DP components are recommended,

due to the large selection of commercially available equipment
available, manufactured to the PROFIBUS-DP Standard.
For further details refer to 352),%86'3:HE6LWH
(See Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media).
7DEOH ' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV

Component
FOUNDATION
Fieldbus
Description
No specific FOUNDATION Fieldbus components are

recommended, due to the large selection of commercially
available equipments available, manufactured to the
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Standard (IEC 1158-2).
This statement covers all FOUNDATION Fieldbus equipments,
including:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus filters.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus bus spur distribution terminals.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus termination
For further details refer to )281'$7,21)LHOGEXV:LULQJDQG

,QVWDOODWLRQDQGWKH)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV:HE6LWH)LHOGEXV
2QOLQH(See Section 1.4, Related Documentation and Media).
3BSE 019 193R201
145
7DEOH ' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWVIRU&RQWURO1HWZRUNV

Component
Description
HUBS
3Com Hub, 8/TPO - (8 ports, RJ45)
(For NonIndustrial
Environments)
Suitable for smaller systems

No supervision required.
No configuration required.
Plug and play capability.
BayStack, 350/24 - (24 port, Star topology, RJ45)
Suitable for larger systems

Supervision required.
Fibre optic capabilities
No plug and play capability.
HUBS
Hirschmann Rail Hub RH1-TP- (4 ports, RJ45)
(Industrial
Environments)
Suitable for small to medium systems

No supervision required.
High Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
Rugged Design for high temp use
Plug and play capability.
SWITCHES
(Industrial
Environments
Hirschmann Rail Switch RS2 (8 ports, Ring, Bus or Star

topology RJ45)
Suitable for larger systems

Supervision required.
High Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
Rugged Design for high temp use
No plug and play capability.
CABLES
Electrical - Class 5, STP

Optical - As recommended by Manufacturer of HUBS
SWITCHES
146
3BSE 019 193R201

Section D.1 Recommended Components
7DEOH ' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV0LVFHOODQHRXV

Component
DIN rail
DIN rail
Accessories
Description
Phoenix:
TS 35/7.5
Steel, yellow chromated with holes
DIN 46 277, EN 50 022
DIN-rail end support device

Phoenix: UK 4-TG+ST-BE
(Standard commercially available components)
3BSE 019 193R201
147
7DEOH ' 5HFRPPHQGHG&RPSRQHQWV3URFHVV&DEOHV

Component
Description
Process Cables
Mains
Various Manufacturers, to Standard;
RS232-C
RKFK 3x1.5mm2
Belden
Belden 8723 2 pair (0.34mm2)
Unitronic
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
CY 3 x 0.25mm2
CY 7x 0.25mm2
Unitronic
Suitable Commercially Available Cable.
Belden
PROFIBUS-DP
Suitable Commercially Available Cable.
Unitronic
Twisted pair, 0.34 mm2
Unitronic-Bus L2/F.I.P
Belden
148
Twisted pair, 0.34 mm2
Belden 3079A
3BSE 019 193R201

Section E.1 Electro-magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
$SSHQGL[( 'LUHFWLYH&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
Relevant products comply with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low-Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC. The products are provided with a CE marking.
( (OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\(0&

Units mentioned in this document, for which the product or packing is CE marked,
are tested and approved according to the following standards:
EN 61131-2 Product Standard, Programmable Controller

- Industrial Environment
EN 50081-2 EMC Generic Emission Standard,

Part 2 Industrial Environment
EN 50082-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard,

Part 2 Industrial Environment.
( /RZ9ROWDJH'LUHFWLYH/9'

Units mentioned in this document for which product or packing is CE marked
comply with the LVD where applicable, that is, if they are connected to
50 - 1000 V a.c. and/or 75 - 1500 V d.c.
The units are IP20 semi-protected equipment and must be mounted in non-public
localities.
1RWHIf you use other power supplies except SD821 SD822 or SD823 to provide
24 V d.c. they must also be CE marked.
To fulfill the CE low-voltage directive, the power supply shall provide a secondary
safety extra low voltage (SELV) or a protected extra low voltage (PELV).
SD821, SD822 and SD823 power supply modules fulfil these requirements.
3BSE 019 193R201
149
$SSHQGL[( 'LUHFWLYH&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
150
3BSE 019 193R201

Section F.1 Environmental Data for Automation Products within ABB
$SSHQGL[) (QYLURQPHQWDO'DWD
) (QYLURQPHQWDO'DWDIRU$XWRPDWLRQ3URGXFWVZLWKLQ$%%
The immunity of products from ABB Automation Products to environmental factors
during operation, transportation and storage is summarized in this section.
,QGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQWhas a power network supplied from a high or medium
voltage transformer dedicated for the supply of an installation feeding
manufacturing or similar plants. The ,QGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQW is characterized
by the existence of industrial apparatus, heavy frequently switched inductive or
capacitive loads and the associated magnetic fields are high.
Control products incl. I/O-systems (e.g. Advant, Freelance, Harmony) are normally
intended for ,QGXVWULDOHQYLURQPHQW.
The products, manufactured by ABB or others, are normally type tested or
evaluated to ensure compliance with the environmental standards specified below.
The environmental specifications applicable to peripheral equipment, for example
printers, may differ. Please refer to the data sheets of the products concerned.
The degree to which the units withstand environmental influence depends on their
components and their design. The system enclosures, the types of cable and how
these are routed determine the environmental specification of the complete system.
3BSE 019 193R201
151
F.1.1 Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions

F.1.1.1 Industrial Environment
7DEOH ) ,QGXVWULDO(QYLURQPHQW
Environmental Specification
Environment
Factor
Climatic Conditions
Operative
Range
Compliance
with Standard
-25 to +70 C
&DELQHWV (1):
+5 to +40C
-25 to +60 C (3)
8QLWV (2)
+5 to +55C
+10 to +40 C (3)
Temp. change
Min. 3min within

temp. range
3 C/min.
EN 61131-2
Humidity
RH=5-95%
RH=20-80% (3)
noncondensation
RH=5-95%
RH=20-80% (3)
max 29g/m3
noncondensation
EN 61131-2
Altitude
3000 m
2000 m
EN 61131-2
Temperature
Pollution degree
Corrosion
152
Transportation
and Storage
Degree 2
EN 61131-2
IEC 60664
Copper corrosion Copper corrosion ISA 71.04 class

of 300 Angstrom of 300 Angstrom G1
(4) over 28 days
(4) over 28 days
ITF SSG 4251G1
3BSE 019 193R201

Section F.1.1 Climatic and Mechanical Environmental Conditions
7DEOH ) ,QGXVWULDO(QYLURQPHQW&RQWLQXHG

Environment
Factor
Vibration
Transportation
and Storage
Operative
Range
10< f <50Hz, Continuous: 0.0375

mm amplitude
Compliance
with Standard
EN 61131-2
(Occasional: 0.075 mm amplitude)
Mechanical Conditions
50< f <150Hz, Continuous: 0.5g

acceleration
(Occasional: 1.0g acceleration)
5< f <500Hz, Continuous: 0.2g
acceleration (3)
Emitted noise
Shock, no
package
<55dB (A)
2
150 m/s , 11ms

20 g, 3ms
(3)
DAT drives; 5 g,
3ms
Fall in package
<10kg: 1m
150 m/s2, 11ms

20 g, 3ms
EN 61131-2
(3)
DAT drives; 5 g,
3ms
EN 61131-2
10-40kg: 0.5m
>40kg: 0.25m
>100kg: 0.025m
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Cabinets = Enclosures, Cases, Consoles

Units = Subracks, plug-in units, printed circuit boards
Workstation, PC computers and peripherals, for example printers
1000 Angstrom for S800 I/O-family
3BSE 019 193R201
153
F.1.2 CE Compliance
All products comply with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC (relevant products fulfil also the Teleterminal Directive).
The products are provided with a CE marking. Some products require enclosure,
as specified in User Guides, to meet the EMC Directives.
Compliance to the Directives is verified by the practice of the following standards
at the minimum:
154
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
EN 61131-2 Product standard, Programmable controllers.
EN 50081-2 Generic emission standard.
EN 50082-2 Generic immunity standard.
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
EN 50178 for all new products, e.g. S100 and S800 family, or good electrical
safety practice based on EN 60950, EN 61010, EN 50178, EN60439,
IEC60255 depending on the product.
Teleterminal Directive 91/263/EE.
3BSE 019 193R201

Section F.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions
F.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Main Voltage Conditions

7DEOH ) (OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\DQG0DLQ9ROWDJH&RQGLWLRQV
Industrial
Environment
Environment Factor
Emission
Compliance with
Standard
Class A
EN 55011
10V/m
EN 61000-4-3
-Radiated
-Conducted
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
Immunity
-Radiated RF field
Immunity
ENV 50 204
10V
EN 61000-4-3
Immunity
4 kV contact discharge
EN 61000-4-2
-ESD (Electrical
Discharge)
8 kV air discharge
Immunity
2 kV, power ports
-EFT/B (Electrical Fast

Transient/Burst)
1 kV, other lines
Immunity
IEC 60255-22-1
Immunity
30 A/m, cont.
EN 61000-4-8
-Power frequency
magnetic field
3 A/m for CRTs
Immunity
2 kV, common
-Surge
1 kV, differential
-Conducted RF field
EN 61000-4-4
-Damped oscillatory
wave
3BSE 019 193R201
EN 61000-4-5
155
7DEOH ) (OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\DQG0DLQ9ROWDJH&RQGLWLRQV&RQWLQXHG

Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
Environment Factor
156
Industrial
Environment
Compliance with
Standard
Main voltage a.c
Unom: -15% to +10%
Main voltage d.c.
-15% to 20% of rated

value
Main frequency a.c.
47 - 63 Hz, 5%
IEC 60255-6
Main voltage
interruption, a.c.
Max 10ms
EN 61000-4-11
Overvoltage
Category
Class III
Permanently
connected equipment
Overvoltage
Category
Class II
-Non-permanently
connected equipment
3BSE 019 193R201

Section F.1.4 Installation Requirements
F.1.4 Installation Requirements

Installation rules for all products are included in relevant product documentation.
Some general installation rules and applications are described below.
F.1.5 The Laying of Field Cables

There are no special requirements for the laying of field and communication cables
connected to products, except:
Cables for short-distance communication without modems should always be
routed 10 cm (4 inches) away from other cables.
All cables connected to products should be run 30 cm (12 inches) away from power
cables (heavy current cables) not belonging to products and 10 cm (4 inches) away
from cables belonging to class 4 of relevant international immunity standards.
F.1.6 Types of Field Cables

Shielded cables are always required for:
Communications (see product documentation for the type of cable)
High-frequency pulse transmission (see product documentation

for the type of cable)
Low level analog signals e.g. Pt100 and thermocouples
Analog application with a system accuracy > 12 bits
For other applications it is possible to use unshielded cables.

Digital and analog signals of the same type can be run in the same cable.
Signal and return conductor are always to be located in the same cable.
3BSE 019 193R201
157
F.1.7 Lightning Strike Protection

Industries and power plants are normally equipped with well integrated earthing
networks which are installed as part of the power distribution system.
In such installations it is not necessary to install additional protection against
lightning strike.
Additional protection against lightning strike is always necessary when:
Cables extend beyond the area covered by the earth line network
Cables are located above ground
Overhead cables are used.
F.1.8 Inductive Load Suppression

Inductive load such as relays and contactors directly connected to products do not
have to be suppressed. The necessary suppression components (varistors or
snubbers - RC units) are installed on the circuit boards.
F.1.9 Environmental Friendly Product Design

Products are constructed and manufactured by ABB Automation Products AB
which is certified according to the environmental protection standards ISO 14001.
This means that the products are designed to increase energy savings in customers
applications, reduce the products harmful effects on the environment during its life
cycle and to improve disassembly and recycling at the disposal stage.
158
3BSE 019 193R201
,QGH[
,1'(;
$
AC 800M 95
Alpha Code Lock 34
%
Battery
External
How to Change 84
Internal
How to Change 80
&
Cabinet 20, 29, 130
CEX-bus Extension Cable
TK850 46
CI851
Communication Interface 4
CI852
CI853
CN1 Port
RJ45 Port for Ethernet 38
CN2 Port
RJ45 Port for Ethernet 38
Cold Restart 76
COM3
RS232C Port 39
COM4
RS232C Port 40
Connection To
Control Network 63
Foundation Fieldbus H1 43
Profibus-DP 41
Connectors 75
Control Builder 20, 61
3BSE 019 193R201
Control Network
Connection To 63
Controller Reset 76
CPU 20
Current Consumption 142
'
DIN-rail 20
(
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility 25
External Battery
How to Change 84
)
Foundation Fieldbus H1
Connection To 43
Fuse Requirement 141
Fuses
How to Change 86
Fusing of External Mains Supply Cable 27
*
Grounding 97
+
How to Change
External Battery 84
Fuses 86
Internal Battery 80
,
I/O units 97
I/O-systems 151
Internal Battery
How to Change 80
159
,QGH[
/
LED Indicators 73
Locking Device 30
RS232C Port
COM3 39
COM4 40
Mains Net Filter 26

Module to Baseplate Alpha Code Lock 34
Modulebus
Electrical 64
Optical 64
3
Planning
Cable routing 25
Cooling 24
Grounding 25
Laying of Field Cables 25
Lightning Protection 26
Temperature 24
To remember 24
Type of Field Cables 26
Vibration 24
PM856 1
PM860
CPU Unit 4, 7
Power supply 96, 98
Precautions 98
Processor Module (PM860/TP830) 7
Product overview 4
Profibus-DP 66
Connection To 41
Protective Earth 27
Protective resistor 97
Push Buttons 74
Safety Switch 27
SB821
Battery Back-up Module 4
External Battery Module 83
SD821
Power Supply Module 4
SD822
SD823
Signal noise 98
SS822 52, 125
Switches 74
7
TB850
Terminator for CEX-bus 50
TB851
Terminator for CEX-bus 51
Terminator for CEX-bus
TB850 50
TB851 51
TK850
CEX-bus Extension Cable 46
TP830
Baseplate 4, 7
TP851 41, 105
TP852 43, 109
TP853 45, 113
5
Removing Modules
How To 32
RJ45 38
160
3BSE 019 193R201
,QGH[
Type Designation
CI851 4
CI852 4
CI853 4
PM856 1
PM860 4, 7
SB821 4, 83
SD821 4
SD822 4
SD823 4
TP830 4, 7
:
Warm Start 76
3BSE 019 193R201
161
,QGH[
162
3BSE 019 193R201
3BSE 019 193R201

August 2001
! "#$
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
#
))
( ! ##
&*
#
)
,# -(
! "
( ! ##
&*
( ! ##
&*
%
)
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
%
-,!$ *
**/ #!# #
%
5
'
* )
-*#
2 -,!$ * 6
2; -,!$ * 65
; # 3
0$/ ( #
; # 3
; (
; # 3
; (2 <
; # 3
; (2 /
; / -,!$ *
5
'
#
#
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
( #
( #
( #
. *
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
-, *
$
. *
0$!# #-
=!-
2
)2 ))
)2; # 3(
! # #
; # 3
0$
*= *#
&
'
(" (
')*
++
&(
1 2
1 2
1 2
+
3 -)) 4 ( # #- "
** 3 ($
- #
3 (
" $
3 (
"
-,!$ # 3 *
6 7 !
89 : *
-,!$ # 3 *
65 7; / 89 : *
5
%
1 2
1 2
.( +/ $
(
2 '2& *
& ' #
& ' #
! (
-* >
#
; (
; (
1 2
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
.( +/
S800 I/O Digital Input
DI800_1
DI_W1auxSwCloseQ51
DI_AuxSwCloseQ71
Move_16_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
In14
Out14
In15
Out15
In16
Out16
WCU1auxSwClose3
AC800auxSwClose3
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Form the common diagnostics word

Hardware diagnostics
AllUnitStat.HwState
c.DeviceError
DeviceFault3
DeviceAlarm3
c.DeviceWarning
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
5
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Common alarm and fault

AuxiliarySupplyFlt
1WCU1auxSwClose
1AC800auxSwClose
&
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
gReset
gAuxSupplyFlt
Form_CommonDiagWord
0
0
2DeviceAlarm
2DeviceFault
gMT1almAct
gMT1fltAct
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
gCommonDiagWord
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
'
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Emergency Stop
SetEstop
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
gEstop
gReset
WatchDogHw
PulseGenerator
Enable
Out
PulseTime ParError
PeriodTime
c.Time_250ms
c.Time_500ms
WatchDogHwUpdate
Form_WatchdogWord
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WatchDogWord_IN
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
WatchDogWord
:=
WatchDogWord_OUT
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
%
5
'
%
5
'
$
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
.- 3 *)
.- 3 *#
*1
,
*1
* ) *)
* ) *#
$ ( ) *)
$ ( ) *#
.- 3 *4 *)
.- 3 *4 *#
( ; (
*1
,
*1
* ) *)
* ) *#
$ ( ) *)
$ ( ) *#
%
5
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
( #
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
2%
)2)
( ; (
) " .- 3 *#
) "
* ) *#
* #
&
'
(" (
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
.( +/ $
2 '2& *
& ' #
! (
! (
2 2
*2 " .-
')*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
++
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
&(
%
%
%'
%5
%%
%
%
%
"
"
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
! .( +/
DI800_3
DI_mTR1buchAlm
DI_mTR1buchFlt
DI_mTR1oilTempAlm
DI_mTR1oilTempFlt
DI_mTR1oilLevMin
DI_mTR1oilLevMax
DI_mTR1windTempAlm
DI_mTR1windTempFlt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Move_16_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
In14
Out14
In15
Out15
In16
Out16
mTR1bucholzAlm2
mTR1bucholzFlt2
mTR1oilTempAlm2
mTR1oilTempFlt2
mTR1oilLevMin2
mTR1oilLevMax2
mTR1windTempAlm2
mTR1windTempFlt2
"
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Main Transformer 1
1mTR1windTempAlm
1mTR1oilTempAlm
>=1
mTrafo1OilTempFlt
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
1mTR1oilTempFlt
gReset
>=1
1mTR1windTempFlt
mTrafo1buchFlt
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
1mTR1bucholzFlt
Form_mTR1diagWord
gMCB1closed
1mTR1bucholzAlm
0
1mTR1oilLevMin
1mTR1oilLevMax
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
mTR1diagWord3
>=1
gMT1fltAct4
>=1
gMT1almAct
"
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Panel / Profibus communication page

PanelData1
2mTR1diagWord
Move_TR_Panel_Profibus
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
gMT1diagWord
&
"
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Fault Class
2gMT1fltAct
>=1
gFC1_TR
'
"
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
$
;
;
(= ; $ # 3
( #
. *
. *
&
'
(" (
')*
++
&(
#
#
#
+
-, *
# *; (
-, *
# *; ( 9$ # 3
(
5
'
%
5
'
;
2 #! ( "
2 #; /#)
2 #; @#)
2 #; ;#)
* )!-)
* ); (
* ); (
** -, !# #
2 #
# #
2 #
#! (
2 #
# A!;
!; 2
3
!; 2
( #
(
.
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
*
*
*
*
#
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
.
(
(
.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
-, * =
( "
# *; (
" ) 1 ? .
'
'
'%
1 2
1 2
1 2
-, *
-, *
= !# #- ; (
= !# #- ; ( 9 (*= ( 3
-, *
= !# #- ; ( 9 (*= ( *
#
*
#
+
!; # # 3 . #
!;
!;
!;
!;
!;
!;
!;
. *
( #
. *
. *
. *
. *
. *
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
+
5
5
5
-,
-,!- *= *#
-,!$ *
0 * 1 #
((
;
((
;
((
!;
((
!;
((
& # #- * (
((
;
((
# #
((
# A- =
((
#< ) A
((
#! ( #
((
#! (! *
((
# A #
((
#@ *#
((
!;
(( <
2 -,!$ * 6
2
""
2
2 )
=!#
2
"2
2 -,!$ * 6
.
.
.
.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5%
5
55
5'
5
5
5+
'
'
'
'%
2 # !# #
2 $ !- *=
2
#
2 )
= ""
2
2>
* *)
2
(=
2
(= "
2
(= 2
(
2; ( ) *)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
'
+
%
%
%
%%
%
%5
%'
%
%
%+
%
5
'
2
2
-, ! A
3
$ # 3
-, *
3.#
-, *
-, *
-, *
-, *
-, *
-, *
-, *
.#
= !# #- ; ( 9 # #
= !#
= !#
= !#
= !#
= !#
= !#
= !#
#######-
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
9 "*# *
9 "*# *
9 -,
A
9 3
9$ # 3(
* #
%
5
'
+
5
#
!
'
*#
( "
-,@ *#
,#
* #
,#
*
-*#9 :
A- #
A- #
5
#
- 9 :
#
9 : -,!$ # 3 *
6 7 #
: *
%
'
$ !-
-,89
*=9 :
5
5
%
'
%&
"#
'
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'

/0 1 /..1 23&56
94
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
%
'
'5
''
'
'
'+
$
2; ( )
""
)
#
#
*#
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(
(
(
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(
(
(
.
(
=!#
""
">
*#
>
*(
>
>
*
-*#; (
-*#; (%
-*#; (
%
5
'
+
(
(
3
3
*
*
#
%
5
'
+
+
+
+
+%
+
+5
+'
+
+
++
>
>
* * )
*
& # #- * (
;
; (
# -,!$ *
# #
# #
#
# A- =
# A- =04
#1 ( . #
#< ) A
&
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
*
#
*
. *
( #
*
*
( #
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
'
(" (
')*
1 2
++
&(
+
!#
(
(
+
%
%
%
. *
. *
( #
*
*
($ (
( #
( #
*
( #
*
($ (
. *
. *
( #
( #
*
*
($ (
($ (
. *
. *
. *
. *
*
( #
. *
. *
( #
. *
. *
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
%%
!; !#
%
%5
%'
%
!;) (-* #
!;
3.# (
!;
!#
!; (=
.
.
.
.
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
%
5
'
%
5
'
%
5
'
# #
= #
-*# *
-*# *
-*# *
93 3
#=
-*# *
9* $
#=
& # ## *; (
#
#
#
#
#
#
7 #
#< ) A04
# !# #
# !#
#! ( #
#! ( # )
#! ( "
#! ( "2!
#! (! *
# A #
# A#
#; /# )
#; /#)
#; /#) 2!
#; /#) *)
#; /#) *#
#; @# )
#; ;# )
#; @#)
#; ;#)
#; @#) 2!
#; ;#) 2!
#; @#) *)
#; ;#) *)
#; @#) *#
#; ;#) *#
#@ *#
#@ *#
#
#; ) *)
#; ) *#
!;
!; * )
!; ""
#9
#9
#- * 7 #
8
#- * 7 *8
" A- = 04 7 #
8
" A- = 04 7 *8
* ( 7B8
) * " A- = 04
8
) * " A- = 04 7
#- *
#
#
(
# A-
*
#- *
*#
#- *
!# #- ; (
!# #- ; (9 * )
!# #- ; (9 )
= ""
7 ""
# 8
!# #- ; (9 )
= #
7 "" % # 8
!# #- ; (9 ) (-* #
!# #- ; (9
!# #- ; (9 (=
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
*8
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
%
%
%+
$
!; (= "
!; (= !; ) #
!;#
(
*=
$ !#
-
- #
. *
. *
. *
. *
( #
. *
. *
-
'
- #!
<
%
+
5
! ( # .
!# # -*
!# #- ; (
2 )
&
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
*( #
2 )
*( #
*
. *
( #
#
#
#
'
(" (
')*
++
&(
!#
!#
!#
!#
(
####"
;
;
;
;
,#
* " -*#
( = 93
7 -# -#8
( = 93
7 -#8
# #3 .= *-
()
(9 (= "
(9 (= (9 ) #
(9 #
(
#
-
#)
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
" #3 (
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
5
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
%
5
'
%
5
'
%
5
'
+
%
%
%
%%
%
%5
%'
%
%
%+
%
5
'
+
5
2
2
2
-, * =!- *= *#
-,
(= -, ! A)
* -* # 2 )
3
"" )
3
)
3
* 1
) 2
& # ## *2 -, *
2
2
2
2
( # #
( # #
( # #
( # # %
( # #
( # # %
""! #
"" )
# ! #
#
)
#
#
)
)2 ;
)2 ;
)2 * ); (
)2 * ); (
)2 -*#; (
)2 -*#; (%
)2 -*#; (
)2
;
)2
; (
)2!# #- ; (
> #2 !;
> #2 !;
> #2 !;
# ; (
/
# ; (
@
# ; (
;
2 ""
* #
-* >
# 2
!# # -*
!# # )
2
# *
+
2 2
2 2
2 2
(
!
!
.( +/ $
* 2 ** 2 **
"
-
1 2
0 -
* -* #
( =
(3 -
"
! (
) 2( #
)1
2 '2& *
2 '2& *
2 2& *
2 2& *
2
!
2
!
2
!
2
!
2
!
2
!
! (
"
! (
"
!
3
#
#
#
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
& ' #
!# #(
& ' #
&# ' &
&# ' &
&# ' &
2 2
2 2
2 2
!
2
-* >
2
#
*2
" .-
"
# *2 2
()
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
'
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
.( +/
Start Pulse
StartPulse
1
0
StartTimer
Trigger
Request Out
Periodic
Period
TOf
In Q
PT ET
StartPulse2
c.Time_10s
+ ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&

DI800_1
0
DI_MauxSwCloseQ41
0
0
0
DI_AuxSwCloseQ10
DI_Fan1fuse
DI_Fan1run
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DI_PowerSupply
Move_16_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
In14
Out14
In15
Out15
In16
Out16
MotAuxSwClose10 23
AuxSwClose10 23
Fan1fuse22
Fan1run22
PowerSupply10 23
DI800_2
DI_DriveOn
DI_DriveOff
DI_MotorStart
DI_Reset
DI_EmergencyStop
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Move_16_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
In14
Out14
In15
Out15
In16
Out16
DriveOn17
DriveOff17
MotorStart17
Reset17
EmergencyStop17
, ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
S800 I/O Digital Output

DO800_1
Move_8_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
19MSWreadyOn
19MSWreadyRef
19MSWreadyRun
11GeneralTrip
19MSWeOff
7MotWTmpAlm
7MotWTmpFlt
11GeneralAlarm
DO_ReadyOn
DO_ReadyRef
DO_ReadyRun
DO_Tripped
DO_EmergencyOff
DO_WindTmpAlm
DO_WindTmpFlt
DO_GeneralAlm
DO800_2
22FanGrp1on
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Move_8_Bool
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
DO_FanOn
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
S800 I/O Analog Input

AI800_1
AI_MotW1Utmp
AI_MotW1Vtmp
AI_MotW1Wtmp
Move_8_RealIO_values
In1
Out1V
In2
Out2V
In3
Out3V
In4
Out4V
In5
Out5V
In6
Out6V
In7
Out7V
In8
Out8V
Out1S
Out2S
Out3S
Out4S
Out5S
Out6S
Out7S
Out8S
MotW1Utmp7
MotW1Vtmp7
MotW1Wtmp7
MotW1Utmp_S9
MotW1Vtmp_S9
MotW1Wtmp_S9
AI800_2
AI_MotSpdRef
Move_8_RealIO_values
In1
Out1V
In2
Out2V
In3
Out3V
In4
Out4V
In5
Out5V
In6
Out6V
In7
Out7V
In8
Out8V
Out1S
Out2S
Out3S
Out4S
Out5S
Out6S
Out7S
Out8S
MotSpdRef21
MotSpdRef_S
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
S800 I/O Analog Output

AO800_1
21MotSpdActrpm
21MotTorqueAct
21MotCurrActA
Move_8_Real
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
AO_MotorActSpeed
AO_MotorActTorque
AO_MotorActCurrent
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
DDCS Communication
MCW=60.01
ACW1=60.02
ACW2=60.03
Drivedataset100
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
17MCW
18ACW1
18ACW2
ddcsMCW
ddcsACW1
ddcsACW2
NREF=60.04
Drivedataset102
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
21NREF
ddcsNREF
ddcsMSW=61.01
ddcsASW1=61.02
ddcsASW2=61.03
Drivedataset101
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
ddcsMSW
ddcsASW1
ddcsASW2
MSW19
ASW120
ASW220
ddcsMotSpdAct=61.04(1.08)
ddcsMotTorqAct=61.05(1.12)
ddcsMotCurrAct=61.06(1.11)
Drivedataset103
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
ddcsMotSpdAct
ddcsMotTorqAct
ddcsMotCurrAct
MotSpdAct21
MotTorqAct21
MotCurrAct21
ddcsMotSpeedScaling=63.01(50.01)
ddcsMotVoltage=63.02(1.18)
ddcsMotFrequency=63.03(2.20)
Drivedataset111
ddcsMotSpeedScaling
ddcsMotVoltage
ddcsMotFrequency
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
MotSpeedScaling21
MotVoltageAct21
MotFrequency21
ddcsMCBstatusClosed=63.04(5.10)
ddcsMotNomFreq=63.05(6.17)
Drivedataset113
Move_DDCS
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
In3 Out3
ddcsMCBstatusClosed
ddcsMotNomFreq
MCBstatusClosed21
MotNomFreq21
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Motor temperature supervision

MotorWinding1U
PT100_0_200
TempIn
TempOut
AlarmLim TempAlarm
FaultLim TempFault
Reset
4MotW1Utmp
c.AlmMotWind1Utemp
c.FltMotWind1Utemp
gReset
MotW1Utemp26
MotW1UtmpAlm8
MotW1UtmpFlt10 12
MotorWinding1V
PT100_0_200
TempIn
TempOut
AlarmLim TempAlarm
FaultLim TempFault
Reset
4MotW1Vtmp
C.AlmMotWind1Vtemp
C.FltMotWind1Vtemp
MotW1Vtemp26
MotW1VtmpAlm8
MotW1VtmpFlt10 12
MotorWinding1W
PT100_0_200
TempIn
TempOut
AlarmLim TempAlarm
FaultLim TempFault
Reset
4MotW1Wtmp
C.AlmMotWind1Wtemp
C.FltMotWind1Wtemp
MotW1Wtemp26
MotW1WtmpAlm8
MotW1WtmpFlt10 12
>=1
MotWTmpAlm3 11 22
>=1
MotWTmpFlt3 11
# ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Alarm Words
Form_AlarmWord1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7MotW1UtmpAlm
7MotW1VtmpAlm
7MotW1WtmpAlm
0
0
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
AlarmWord126
Form_AlarmWord2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19MSWalarm
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
AlarmWord226
+
DINT_TO_BOOL
AlarmSum18
% ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Diagnostic Word
Form_MeasDiagWord
CheckStatusCodes
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
c.IOunitOK
4MotW1Utmp_S
4MotW1Vtmp_S
4MotW1Wtmp_S
MeasDiagWord26
& ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
5
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Fault Words
Form_FaultWord1
0
0
0
0
7MotW1UtmpFlt
7MotW1VtmpFlt
7MotW1WtmpFlt
0
0
0
0
24CH4linkLost
19MSWtripped
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
FaultWord126
Form_FaultWord3
0
0
0
2MotAuxSwClose
2AuxSwClose
2PowerSupply
12FC1diag
12FC2diag
12FC2hipDiag
12FC2lopDiag
13Estop
19MSWeOff
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
FaultWord326
Form_FaultWord4
22Fan1Grp1ovld
0
22Fan1Grp1ackFlt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
FaultWord426
10
' ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
'
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
General Trip and Alarm

7MotWTmpFlt
22FanGrpFC2lop
23AuxSupplyFlt
19MSWtripped
gMT1fltAct
>=1
GeneralTrip3
7MotWTmpAlm
19MSWalarm
gMT1almAct
>=1
GeneralAlarm3
11
+ ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Fault Classification
gFC1_TR
>=1
FC118
>=1
FC218
>=1
FC2hip18
>=1
FC2lop18
0
7MotW1UtmpFlt
7MotW1VtmpFlt
7MotW1WtmpFlt
23AuxSupplyFlt
0
0
22FanGrpFC2lop
0
>=1
ACS6000 Fault Class
FCestopTimer
&
20ASW2_FC1
20ASW2_FC2
20ASW1_FC2hip
20ASW1_FC2lop
>=1
TOn
In Q
PT ET
FCestop13
>=1
FC1diag10
>=1
FC2diag10
>=1
FC2hipDiag10
>=1
FC2lopDiag10
0
c.Time_5s
0
12
, ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Emergency Stop
24CH4linkLost
12FCestop
>=1
Estop10 17
:=
gEstop
13
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Auxiliaries On/Off Control

Control_Auxiliaries
20ASW2auxOnSeq
23AuxSupplyFlt
&
0
19MSWremote
0
0
0
0
19MSWeOff
RemLoc
DIremoteOn
MSW_RemoteOn
ASW2_AuxOnSeq
DIauxOnLocal
DIauxOffLocal
AuxOnRemote
AuxOffRemote
MSW_EmergOff
AuxCtrlOn
LubPumpOn
JupPumpOn
MotFanGrpOn
LocalOn
AuxOn15
MotFanOn22
14
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
DDCS Control
All Aux ON State
14AuxOn
22FanGrp1on
19MSWprocessStop
&
AllAuxOnState
AuxOnSequenceTimer
TOf
In Q
PT ET
20ASW2auxOnSeq
c.Time_5s
AuxOnReadyRun
>=1
RS
Set Q1
R1
20ASW2_FC2
ACW1readyRun18
PulseGenerator_1
1
c.Time_500ms
c.Time_1s
PulseGenerator
Enable
Out
PulseTime
ParError
PeriodTime
ACW1watchDog18
15
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Status Word
19MSWreadyRef
20ASW1startinhibit
&
Form_StatusWord
&
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
gReset
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
StatusWord26
16
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
DDCS Control Words

On_Off
RS
Set Q1
R1
2DriveOn
2DriveOff
2EmergencyStop
13Estop
>=1
FC2reset
RS
Set Q1
R1
2Reset
>=1
Form_MCW
gReset
1
2MotorStart
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
MCW6
17
# ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Form_ACW1
1
15ACW1readyRun
1
15ACW1watchDog
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
ACW16
Form_ACW2
8AlarmSum
0
12FC1
12FC2
0
0
12FC2lop
12FC2hip
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ConvB16Dint
I1
O_Dint
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
ACW26
18
% ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
DDCS Status Words

Get_MSW
DintToBit16FB
Integer BoolStruct
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
6MSW
MSWreadyOn3
MSWreadyRun3
MSWreadyRef3 16 25
MSWtripped10 11
MSWonInhibited
MSWalarm8 11
MSWremote14
MSWprocessStop15
MSWmodulating
EoffTimer
EoffSet
TOf
In Q
PT ET
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
EstopTimer
EstopSet
c.Time_2s
MSWeOff3 10 14 22
gReset
TOf
In Q
PT ET
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
MSWeStop
>=1
EstopOrOff
19
& ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%5
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Get_ASW1
6ASW1
DintToBit16FB
Integer BoolStruct
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
ASW1startinhibit16
ASW1zerospd
ASW1_FC2hip12
ASW1_FC2lop12
Get_ASW2
6ASW2
DintToBit16FB
Integer BoolStruct
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
ASW2_FC112
ASW2_FC212 15
ASW2watchDog24
ASW2auxOnSeq14 15
ASW2charging
20
' ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%'
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
DDCS Actual Values

Comp_MCBstatus
6MCBstatusClosed
0
6MotVoltageAct
Comp_dint
I1 I1_H_I2
I2
Equal
I1_L_I2
gMCB1closed
DINT_TO_REAL
MotVoltage26
3.15
6MotFrequency
DINT_TO_REAL
ABS
MotFrequencyHz
0.1
MotNomFreqHz
6MotNomFreq
DINT_TO_REAL
/
0.1
/
MAX
1.0
Motor actual torque %
6MotTorqAct
DINT_TO_REAL
MotTorqueAct5
*
6MotCurrAct
DINT_TO_REAL
6MotSpdAct
DINT_TO_REAL
20000
6MotSpeedScaling
ABS
MotLoadAbsPct26
MotCurrActA5 26
/
INT_TO_REAL
DINT_TO_REAL
MotSpdActrpm5
/
10.0
ABS
SpeedActAbs26
4MotSpdRef
REAL_TO_DINT
100.0
*
20000
:=
NREF6
21
+ ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Fan Control
Fan_Control
14MotFanOn
2Fan1fuse
2Fan1run
7MotWTmpAlm
19MSWeOff
gReset
Fancontrol_1_1
Mot_Fan1_OnOff
Mot_Fan1_Ovld
Mot_Fan1_Ack
Mot_Temp_Alm
Eoff
Reset
Mot_Fan1_On
Mot_Fan1_OvldFlt
Mot_Fan1_AckFlt
Mot_Fan_FC
FanGrp1on3 15
Fan1Grp1ovld10
Fan1Grp1ackFlt10
FanGrpFC2lop11 12
22
, ()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Auxiliary Supply Fault

&
2MotAuxSwClose
2AuxSwClose
2PowerSupply
gAuxSupplyFlt
AuxiliarySupplyFlt
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
gReset
>1)
>1) AuxSupplyFlt11 12 14
23
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
%
$ '(,
"
%+
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Channel 4 WatchDog
Chan4OnTimer
TOn
In Q
PT ET
20ASW2watchDog
c.Time_3s
Chan4OffTimer
TOf
In Q
PT ET
>=1
Channel4Link
RS2and
Set Q1
R1
R2
gReset
CH4linkLost10 13
24
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
Running days, hours and seconds

Calculate_RunningTime
RunningTime
TimeCountersIn
DriveRunning
ResetTime
19MSWreadyRef
RunningTimeReset
TimeCountersOut
RunningCounters
:=
RunningCountSrc
25
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
To Profibus and Panel communication page

PanelData
16StatusWord
21SpeedActAbs
21MotLoadAbsPct
21MotCurrActA
21MotVoltage
7MotW1Utemp
7MotW1Vtemp
7MotW1Wtemp
8AlarmWord1
8AlarmWord2
10FaultWord1
10FaultWord3
10FaultWord4
9MeasDiagWord
>1)
>2)
Move_Drive_Panel_Profibus
In1
Out1
In2
Out2
In3
Out3
In4
Out4
In5
Out5
In6
Out6
In7
Out7
In8
Out8
In9
Out9
In10
Out10
In11
Out11
In12
Out12
In13
Out13
In14
Out14
In15
Out15
In16
Out16
In17
Out17
In18
Out18
In19
Out19
In20
Out20
In21
Out21
In22
Out22
In23
Out23
In24
Out24
In25
Out25
In26
Out26
In27
Out27
In28
Out28
In29
Out29
gD1statusWord
gD1speedAct
gD1loadAct
gD1currentAct
gD1voltageAct
gD1motWind1Utemp
gD1motWind1Vtemp
gD1motWind1Wtemp
gD1alarmWord1
gD1alarmWord2
gD1faultWord1
gD1faultWord3
gD1faultWord4
gD1measDiagWord
gD1runningDays
gD1runningHours
>1) RunningCounters.RunningDays
>2) RunningCounters.RunningHours
26
()
()
*
!
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
! "
3 #7 8
(
**
! "#$
"
%&
#$% ! #$& '()%$ # *'
/0 1 /..1 23&56
"#
' )(#" ' #
+#
'#, *+!$
%$& (' $ +'
'
# " $$ (-.. "'*#
"
%
$ '(,
%
+ #
#$& /0 1 /..1 23&0., " 4$
#$&
NORELCO EHKE
(Norpower 4000)
Instructions for
installation, commissioning and
service
NORELCO
15297-1
NORELCO MULTI-CUBICLE-TYPE SWITCHBOARDS
Transportation and lifting of the switchboard 1

Storing the switchboard ... 3
Installation of the switchboard. 3
Joining the busbars of the transportation partitions. 5
The adjustments before commissioning the switchboard (after installation) 5
Cabling instruction. 6
The measurements before the commissioning. 6
Commissioning, operational test and adjustment of the switchboard... 7
Usage and installation of the withdrawable and removable units.. 7
Taking thermographic pictures of the switchboard.. 7
Maintenance of the switchboard. 8
Page 1
NORELCO
15297-1
Transportation and lifting of the switchboard

The EHKE multi-cubicle-type switchboards are transported in separate partitions normally when
the overall length of the switchboard exceeds 4 meters. Each partition can be equipped with lifting
hooks when necessary.
When planning the transportation and handling of the switchboard, the external parts like door and
switch handles should also be taken in consideration. The required transportation height is
2500mm (switchboard free height is 2450mm) and width should be 200mm more than the depth of
the switchboard. The standard height of the switchboard is 2250mm and standard depth modules
are 500, 750 or 1000mm.
The switchboard can be transported either with fork lift, rollers, by dragging or by lifting.
Transportation with a fork lift
Transport with a fork trolley
Page 2
NORELCO
15297-1
Transportation with rollers
max. 90
Transportation by lifting with belts or by the hooks
When transporting with rollers, the switchboard should always be on its transportation pallet.
Make always sure that the switchboard can not fall down in any phase of the transportation.
Page 3
NORELCO
15297-1
Storing the switchboard

If a switchboard is not immediately taken into use at the site it is better to keep it in the original
plastic packing. If the storage time is long it is advised that small holes are made into the bottom of
the packing so that the humidity gets out and there will be no harmful condensation of water inside
the switchboard. The storage floor should be even.
Installation of the switchboard

The switchboard can be installed on a separate installation rail or if the floor is even enough, fixed
directly on the floor with wedge-anchor bolts.
To ensure the correct functioning of the switchboard and prevent any mechanical strain, should the
installation foundation have a maximum deviation of 1mm / 1m. If the foundation is uneven, can it
be straightened with metallic filling pieces under the switchboard. The filling pieces should be
installed under each section-joint.
Installation directly onto the floor
1. Move /Lift the transportation partitions into their place depth-wise
2. Remove the cover plates in the cabling section next to the transportation joint to have access the
busbar
3. Release the busbar continuation pieces by opening the nuts
4. Loosen the bolts holding the busbar continuation pieces
5. Push the switchboard from the end until the busbars are aligned (NOTE: positioning tolerance is
appr. 1-2 mm)
6. Check that the switch partitions are all straight in relation to each others, adjust when necessary.
7. Fix the switchboard structures to each others from above and below using the joining pieces
8. Install the busbar continuation pieces and tighten the bolts to the correct momentum.
9. Fix the switchboard onto the floor using the floor fixing pieces and wedge-anchor bolts M8.
10. Install back the removed busbar cover plates.
11. Install the possible cables between the transportation partitions. At the joint, the cables are either on
a roll or connected to a terminal.
The switchboard installed in its position
Page 4
NORELCO
15297-1
Installation directly onto the floor
Installation on an installation rail

As above except in point 9: Use bolts M8 and external floor fixing pieces.
35
t
Installation of a switchboard on an installation rail
Page 5
NORELCO
15297-1
To be noted in the calculation of the required space

A saving in the required space is achieved because of the large opening angle of the doors (180
degrees).
When calculating the height of the required space an extra 250 mm empty space should be
reserved for the opening of the pressure hatches. Also note that the pressure is released
diagonally upwards towards the back of the switchboard.
For thermo-photographs of the main busbar please leave a free space of 600mm above the
switchboard.
When installing the switchboard against the wall or back-to-back, leave a space of at least 50mm
to ensure adequate air circulation.
Arrange an adequate service corridor, minimum of 0,8m in front of the switchboard (also note the
external handles and withdrawable units.
Switchboard
depth
500
490
450
20
750
740
700
20
1000
955
905
20
Joining the busbars of the transportation partitions

Making the transportation joint
Connection of the busbars is usually made in the cable channel. First the cable compartment
shield is removed and the switchboard parts are placed so that the heads of the busbars are on the
same level. The busbars are connected by using the delivered connection pieces, bolts, nuts and
washers.
When making the connection one should note that
the bolts to be used are the galvanized M12 bolts and nuts (hardness 8.8), pressure levelling washers
(SFS3738) and cone-shaped pressure washers (SFS3737) according to picture 3. With these washers
the connection keeps tight all the time. The bolt hole size is 13.5 mm.
brush lightly with a steel brush and put connection grease on it before connection (Al-busbar)
finally all the M12 bolt-joints are tightened to a momentum of 75 Nm. When using other bolt-sizes please
use the momentum values of table 1.
After the connection has been made, the cable compartment shields should be attached back on.
Bolt/Nut size
Tightening moment. Nm
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
9
22
44
75
190
TABLE 1: The tightening momentum of the busban connection bolts according to the bolt
size
Page 6
NORELCO
15297-1
The adjustments before commissioning the switchboard (after

installation)
Check the functioning of the mechanical devices like:
doors and handles
functioning of the removable and withdrawable units
Check that no components have become loose or broken during the transportation or installation.
IN case the painting has been damaged, paint again these places using the spray. The color of
doors and covers is beige Oxyplast 928 and other visible structural parts dark grey BH8715.
Cabling instruction
When cabling always clean well the connection surfaces. In aluminium connection use connection
grease.
With cable crimp terminals always use pressure washers and make tightening with momentum
according to Table 1.
Use the indicated tightening momentums and cable recommendations for terminals in the
switchboard.
Cabling is done either through the cabling section or alternatively from top/bottom of the
switchboards directly to the equipment.
Cables can be attached to the C-profile rails in the cabling section. Cabling from the cabling
section to the compartment is made through plastic C-type glands. The glands can be punctured
e.g. with a knife.
Other installation friendly features are:
there are lots of C-profiled rails in the cable channel. These can be used to fix cable connectors and
cables
the cabling can be made either from above or from below. It is always made through the standard
bottom or ceiling plate and glands
The measurements before the commissioning

Insulation resistance measurement
The insulation resistance measurement is made with all switches closed and fuses installed.
During the measurement the N/PE-joint is opened (joint is marked on the switchboard cover with a
blue-and-white sticker). The N/PE-joint has to be connected again after the measurement.
Measure between the joined phases and neutral busbar and also the structure
Measure between each pole and other joined phases and also the structure
The value of the insulation resistance should be greater than values in the table below (A2-1994)
when the measuring time is 1 min. The test equipment should be able to feed a current of 1 mA.
Nominal voltage of the Test voltage (stable)
circuit
V
Insulation resistance
Mohm
max.. 500V
500
>= 0.5
> 500V
1000
>= 1.0
Table2: Insul. resistance measurement min.values

NOTE: If the switchboard contains electronic circuits, the insulation resistance is measured only between the
joined phases and neutral busbar and also the structure.
Page 7
NORELCO
15297-1
Commissioning, operational test and adjustment of the

switchboard
Turn on the mains and switch on the main switch. the functioning of each unit. The adjustment of
the components is done according to the instructions of the manufacturers of the components.
Usage and installation of the withdrawable and removable

units
WITHDRAWABLE cassettes, inserting the cassette
Check that the switch is in TEST- position
Insert the cassette and push until it locks in isolation position
Release the latch at the bottom of the cassette by pressing it upwards. Simultaneously push the
cassette inside.
The cassette is now earthed and the control circuit is functional, so the testing can be made. The main
circuit is not connected. Note the possible switching-off of the control voltage together with the main
voltage. In these cases testing can be done using the testing cable (option).
Turn the switch in position "I". The cassette is mechanically locked and main circuit connected. The unit
is ready for use.
WITHDRAWABLE cassettes, removing the cassette
Turn the switch in TEST-position, the main circuit is disconnected and cassette mechanical locking is
opened
Pull the cassette outwards until it locks in the isolation position
Release the latch at the bottom of the cassette by pressing it upwards. Simultaneously pull the cassette
out.
REMOVABLE units:
Insert the unit
Connect the control and outgoing cables. The cassette unit is ready for use.
Taking thermographic pictures of the switchboard

The thermographic pictures of the switchboard can be taken from the back, through the roof or
from the front.
From the back
Remove the back plates and take pictures of the connections of the horizontal and vertical
busbars.
Through the roof
Reserve a free space of appr. 600mm above the switchboard. Remove the pressure relieve
hatches and take the pictures using a mirror.
From the front
The horizontal busbar connection pictures can be taken by removing the frontal cover plates on top
of the busbar in each section. The vertical busbar connection pictures can be taken by removing
the installation plate which covers the desired compartment.
Page 8
NORELCO
15297-1
Maintenance of the switchboard

The following maintenance is recommended for the switchboards:
air distances
check always after making new connections
Un = 400V, min. air distance 4 mm
withdrawable and removable units
after pulling out the cassette appr. 20 times check and if necessary grease the cassette and the
connectors. Use grease of the type Shell Grease 1353 LIX2 or similar
check also periodically the condition of the connectors and mechanical functioning of the units
components
according to instructions of the component manufacturers
earthing
check earthing conductor every 3 - 7 years
check earthing impedance normally every 10 years
connections
check either visually or by thermographic pictures after appr. 1 year of the commissioning. Tighten
when necessary. Renewal check-ups when necessary. Tightening of the connections is easiest
from the back after removing the back plates.
surface temperature of the switchboard
if the surface temperature of the switchboard seems exceptionally high, find out immediately what
is the source of the heating
ventilation fans
check the ventilation fans every six months
the filters should be checked at least every six months. When necessary clean or change the
filters.
NORELCO
P.O. Box 28
FIN-57201 Savonlinna
FINLAND
tel. +358-15-57 67 70
fax +358-15-57-67-710
Page 9
NORELCO
05200-1
NORELCO MULTI-CUBICLE TYPE SWITCHBOARD SYSTEMS
Multi-cubicle type switchboard systems

NorPower 4000 (EHKE) and NKE
For industrial, building
and power company use
Easy to install and

maintain
easy and safe installation at the site
spacious connection compartments
thermographic pictures for preventive
maintenance can be taken either from the
ceiling by removing the ceiling plates or by
removing the back plates
The NORELCO multi-cubicle type switchboard

systems offers a wide range of solutions
withdrawable (cassette), removable and
fixed units
normal and splash- proof structures
motor control centers (MCC)
low voltage switchboards for transformer
sub-stations
economical distribution centers
for power distribution and control
The structures are assembled from standardized
modular parts according to customer
specifications.
Practical and flexible

solutions from an
experienced manufacturer
modular system
busbars are made of either copper or
aluminium bar
the main busbars can be built either in the
upper or the lower part of the switchboard
two-sided switchboards can be built when
compact solutions are needed
whatever the need, NORELCO can tailor a
solution for it
over 35 years experience in LV and MV
Type tested switchboards

are reliable and safe
the systems are certified type tested
assemblies according to EN 60439
short circuit and arc-fault tested up to
100kA/220kA
switchboards are built according to the EN-,
IEC-, VDE-, SFS- and industrial standards
made of the best weather and corrosion
proof materials
in an arc-fault situation the pressure flows
safely through the pressure hatches and
back plates (not in NKE)
switchboard compartments have been
enclosed with steel partitions and steel
dropping protection plates ( <= Form 4)
working inside the compartments is safe
also when the covers are open and the
power is on
busbars have been enclosed in a separate
metal enclosed compartment
all switchboards are manufactured
according to EN60439-1 and the NORELCO
ISO9001 quality control policy and
thoroughly tested before sending to the
customer
Contents
General description
Description of the switchboard systems
Technical specification of the systems
The structure of the switchboard systems
Sectional modules
Transportation and installation
The standard outgoing unit modules
Drawing of a NorPower switchboard: Inside
Drawing of a NorPower switchboard: Covers
Page 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NORELCO
05200-1
NorPower with withdrawable (cassette) outgoing units (EHKE-W)

The best solution from the point of view of process usability, maintenance and service.
savings of total cost and switchboard space app. 30 - 60%.
The
so that the connection is always reliable. The power

cables and control cables are connected at the
factory to the terminal blocks in the cabling section.
The testing mode is achieved by disconnecting the
main power of the unit, which also opens the
mechanical locking of the unit. The control voltage
of the unit remains connected but the main power is
off.
The withdrawable units are equipped with handles
for easy handling of the units (cassettes).
A withdrawable (cassette) unit can be removed and

changed while the rest of the switchboard has
power. This ensures unbreakable usage. Testing
and preventive maintenance can be done under
power.
A withdrawable unit can contain motor control units
up to 55 kW. Any switchboard section can contain
both withdrawable, removable and fixed units.
The main power connector and the control circuit
connector of a withdrawable unit are self-guiding,
NorPower with removable outgoing units (EHKE-R, EHRKE-R)

A practical solution when an uninterrupted energy distribution is required even during the service and
maintenance. More economical than the withdrawable with almost the same functionality
A switchboard can contain both removable,
withdrawable and fixed units.
The main power connector of a removable unit is
self-guiding so that the connection is always made
reliably. The power cables are connected from this
connector to the terminal blocks in the cabling
section. The control cables are connected directly
to the terminal blocks in the unit.
The removable units always have fixed handles for
easy handling of units.
A removable outgoing unit can be changed and

removed while the rest of the switchboard is live.
This gives a possibility for an uninterrupted energy
distribution. Testing and other types of preventive
maintenance can be carried out at the most
appropriate moment.
A removable unit can contain motor control units up
to 55 kW. The control can be direct, inversing or
star-delta.
NorPower with fixed outgoing units (EHKE-F, EHRKE-F)

An economical and safe solution is reached by using fixed outgoing units especially when high
currents are used and when it is required to switch off the switchboard during the maintenance
interrupting the functioning of other sections and the
maintenance of the switched off section can be
carried out without any danger to people or
equipment.
A variation of this type is the EHKE-M, the low
voltage switchboard for a medium voltage indoor or
outdoor sub-station.
The fixed outgoing units are always the safest and

most reliable units and especially for the high power
components.
The switchboard can be either one or two sided. If
necessary the switchboard can be built according to
the special requirements of the process industry.
Often the desired flexibility can be obtained by
using a section-specific switch and fixed units.
Then any section can be switched off without
NKE light-structured cubicle with fixed outgoing units

The most economical multi-cubicle type switchboard system for a lighter use up to 1600A
Light-structured NKE is a good choice for e.g. a
motor control center and for a main or distribution
board of a building. It comes always with fixed
outgoing units. The motor control units can be built
as independent units or concentrated into one

compartment.
Despite its name, the light-structured NKE is by no
means light when it comes to functionality and
safety.
Page 2
NORELCO
05200-1
Technical specification of the multi-cubicle type switchboard

All metal structures of the NORELCO switchboards
have been designed and manufactured by
NORELCO. Switchboard is always assembled from
modular standard parts using bolts and nuts.
The modular switchboard systems offer several
alternatives for height, width and depth of sections
and units. In addition to this customer specific
modifications can be made whenever necessary.
E H R K E -R
W=withdrable units
F=fixed unit
R=removable unit
M=LV switchgear of a sub-station
NORELCO multicubicle
switchboard system
Empty=ordinary degree of protection
R=splash proof decreeof protection
NORELCO switchboard system
All multi-cubicle type switchboard systems (common characteristics)

Certifications
TTA (Type Tested Assemblies) according to EN 60439
Standards
EN 60439-1/1994; IEC 439-1/1992+A1/1995+A2/1996;
IEC1641/1996, VDE0660 Teil 500/04.94+Bbl2
Surface treatment
multi-phase surface treatment and epoxy powder
painting in 220 C (doors, covers and side panels)
Thickness of the epoxy paint
minimum 80 m
Standard colour
doors and panels: light brown Oxyplast 928 (equal to RAL 1001),
other visible frontal parts (EHKE): dark grey
other colours on special request
Material
hot dip zinc coated steel plate
Thermographic pictures
can be taken from the ceiling
Opening angle of the doors
170
Insulation class
Class I
NorPower systems
Additional standards
PSK 1801 (Finnish process industry standard)
Nominal voltages
400V, 690V,
50/60 Hz
Nominal current
vertical busbars 400A - 4000A
horizontal busbars 630A - 4000A
Short time withstand current
It h max. 100 kA, 1s (laboratory tested thermal short-circuit
Peak withstand current
Internal arc test
AC test voltage
Outgoing units
Compartmentation class
Degree of protection-withdrawable
Degree of protection-removable
Degree of protection-fixed
NKE systems
Nominal voltages
Nominal current
Short time withstand current
Peak withstand current
AC test voltage
Outgoing units
Degree of protection
current)
Id y n max. 220 kA
(laboratory tested dynamic short-circuit
current)
50 kA, 725V, 0.3 s (laboratory tested value)
2500V
withdrawable (W), removable (R) or fixed (F)
IP20 inside, max. compartimentation Form 4
IP30
(IEC 529)
IP30, IP44 or IP54
(IEC 529)
IP30, IP44 or IP54
(IEC 529)
400V, 690V,
50/60 Hz
250A - 1600A
It h max. 25 kA, 1s (thermic short-circuit current)
Id y n max. 63 kA
2500V
always fixed
IP 30
(IEC 529)
Page 3
(dynamic short-circuit current)
NORELCO
05200-1
The structure of the multi-cubicle type switchboards

Doors, hinges and locks
The doors are easy to open very wide so that working
inside the switchboard is easy. Hinges can be mounted
either left- or right-handed. There are several alternative
locks available; hand, tool or key-operated, either one- or
multi-point locking.
Modular structure and surface treatment

NORELCO switchboard systems are made of
standardized modular parts (see table below) which are
joined by reliable bolt fixing. These also guarantee a good
earthing of the structure. The metal parts are made of hot
dip zinc coated steel plates. All doors and visible frontal
parts are painted with epoxy powder.
Busbars
Compartments and cabling
The busbars are normally made of E-AlMgSi aluminium

flat bar. Copper bar can also be used if necessary. The
busbar-system is always in a separate compartment.
Joints are made using bolts and nuts. The horizontal
busbar can be placed either in the upper or the lower part
of the switchboard.
An additional product is an inter-connection busbar for
connecting a switchboard to another one or to a
transformer. This busbar is made according to customer
specification and can be open or enclosed.
The structure basically consists of three different spaces

which have been separated by steel intermediate walls in
all directions. These three spaces are: equipment
compartments, busbar compartments and cabling
channels. Due to this compartmenting the possible
damages in a short circuit situation are limited to a small
area and can thus be fixed fast.
The inter-sectional cabling is done through isolation
material flanges. An IP20 protection inside the
switchboard with the covers open is possible (Form 4).
The connection spaces and the cabling routes are very
spacious according to the easy installation-philosophy. As
the structure is made of C-profile bars, there are plenty of
fixing points for the cables in the cabling channels. The
ingoing and outgoing cables can enter either through the
bottom or the ceiling.
Other structural parts

NorPower-systems are always delivered with a pedestal
(option for the NKE). The switchboard always includes
the back plates, bottom plates (NorPower), ceiling plates
with pressure hatches (NorPower) and external fastening
hooks for fastening on the floor. The ceiling and bottom
plates can be equipped with flanges and sealing for cable
input/output.
MODULAR STRUCTURE SYSTEM
EHKE
Withdrawable
EHKE
Removable
EHKE
Fixed
NKE
Height of the structure (mm)

Height of the pedestal (mm)
Depth modules
420mm
500mm
750mm
1000mm
Width modules
250mm (NKE 220mm)
390mm (NKE 360mm)
500mm (NKE 470mm)
750mm (only EHKE)
Height modules
200mm
300mm
400mm
450mm
550mm
600mm
900mm
1200mm
1800mm
2050mm
Cabling channel widths
250mm (NKE 220mm)
390mm (NKE 360mm)
2250
65mm,included
2250
65mm,included
2250
65mm,included
1900
300mm, option
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Page 4
NORELCO
05200-1
The switchboard can be equipped with an

earthing switch or earthing terminals.
In addition to the most normal components e.g. soft
starters, frequency inverters and 19-inch electronics
racks can be placed inside the assemblies.
Other options for NorPower-system are the
automatic compensation systems (NAC) and
instrumentation cabinets, with the same modularity.
NORELCO multi-cubicle type switchboard systems

can be used to build
one-sided assemblies
two-sided assemblies into one structure
two-sided assemblies into two opposite
structures
Sectional modules
PICTURE 1:Module sizes of the NorPower-system
PICTURE 2: Module sizes of the NKE-system
Page 5
NORELCO
05200-1
Transportation and installation of the switchboard

To be noted before transport
The multi-cubicle type switchboard systems are
transported in separate parts when the total length of
the switchboard exceeds four meters. Separate lifting
hooks (option) can be installed into each part.
When planning the transportation also the external
parts like the handles should be taken into
consideration when calculating the required space.
Principle of the transportation joint
The joining of the transportation parts is usually done
at the construction site. In order to make a good joint,
the floor should be reasonably even (approx. 2mm/m).
Making the joint is quite simple but to avoid any
problems these instructions should be followed.
Making the busbar connection
Connection of the busbars is usually made in the cable
channel. First the cable compartment shield is
removed and the switchboard parts are placed so that
the heads of the busbars are on the same level. The
busbars are connected by using the delivered
connection pieces, bolts, nuts and washers.
When making the connection one should note that
the bolts to be used are the galvanized M12
bolts and nuts (hardness 8.8), pressure levelling
washers (SFS3738) and cone-shaped pressure
washers (SFS3737) according to picture 3. With
these washers the connection keeps tight all the
time. The bolt hole size is 13.5 mm.
brush lightly with a steel brush and put
connection grease on it before connection (Albusbar)
finally all the M12 bolt-joints are tightened to a
momentum of 75 Nm. When using other boltsizes please use the momentum values of table
1.
After the connection has been made, the cable
compartment shields should be attached back on.
Bolt/Nut size
Tightening moment.
Nm
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
9
22
44
75
190
TABLE 1: The tightening momentum of the busbar

connection bolts according to the bolt size
Installation hints
There are features that make the installation easier e.g.
there are lots of C-profiled bars in the cable
channel. These can be used to fix cable connectors
and cables
the cabling can be made either from above or from
below. It is always made through the standard
bottom or ceiling plate (see pictures 1 and 2)
it is easy to connect the cables directly to the poles
and connectors inside the switchboard
Installation
Fixing onto the floor is made by using the external fixing
hooks. This is the easiest way to fix a switchboard on a
floor.
To be noted in the calculation of the required

space
A saving in the required space is achieved because of the
large opening angle of the doors.
When calculating the height of the space an extra 250
mm empty space should be reserved for the opening of
the pressure hatches.
Maintenance of the switchboard

To facilitate preventive maintenance the thermographic
pictures can be taken from above after removing the
ceiling plates.
Also a re-tightening of the busbar connections can be
made by removing the back or ceiling plates.
Storing the switchboard at the construction site

If a switchboard is not immediately taken into use at the
site it is better to keep it in the original plastic packing. If
the storage time is long it is advised that small holes are
made into the bottom of the packing so that the humidity
gets out and there will be no harmful condensation of
water inside the switchboard.
NORELCO Co.
P.O. Box 28
FIN-57201 Savonlinna
FINLAND
tel. + 358-15-57 67 70
fax + 358-15-57 67 710
PICTURE 3: Making a busbar connection
www.norelco.fi
Page 6
1)
37 kW
45 kW
Direct starter
Direct starter
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW 18.5 kW NFR18
7.5 kW
< 4 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW 18.5 kW NFR18
Reversing
f-s =fuse-switch
Page 7
Reversing
Reversing
Reversing
Reversing
Reversing
S/D-starter
S/D-starter
S/D-starter
S/D-starter
15 kW
11 kW
15 kW
11 kW
7.5 kW
5.5 kW
< 4 kW
NFR15
NFR11
NFR7
NFR15
NFR11
NFR7
NFR5
NFR4
NFS75
75 kW
Direct starter
75 kW
55 kW
NFS55
NFS45
NFS37
NFS30
Direct starter
55 kW
45 kW
37 kW
30 kW
f-s 250 A
f-s 250 A
f-s 250 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A NRYD18
f-s 125 A NRYD15
f-s 125 A NRYD11
switch 40 A
switch 40 A
switch 40 A
Compo
nent 1)
switch 40 A
switch 40 A
switch 40 A
NWYD7
switch 40 A
NWR18 switch 125 A
NWR15 switch 125 A
NWR11 switch 125 A
NWR7
NWR5
NWS45 switch 250 A
NWS37 switch 250 A
NWS30 switch 250 A
NWS22 switch 125 A
NWS18 switch 125 A
NWS15 switch 125 A
NWS11 switch 125 A
NWS7
NWS5
Code
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
NWYD 18 switch 125 A
NWYD 15 switch 125 A
f-s 125 A NWYD11 switch 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A NRYD18
NRYD7
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A NRYD15
f-s 63 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
NRYD7
NRYD5
f-s 125 A NRYD11
f-s 63 A
f-s 63 A
fuse/mcb NRYD4 fuse/mcb
f-s 400 A
f-s 400 A
f-s 250 A NRS45
f-s 250 A NRS37
f-s 160 A NRS30
30 kW
Direct starter
NFS22
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
f-s 125 A
Compo
nent 1)
Withdrawable (W)
200 300 450
width 390, height
200
width 250mm
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
R,W
F,R,W
F,R
F,R
200
R,W
R,W
R,W
300 400 450 550
width 500, height
Unit module size (h x w mm)
05200-1
22 kW
f-s 125 A NRS22
f-s 125 A NRS11
NRS7
22 kW
15 kW
NFS11
f-s 63 A
NRS5
Direct starter
15 kW
Direct starter
11 kW
NFS7
f-s 63 A
f-s 125 A NRS18
11 kW
Direct starter
7.5 kW
NFS5
fuse/mcb
Code
Direct starter 18.5 kW 18.5 kW NFS18
7.5 kW
Direct starter
5.5 kW
NFS4
Compo
nent 1)
Removable (W)
f-s 125 A NRS15
5.5 kW
Direct starter
< 4 kW
690 V
Code
Fixed (F)
NFS15
< 4 kW
Direct starter
400 V
Motor starter Motor power

unit type
NORELCO
The standard outgoing unit modules of NorPower
In the table below all the module sizes of the standard outgoing units (motor starter units) have been given.
Here the F stands for fixed outgoing units (EHKE-F and EHRKE-F), R for removable units (EHKE-R and
EHRKE-R) and W for withdrawable units (EHKE-W).
When ordering standard outgoing units please mention the order code, voltage, component type and width,
height of the module and the colour of the switchboard (if not standard colour).
NORELCO
05200-1
Basic drawing of a NorPower switchboard: Inside

This drawings present some of the major elements and components of a typical NorPower-type switchboard
with the doors and protective covers open.
1.
The incoming
section, width
500mm
2.
An outgoing section,
circuits with fuseswitches and
moulded case
circuit breakers
3.
Cabling section for

incoming and
outgoing cables with
plenty of space for
the connections
4.
An outgoing section
with motor control
feeders, one with a
fuse-switch and the
other with a MCCB
5.
An outgoing section
with withdrawable
(cassette) and
removable units, a
500mm section can
also have 250mm
units
6.
The terminal blocks

for the withdrawable
units are in the
cabling section
7.
PE- and N-busbars

cover the whole
length of the
switchboard
8.
N/PE- shunt
9.
The terminals for

the feeder cable
10. Main switch (E.g.

withdrawable air
circuit breaker)
11. Current
transformers
12. Horizontal busbar
(Cu or Al) can be
built in the upper or
lower part, the
whole busbar is
compartmented by
steel plates
13. Vertical busbar
which connects to
the components
with flexible copper
bar or cable
14. Miniature circuit
breakers in a
compartment
15. Contactor with a
thermal overload
relay
Page 8
NORELCO
05200-1
Basic drawing of a NorPower switchboard: Cove

This drawings present a typical NorPower-type switchboard with the doors closed.
1.
The incoming
section, width
500mm, one
module of 1200mm
(height) and two
modules of 300mm
(height)
2.
An outgoing section
with fixed units,
width 500mm, one
module of 600mm
and four modules of
300mm
3.
Cabling section for

incoming and
outgoing cables,
width 390mm
4.
An outgoing section
with motor control
feeders, width
750mm, two
modules of 600mm
and two modules of
300mm
5.
An outgoing section
with withdrawable
(cassette) and
removable units,
two modules of
400mm, three
modules of 200mm
(width 500) and four
modules of 200mm
(width 250)
6.
The pressure
hatches for short
circuit situation
pressure relief
7.
Pilot lights with the

CAM-switch
(manual-0automatic)
8.
Flanges and sealing

for outgoing cables
(top and bottom)
9.
A- and V-meters
with a 7-position
CAM-switch
10. Each door is

operated from one
handle using either
key-, tool- or handoperated locks
11. The reliable metal
hinges
12. The 300mm
pedestal (optional in
NKE)
13. The bottom plates
14. The strong modular
structure is made of
galvanized steel
NORELCO reserves the right to modify and improve the product as described in this manual at any time and without any prior notice.
Despite all the efforts there may be some inaccuracies in this manual, however, NORELCO can not be held responsible for any
losses resulting from the use of this manual.
Page 9
ABB
ACS 6000
Medium Voltage Drives
3 to 27 MVA
Users Manual
ABB
Document No.:
3BHS212794 ZAB E01 Rev. -
Issued:
03-06-2005
Switzerland Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
ABB reserves all rights to this document, also in the event of patent issue
or registration of any other industrial property protection right. Misuse, in
particular duplication and forwarding to third parties, is not permitted.
This document has been checked with due care and attention. However,
should the user find any errors, these should be reported to ABB.
ABB aims to maintain the most modern standard, therefore, entries in this
manual may differ from the actual product.
ACS 6000 Users Manual
ABB
Table of Contents
General Information
Contact Information
Related Documentation
Quality Certificates and Applicable Standards
Chapter 1 - Safety
1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
Intended Audience and Required Qualifications

Owners Responsibilities
Safety Instructions
Safety Labels and Signs
Danger Zones
Chapter 2 - Transportation, Storage and Disposal
2-1
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
Transportation
Transport Conditions
Unpacking and Inspection
Loading and Unloading
Storage
Storage Conditions
Storage
Storage and Handling Instructions for Spare Parts
Disposal of Packaging Materials
Disposal of Components
Chapter 3 - Mechanical Installation
3-1
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-6
Overview
Installation Site
Ambient Conditions
Dimensions and Clearances
Foundation, Floor Levelling and Cable Ducts
Identifying Converter Units
Installing the Converter
Raw Water Circuit
Mechanical Door Interlock
Installation Procedure
1 (4)
ABB
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.13
Installing Transport Units

Attaching the Sealing Tape
Installing Roof Joining Pieces
Installing Roof Fixings
Installing Roof-Mounted Heat Exchangers
Joining Water Pipes
Joining DC Busbars
Joining Ground Busbars
Joining AC Busbars in ARU, INU, IFU
Joining AC Busbars in LSU
Chapter 4 - Electrical Installation

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.7
4.8
4.9
2 (4)
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-19
3-20
3-23
4-1
Overview
Cables
Internal Wiring
Busbars and Ground Connections
External Power Cabling
Connecting Incoming Feeder and Motor Cables
Connecting Braking Resistor Cables
Connecting Excitation Cables
Connecting Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
Connecting Auxiliary Power Cable
Connecting Control Cables in WCU
Connecting Cables for Serial Communication
and Encoders
Connecting Position Encoder Cables in
Marine Drives
Connecting the Heating Cable
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-5
4-8
4-8
4-10
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-17
4-25
4-27
Chapter 5 - Information on Commissioning
5-1
5.1
5-1
Customer Assistance and Acceptance
Chapter 6 - Operation
6-1
Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel
7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-6
7-8
Overview
Identification Mode
Actual Signal Display Mode
Parameter Mode
Parameter Lock
ABB
7.5
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
Function Mode
Operational Commands
Selecting Local/Remote
Setting the Direction of Rotation
Entering a Setpoint
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10
7-11
Chapter 8 - Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-1
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
Safety Instructions
Specific Maintenance Tasks
Cleaning
Checking Wire and Cable Connections
Standard Procedure for Troubleshooting
Appendix A - Water Cooling Unit

Appendix A contains all documentation relevant to the water cooling
system:
Users Manual
Data Sheet
Flow Diagram
Appendix B - Options
Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings
Appendix D - Electrical Diagrams
Appendix E - Parts List
Appendix F - Test Reports
Appendix G - Signal and Parameter Table
Appendix H is provided to file the Signal and Parameter Table. The table
includes a complete description of all control parameters and their default
setting.
If the Signal and Parameter Table is not included in the Appendix, the
commissioning engineer will hand out a copy to the customer after commissioning of the converter has been completed. The Signal and
Parameter Table can also be obtained from ABB. For contact address see
section General Information.
3 (4)
ABB
4 (4)
ABB
General Information
Contact Information
If information is required beyond the instructions in this manual, ABB can
be contacted as follows:
ABB Switzerland Ltd
CH-5300 Turgi, Switzerland
Phone:
+41 844 845 845
Fax:
+41 58 589 2984
E-mail
[email protected]
Related Documentation
The following documents can be optained from ABB for supplementary
information.
Title
Document
Number
Power Cable Specification
3BHS125090
Main Circuit Breaker Specification
3BHS125149
LSU Main Transformer Specification
3BHS125150
ARU Main Transformer Specification
3BHS125092
Voltage Transformer Requirement Specification
3BHS125393
Asynchronous Motor Specification
3BHS125088
Synchronous Motor Specification
3BHS125093
Tool Sets for Installation, Commissioning and

Maintenance
3BHS130246
Emergency Off/Stop Modes and Prevention of

Operation
3BHS196243
ACS 6000 Troubleshooting
3BHS204855
ACS 6000 Service and Maintenance Manual
3BHS202077
1 (2)
ABB
Quality Certificates and Applicable Standards
The following certificates and conformity declarations are available with
ABB:
ISO 9001 / ISO 14001 certificates stating that ABB Switzerland Ltd has
implemented and maintains a management system which fulfills the requirements of the normative standards
EC Conformity Declaration
List of standards the converter complies with
2 (2)
ABB
Chapter 1 - Safety
1.1
Intended Audience and Required Qualifications

The users manual addresses personnel who are responsible for the
installation, operation and maintenance of the converter. The personnel
must be qualified and fully acquainted with medium voltage equipment.
Installation Personnel
Operating Personnel
Maintenance
Personnel
1.2
The installation personnel are mainly responsible for:
Preparing the mounting site
Transporting the converter
Performing the mechanical and electrical installation
Preparing the water cooling unit for operation (if present in the
converter)
The operating personnel include all persons who operate the converter as
required for the application using the control panel(s) of the converter or a
supervisory control system. Operating the converter does not require
special knowledge of converter technology. However, the operator must
know the functions of the control panel.
The maintenance personnel are mainly responsible for:
Periodical checks of the converter
Maintenance tasks
Owners Responsibilities
It is the owners responsibility to ensure that each person involved in the
installation, operation or maintenance of the converter has received the
appropriate training and has thoroughly read and clearly understood the
relevant safety instructions.
The technical specifications and the approved purpose of the converter
must be strictly adhered to.
The owner must ensure that the converter is operated under proper
conditions and in a fully serviceable state. The specified service intervalls
and ambient conditions for the converter must be followed.
Unauthorized modifications and constructional changes of the converter
are not permitted.
1-1 (4)
ABB
Chapter 1 - Safety
1.3
Safety Instructions
Safety instructions are used to highlight a potentially dangerous situation
when working on the converter. Safety instructions must be strictly
followed! Non-compliance can jeopardise the safety of personnel, the
machine and the environment.
DANGER!
Indicates an imminent hazardous situation. If not observed, it will lead to
death or life-threatening injury.
WARNING!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation. If not observed, it could result
in death or life-threatening injury.
CAUTION!
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation. If not observed, it could lead to

minor or moderate injury or property damage.
NOTICE!
Indicates important information related to personal safety and protection
of property.
1-2 (4)
IMPORTANT!
Emphazises hints and highlights information.
ABB
1.4
Chapter 1 - Safety
Safety Labels and Signs

Safety labels are attached to the converter enclosure to alert personnel of
potential hazards when working on the converter. The safety labels must
always be followed and kept in perfectly legible condition.
Depending on the scope of supply, the following additional safety signs are
provided:
Fire fighting:
The sign explains the procedure when fighting fire in electrical equipment.
The sign should be installed well visible near the converter.
Heart pacemaker:
The magnetic field of the converter can influence the functioning of heart
pacemakers. The sign should be installed at the entrance to the drive
room or at a minimum distance of 6 meters (20 ft) from the converter!
High voltage:
The sign should be installed well visible at the main circuit breaker in the
switchgear room. The sign alerts personnel to the high voltage which can
be present on the secondary side of the converter transformer until the
main circuit breaker has been opened and secured and the converter has
been de-energized and grounded.
1-3 (4)
ABB
Chapter 1 - Safety
1.5
Danger Zones
Figure 1-1 indicates the danger zones of the converter.
Danger from auxiliary and control voltages

in control unit when front door is open!
Line
Supply
Unit
Hot equipment inside the

converter
Terminal Control
Unit
Unit
Danger from auxiliary and control

voltages in water cooling unit!
Cooling system may start automatically when auxiliary voltage is on.
Inverter
Unit
Capacitor
Bank
Unit
High voltage!
Do not attempt to open doors of
medium voltage units by force when
converter is energized.
The doors are electromechanically
interlocked. When the light GROUNDING SWITCH UNLOCKED is on, the
converter can be grounded and then
the doors can be opened.
Water
Cooling
Unit
High voltage!
Do not remove any
bolted walls or plates
when converter is energized or before converter
is grounded.
Illustration shows basic configuration of the converter
Figure 1-1
1-4 (4)
Danger Zones
ABB
2.1
2.1.1
Transportation
Transport Conditions
The transport conditions are based on IEC 721-3-2 'Classification of
environmental conditions: Classification of groups of environmental
parameters and their severities; Transportation'.
2.1.2
Classification:
2K4 / 2B1 / 2M1
Transport time:
max. 2 month
Unpacking and Inspection

Proceed as follows:
1
Remove all packaging material carefully. Do not use sharp or pointed

tools.
Check the converter and accompanying equipment for damage.
Compare the complete delivery with the purchase order and the
packing list.
If parts are missing or damaged, immediately inform the shipping

company and the ABB service organization.
It is recommended to photograph the damages.
2.1.3
Loading and Unloading

Observe the following points when transporting the converter:
CAUTION!
Do not lift and move the converter or a transport unit using a forklift. The
frame of the cabinets could be damaged. If a crane is not available contact
ABB for instructions on other means of moving. See section General
Information for contact address.
CAUTION!
Converter components can be damaged during transportation. Therefore,

the converter must be transported in upright position.
2-1 (6)
ABB
CAUTION!
When transporting the converter ensure that no dirt enters. Keep doors
closed. Metallic dust in particular may cause damage and lead to
malfunction when the converter is powered up.
CAUTION!
The roof plates of medium voltage units are equipped with pressure relief
flaps. Do not stand on roof due to danger of collapse.
See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for dimensions and weight

details.
Material and diameter of the lifting cables must correspond to the

weight of the converter.
When lifting a converter equipped with a base frame always use the
lifting lugs which are attached to the base frame. The lugs can be
removed after the converter has been installed at its final location.
Do not pass a lifting cable through the fastening hole of a lug. Use a
safety hook to attach a cable to a lug.
The lifting cables should be approximately at an angle as indicated in

Figure 2-1 to Figure 2-3.
Protect the roof edges of the cabinets using appropriate means.

When lifting cabinets with marine-type door handles, use spreader
bars or similar equipment to ensure that the lifting cables do not
damage the door handles and the roof edges (see Figure 2-3). If the
door handles cannot be protected it is recommended to unscrew
them.
2-2 (6)
Lift the converter slowly and steadily to the required clearance height
maintaining the converter in upright position.
Check the horizontal position of the converter. Reposition the cables

if necessary.
If a door cannot be opened see Chapter 3 - Mechanical Installation,

3.4.2 Mechanical Door Interlock for information on opening.
If a delivery comprises transport units for several converters see

Chapter 3 - Mechanical Installation, 3.3 Identifying Converter Units,
for information how transport units belonging to a particular converter
are identified.
ABB
Protect
edges !
30
Figure 2-1 Cabinets with Base Frame and without Door Handles
30
Figure 2-2 Cabinets with Base Frame and Marine-type Door Handles
MAX.
120
Cable angle
indicated on
cabinet roof
Figure 2-3 Cabinets without Base Frame
2-3 (6)
ABB
2.2
2.2.1
Storage
Storage Conditions
The minimum requirements for storage are based on IEC 721-3-1
'Classification of environmental conditions: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities; Storage'.
Classification:
1K4 / 1Z3 / 1B1 / 1M3
The converter can be stored for up to 1 year in the original packaging as

long as it is not damaged or opened. For information on longer storage
periods contact the ABB service organization.
2.2.2
Storage
If the converter is taken out of service for a longer time proceed as follows:
1
Drain the cooling circuit completely or add the appropriate amount of

glycol for frostproofing, if the converter is to be stored in ambient
temperatures below 0 C (32 F).
See Appendix A - Water Cooling Unit for information on frostproofing.
Remove the batteries (if applicable).
Cover all cable inlets and ventilation slots with an impermeable plastic
or aluminum foil and a wooden panel.
Add the desiccant of the appropriate quality: 1 unit desiccant (30g)

absorbs 6 g water vapor. The following quantity is needed when using
a polyethylene foil:
10 units/sqm foil
Close and lock the doors of the converter.
Use polyethylene or equivalent for packaging:

0,3g/sqm/24h water vapor diffusion
Attach humidity indicators to the packaging.
The storage conditions and the packaging should be checked regularly.

Any damages which occur during the storage period should be repaired
immediately.
2-4 (6)
ABB
2.3
Storage and Handling Instructions for Spare Parts

Inspect the spare parts immediately after receipt for damages. Report any
damage to the shipping company and the ABB service organization.
Observe the following to maintain spare parts in good condition and to
keep the warranty valid during the warranty period:
Keep spare parts in their original packaging.
Store printed circuit boards in antistatic bags or boxes.
Storage temperature range: -5 C to + 55 C (23 F to 131 F)
Storage place requirements:

Free of vibration and shock.
Protected against dust, sand, vermin and insects.
Free of corrosive gases, salt or other impurities that
could damage electronic equipment.
Dry; no condensation
Relative air humidity: 5 to 85 %
If in doubt if the maximum allowed humidity is
exceeded, protect spare parts by an external heater.
Apply static-sensitive precautions when handling printed circuit

boards. Static electricity can damage these components.
Do not touch a component without wearing a wrist
grounding strap.
Put the component on a grounded working surface
protected against electrostatic discharges.
Hold the component only at the edge.
2-5 (6)
2.4
ABB
Disposal of Packaging Materials

Dispose of the following materials according to local regulations:
2.5
Wooden frame
Wooden pallet
Polyethylene sheet
Plywood
Silicagel
Disposal of Components
At the end of the life time of the converter dispose of the following
components according to local regulations:
2-6 (6)
Batteries
Capacitors
Printed circuit boards
Electronic devices
ABB
NOTICE!
All installation work must be carried out by qualified personnel in
compliance with local regulations.
See Chapter 1 - Safety for explanation on how the safety messages are
categorized and used in this manual.
3.1
Overview
The mechanical installation includes the following steps:
Fitting water pipes

see 3.4.1 Raw Water Circuit
Installing transport units

see 3.4.4 Installing Transport Units
Attaching sealing tape

see 3.4.5 Attaching the Sealing Tape
Installing roof fixings

see 3.4.6 Installing Roof Joining Pieces
Installing pipe joints

see 3.4.9 Joining Water Pipes
Installing busbar joining pieces

see 3.4.10 Joining DC Busbars
3.2
Installation Site
3.2.1
Ambient Conditions
Ambient factors such as temperature, relative humidity, air contamination,
shock and vibration must be in compliance with the stated maximum
permissible levels.
Maximum ambient temperature: see rating plate of converter
Operation with respect to climatic and environmental conditions is

based on IEC 721-3
Classification:
3K3 / 3B1 / 3C2 / 3S2 / 3M3
If the condition of the installation site is not within the specifications or if

the transportation or the installation require special measures, contact the
ABB service organization.
3-1 (24)
ABB
3.2.2
Dimensions and Clearances

The converter must be mounted with adequate free space. The
dimensions of transport units, the overall dimensions of the converter and
the clearances are provided in Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings.
3.2.3
Foundation, Floor Levelling and Cable Ducts

The floor must be of non-flammable material, with smooth and nonabrasive surface, protected against humidity diffusion, levelled and able to
support the weight of the cabinets (min. 1000 kg/m2).
The maximum allowable overall unevenness is 5 mm / 5 m. If the
mounting surface is uneven, the cabinet doors become misaligned and do
not open or close properly.
Cable ducts must be of non-flammable material with non-abrasive
surface.
Suitable fire protection measures must be applied to prevent fire from
spreading into the converter.
All cable entries and exits must be protected to prevent dust, humidity and
animals from entering into the converter.
See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for exact dimensions, if holes and
channels for cables and water pipes have to be cut into the floor and
mounting holes have to be drilled.
3.3
Identifying Converter Units

If a delivery comprises transport units for several converters, the transport
units need to be identified and assigned to the converter to which they
belong. For this purpose, the converters have been numbered on the
accompanying papers (e.g. converter 1, converter 2 etc.). The
corresponding information is provided on
the packing list, attached to the packaging of each transport unit

and
Packing List
3-2 (24)
the packing label on the back wall of each converter unit (ARU, LSU,
CBU etc.). The packing label is only visible after the packaging has
been removed.
Transport units which belong to a particular converter are identified with

the help of the commodity description on the packing lists. The identical
column of the packing list states the number of the converter to which the
transport unit belongs (see section of packing list in Figure 3-1).
ABB
the nearest Lloyd's agent may be contacted. Please also inform the contact person with ABB Schweiz AG
shown on this packing list.
ABB item
Customer item
Qty. Unit.
001201
Identnumber
PC
Commodity description
Converter 1: Transport Unit 1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Drives
Mailing address:
Phone:
Telex:
Facsimile:
CH-5401 Baden/Schweiz
+41 58 589 27 95
755749 abb ch
+41 58 589 29 84
Bank Credit Suisse CH-8070 Zrich/Switzerland
Transport units where packing lists
have the same number in this place

belong to one converter
Figure 3-1
Identifying the Converter on the Packing List
Separately delivered crates with accessories such as tools and installation

material are also assigned to a converter by means of the packing list. The
item number in column ABB Item / Customer item provides the necessary
information (see section of packing list in Figure 3-2).
the nearest Lloyd's agent may be contacted. Please also inform the contact person with ABB Schweiz AG
shown on this packing list.
ABB item
Customer item
Qty. Unit.
Identnumber
Commodity description
001221
PC
cross wiring
001222
PC
WCU accessory
001223
PC
crank for isolator
001500
PC
3BHB013202R0001
ACS6000 Max-SL LOSE TEILE konfig.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Drives
Mailing address:
Phone:
Telex:
Facsimile:
CH-5401 Baden/Schweiz
+41 58 589 27 95
755749 abb ch
+41 58 589 29 84
Bank Credit Suisse CH-8070 Zrich/Switzerland
The number in this place (4th. digit from right) states the converter to which
the accessories belong. In this example they belong to converter 1.
Figure 3-2
Packing Label
Identifying the Converter on the Accessories Packing List
The packing labels on the back walls of converter units can also be used
to identify the converter (see Figure 3-3).
3-3 (24)
ABB
ABB
Packing Label
0000
Material no
3BHB009964R1500
1 ST
Material
Schrank kpl. ARU_INU konfig
Order no/positions 11027727
001241 Project CBA
Material Document
004902892300012004
001241
The number in this place (4th. digit from right)

identifies the converter to which the
transport unit belongs.
Figure 3-3
3.4
3.4.1
Identifying the Converter on the Packing Label
Installing the Converter
Raw Water Circuit

See the following when preparing the connection for the cooling water:
Rating Plate for information on:

Type of water cooling unit
Project specific values of flow rate, pressure range
etc.
Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for information on dimensions of

the raw water entry
Datasheet in Appendix A - Water Cooling Unit for information on:

Nominal values of flow rate, pressure range etc.
Industrial cooling water specification
3.4.2
Mechanical Door Interlock

The doors of the medium voltage units (units with names plates: LSU,
ARU, IFU, IRU, CBU, INU, BCU, RBU, VLU, TEU, ISU) are equipped with
a solenoid interlock which ensures that a door cannot be opened when the
converter is energized. The doors can also not be opened, when the
converter is disconnected from the auxiliary power and the solenoid
interlock is in locked position. To be able to open the doors for the
installation of the converter, the solenoid interlocks are unlocked before
the converter leaves the factory. If a door cannot be opened, however, the
solenoid interlock must be manually unlocked as described below.
Required Tools
3-4 (24)
A small cross-slot screwdriver
ABB
Triangular door key
Figure 3-4
Procedure
The solenoid interlocks are mounted behind the name plate on the doors
of the medium voltage units (see arrows in Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5
Location of Name Plates
Remove the name plate of the door to be opened and insert the key
through the opening in the door (see Figure 3-6) into the triangular
counterpart of the solenoid interlock (see Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-6
Triangular Door Key
Door Opening
Turn the key from the locked to the unlocked position to release
the interlock (when looking through the opening at an angle the
symbols are visible). The door can now be opened.
3-5 (24)
ABB
Unlocked position
Locked position
Figure 3-7
!
3.4.3
Manual Release of the Interlock
Remount the name plate.
IMPORTANT!
After the mechanical and electrical installation has been finished, it is the
task of the commissioning engineer to check that the manual release of all
solenoid interlocks is in the locked position. Otherwise, the converter
cannot be started up.
Installation Procedure
Depending on the configuration, the converter is delivered in one unit or in
several transport units, which are joined and fixed to the floor at the
installation site. See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings to identify the
units and their position in the lign-up. Transport units must be ligned up as
shown on the Layout Drawing. The units can be ligned up either beginning
from the left or the right.
Parts needed for the installation (bolts, washers, joining pieces etc.) are
supplied with the converter in a separate box.
Observe the following points when installing the converter:
Drill the floor fixing holes before moving the converter unit(s) to the
final location.
Be careful when moving the converter unit(s).

See Chapter 2 - Transportation, Storage and Disposal, 2.1 Transportation for information to be observed.
CAUTION!
3-6 (24)
When installing the converter ensure that no dirt enters. Always close the
doors when work is discontinued and completely cover openings. Metallic
dust in particular may cause malfunction when the converter is powered
up and cause damage.
ABB
CAUTION!
The roof plates of medium voltage units are equipped with pressure relief
flaps. Do not stand on roof due to danger of collapse.
NOTICE!
When joining two cabinets do not damage or dislocate the EMC sealing
strip which is glued onto the outer joining surface of the cabinet frame.
NOTICE!
Do not weld cabinets without base frame to the floor. The corrosion
protection will become ineffective.
NOTICE!
The roof plates of the cabinets are not designed as a mounting base for
foreign devices, cable ducts etc. Therefore, it is not permitted to install any
foreign devices on the cabinet roofs.
3.4.4
Installing Transport Units

Proceed as follows:
Carefully lift the first transport unit to its installation position.
If the transport unit has water pipes, remove the protective covers
from each water pipe end.
Align the transport unit and fix it to the floor.

Floor fixings are not part of the delivery.
Recommended size of bolts and nuts: M12.
Before aligning the following transport units make sure that:

the protective covers are removed from the water
pipe ends on both sides
the water pipe joints are in place.
The pipe joints have been slid onto the water pipes in
the factory.
!
IMPORTANT!
When aligning a transport unit make sure that two joining water pipes have
a linear misalignment of a maximum of +/- 3 mm (see Figure 3-8).
3-7 (24)
ABB
Figure 3-8
Aligning a Water Pipe
Join the transport units using the supplied M6 screws, item 1 in Table
3-1. Number and position of connecting points are illustrated in Figure
3-9.
Cabinet connecting points
Front of cabinet
Figure 3-9
Cabinet Connecting Points
Connect the wiring ducts using the supplied M6 screws and nuts,
washers and spring washers, items 1, 2, 3 and 4 in Table 3-1.
Connecting points
Figure 3-10 Connecting Points of Wiring Duct
3-8 (24)
ABB
Table 3-1
Installation Material
Item
3.4.5
Type
Hexagon head screw
M6x20
Hexagon head bolt
Washer
Spring washer
Hexagon head nut
Ident. Number
Use
3BHE004520R0003
Connection of transport
unit
M6x20
NB312350P0260
Connection of wiring duct
A 6.4/12.5
NB335050P0607
NB335805P0509
HZN452198P0016
M6 A2-70
Attaching the Sealing Tape
IMPORTANT!
This section is applicable for marine converters and converters with
insulation protection IP 54.
The self-adhesive sealing tape (supplied with the converter) prevents
water from entering into the gap between two joining roof plates. The tape
has to be installed where two transport units have been joined. Gaps
within a transport unit have been sealed with a tape in the factory already.
Proceed as follows:
Remove the roof plates of two joining transport units.
Cut the sealing tape to the required length.
Attach the tape on the whole length of the joining crossbars (see
Figure 3-11).
Remount the roof plates again.
Sealing Tape
Figure 3-11 Attaching the Sealing Tape
3.4.6
Installing Roof Joining Pieces

The joining pieces are mounted at the front and the back (see Figure 3-12)
of the roof and connect two joining transport units. The joining pieces
within a transport unit have been mounted in the factory already.
3-9 (24)
ABB
Joining pieces
Figure 3-12 Roof Joining Pieces

Table 3-2
Item
3.4.7
Type
Ident. Number
Joining piece
8x80x220 mm
3BHB011552R0001
Bolt
M16x45
NB312350R0465
Washer
A17/30
NB335050R0611
Installing Roof Fixings
!
Roof Attachments
IMPORTANT!
This section is only applicable for marine drives.
To prevent tilting, the cabinets are fixed to the ceiling or the back wall of
the drive room by means of roof attachments which also serve as vibration
dampers. All parts of a complete roof attachment assembly are listed in
Table 3-3.
See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for
number and location of roof attachments
hole center distances and dimensions.
Table 3-3
Item
3-10 (24)
Type
Ident. Number
Steel bracket, roofside
120x80x8 mm, L=120 mm

with 14 mm mounting holes
3BHB11553R0001
Steel bracket, wallside
120x80x8 mm, L=120 mm

with 30 mm mounting holes
3BHB11553R0002
Rubber pad
80x220 mm
3BHB12579R0001
2 Sleeves
3BHB012580R0001
ABB
Table 3-3
Installation Material (Continued)

Item
Type
Ident. Number
2 Bolts
M12x80
NB312450P8127
2 Washers
13x45x4
3BHL001710P0001
2 Nuts
M12
3BHB011779R0002
2 Washers
A13/24
NB335050P0610
Normally, roofside steel brackets (item 1 in Table 3-3) within a transport

unit have been mounted in the factory already (see Figure 3-13). If the
brackets are not mounted for transport reasons (e.g. between transport
units) they are part of the separate installation material delivered with the
converter.
The steel brackets can be distinguished by their mounting holes:
The roofside brackets have holes with a diameter of 14 mm (see

Figure 3-13).
The wallside brackets have holes with a diameter of 30 mm (see

Figure 3-14).
1 4 mm
factory mounted
within a transport
unit
Figure 3-13 Roofside Steel Bracket

Before starting assembling have all parts of a roof attachment ready at
hand.
A roof attachment can be assembled by one person but depending on the
site conditions the assistance of a second person is helpful.
Proceed as follows:
Check that the roofside steel brackets have been mounted according
to Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings.
Align the rubber pad and the wallside steel bracket with the roofside
steel bracket (see Figure 3-14).
Insert one of the sleeves into a mounting hole until the sleeve is flush
with the surface of the second bracket.
3-11 (24)
ABB
Join the parts with one set of the supplied bolts, nuts and washers,
with the nut on the roofside bracket and the bolt on the wallside
bracket (see Figure 3-15). Tighten the bolted connection by hand.
Insert the second sleeve and join the parts with the remaining bolt, nut
and washers. Tighten the bolted connection by hand.
Finally, tighten the bolted connections until the rubber of the sleeves
starts to bulge (see Figure 3-15).
To be mounted on site:
2nd steel bracket
Rubber pad
30 m m
Sleeve
Figure 3-14 Installing the Roof Attachments
Nut
Bolt
Figure 3-15 Roof Attachment Assembled
Fix the cabinets to the ceiling or the back wall with suitable struts. The
struts are not part of the delivery.
When fixing the cabinets to the ceiling, it is recommended to use two
struts per roof attachment as illustrated in Figure 3-16 a.
Struts connecting the cabinet to the wall should be mounted in a 90
angle to the converter as illustrated in Figure 3-16 b.
!
3-12 (24)
IMPORTANT!
When fixing the struts to the ceiling, do not mount the struts in a 90 angle
to the cabinet roof as illustrated in Figure 3-16 c.
ABB
45
45
90
Recommended!
Recommended!
Not recommended!
Figure 3-16 Recommended Ceiling and Wall Fixings
3.4.8
Installing Roof-Mounted Heat Exchangers

See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for number and location of the
heat exchangers and overall height of the converter.
Proceed as follows:
If present, remove the cover from the mounting frame.
Place the heat exchanger on the mounting frame and align the screw
holes on the underside of the heat exchanger with the screw holes of
the mounting frame (one screw hole in each corner, see Figure 3-17).
Fasten the heat exchanger to the frame using the supplied screws
and washers.
Plug the power leads into the connectors on the roof (see Figure 318) and fasten the coupling rings.
Fixing points are in

all four corners of the
support frame
Figure 3-17 Heat Exchanger Fixing Points
3-13 (24)
ABB
Figure 3-18 Heat Exchanger Electric Connections
3.4.9
Joining Water Pipes

The pipe joints connecting the water pipes of two joining transport units
have been slid onto the water pipes in the factory with the bolts showing
in the direction where they can be reached best with a wrench. On the
installation site, they have to be slid over two joining pipe ends, centered,
adjusted and fastened after the cabinets have been aligned.
Proceed as follows:
Connect the pipe ends by sliding the pipe joint over the two joining
pipe ends.
Center the pipe joint.

Mark the length of a pipe joint on one end of a water pipe as a fitting
guide (see Figure 3-19).
Figure 3-19 Marker for Centering a Pipe Joint

Slide the pipe joint over two pipe ends as shown in Figure 3-20.
47
mm
Figure 3-20 Centering a Pipe Joint
3-14 (24)
ABB
Adjust the pipe joint.
IMPORTANT!
When adjusting a pipe joint make sure that the locking part of the pipe joint
is at a minimum distance of 55 mm from a DC busbar.
Front of cabinet
5 5 min
mm .
Locking part of
pipe joint
m
55 min.
m
Figure 3-21 Adjusting Pipe Joints
After adjusting a pipe joint, alternately tighten the bolts only lightly.
Tighten the bolts with a torque wrench to the final torque rate
indicated on the pipe joints outer surface.
Torque rate
Figure 3-22 Torque Rate
IMPORTANT!
Do not tighten bolts above indicated torque rate.
If a pipe joint has to be removed, proceed as follows:

Loosen bolts alternately but do not remove them
completely.
Slide pipe joint to the side.
3-15 (24)
ABB
IMPORTANT!
Sealing lip may touch pipe end. Turn and move pipe joint smoothly.
Clean pipe joint and treat bolts with an appropriate
lubricant before refitting.
3.4.10 Joining DC Busbars

DC busbars must be connected with joining pieces between two transport
units. Busbar joining pieces within a transport unit have already been
mounted in the factory. The DC busbars are reached best from behind and
from the top.
Remove top plates and rear walls if necessary.
IMPORTANT!
All joining pieces and bolts must be orientated exactly as shown in Figure
3-23 to Figure 3-26 to maintain the required distance between busbars of
different polarity.
When fitting the joining pieces make sure that the bolt head is on the
busbar side and the nut is on the side of the joining piece.
IMPORTANT!
Tightening torque for bolted busbar connections: 30 Nm.
The bolts must be greased to maintain the required contact pressure.
Use the items listed inTable 3-4 when joining the busbars.
Table 3-4
Item
Hexagon head bolt
Type
Ident. Number
M12x35
NB 312350P8118
Strain washer
Hexagon head nut
3-16 (24)
GZN 490084P0111
M6 A2-70
HZN 452198P0022
Joining piece
3BHB009410R0001
Grease
GJN598105P0153
ABB
Top of cabinet
Strain washer on each side

of a connection!
Front of cabinet
Joining piece
NP
Figure 3-23 Busbar Configuration 1, Polarity and Bolt Orientation
Top of cabinet

of a connection!
Front of cabinet
Joining piece
+
NP
NP
3-17 (24)
ABB

of a connection!
Top of cabinet
Front of cabinet
Joining piece
NP
+
NP
NP
Front of cabinet
Top of cabinet
of a connection!
Joining piece
+
NP
NP
+
NP
NP
3-18 (24)
ABB
3.4.11 Joining Ground Busbars

Ground busbars must be connected with joining pieces between two
transport units. Busbar joining pieces within a transport unit have already
been mounted in the factory.
IMPORTANT!
Mount the joining pieces for safety ground busbar (PE) and power ground
busbar (PG) as shown in Figure 3-27 using the items listed inTable 3-5.
Table 3-5
Item
Hexagon head bolt
Type
Ident. Number
M12x40
NB 312350P8119
Strain washer
Hexagon head nut
GZN 490084P0111
M6 A2-70
HZN 452198P0022
Joining piece
3BHB009221R0001
Grease
GJN598105P0153
PG busbar
of a connection!
Pipe joint
Connecting piece
PE busbar
Front of cabinet
Figure 3-27 Connecting Ground Busbars
3-19 (24)
ABB
3.4.12 Joining AC Busbars in ARU, INU, IFU

If a Terminal Unit (TEU) is joined to an Activer Rectiver Unit (ARU), an
Inverter Unit (INU) or an Input Filter Unit (IFU) the AC busbars in these
cabinets must be connected to the corresponding busbars in the TEU.
The busbar joining pieces between two transport units have oblong holes
for fine adjustment.
IMPORTANT!
Table 3-6
Item
Hexagon head bolt
Type
Ident. Number
M12x40
NB 312350P8119
Strain washer
Hexagon head nut
Grease
3-20 (24)
GZN 490084P0111
M6 A2-70
HZN 452198P0022
GJN598105P0153
ABB
Connecting Points on
the Right of TEU
Figure 3-28 shows the connecting points of AC busbars of ARU, INU and
IFU when located on the right of a terminal unit.
Connecting points
for phase L3 of IFU
Front of TEU cabinet
Connecting points for

phase L3 of ARU/INU/IFU
L3
L2
phase L2 of ARU/INU
L1

phase L1 of ARU/INU/IFU
Figure 3-28 Connecting Points of AC Busbars in ARU, INU, IFU
3-21 (24)
ABB
the Left of TEU
Figure 3-29 shows the connecting points of AC busbars of ARU, INU and
IFU when located on the left of a terminal unit.
L3
L2
L1
Connecting points for ARU/INU

Connecting points for IFU
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Figure 3-29 Connecting Points of AC Busbars in ARU, INU, IFU
3-22 (24)
ABB
3.4.13 Joining AC Busbars in LSU

If a Line Supply Unit (LSU) is joined to a Terminal Unit (TEU), the AC
busbars in this cabinet must be connected to the corresponding busbars
in the TEU.
IMPORTANT!
Table 3-7
Item
Type
Ident. Number
Remarks
Hexagon head bolt
M12x50
NB 312450P8121
single busbars
Hexagon head bolt
M12x80
NB 312450P8127
double busbars
Hexagon head bolt
M12x60
NB 312350P0418
Strain washer
Hexagon head nut
GZN 490084P0111
M6 A2-70
Grease
the Right of TEU
HZN 452198P0022
GJN598105P0153
Figure 3-30 shows the connecting points of AC busbars of LSU when

located on the right of a terminal unit.
Connecting points

Figure 3-30 Connecting Points of AC Busbars in LSU
3-23 (24)
ABB
Single busbars in
7 and 9 MVA units
require M12x40 bolts
Double busbars in
14 MVA units
require M12x40 bolts
Figure 3-31 Busbar Arrangements in LSU
3-24 (24)
ABB
NOTICE!
All installation work must be carried out by qualified personnel in
compliance with local regulations.
See Chapter 1 - Safety for explanation on how the safety messages are
categorized and used in this manual.
Power must not be applied to the drive system without the consent of the
ABB commissioning staff.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
To ensure safety, the converter must be installed in accordance with the
instructions in this manual. Improper work can lead to life-threatening
injury or death.Take appropriate measures to prevent that mains and
auxiliary power can be switched on.
4.1
Overview
The electrical installation includes the following steps:
Understanding
Electrical Drawings
Abbreviations
Internal wiring
see section 4.3 Internal Wiring
Ground cable
see section 4.4 Busbars and Ground Connections
Power cables
see section 4.5 External Power Cabling
Auxiliary voltage and control cables

see section 4.6 Connecting Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
Serial communications and encoder cables

see sections:
4.7 Connecting Cables for Serial Communication and Encoders
4.8 Connecting Position Encoder Cables in Marine Drives
Heating cables
see section 4.9 Connecting the Heating Cable
Designation, cross-reference and device-identification conventions are

defined on the diagrams in Appendix D - Electrical Diagrams.
Control Unit (COU) and Terminal Unit (TEU) exist in a version for 3 and 5
MVA converters and a version for converters with a power rating of 7MVA
4-1 (28)
ABB
and above. Both versions have a different physical layout and can be
present in a drive line-up. To distinguish the cabinets, the following
abbreviations are used:
Tools
4.2
COU Type 1 and TEU Type 1 for 3 and 5 MVA converters
COU Type 2 and TEU Type 2 for power ratings of 7 MVA and above.
ABB offers various tool sets which contain all necessary tools and
equipment for installation, commissioning and maintenance of the
converter. The content of the tool sets is described in manual Tool Sets for
Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance.
Cables
Power Cables
Auxiliary Power Cable
Control Cables
See the Power Cable Specification for information on suitable power

cables (incoming feeder cables, motor cables, braking resistor cables) or
contact ABB.
A 3-phase cable is required for the auxiliary power supply. A neutral
connector is not required. Type and rating is to be selected according to
local regulations.
Control cables should be provided in accordance with Table 4-1. Either
single or multiple twisted pair cables may be used.
Control cables should not be laid in parallel to the power cables. If this
cannot be avoided, a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 in) must be
maintained between control and power cables. Control and power cables
should be crossed at an angle of 90.
Table 4-1
Control Cable Requirements
Signal Type
General Cable Type
Cross-Section
Twisted pair(s) - Overall Shield
0.5 to 2.5 mm2 /

AWG 20 to AWG 12
0.5 to 2.5 mm2 /

AWG 20 to AWG 12
0.5 to 2.5 mm2 /

AWG 20 to AWG 12
0.5 to 2.5 mm2 /

AWG 20 to AWG 12
Speed Encoder
Twisted pair cable with overall shield

and separately shielded pairs
0.5 mm2
4 x (2+1)
Position Encoder
Twisted pair cable with overall shield

and separately shielded pairs
0.5 mm2
4 x (2+1
Analog In
Analog Out
Digital In
Digital Out
Synchronization
Cables
4-2 (28)
Synchronization cables are used in ACS 6000 configurations with ARU. A

3-phase shielded cable without neutral wire is required for the voltage
ABB
supply of the synchronization transformer. For information on ratings

contact ABB.
4.3
Internal Wiring
Cables for internal wiring are prepared inside the cabinets. All necessary
data for each individual connection, i.e.
Cable numbers
Cable type
Cross-section
Location of terminals
are specified on the Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D Electrical Diagrams.

The cables have been connected on one side or they have been rolled up
and delivered as loose items.
All cables to be connected can be identified by their specific number.
Individual strands or wires have been marked with the designation of the
terminal they have to be connected to.
Proceed as follows:
Pull all cables through the cable duct located at the top of the
cabinets. Cut-outs in the ducts provide entry into the cabinets.
Cable duct
Figure 4-1
Location of Cable Duct
Lay the cables and wires in their designated trays and cable ducts as
shown in Figure 4-2.
4-3 (28)
ABB
Front of cabinet
Cable trays A for:
- Auxiliary supply
- Control cables
Cable duct B for:

Fiber optic cables
Mounting rail C for:
IGCT power supply cable of
- Discharging Unit (DIU)
- Ristor Braking Unit (RBU)
- Voltage Limiting Unit (VLU)
Figure 4-2
IMPORTANT!
When fastening IGCT power supply cables on mounting rail C (see Figure
4-2) make sure that the cables are at a minimum distance of 5 mm from
the nearest metall part.
Cable Duct Sections
Connect all cables and wires according to the Converter Hardware

Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical Diagrams.
IMPORTANT!
Handle fiber optic cables with care. Do not touch the ends of the fibers,
they are extremely sensitive to dirt. When unplugging a fiber optic cable,
always hold it at the connector not at the fiber.
Observe the maximum long-term tensile load of 1.0 N and the minimum
bend radius of 25 mm.
4-4 (28)
ABB
4.4
Busbars and Ground Connections
Cable entry from top

LSU
TEU
INU
WCU
CBU
EXU
(CIU)
DC (-)
DC (NP)
DC (+)
1L1
1L2
1L3
L3
L2
L1
2L3
2L2
2L1
PG
PE
Cable entry from bottom
PG to PE connection in CBU
Connecting point of system ground

Figure 4-3
AC Busbars
Principal Busbar Arrangements
Incoming feeder and motor cables are connected to their corresponding

busbars inside a TEU. In multi-motor converters, several TEUs are part of
the drive line-up. See the Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D Electrical Diagrams to assign incoming feeder and motor cables to their
corresponding TEU.
The incoming busbars are interconnected with the line rectifier unit (ARU
or LSU) and the outgoing busbars with the motor inverter(s) (INU). The
busbars can be identified by their phase designations.
DC Busbars
The DC busbars connect the line rectifiers (ARU or LSU) with motor
inverter(s) (INU) and CBU. In multi-motor configurations up to four DC
busbar arrangements can be installed (see Chapter 3 - Mechanical
Installation, 3.4.10 Joining DC Busbars). The busbars are mounted in the
upper part of the converter and are marked with DC (+), DC (-) and DC
(NP).
Protective Earth
It is important that the converter is properly grounded to maintain safety

and to ensure smooth functioning of the equipment. For this reason, the
converters ground cable must be securely tied to the grounding system of
the installation site (system ground).
The converter is equipped with a continuous ground busbar (marked PE,
Protective Earth) which is installed in the bottom area of the cabinets (see
Figure 4-3).
4-5 (28)
ABB
The ground cable is tied to a connecting bar which is accessible from the
front of the cabinets (see Figure 4-5 to Figure 4-6).
IMPORTANT!
The ground cable must be connected to the ground busbar of the
converter at only one point: at the busbar inside the TEU closest to the
CBU. See Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical
Diagrams for project-specific illustration.
The connection must be in compliance with local regulations.
Connection details:
Thickness of connecting bar: 5 mm
Diameter of provided fixing hole for the ground cable: 13 mm.
Recommended minimum cross section of the ground cable:

150 mm2.
Connecting bar
for
grounding cable
Note: If cable enters from the

top, the connecting bar is
mounted below the roof
Figure 4-4
4-6 (28)
Bottom Connecting Point of System Ground in TEU Type 1
ABB
Connecting point
for
ground cable
Figure 4-5
Bottom Connecting Point of System Ground in TEU Type 2
Connecting point
for
grounding cable
Figure 4-6
Power Ground
Top Connecting Point of System Ground in TEU Type 2
Cable shields must be connected to the converter to ensure proper

operation. A separate busbar (Power Ground, PG) is installed for this
purpose. The busbars of power ground and protective earth are
connected with each other inside the CBU which has the grounding switch
mounted on the front door. The connection has been made in the factory
already.
See Power Cable Specification, section 1.3 Installation Requirements for
a principal illustration on cable shield grounding.
4-7 (28)
ABB
4.5
External Power Cabling

The following sections
4.5.1 Connecting Incoming Feeder and Motor Cables
4.5.2 Connecting Braking Resistor Cables
describe cable entry using EMC ROX modules. These modules are not in
ABBs scope of supply.
Information on EMC ROX modules can be optained from www.roxtec.com
and from the Power Cable Specification.
See the Layout Drawing in Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for the
dimensions of the EMC ROX frame(s).
If EMC ROX modules are not used, cable transits in accordance with local
regulations must be installed.
4.5.1
Connecting Incoming Feeder and Motor Cables

The incoming feeder and motor cables are connected inside a TEU. If
several TEUs are part of the converter, see Appendix D - Electrical
Diagrams to assign incoming feeder and motor cables to their
corresponding TEU.
Cable entry can either be from the top or from the bottom. Project specific
cable entry is illustrated on the Layout Drawing in Appendix C Mechanical Drawings.
NOTICE!
Do not cut cables inside the terminal unit. Make sure that waste from cable
cutting and stripping cannot enter the converter. Any waste which
accidentally dropped into the converter must be retrieved. The waste
could cause damage or malfunction.
Enter a cable into the respective terminal unit to measure the

conductor length.
Mark the required conductor length and withdraw the cable. Cut it to
the correct length, strip the conductor ends and mount the cable lugs
suitable for M12 bolts. Cables must be terminated with lugs according
to the specification of the cable manufacturer.
See Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for hole sizes of cable termination bar inside the TEU.
4-8 (28)
Cable armor must be in contact with the EMC ROX module as shown
in Figure 4-7 (see also Power Cable Specification). If non-armored
cables are used, the cable shield must be in contact with the EMC
ROX module.
ABB
Pull the conductors into the cabinet and install the EMC ROX
modules.
EMC ROX module
Strip this part of

the cable jacket
Figure 4-7
Entry plate
Cable Entry for Power Cables with EMC ROX Modules
Check the insulation of each cable before connection and verify that
the results are within the specification of the cable manufacturer.
Connect the phase conductors to the corresponding busbars. See the

specification of the manufacturer of the cable lugs for tightening
torques.
CAUTION!
High voltages will be present in the terminal unit. High voltages can cause
flashover between the potential of a phase conductor and ground.
A minimum clearance of 55 mm must be maintained between each cable
and the terminals of any other phase.
Connect the shield ends of all conductors to the power ground busbar
(PG).
Enter the ground cable into the cabinet through the entry plate and
fasten it to the PE ground busbar.
Connect the armor of all cables to the power ground busbar (PG).
Mount top plates and rear walls of all cabinets and fasten them with
the supplied screws.
4-9 (28)
ABB
IMPORTANT!
All provided screws must be mounted and tightened to achieve best EMC.
10 Cover all remaining cable entry openings.
4.5.2
Connecting Braking Resistor Cables
IMPORTANT!
This section is only applicable for converters with a Braking Chopper Unit
(BCU).
The braking resistor cables are connected inside a BCU.
Cable entry can either be from the top or from the bottom. Project specific
cable entry is illustrated on the Layout Drawing in Appendix C Mechanical Drawings.
NOTICE!
Do not cut cables inside the terminal unit. Make sure that waste from cable
cutting and stripping cannot enter the converter. Any waste which
accidentally dropped into the converter must be retrieved. The waste
could cause damage or malfunction.
Proceed as follows:
Enter a cable into the cabinet to measure the conductor length.

Mark the required conductor length and withdraw the cable. Cut it to
the correct length, strip the conductor ends and mount the cable lugs
suitable for M12 bolts. Cables must be terminated with lugs according
to the specification of the cable manufacturer.
4-10 (28)
Cable armor must be in contact with the EMC ROX module as shown
in Figure 4-7 (see also Power Cable Specification). If non-armored
cables are used, the cable shield must be in contact with the EMC
ROX module.
Pull the conductors into the cabinet and install the EMC ROX module.
Check the insulation of each cable before connection and verify that
the results are within the specification of the cable manufacturer.
Connect the phase conductors to the corresponding busbars. See the

specification of the manufacturer of the cable lugs for tightening
torques.
ABB
CAUTION!
High voltages will be present in the terminal unit. High voltages can cause
flashover between the potential of a phase conductor and ground.
A minimum clearance of 55 mm must be maintained between each cable
and the terminals of any other phase.
Connect the shield ends of all conductors to the power ground busbar
(PG) (see Figure 4-8).
Connect the armor of all cables to the power ground busbar (PG).
Connecting point of
cable shield
Cable entry
Figure 4-8
4.5.3
BCU Bottom Cable Entry
Connecting Excitation Cables
IMPORTANT!
This section is only applicable for converters with synchronous motors.
Information on cable connection can be found on the Converter Hardware
The incoming feeder and motor cables can be entered either from the top
or from the bottom of a cabinet. Project specific cable entry is illustrated
on the Layout Drawing in Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings.
Proceed as follows:
Enter the conductors through the EMC sleeves of the entry plate as
shown in Figure 4-9:
Strip the cable insulation at the point of entry. Tighten
4-11 (28)
ABB
the EMC sleeve on the stripped part of the cable with

cable ties.
If necessary, remove the entry plate and slide it onto
the cable. Fasten the entry plate, after the ground
connections have been made.
Remove the rubber grommets from the entry plate
and cut them to adequate cable diameter (Figure 410). To ensure proper sealing, cut along the diameter
marking that corresponds to the cable diameter. Slide
the grommet onto the cable (Figure 4-9). The
grommet must fit tight to prevent water from entering
the cabinet. If necessary, seal the junctions with
silicone rubber.
Outer sheath
1st. insulated conductor

2nd. insulated conductor
Mounting bracket
3rd. insulated conductor

Strip conductor
insulation to
expose shield
Rubber grommet
Entry plate
EMC sleeve
3rd. insulated conductor
Strip conductor
insulation to
expose shield
2nd. insulated conductor

1st. insulated conductor
Mounting bracket
Outer sheath
Top entry
Bottom entry
Figure 4-9
Principle Cable Entry into EXU
Figure 4-10 Cutting Rubber Grommets to Size
4-12 (28)
ABB
4.6
Connect the supply cables and motor cables to their corresponding

busbars.
Connect the end of the cable shields to PE.
Connecting Auxiliary Power and Control Cables

The auxiliary power cable and the control cables are connected inside the
Water Cooling Unit (WCU).
Information on cable connection can be found on the Converter Hardware
The cables can be entered either from the top or from the bottom of the
WCU. Project specific cable entry is illustrated on the Layout Drawing in
Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings.
It is recommended to properly determine the required length of a cable
between the point of entry and the connection point inside a cabinet and
to cut the cable to the required length before connection to avoid excess
cable to be stored in the cable ducts.
The following section describes cable entry using EMC ROX modules
(type CS-EMV). These modules are not in ABBs scope of supply.
Information on EMC ROX modules can be optained from
www.roxtec.com.
See the Layout Drawing in Appendix C - Mechanical Drawings for the
dimensions of the EMC ROX frame(s).
If EMC ROX modules are not used, cable transits in accordance with local
regulations must be installed.
Cable transit inside cabinet

EMC ROX-Module
Remove outer
sheath in this area
Figure 4-11 Cable Transit inside Cabinet
4-13 (28)
ABB
4.6.1
Connecting Auxiliary Power Cable

Proceed as follows:
Enter the auxiliary power cable into the WCU.
Connect the cable according to the Converter Hardware Diagram in

Appendix D - Electrical Diagrams.
Shielded cables: Remove the outer cable sheath in
the area of the cable transit. The conductive parts of
the EMC ROX module must be in contact with the
cable shield (see Figure 4-11). The cable shield is
connected to PE.
4.6.2
Connecting Control Cables in WCU

Top Cable Entry
Proceed as follows:
Enter the control cables into the WCU through the entry plate (see
Figure 4-12).
Remove the rubber grommets from the entry plate
and cut them to adequate diameter for the auxiliary
power cable. To ensure proper sealing, cut along the
diameter marking that corresponds to the cable
diameter (see Figure 4-10). Slide the grommet onto
the cable. The grommet must fit tight to prevent water
from entering the cabinet. If necessary, seal the
junctions with silicone rubber.
Top entry plate

Cable transit
Cable routing
Figure 4-12 WCU Top Cable Entry
Pull the cables through the cable transit (see Figure 4-14).
Shielded cables are prepared as illustrated in Figure
4-11. Remove the cable insulation in the area of the
cable transit to bring the conductive parts of the EMC
ROX module in contact with the cable shield.
4-14 (28)
Connect the end of the cable shield to PE.
Connect the cables to the terminals below the cable transit according
to the Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical
ABB
Diagrams.
Bottom Cable Entry
Proceed as follows:
Remove the cover (if present) of the cable entry. The cover can either
be discarted or used as an entry plate.
Bottom entry plate
Figure 4-13 WCU Types 29, 50 Bottom Cable Entry
Enter the cables through the floor and run them up the side wall as
illustrated in Figure 4-14.
Fix the cables to the C-rails on the side of the cabinet.

The cables can be fixed using a screw base with a
cable tie or cable clamps.
Pull the cables through the cable transit (see Figure 4-14).
Shielded cables are prepared as illustrated in Figure
4-11. Remove the cable insulation in the area of the
cable transit to bring the conductive parts of the EMC
ROX module in contact with the cable shield.
Connect the end of the cable shield to PE.
4-15 (28)
ABB
Cable transit
Cable routing
C-rail
Bottom cable entry

Walls removed for illustration purposes
Figure 4-14 WCU Bottom Cable Entry - Cable Routing
4-16 (28)
Connect the cables to the terminals below the cable transit according
to the Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical
Diagrams.
ABB
4.7
Connecting Cables for Serial Communication and Encoders

The serial communications and encoder cables are entered into a COU
either from the top or from the bottom.
Information on cable termination can be found on the Converter Hardware
Top and bottom cable entry are covered by plates. Holes for cable glands
have to be drilled on site.
It is recommended to properly determine the required length of a cable
between the point of entry and the connection point inside a cabinet and
to cut the cable to the required length before connection to avoid excess
cable to be stored in the cable ducts.
Top Cable Entry
When cables are entered through the roof, EMC cable glands have to be
used. These cable glands are not part of the delivery.
Top entry plate
Figure 4-15 Top Cable Entry

Proceed as follows:
Remove the entry plate and drill a hole adequate for the diameter of
the cable gland.
Cut off the cable sheath on the length of cable between the cable
gland and the connection point.
Prepare the cable in the area of the cable gland according to Figure
4-16.
4-17 (28)
ABB
Overall cable shield

in contact with cable
gland
Point of entry
Entry plate
Figure 4-16 Cable Entry with EMC Cable Gland
Pull the cable through the cable gland, attach the cable gland to the
entry plate and fasten the entry plate to the roof.
Lay the cable along cable tray A (see Figure 4-17).
Cable routing
Front of cabinet
Cable trays A for control cables
Figure 4-17 Control Cable Trays
4-18 (28)
At the end of cable tray A run the cable down into the cable duct to its
destination inside the COU (see Figure 4-18 regarding COU type 1 or
Figure 4-19 regarding COU type 2).
ABB
Routing control cable

from cable tray A to
cable duct
Figure 4-18 Front View of COU Type 1


from cable tray A to
cable duct
Figure 4-19 Front View of COU Type 2
See the Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical

Diagrams to identify the device terminals where the conductors are
connected.
4-19 (28)
ABB
If twisted pair cable is used, leave the unshielded cable ends twisted
up to the device terminals.
Connect the cable shields as described in section Bottom Cable
Entry.
Bottom Cable Entry
If control cables are entered through the bottom, rubber grommets must
be used to seal the entry plate. The rubber grommets are not part of the
delivery.
Proceed as follows:
Remove the entry plate and drill a hole adequate for the diameter of
the rubber grommet.
Enter the cable through the bottom entry plate. Depending on the
type of COU, run the cable to the duct on the right (see Figure 4-20
regarding COU type 1) or to the duct on the left (see Figure 4-21,
Figure 4-22 and Figure 4-23 regarding COU type 2).
Entry plate
Cable routing
Figure 4-20 Bottom Cable Entry in COU Type 1
Entry plate
Cable routing
Figure 4-21 Bottom Cable Entry COU Type 2

Inside a COU type 2 without cable duct, fasten the cable to the water
pipe with suitable cable ties.
4-20 (28)
ABB
Entry plate
Routing cable
along water pipe
Figure 4-22 Bottom Cable Entry COU Type 2
Run the cable up the cable duct and lead the cable through the cable
transit.
Cable transit through the frame is the same for both types of COU.
Figure 4-24 illustrates cable transit through the frame inside a COU
type 2.
Cut the rubber grommet(s) to the correct size.
Remove the cable shield in the area of the grounding
bracket.
Ground the overall cable shield.
Fix the cable to the side wall.
Front
Cable routing
Side wall removed for

illustration purposes
Figure 4-23 Cable Routing in COU Type 1
4-21 (28)
ABB
Control cable fixing
Front
Cable transit
Grounding brackets
for overall cable shield
Cable duct
Figure 4-24 Cable Transit
Run the cable along the horizontal cable duct and down through the
vertical duct to its destination inside the COU (see Figure 4-25
regarding COU type 1 and Figure 4-26 regarding COU type 2).

through cable duct
to
encoder or
fieldbus Interface
Rubber grommets
Figure 4-25 Routing Control Cable in COU Type 1
4-22 (28)
ABB

through cable duct
to
encoder or fieldbus
interface
Rubber grommets
Figure 4-26 Routing Control Cable in COU Type 2
See Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical

Diagrams to identify the device terminals where the conductors are
connected.
If twisted pair cable is used, leave the unshielded cable ends twisted
up to the device terminals.
Connect the cable shields as described in section Bottom Cable
Entry, page 4-20.
Grounding Cable
Shields
IMPORTANT!
The individual shields and the overall shield of encoder cables must not
be connected to the terminals of the encoder adapter but to the separate
shield grounding point next to it (see Figure 4-27).
The unshielded cable ends must be as short as possible. The shield ends
which are fixed to the grounding clamp must be not longer than 50 mm.
The shields of serial communications cables, however, are terminated at
the fieldbus adapter as shown on the Converter Hardware Diagram in
4-23 (28)
ABB
Gray encoder interface

Shield grounding point for
gray encoder interface
Pulse encoder interface

Shield grounding point for
pulse encoder interface
Figure 4-27 Shield Grounding Points

A shield grounding point consists of a slotted mounting bracket which has
been mounted in the factory and an grounding clamp.
Depending on the layout of the COU, the shield grounding points can be
mounted at a different place than shown in Figure 4-27.
Instead of the brackets, slots can have been cut into the back wall of the
COU swing frame for fixing the grounding clamps.
Three grounding clamps of different sizes (see Figure 4-28) are supplied
for each connection to accommodate encoder cables of different diameter.
The clamps are tied to each mounting bracket.
SK 9
SK 10
SK 8
Figure 4-28 Shield Grounding Clamps
4-24 (28)
ABB
4.8
Connecting Position Encoder Cables in Marine Drives
IMPORTANT!
This section is only applicable for marine converters used for azipod
propulsion.
In applications for azipod propulsion, fibre-optic cables are used for signal
transmission between position encoder(s) and the associated receiver(s)
in the converter. The number of the pulse encoders and the location of the
receiver(s) in the converter depends on the application. The receiver(s)
can either be installed in the Water Cooling Unit (WCU) or a Control Unit
(COU). See Converter Hardware Diagram in Appendix D - Electrical
Diagrams for project specific details.
NOTICE!
If a fiber-optic cable is damaged or improperly installed, data transmission
can be affected and the equipment can mulfunction. To prevent such
problems always follow the handling and installation guidelines.
Handling and
Installation Guidelines
Lay the fiber-optic cables in a steel or plastic conduit to protect the

cables against damages. The conduit shall only be used for encoder
cables.
The conduit starts at the Azipod Information Unit (AIU) and ends
inside the converter.
On the AIU side, the conduit starts at the rubber cable penetrations
through which the fiber-optic cable is entered into the cabinet.
On the converter side, the conduit enters through the entry plate with
about 10 to 20 mm of conduit extending from the entry plate.
Routing Cables
through WCU
Cover the cable end with a cap to protect the tip of the fiber against
scratches before pulling the cable through the conduit.
Do not exceed the maximum tensile load and the minimum bend
radius of the cable. See cable specification for information.
When using cable ties be careful not to deform the fiber-optic cable.
Do not use tie guns.
Connect/unplug a fiber-optic cable by holding the connector and not

the fiber.
Proceed as follows when routing cables through the Water Cooling Unit
(WCU):
Route the cables through the WCU as desribed in section 4.6.2

Connecting Control Cables in WCU.
4-25 (28)
ABB
After the cables have been pulled through the cable transit inside the
WCU run the cables through the WCU as indicated with the dashed
line in Figure 4-29.
Connect the cable to the receiving connector of the receiver (see

Figure 4-29).
The supplied connectors must be used if the cable has not been
equipped with connectors.
Redundant cables should be stored appropriately for later use.
Cable transit
Receiving connector
Installation location of receiver can be different

Figure 4-29 Pulse Encoder Receiver
Routing Cables
through COU
4-26 (28)
When routing cables through a COU proceed as illustrated in section 4.7

Connecting Cables for Serial Communication and Encoders.
ABB
4.9
Connecting the Heating Cable

When the converter has been ordered with a heating cable, the heating
cable has been readily installed along the bottom water pipe (see Figure
4-30).
The following connections have to be made:
The power supply according to the Converter Hardware Diagram in

The heating cables of two adjoining transport units have to be

connected with each other.
Figure 4-30 Heating Cable
Figure 4-31 Heating Cable Connector
4-27 (28)
ABB
4-28 (28)
ABB
5.1
Customer Assistance and Acceptance

Commissioning, parameter adjustments and functional tests are to be
carried out by certified commissioning personnel. Information on the
commissioning procedure and conditions for the commissioning to start
can be obtained from ABB. For address see section General Information.
During the commissioning period, the customer is requested to provide
qualified personnel for assistance, who are
familiar with medium and low voltage equipment and with local safety
regulations,
familiar with the driven process,
authorized to operate associated medium and low voltage equipment

(MCB, other MV and LV switchgear etc.),
authorized to operate the driven process for functional tests.
When commissioning is completed, the commissioning report is signed by

the responsable commissioning engineer and by the customer as a sign
of acceptance. A copy of the report and a copy of the actual parameter
settings are handed out to the customer.
5-1 (2)
5-2 (2)
ABB
ABB
The instruction manual applicable for the converter is filed at the end of the
manual.
6-1 (2)
ABB
6-2 (2)
ABB
7.1
Overview
The CDP control panel is the basic user interface for operating, controlling
and monitoring the converter.
The panel messages and parameter settings used in this chapter are
typical examples to illustrate the related instructions and display functions.
They may differ from the actual messages and parameter settings in your
converter.
1 L -> 1242,0 rpm I

MotCurr
76.00 A
MotSpeed 1242.0 rpm
86.00 %
Torque
Alphanumeric display
(4 lines x 20 characters)
Mode selection buttons
Enter button
Selection and changing buttons

Reset button
Setpoint setting button
Local, remote button
Start button
Forward, reverse buttons
Stop button
Figure 7-1 CDP Control Panel
7-1 (12)
ABB
Keypad Modes
7.2
The CDP control panel provides the following modes:
Identification mode
Actual Signal Display mode, selected by the ACT button
Parameter mode, selected by the PAR button
Function mode, selected by the FUNC button
Drive Selection mode, selected by the DRIVE button.
Identification Mode
After the converter has been energized or after the panel has been
connected to the converter for which the auxiliary voltage has been
switched on already, the identification display appears showing the panel
version and then the ID-number of the converter. When the control panel
is being initialized the display changes as follows:
CDP312 PANEL V5.30
........
After 2-3 seconds:
ACS 6000 xxxx

< Device Name >
ID-NUMBER 1
After another few seconds, the display changes to the Actual Signal
Display mode.
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
Status...
Earth Iso clos
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
7-2 (12)
ABB
7.3
Actual Signal Display Mode

Two displays can be selected in the Actual Signal Display mode:
Actual Signal Display
Fault History Display.
The Actual Signal Display appears first when the Actual Signal Display
mode has been selected. However, when the converter is in a fault
condition, the Fault Display will be shown instead.
The Actual Signal Display is used to monitor the converter without
interfering the operation of the converter. Three selectable actual values
are shown continuously on the display.
The panel will automatically return to the Actual Signal Display mode
from other modes within one minute when no buttons are pressed
(exceptions: Status Display and Common Reference Display when in
Drive Selection mode and Fault Display mode).
A complete list of selectable actual signals can be found in the Signal and
Parameter Table.
The fault memory includes information on the 64 most recent fault events
that occurred in the converter. The name of the fault and the actual time
are displayed. The procedure for selecting and clearing the fault history is
described in Table 7-3.
When a fault or warning is generated in the converter, the message will be
displayed immediately, except when in Drive Selection mode.
Changing from the Fault Display mode to other display modes is possible
without resetting the fault first. When no buttons are pressed, the fault or
warning text is displayed as long as the fault is pending.
The Actual Signal Display mode is selected by pressing the ACT button.
ACT
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
Rdy MCB on
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
7-3 (12)
ABB
When in Actual Signal Display mode, the fast UP/DOWN buttons allow
to toggle between Actual Signal Display and Fault History Display.
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
1 LAST FAULT
Overspeed
001231 12:30:02.3256
Table 7-1
Displaying three Actual Signals
Step
Function
1.
to display the full name of

the three actual signals
Button to be
pressed
HOLD
ACT
2.
to return to the Actual

Signal Display mode
RELEASE
ACT
Table 7-2
Function
1.
to enter the Actual

Signal Display mode
Button to be
pressed
ACT
2.
to select a row where the

actual signal is to be
displayed (a blinking
cursor indicates the
selected row)
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 1
DriveStatus Running
MotorSpeed 600.00 rpm
Power
75.0 %
3.
to enter the actual signal

selection function
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
ENTER
7-4 (12)
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 1
DriveStatusWord
MotorSpeed
Power
Selecting Actual Signals
Step
4.
Display
to select a parameter
group
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
1 Actual Signals
13 Power
0.0 %
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
2 Actual Signals
01 Excitation Cur
ABB
Table 7-2
Selecting Actual Signals (Continued)
Step
Function
5.
to select an actual signal
6.a
to accept the selection

and to return to the
mode
6.b
to cancel the selection

and keep the original
selection, press any of
the mode buttons
Button to be
pressed
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
1 Actual Signals
09 NP Voltage
0.0 V
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
NP Voltage 0.0 V
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
the selected keypad

mode is entered
Table 7-3
Displaying a Fault and Resetting Fault History
Step
Function
1.
to enter the Actual

Signal Display mode
Button to be
pressed
ACT
2.
to enter the Fault

History Display
3.
to select the previous

(UP) or next fault
(DOWN)
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
1 Last Fault
+ Panel Lost
Power
0.0 %
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
2 Last Fault
Speed Ref Lost
980224 10:45:32.0705
to clear the fault history

RESET
the fault history is empty
1 L ->
1 Last
600.0 rpm 0
Fault
H
Min
7-5 (12)
ABB
Table 7-3
Displaying a Fault and Resetting Fault History (Continued)
Step
Function
4.
to return to the Actual

Signal Display mode
Table 7-4
Button to be
pressed
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
Displaying and Resetting an Active Fault
Step
Function
1.
to display an active fault
Button to be
pressed
ACT
2.
to reset the fault

RESET
7.4
Display
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
ACS 1000
*** Fault ***
Panel Lost
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
Parameter Mode
NOTICE!
Parameters must only be set by qualified personnel. Do not change any
parameter, if the meaning of the parameter and the effects of the change
are not fully understood. Running the drive system with incorrect data can
result in improper operation, reduction of control accuracy and damage of
equipment.
Parameters allow the converter to be configured and set-up specifically for
an application (see also Signal and Parameter Table).
Parameters are organized in functional groups. All control functions are
represented by a parameter group and can be activated and set-up
individually.
Selecting Parameters
7-6 (12)
The Parameter mode is used to check and change parameters. When this
mode is entered for the first time after the auxiliary voltage of the converter
has been switched on, the display will show the first parameter of
parameter group 11. The next time, the Parameter mode is entered, the
previously selected parameter is shown.
ABB
Some parameter values cannot be changed while the converter is running.

If tried, the following warning will be displayed:
** Warning **
Write Access Denied

Parameter Setting
Not Possible
Table 7-5
Selecting a Parameter and Changing the Value
Step
Function
1.
to enter the Parameter

mode
Button to be
pressed
PAR
2.
to select a different
group
3.
to select a parameter
4.
to enter the parameter

setting function
to change the parameter

value
(slow change for
numbers and text)
(fast change for numbers
only)
6.a

mode
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
01 IOEC3 OptionBoard
YES
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
YES
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
NO
ENTER
5.
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
[NO]
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
[YES]
ENTER
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
YES
7-7 (12)
ABB
Table 7-5
Selecting a Parameter and Changing the Value (Continued)
Step
Function
6.b
to cancel the setting and

keep the original
the mode buttons
Button to be
pressed
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Display
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
75 OPTION MODULES
NO
the selected keypad

mode is entered
7.4.1
Parameter Lock
Unwanted parameter entry can be prevented by activating the Parameter
Lock function which is part of group 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS.
The Parameter Lock is activated by setting parameters 16.02 and 16.03
accordingly. The user pass code can be changed by setting parameters
16.04 and 16.05. For more details see Signal and Parameter Table.
To activate the Parameter Lock:
Select parameter 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK
Set parameter 16.02 to LOCKED
Save the setting and exit the Parameter mode
To open the Parameter Lock:
7.5
Select parameter 16.03 PASS CODE
Set the correct pass code. If not known see Signal and Parameter
Table for details.
Save the setting and exit the Parameter mode.
Function Mode
Setting the Display

Contrast
The Function mode is used to set the contrast of the display.

Table 7-6
Setting the Contrast of the Panel Display
Step
Function
1.
to enter the Function

mode
Button to be
pressed
FUNC
7-8 (12)
Display
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
UPLOAD
<= <=
DOWNLOAD
=> =>
CONTRAST
4
ABB
Table 7-6
Setting the Contrast of the Panel Display (Continued)
Step
Function
2.
to select a function (a
blinking cursor indicates
the selected function)
Button to be
pressed
Display
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
3.
to enter the contrast

setting function
ENTER
4.
to set the contrast
5.a

mode
5.b
to cancel the setting

and keep the original
the mode buttons
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
0.0 rpm 0
<= <=
=> =>
4
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
CONTRAST
[4]
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
CONTRAST
[6]
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
UPLOAD
<= <=
DOWNLOAD
=> =>
CONTRAST
6
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
UPLOAD
<= <=
DOWNLOAD
=> =>
CONTRAST
4
the selected keypad

mode is entered
7.6
7.6.1
Operational Commands
Local control mode is selected by pressing the
panel.
Local Control
LOC
REM
button of the control
When the panel is switched to LOCAL, operation via the pushbuttons on

the front door of the COU and the CDP control panel is possible. Control
commands from remote have no effect. LOCAL can only be selected
when the converter has been stopped and no remote run command is
active. Switching from LOCAL to REMOTE while the converter is running
stops the converter.
7-9 (12)
ABB
Remote Control
When the panel is switched to REMOTE, the pushbuttons on the front

door of the control unit and the operational buttons of the control panel are
disabled. Operational commands and reference value from a remote
control station are transmitted via fieldbus or remote I/O to the converter.
Switching from REMOTE to LOCAL while the converter is running is not
possible.
Table 7-7
Button to be
pressed
Step
Function
1.
to select LOCAL control

(the local control location
is indicated by the letter L)
2.
LOC
REM
1 ->L
Status
MotorSpeed
Power
550.0 rpm 1
Running
0.00 rpm
0.0 %
1 ->
Status
MotorSpeed
Power
550.0 rpm 1
Running
0.00 rpm
0.0 %
to select REMOTE control

(the remote control
location is indicated by a
blank)
7.6.2
Display
LOC
REM
Setting the Direction of Rotation

The direction of rotation is selected on the control panel using the
button for forward direction and the
button to reverse the direction.
Both buttons can be used when the control panel is in LOCAL mode.
An arrow on the display indicates the direction:
When the motor is running, the arrow indicates the actual sense of
rotation.
When the motor is not running, the arrow indicates the preselected
sense of rotation.
In the example below, reverse direction is shown.
1 L <600.0 rpm 1
Status
Running
Power
40.0 %
When the direction of rotation is changed while the motor is running, the
speed will automatically ramp to zero and the motor will accelerate in
opposite direction to the preset speed. The direction of the arrow on the
display changes to the new direction when the motor has reached zero
speed.
7-10 (12)
ABB
7.6.3
Entering a Setpoint
The setpoint can be changed via the control panel at any time, when set
to LOCAL.
Table 7-8
Entering a Setpoint
Step
Function
1.
to enter a keypad mode

displaying the status
row, press a mode
button
2.
3.
to enter the Setpoint

Setting function
Button to be
pressed
ACT
PAR
FUNC
600.0 rpm 1
Running
600.00 rpm
50.0 %
to change the setpoint
1 L ->
[ 550.0 rpm] 1
Status
Running
Power
50.0 %
(fast change)
to exit the Setpoint

Setting mode, press any
of the mode buttons
the selected keypad
mode is entered
1 L ->
Status
MotorSpeed
Power
1 L ->
[ 600.0 rpm] 1
Status
Running
Power
50.0 %
REF
(slow change)
4.
Display
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L ->
Status
MotorSpeed
Power
550.0 rpm 1
Running
550.00 rpm
50.0 %
7-11 (12)
ABB
7-12 (12)
ABB
Maintenance and parts replacement on the converter must only be carried
out by qualified personnel in compliance with local regulations.
It is strongly recommended to carry out all maintenance work according to
the maintenance schedule at the end of this chapter and the applicable
service instructions, on time and at the stated intervals.
During the warranty period, any repair work must be carried out
exclusively by ABB service personnel. After the warranty period, repair
work may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
ABB offers maintenance and service training courses. Customer staff
having successfully attended such courses, will be certified to do
maintenance and repair work on the converter. To maintain safe and
reliable operation of the converter, ABB recommends taking out a service
contract with the ABB service organization. For more information contact
the ABB service organization. For contact address see section General
Information.
All maintenance activity should be recorded in the maintenance log book
including:
Date and time of the maintenance work
Description of the maintenance work
In case of water-cooled converters:
Conductivity, temperature, pressure and water level
of the cooling water before and after the maintenance
routine
Supplementary information on maintenance and troubleshooting can be
obtained from the following manuals:
Service and Maintenance Manual with instructions on checking and

replacing semiconductors, changing phase modules and replacing
components
Operation and Maintenance Manual for Water Cooling Systems in

Appendix A - Water Cooling Unit (only in case of water-cooled
converters)
Signal and Parameter Table
Troubleshooting Manual. The document supplements the Signal and

Parameter Table and provides explanations of alarm and fault
messages, associated parameters and I/Os and hints for rectification.
8-1 (4)
ABB
8.1
Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
Do not try to gain access to the converter transformer, the medium voltage
units of the converter nor the motor as long as the drive system is
energized and not grounded.
DANGER!
Voltages from external control circuits may be present inside the
converter, even if mains and auxiliary power are shut off. Take appropriate
measures before working on the converter: de-energize and disconnect all
external devices!
DANGER!
The driven machine can cause the motor to rotate! Always disconnect,
short-circuit or block the motor before work is started.
NOTICE!
Before power is applied to the converter, check that:
Mains and motor connections are ok
Auxiliary power and control cable connections are ok
No tools or other foreign objects are left in the cabinet
All doors of the power units are properly closed
NOTICE!
The cooling system may start automatically as soon as the auxiliary
voltage is switched on.
8-2 (4)
ABB
8.2
8.2.1
Specific Maintenance Tasks
Cleaning
Dust on electrical components and wiring can cause malfunction and
damage the components.
Proceed as follows:
8.2.2
De-energize the drive system according to Chapter 6 - Operation.
Carefully clean compartment floors with the vacuum cleaner fitted

with a soft nozzle to prevent component damage.
When finished, restart the drive system as described in Chapter 6 Operation.
Checking Wire and Cable Connections

Vibration can loosen electrical connections and cause occasional
malfunction or equipment failure. Dust and moisture can build up in loose
connections and cause loss of low-level signals.
Proceed as follows:
De-energize the drive system according to Chapter 6 - Operation.
Check all power and control cable connections and tighten them if
necessary. Check that all plugs and connectors are tight.
IMPORTANT!
Capacitor bushings will be damaged when excessive force is applied. Do
not exceed the maximum tightening torque when tightening the capacitor
terminals. The tightening torque values are printed on a label which is
attached on the capacitor. If not otherwise specified, the maximum torque
must not exceed 20 Nm.
When finished, restart the drive system as described in Chapter 6 Operation.
8-3 (4)
ABB
8.3
Standard Procedure for Troubleshooting

Proceed as follows:
Do not switch off the auxiliary voltage or try to reset a fault message
before all essential information at the time of the occurance of the
fault condition has been saved.
Call up the Fault History Display on the CDP control panel. See
Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel for further information.
Do not clear the fault buffer now!
Identify the fault and make a logbook entry.
Save the content of the data logger, when a PC is available which has
the DriveWindow or DriveDebug tool installed.
The data logger provides useful information (e.g. waveforms of
voltage, current, torque etc.) for efficient troubleshooting.
Try to rectify the fault following the Troubleshooting Manual.
Contact ABB service if a fault cannot be rectified.

When calling ABB service, it is recommended to have the following
data available at the time when the fault occurred:
Operating, ambient and load conditions
Unusual events
In case of water-cooled converters:
Conductivity, temperature, pressure and water level
of the cooling water
After the fault has been rectified, start the converter as described in
Chapter 6 - Operation.
8-4 (4)
ABB
Maintenance Schedule
0
Start-up
Years from start-up

9 10 11 12 13
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
R
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
R
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P
P
P
I
I
I
I
P
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
P
P
P
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P
P
P
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
P
P
P
Cooling
Air Filters
Cooling fan (if installed)
De-ionizer and mech. filters
Cooling pump seals
Cooling pumps
Heat exchanger
Aux Cooling fan (if installed)
Aging
Battery of UPS (if installed)
Connections and Surroundings
Cable and DC Bus connection
torques
Dustiness, corrosion and
temperature
Improvements
SW / HW upgrade
Based on product notes
Measurements
Basic measurements with aux.
supply voltage / control of
protection settings
Optical connected boards with
transmitter
Fiber optic cables
Clamp capacitors
Snubber capacitors
DC capacitors (CBU)
Spare Parts
Spare Parts
Legend:
Replacement of component
Inspection (visual inspection, correction and replacement if needed)
Performance of on-site work (commissioning, tests, measurements, etc.)
ACS 6000 User's Manual
R
I
P
1 (2)
ABB
2 (2)
ACS 6000 User's Manual
ABB
ACS 6000
3 bis 27 MVA
Operating Instructions
ACS 6000 with Line Supply Unit (LSU)
ABB
Document No.:
3BHS212800 ZAB E01 Rev. A
Issued:
13-03-2006
ABB
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Overview
1-1
Chapter 2 - Local Control Elements
2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
Control Panels
Switches
Control Panels
Control Panel on COU 1
Grounding Switch
3-1
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Starting
Checks before Switching on
Starting the Converter
Stopping
Deenergizing
Emergency Off
Alarm and Fault Messages
1 (2)
ABB
2 (2)
ABB
NOTICE!
Only qualified personnel shall operate the drive system, i.e. personnel
who are familiar with the machine and the operation of the drive system
and the hazards involved.
Refer to Users Manual, Chapter 1 - Safety, for explanation on how the
safety messages are categorized and used in this manual.
This manual outlines the local operation of the converter using the CDP
control panel and the control switches as illustrated in section Chapter 2 Local Control Elements after the converter has been installed and
commissioned.
Remote control of the converter via a PLC or remote stations is not
described in this manual. If the converter is controlled from remote, see
the applicable manuals for information.
1-1 (2)
ABB
1-2 (2)
ABB
The location of the control units (COU) in the drive and the location of the
operating devices are illustrated on the layout drawing in Appendix B Mechanical Drawings.
2.1
Overview
2.1.1
Control Panels
The following control panels are provided for local operation of a converter
which is equipped with a line supply unit (LSU) and one or several inverter
units (INU):
INU control panel(s)

The control panel for the first inverter unit (INU1) is located on the
door of control unit COU 1. The number and location of additional
control panels depends on the configuration of the converter (single
or multi-motor drive, drive for motors with double windings) (see
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2).
2.1.2
Switches
Main Supply
The on/off switches for the main supply are installed on the door of COU 1
(see Figure 2-1).
Emergency Off
An emergency off switch is installed on each contol unit. The emergency

off switches affect the whole drive when activated (see Figure 2-1 and
Figure 2-2).
Grounding Switch
The grounding switch is installed on the capacitor bank unit (CBU) (see
Figure 2-3). The switch can only be actuated if released by the converter.
DC Link Isolator
Converters can optionally be equipped with a manual controlled DC link

isolator. The installation location of the control switch for opening and
closing depends on the configuration of the converter (see Figure 2-4).
Actuation of the control switch is released by the converter.
Output Switches
Converters can optionally be equipped with manual or motorized output

isolators or output grounding switches which are installed between
inverter and motor. The open and closed position of the switches is
monitored by the converter.
The switches for actuating the manual output switches are installed inside
the converter cabinets. The installation location depends on the
configuration of the converter. The switches are accessible after the DC
link has been discharged and the doors have been opened.
2-1 (6)
ABB
IMPORTANT!
The user of the drive system must ensure that the motor does not rotate
before the switch is actuated.
The motorized switches are opened or closed automatically by the
converter depending on the operating status of the drive and the settings
of the parameters provided for this function. The possible parameter
settings are shown in Appendix D - Signal and Parameter Table.
!
Lamp Test
IMPORTANT!
The operating personnel must be informed about the types of output
switches present in the converter and the parameter settings for opening
and clossing.
The bulbs of lamps and illuminated pushbuttons on the doors of control

units (see Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2) can be tested with the lamp test
function. The lamp test is activated via the CDP control panel by setting
control parameter 16.7 to lamp test.
The indicator lamp for the grounding switch (see Figure 2-3) has an
integrated momentary pushbutton. The lamp lights up when the lamp cap
is pressed.
2-2 (6)
ABB
2.2
2.2.1
Control Panels
Control Panel
used to start and stop the motor
displays status messages of the converter
displays alarm and fault messages
used to reset alarm and fault messages
Illuminated Pushbuttons
OFF opens the main cicuit breaker
ON closes the main cicuit breaker
Alarm / Fault Lamp
ALARM: flashing light
Fault: permanent light
Emergency off Reset Switch
Emergency off Switch

prevents starting when actuated at standstill
main circuit breaker opens and DC link discharges when actuated during operation
Figure 2-1
INU Control Panel
2-3 (6)
ABB
2.2.2
Control Panel on additional Control Units
Control Panel
used to start and stop the motor
displays status messages of the converter
displays alarm and fault messages
used to reset alarm and fault messages
Alarm / Fault Lamp

ALARM: flashing light
Fault: permanent light
Emergency off Switch

prevents starting if actuated at standstill
main circuit breaker opens and DC link discharges if actuated during operation
Figure 2-2
2-4 (6)
INU Control Panel
ABB
2.3
Grounding Switch
Grounding Switch
used to ground the converter
Indicator Lamp with Lamp Test Function

signals when grounding switch can be
turned into position grounded
used to test the lamp. Lamp lights up
when lamp cap is pressed
Figure 2-3
2.4
Grounding Switch on CBU
Control Switch for DC Link Isolator

Figure 2-4 shows the control switch for the optional DC link isolator. The
switch is used to open and close the DC link isolator.
Indicates open position of DC link isolator
Indicates closed position of DC link isolator
Opens/closes DC link isolator
Figure 2-4
Control Switch for DC Link Isolator
Opening and closing of the DC link isolator is only possible after the DC
link has been deenergized. When the converter is in operation, it must first
be stopped and the DC link be discharged. Discharging of the DC link is
initiated by opening the main circuit breaker. The discharged condition of
the DC link is indicated with the lamp Grounding Switch Unlocked. As
soon as the lamp lights up, the grounding switch of the converter (located
on the door of the CBU) can be turned into the grounded position and
operation of the DC link isolator is released. When the signal is present,
the isolator moves to the position which has been selected.
2-5 (6)
ABB
2-6 (6)
ABB
3.1
3.1.1
Starting
Checks before Switching on

Proceed as follows:
1
Check that no tools and foreign objects are left inside the converter.
Verify that:
all internal circuit breakers of the converter have
been closed,
the auxiliary power supply of the converter has been
switched on.
See Appendix C - Electrical Diagrams to identify the circuit breakers.
Check that the water cooling system is ready for operation.

See also Users Manual in Appendix A - Water Cooling Unit.
NOTICE!
voltage has been switched on.
4
Check that all doors have been closed and locked and all covers have
been mounted.
Medium voltage units of the converter include an interlocking system
which operates in conjunction with the grounding switch and the
electrical interlocks from the main circuit breaker.
The interlocking system ensures that power cannot be initialized to
the converter unless all doors have been closed and the grounding
switch has been turned to position
(not grounded).
The interlocking system also ensures that the doors of medium

voltage units cannot be opened until the main power source has been
disconnected, the DC link capacitors have been discharged and
the grounding switch has been turned to position
(grounded).
Doors of control and cooling cabinets are not integrated into the
interlocking system and can always be opened.
3-1 (8)
ABB
DANGER!
High Voltage!
All bolted covers must be fitted to prevent unintended touching of
energized components.
5
Check that the grounding switch is in position not grounded.
Figure 3-1
3.1.2
Grounding Switch in Position Not Grounded
Check that the main circuit breaker is in operating position.
If the converter is equipped with a DC link isolator, check that the

control switch for the DC link isolator is in the desired position.
Starting the Converter

LOC
Set the CDP control panel to LOCAL mode by pressing the

button.
REM
See also Users Manual, Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel, for

information on selecting this mode.
9
Check that the converter is ready.

No alarm or fault message on the CDP control panel must be present.
10 When a fault message is displayed on the CDP control panel reset

the
RESET
fault, by pressing the
button.
See Users Manual, Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel, for information

on resetting a fault.
If a fault cannot be reset, it must be rectified by the responsible
personnel.
3-2 (8)
ABB
When the converter is ready, the control panel of an INU displays

ReadyOn:
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
Status...
ReadyOn
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
11
Press the ON button on the door of COU1 to charge the DC link. The
ON button flashes during charging:
The status line of the INU control panel changes to Charging:
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
Status...
Charging
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
After charging has been finished, the main circuit breaker closes
automatically, the ON button lights up permanently and the display of
the first INU control control panel and the additional control panels (if
present) changes to ReadyRun:
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
Status...
ReadyRun
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
All inverters can now be started.
12 Enter a setpoint.
See User Manual, Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel, for information on
entering a setpoint.
1 L -> [ 600.0 rpm ]

Status...
ReadyRun
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
13 Press the
started up.
button on the INU control panel of the motor to be
3-3 (8)
ABB
At first, the motor is magnetized.
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
Magnetizing
MotorSpeed 0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
After the motor has been magnetized, the motor speed is ramped up
to the setpoint. As soon as the motor starts to turn the display of the
INU control panel shows Running:
1 L ->
Status...
600.0 rpm
Running
MotorSpeed
Power
3.2
600.00 rpm
30.0 %
Stopping
Proceed as follows to stop a motor:
To stop a motor, press the

the motor to be stopped.
button on the INU control panel of
The motor stops according to the preset stop function and the
converter stops modulating. Stop modes are preset in parameters.
While the motor stops, the status line of the display shows Stopping:
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 1
Status...
Stopping
Power
20.0 %
As long as the stopping sequence is in progress, the converter can
always be restarted by pressing the
panel.
button of the CDP control
When the converter has stopped modulating, the CDP control panel
displays Ready to Start:
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
Rdy to Strt
MotorSpeed
0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
3-4 (8)
ABB
As long as the main circuit breaker has not been opened, the motor
can be started again.
.
3.3
Deenergizing
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
Do not try to gain access to the converter transformer, the medium voltage
units of the converter nor the motor as long as the drive system is
energized and not grounded.
To disconnect the converter from the main power supply, do the following:
1
Stop the motor as described in the previous section.
Press the Offline button to disconnect the converter from the main
power supply. The following happens:
Main circuit breaker opens
DC link discharges
Offline button lights up
After the DC link has been discharged, the display shows:
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
Rdy MCB on
MotorSpeed
0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
Rack-out, lock-out and tag-out the main circuit breaker.
Turn the grounding switch to the position grounded.
IMPORTANT!
Do not turn the grounding switch to position grounded, before the
light GROUNDING SWITCH UNLOCKED is on. Otherwise, the switch will
be damaged.
3-5 (8)
ABB
Figure 3-2
Grounding Switch in Position Grounded
After the grounding switch is in position grounded, the CDP control

panel displays:
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
ErthIsoClos
MotorSpeed
0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
5
Switch off all auxiliary voltages from external sources.

See Appendix C - Electrical Diagrams to identify the circuit breakers.
The converter is now dead and safe access is possible.
3.4
Emergency Off
The emergency off button is located on each control unit of the converter
(see also Figure 2-1).
Figure 3-3
Emergency Off Pushbutton
When the pushbutton is pressed during operation, the following happens:
3-6 (8)
The main circuit breaker opens.
The drive coasts down.
ABB
The message Emergency Off comes up on the control panel display.
1 L ->
600.0 rpm 0
Status...
EmergencyOff
MotorSpeed
0.00 rpm
Power
0.0 %
The DC link discharges.
The converter can be started again after the emergency off button has
been extracted and the reset button on the control panel has been
pressed. The emergency off button returns to its initial position when
turned to the right.
3.5
Alarm and Fault Messages

When a malfunction occurs in the converter or in the equipment monitored
by the converter, the control panel displays a corresponding alarm or fault
message. The message can also be viewed and saved in the fault logger
of the converter when a PC with the DriveWindow or DriveDebug tool is
available.
Two error message levels are used in the converter:
Alarm (warning): an alarm does not shut down the converter.

However, a persisting alarm condition can often lead to a fault if the
condition causing the alarm is not corrected. An alarm cannot be
manually reset. The alarm message will be deleted from the display
as soon as the alarm condition has been corrected.
Fault: a fault always shuts down the affected inverter or the whole
drive. The type of shut-down depends on the origin of the fault.
In general, a fault condition must be corrected and the fault be
manually reset before the converter can be started again.
Depending on the type of fault, the main circuit breaker (MCB) is
opened by the converter or stays closed. Since the MCB is controlled
and monitored entirely by the converter, no external opening
command must be given to the MCB when a fault condition occurs.
Some of the alarm and fault messages are related to other equipment in
use (MCB, transformer, cooling system) and the configuration of the drive
system. For more information on alarms and faults see Signal and
Parameter Table.
3-7 (8)
ABB
3-8 (8)
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without ex press authority is strictly
forbidden.
ABB Swizerland Ltd
MV - Drives
Specification
For
Main Circuit Breaker
Protection Design Requirements
Issued
Dietmar Gamp
13.10.2005
Check / rel.
Werner Kpfer
21.10.2005
Resp. dept.
No. of sh.
Technical Specification MCB
4
Protection Design Requirements
ATDAD
Document No. Typ Part
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E81
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
1 Notice of Changes
Rev. Index
Page
Description
Date
Chap.
-
Dept. / Name
All
First issue of template
13.10.2005 / Ga
2 Table of Contents
1
Notice of Changes ........................................................................................................ 2
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................... 2
3 Mains Supply Feeder and Drive Transformer Protection .......................................... 3

3.1 MCB Protection Relay .................................................................................................... 3
3.1.1
Transformer Primary Fault Protection ...................................................................... 3
3.1.2
Transformer Secondary Fault Protection ................................................................. 4
3.1.3
Overload Protection ................................................................................................. 4
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E81
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3 Mains Supply Feeder and Drive Transformer Protection

3.1
MCB Protection Relay

The MCB quotation shall include a price for an over current protection relay with the
following features.
The protection relay shall detect over currents on primary and secondary side of the
transformer. The relay must detect transformer inrush current to avoid unexpected
tripping by over current. Max. 20 30ms for fault detection and delay time of the over
current shall be guaranteed.
The intended protection scheme is shown in Diagram 4.0.1. This protection described
can be implemented with individual protection relays or with a single microprocessor
based unit. Required protection current transformers (CTs) should be sized in
accordance with the rated current levels of the transformer.
Diagram 4.0.1
Typical Protection Scheme
This protection scheme consists of three areas:

3.1.1
Transformer Primary Fault Protection

The first area, identified as Transformer Primary Fault Protection, is an
instantaneous trip area that protects against short circuits in the transformer primary
windings or in the cables supplying the transformer primary. The lower level of the
trip threshold should be adjusted high enough to insure that nuisance tripping does
not occur due to transformer inrush currents.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E81
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3.1.2
Transformer Secondary Fault Protection

The second area, identified as Transformer Secondary Fault Protection, is a short
delay trip area that protects against short circuits in the transformer secondary
windings, the cables from the transformer secondary to the Drive, or in the input
rectifier stages of the Drive. The short time delay provided should be adjustable and
should be set long enough to insure that the protection does not trip due to
transformer inrush current. At the same time, the trip level should be adjusted low
enough to insure that tripping would occur within 250ms (including MCB breaking
time) even if transformers with high input impedance were used.
If both requirements cannot be fulfilled with one protection setting then it is required
to mask this over-current trip for certain time during MCB closing (max. 500 ms 1
sec recommended depending on transformer short circuit withstand ability, please
refer also to applicable IEC or ANSI standards). This short suppression of the overcurrent trip will skip the inrush current, which typically fades out after 100 200
ms. Latest after 1 s however, the over-current protection must be active again in
order to protect the transformer in case of a real short circuit on the secondary side
(the recommended time for suppression is based on the IEC and ANSI requirement
that a transformer has to withstand a secondary side short circuit for at least 2 sec;
this value needs however to be confirmed case by case by the transformer
manufacturer).
3.1.3
Overload Protection
The last area, identified, as Overload Protection should provide long-term overload
protection with an inverse time characteristic. This area is intended to protect the
transformer and cables from long term thermal overload.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E81
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
ABB Swizerland Ltd
ACS 6000
Specification
For
Issued
Dietmar Gamp
13.10.2005
Check / rel.
Werner Kpfer
21.10.2005
Resp. dept.
ATDAD
11
ACS 6000 Application

ABB Switzerland Ltd
No. of sh.
Technical Specification MCB
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
1 Notice of Changes
Rev. Index
Page
Description
Date
Chap.
Dept. / Name
All
First issue of template
13.10.2005 / Ga
5, 11
Description of MCB open signals
20.03.2006 / Ga
All
Figures identified, Fig. 6 revised
18.04.2006 / Ga
2 Table of Contents
1
Notice of Changes
Table of Contents
Abstract
3.1
Main Circuit Breaker Interface
3.1.1
Contact Capacity of the ACS 6000 Auxiliary Relays
3.1.2
MCB Control Signals (Digital Input, DI)
3.1.3
MCB Feedback Signals to ACS 6000 (Digital Output, DO)
3.1.4
MCB Feedback Signals to Main Control System
3.1.5
Control Signal Interface Diagrams
3.2
MCB Control Philosophy
3.2.1
Release to close conditions
3.2.2
MCB operation in Test Position (MCB disconnected from the Bus Bar)
3.2.3
MCB operation in Service Position (MCB connected to the Bus Bar)
3.2.4
MCB closing loop
3.2.5
Opening loop of the MCB and MCB pre-trip signalisation
3.2.5.1
Opening loop with control circuit undervoltage coil
3.2.5.2
Opening loop with two opening coils and trip circuit supervision (Option for marine application) 10
3.2.5.3
Opening loop with two opening coils, Second coil (YO 2) for 230VAC operation only (Option) 11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
Abstract
The Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) is one of the most important devices to protect the whole
system in case of a failure. In spite of the high reliability of the drive, faults might happen
because of certain unfortunate circumstances like human failure, material defects, etc. In
such a situation the correct operation of the Main Circuit Breaker will protect the drive for
risks of damages. Therefore a correct operation of the Main Circuit Breaker is inalienable.
This document specifies a proper Main Circuit Breaker for the ACS 6000 drive.
The Main Circuit Breaker should preferably be an SF6-gas insulated or a vacuum type circuit
breaker. It should also meet the specific drive requirements that need a correct coordination
with the instrumentation and protection equipment.
The MCB must be able
3.1
To connect and maintain nominal load currents and clear short-circuit currents
To tolerate the transformer inrush current without tripping
To clear transformer primary sides short-circuit instantaneously by breaking the fault

current.
Main Circuit Breaker Interface

For proper use the MCB shall have the following signal interface.
3.1.1
Contact Capacity of the ACS 6000 Auxiliary Relays

The contacts of the auxiliary relays in the ACS 6000 control cabinet are designed
according the values listed in the tables below.
Command close & Command open
Aux. Voltage
(Provided by MCB)
Max. breaking current of

relay contacts
<= 30 VDC
6,0 A
<= 110 VDC
2,4 A
<= 220VDC
0,5A
Table 1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
Undervoltage release contact

Aux. Voltage
(Provided by MCB)
Max. breaking current of

relay contacts
<= 30 VDC
6,0 A
<= 110 VDC
6,0 A
<= 220VDC
2,3 A
Table 2
3.1.2
MCB Control Signals (Digital Input, DI)
Input to close in response to the close command MCB order close from the ACS
6000 drive control system
Input to open in response to the open command MCB order open 1 and MCB
order open 2 from the ACS 6000 drive control system
Input to trip in response to the trip command, MCB order trip from the control
circuit undervoltage coil.
In order to ensure the correct operation of the ACS 6000 drive under fault
condition a maximum total MCB breaking time of 60ms has to be guaranteed.
Breaking time is the defined time interval between the energizing of the
opening coil and the extinguishing of the current flow in all poles.
The ACS6000 control part itself will guarantee to keep the additional delay time
to less than 15ms in case of short circuit. Therefore an overall response time of
less than 75 ms can be reached what is required due to the fuse-less design of
the converter.
3.1.3
3.1.4
MCB Feedback Signals to ACS 6000 (Digital Output, DO)
Relay output indicating MCB status closed to the ACS 6000 drive control system.
Relay output indicating MCB status open to the ACS 6000 drive control system.
Relay
output
indicating
MCB
pre-trip,
direct
to
the
drive.
The signal must be generated as fast as possible, before the MCB opens.
Hence an additional auxiliary relay for the signal MCB pre-trip shall be
avoided due to the time limitation.
MCB Feedback Signals to Main Control System
Relay output indicating MCB IS AVAILABLE, i.e. MCB not in test position, not
locked, not drawn out, not grounded, not faulty to the main control system.
Relay output indicating MCB TEST POSITION, or Not in Service Position to

the main control system.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3.1.5
Control Signal Interface Diagrams

Figure 1 shows the principal signal interface between ACS 6000 control system and
Main Circuit Breaker (MCB)
MV - Switchgear
MCB
MCB order close
MCB status closed
-Q0
MCB order open 1
MCB status open

MCB pretrip
MCB order open 2 (*1)

-F1
MCB order trip (*2)
Protection
Relay
(*1) or (*2)
Either the signal MCB
Oredr Open 2" or
MCB Oredr Trip can
be used to open the
main circuit breaker by
a second signal.
-Q5
Transformer
DI
ACS 6000
DO
Figure 1: Drive MCB - Interface

As shown in Figure 1 the ACS 6000 standard I/O Configuration provides two DOs to
open the circuit breaker. During normal operation of the drive system the DOs are active
high. To open the MCB the signal change to low (fail safe operation). The software logic
which controls the two digital outputs is standardised and cannot be modified.
The digital output MCB Order Open 1 is wired to an interface relay with changeover
contacts where by default the normally closed (NC) contacts are connected in serial.
The MCB opens by de-energized relay. It means the contacts will close and an active
high signal is send to the MCB.
The second digital output which can be used to open the main circuit breaker is wired to
two relays in parallel. One relay is equipped with Normally Open (NO) contacts whereas
the other one is a changeover relay from the same type as it is used for MCB Order
Open 1. This gives the customer the possibility to choose between MCB Order Open 2
or "MCB Order Trip. To open the MCB the relays are de-energized. Depending on
which relay is used the MCB opens by a high or low signal.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
The provision of two open commands is based on the standards:

ISO13849-1 Category 3, which specify, ..a single fault does not lead to loose the safety
function and
IEC 60204-1, which describe, ..by providing partial or complete redundancy it is
possible to minimize the probability that one single failure in the electrical circuit can
result in a hazardous condition. Redundancy can be effective in normal operation (i.e.
on-line redundancy) or designed as a special circuit that take over the protective
function (i.e. off-line redundancy) only if the operating function fails.
3.2
3.2.1
MCB Control Philosophy

Release to close conditions
Terminals shall be provided to link the minimum of the following external signals as
release to close condition into the closing loop of the MCB.
The grounding isolator of the upstream MV-SWG or MCB must be open
Upstream MV-Breaker must be closed (if applicable)
Additionally to
not disturbed.
the
external
release
conditions
the
MCB
shall
be
Typical ACS 6000 Configuration with LSU
MV-Switchgear
Main Circuit
Breaker
Earthing Switch
Figure 2.1: Example for MCB Hardwired Interlock

MV - Switchgear is Ready
(U>85%, No Fault)
Earthing Switch is open
&
Release to close
MCB Ready / No Alarm
By Others
ABB
Figure 2.2: Example for pre - trip signal conditions

No external Trip/Alarm
ACS 6000 with LSU
&
pre - trip
Controlvoltage available
Figure 2: ACS 6000 with LSU
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
Typical ACS 6000 Configuration with ARU
MV-Switchgear
Synchronisation
Voltage
Main Circuit
Breaker
Earthing Switch
Figure 3.1: Example for MCB Hardwired Interlock

MV - Switchgear is Ready
(U>85%, No Fault)
&
Release to close
By Others
ABB
Figure 3.2: Example for pre - trip signal conditions

No external Trip/Alarm
ACS 6000 with ARU
&
pre - trip
Controlvoltage available
Figure 3: ACS 6000 with ARU

3.2.2
MCB operation in Test Position (MCB disconnected from the Bus Bar)
Control switches, selector switches and status indication shall be provided on the
switchgear door.
Selector switch shall be two-position type, namely Local and Remote.
In test position the breaker can be closed either from the local push button or from
remote depending on the position of the selector switch.
If the selector switch is in remote it shall be possible to test all interlocks. Therefore all
circuit breaker indications as well as software and hardware interlock functions shall
remain operative
If the selector switch is in local it shall be possible to close the circuit breaker at any time.
Therefore no interlock function shall remain active
3.2.3
MCB operation in Service Position (MCB connected to the Bus Bar)

If the MCB is in service position and the selector switch is in remote a closing of the
breaker shall be possible from ACS 6000 control system only.
If the selector switch is in local position no closing of the MCB shall be permitted.
All interlock and protection functions shall remain operative at any time.
Opening of the MCB shall be possible at any time, independent from the position of
the selector switch.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3.2.4
MCB closing loop

Important
For safety reason both sides of the control loop of the closing relay (-YC) shall be wired to
terminals to link two closing signals from the ASC 6000 control system.
Both Contacts are closed

--> MCB "ON" command
MCB
order close
MCB
order close
ACS 6000
MCB
(+ VDC)
External release
conditions
MCB Internal
release conditions
-Q0
A1
-YC
(ON)
A2
(0 VDC)
Figure 4: MCB closing loop

3.2.5
Opening loop of the MCB and MCB pre-trip signalisation

3.2.5.1 Opening loop with control circuit undervoltage coil
3.2.5.2 Opening loop with two opening coils and trip circuit superviaion (Option for
Marine application)
3.2.5.3 Opening loop with two opening coils, second coil for 230VAC
(Engineered application and available only on request
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3.2.5.1 Opening loop with control circuit undervoltage coil

The MCB can be equipped with a control circuit undervoltage coil instead of the second
opening coil (YO 2) as described in chapter 3.2.5.3. It has to be verified in co-ordination
with the customer which system is preferred. .
The function of the control circuit undervoltage coil is to trip the MCB as soon as its
control voltage falls below 70% of Urated. The MCB can be switched ON again after the
control voltage is above 85% of its rated value
Contact closed -->

MCB "OFF" command
Contact open --> MCB

"Trip" command
MCB order open 1
MCB order Trip
MCB pre-trip
(+)
DI
ACS 6000
MCB
(+ VDC)
MCB internal
trip signals
manual
open
MCB internal
trip signals
external
trip signals
external
trip
-Q0
-YO 1
(OFF)
A1
A1
A2
A2
MCB
internal trip
-YU
(Undervoltage coil)
(0 VDC)
Earthing switch
open
Undervoltage
coil
Figure 5: MCB control circuit with undervoltage coil

Signal output MCB pre-trip, shall be sent to the drive as fast as possible, therefore
additional auxiliary relays for pre-trip indication shall be avoided due to time
requirements.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
3.2.5.2 Opening loop with two opening coils and trip circuit supervision (Option for marine
application)
Should an interruption occur in a trip circuit a possible network fault would not be
disconnected, and the fault would have to be cleared by another protection relay
upstream in the power system. The supervision function is particularly important when
there is only one tripping coil.
The trip circuit supervision relay from ABB (Type SPER) or equivalent requires a
separate auxiliary supply voltage in the range 40 265Vdc, connected to input 18-28.
Normally the same voltage as that feeding the supervision circuit is used.
When terminals 11-21 are connected over the trip contacts, the current generator of the
supervision relay forces a small current to flow through the circuit to be supervised.
Please refer to document 1MRS 750231-MUM EN, SPER 1B1 C4, SPER 1C1 and
SPER 1C2 Supervision relay for details about the trip circuit supervision relay.
Contact closed -->

MCB "OFF" command
Contact closed -->

MCB "OFF" command
MCB order open 1
MCB pre-trip
MCB order open 2
(+)
DI
ACS 6000
MCB
40 . 265 VDC
Battery Sys . 1
40 .265 VDC
Battery Sys . 2
MCB internal
trip signals
ABB
SPER 11
external
trip signals
21 18
Type: 1C1
16
manual
open
MCB internal
trip signals
28
ABB
SPER 11
external
trip signals
15 17
16
remote
indication
28
external
trip
15 17
remote
indication
-Q0
MCB
internal trip
-Q0
A1
-YO 1
(OFF)
21 18
Ty pe: 1C1
-YO 2
(OFF)
A2
(0 VDC)
Earthing switch
open
A1
A2
(0 VDC)
Figure 6: MCB control circuit with trip circuit supervision
Signal output MCB pre-trip, shall be sent to the drive as fast as possible, therefore
additional auxiliary relays for pre-trip indication shall be avoided due to time
requirements.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
10
3.2.5.3 Opening loop with two opening coils,

Second coil (YO 2) for 230VAC operation only (Option)
This is an engineered option and available on request only
230VAC
from
ACS 6000
Contact close --> MCB
"OFF" command
Contact close --> MCB

"OFF" command
MCB order open 1
MCB pre-trip
MCB order open 2
(+)
DI
ACS 6000
MCB
(+ VDC)
MCB internal
trip signals
MCB internal
trip signals
external
trip signals
external
trip signals
external
trip
-Q0
A1
-YO 1
(OFF)
manual
open
A1
-YO 2
(OFF)
A2
MCB
internal trip
A2
(0 VDC)
Earthing switch
open
Figure 7: MCB control circuit with two opening coils

Signal output MCB pre-trip, shall be sent to the drive as fast as possible,
therefore additional auxiliary relays for pre-trip indication shall be avoided due
to time requirements.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS 125149E60
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Sheet
11
ABB
ACS 6000
3 to 27 MVA
Users Manual
Water Cooling Unit
with External Heat Exchangers
ABB
Project:
Tasnee Coperion
Order No.:
1-1042645
Document No.:
Issued:
26-06-2007
ABB reserves all rights to this document. Misuse, in particular duplication

and forwarding to third parties, is not permitted.
ACS 6000 Water Cooling Unit
ABB
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Safety
1-1
Chapter 2 - Starting up the Cooling System
2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.7
Checks before Start-up

2-1
Filling the Cooling System
2-2
Venting the Cooling System
2-4
Starting up
2-6
Changing over the Heat Exchangers During Operation 2-8
Overview
2-8
Changing over from Unit E1 to Unit E2
2-9
2-9
Shutting down a Heat Exchanger and Putting It
on Standby
2-10
Shutting down Heat Exchanger E1
2-10
Putting Heat Exchanger E1 on Standby / into
Operation
2-10
2-10
Putting Heat Exchanger E2 on Standby /
into Operation
2-11
Adding Water to the Cooling System
2-11
Chapter 3 - Draining the Cooling System
3-1
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
Draining for Service Purposes

Draining through Valve V82
Draining Water-cooled Resistors
Draining Heat Exchangers
Complete Draining of the Cooling System
Draining through a Pipe Joint
Draining the Pumps
Draining the Filter and Deionizer Vessel
Chapter 4 - Checking Actual Values
4-1
4.1
4.2
4-1
4-2
Water Conductivity
Water Pressure
1 (2)
ABB
4.3
Water Temperature
4-2
Chapter 5 - Tightening Torques, Threaded Connections

5.1
5-1
Sealing off Threaded Connections without O-rings and

Gaskets
5-1
Appendices
2 (2)
ABB
Chapter 1 - Safety
This manual should be read thoroughly and understood before work on
the cooling system is started.
See ACS 6000 User's Manual, Chapter 1- Safety for explanation on how
the safety messages are categorized and used in this manual.
NOTICE!
voltage is switched on. The pump is switched on depending on
temperature and conductivity of the pure water or internal air temperature.
NOTICE!
Valves, tubes and hoses are delicate parts. Do not bend or put any
pressure on the valves, tubes and hoses.
NOTICE!
Where possible, all components and sub-assemblies weighting over 25 kg
have been clearly marked with weight details. Pumps and electric motors
are equipped with lifting eyes as supplied by the manufacturers. If lifting of
heavy and/or awkwardly positioned items is necessary, extreme caution
shall be exercised. Safe, reliable mechanical lifting equipment shall be
used wherever possible. Under no circumstances shall items be lifted by
means of straps, ropes, chains etc. connected to piping or other system
components.
1-1 (2)
ABB
Chapter 1 - Safety
1-2 (2)
ABB
NOTICE!
Do not run the pumps if the cooling circuit is empty, not even for a short
time. If a pump runs dry the pump seals will be damaged immediately.
2.1
Checks before Start-up

The positions of all valves in the operating state are illustrated on the Flow
Diagram (see Appendix). See Figure 2-4, page 8, to locate the valves.
Proceed as follows:
1
Open valves V1, V2, V5, V51, V52, V91, V92 in the pure water circuit.
Close valve V13 of heat exchanger E2 (it is assumed that heat

exchanger E1 will be in operation).
Close valves V20 and V21.
Open valves V31 and V32 ffnen, if an excitation unit (EXU) is part of
the drive.
Close valve V50.
Check that the following valves and vent plugs in the pure water
circuit are closed:
Drain valves V81, V82, V83, V84
Make-up water valve V55
Vent plug V70
Vent valve V75 (at heat exchanger E1)
Vent valve V76 at heat exchanger E2)
In the following steps 6 and 7 it is assumed that heat exchanger E1 is

normally in operation (see section 2.5 for information regarding changing
over from one heat exchanger to the other).
7
Open the following valves in the raw water circuit:

V15 (in inlet pipe of heat exchanger E1)
V16 (in outlet pipe of heat exchanger E1)
V78 (vent in outlet pipe of heat exchanger E2)
V86 (vent in inlet pipe of heat exchanger E2)
Close the following valves in the raw water circuit:

V17 (in inlet pipe of heat exchanger E2)
2-1 (12)
ABB
V18 (in outlet pipe of heat exchanger E2)

V77 (vent in outlet pipe of heat exchanger E1)
V85 (vent in inlet pipe of heat exchanger E1)
9
2.2
Check that the pipe joints are in place, properly adjusted and the
locking bolts are tightened.
Filling the Cooling System

Cooling Water
The cooling system is filled through make-up water valve V55 (ISO-R ").
When filling the cooling system, deionized or distilled water shall be used
preferably. If deionized or distilled water is not available, the water must
have at least drinking quality, see Table 2-1.
If in doubt about the quality of the drinking water on your premises contact
your local water utility.
Table 2-1
Drinking Water Specification
Parameter
Value
pH
7 8.5
Specific conductivity
< 300 S / cm
Hardness
3 10 dH
Chloride (Cl)
< 300 mg/l
Copper (Cu)
< 0.1 mg/l
Total dissolved salt
< 1000 mg/l
Undissolved particles
< 5 mgl
IMPORTANT!
!
!
IMPORTANT!
Use deionized or distilled water. Otherwise, the effective life of the

deionizer resin will be substantially reduced.
Do not add inhibitors or other chemicals to the water.
IMPORTANT!
A preset pressure is not needed in the expansion vessel.
Proceed as follows:
1
2-2 (12)
Open the following vent plugs and valves:
ABB
V70 (inside the water cooling unit, in the pure water

return pipe to heat exchanger E1
V75 (at heat exchanger E1)
IMPORTANT!
Do not take off the cap of a vent valve completely. Only loosen it.
2
If present, open the flow regulating valve at flow meter B5523.
Fill the cooling system (max. 15 l/min) until the expansion tank is
approx. 80 % full.
Close the vent valves one after another when water starts to trickle
out of them.
Stop filling, close valve V55 and open valve V50.
Vent the pumps through the vent plug at the pump head (see Figure
2-1).
Vent plugs
Figure 2-1
6
Location of Vent Plugs
Close a vent plug when water starts to run out of it.
2-3 (12)
ABB
2.3
Venting the Cooling System

NOTICE!
Valves V1 and V2 in the suction line and valve V5 must be fully open.
Running the pumps dry will result in increased wear and must be avoided.
Procced as follows:
1
Switch off the motor starters Q5002 and Q5003 of the pumps (see
Figure 2-3).
Close the disconnect terminals of each pump. They are located in the
terminal section located at the top of the cabinet (see Figure 2-2).
Pump 1
Pump 2
Figure 2-2
3
Disconnect Terminals
Switch on the auxiliary power supply.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
After switching on the auxiliary power supply, voltages up to 690 VAC are
present in the water cooling unit.
After switching on the auxiliary voltage, the alarm messages CW1
Pump1Overload and CW1Pump2Overload and the fault message
CW1 NoWtrPumpOn will come up on the display of the control panel
of COU 1.
Do not reset the alarms and the fault because they prevent the pumps
from being switched on automatically by the control system of the
converter.
4
Switch on the motor starters of the pumps (see Figure 2-3).
Check that the direction of the pump rotation corresponds to the

arrow on the motor head.
To switch a pump on, activate the contact module of its motor starter
(see Figure 2-3).
2-4 (12)
ABB
IMPORTANT!
If a pump runs in the wrong direction of rotation, interchange any two of
the three phases U, V or W of the power supply cable feeding the water
cooling unit. Switch off the supply voltage before interchanging a phase
conductor.
Motor starter in position on
Push in contact with a suitable

screw driver
Pump 1
Figure 2-3
Pump 2
Pump Motor Starters
Run each pump for 10 seconds by activating the contact module of

the motor starter (see Figure 2-3).
Open valve V70 to release the air and close the valve again.
NOTICE!
Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and make sure that escaping
water does not cause injury to persons or damage to the motor or other
components.
8
Vent the pumps according to section 2.2 Filling the Cooling System,
step 4.
Repeat the above procedure (step 6 to 7) two or three times until the
air is completely released from the water cooling circuit.
10 Check the water level in the expansion vessel. Add water if the level
is below 80 %.
11
Run the pump(s) for about 30 minutes to release all entrapped air
through the expansion vessel.
The pump(s) will be switched on automatically if the following conditions are fullfilled:
The auxiliary power supply is on
2-5 (12)
ABB
The motor starters of both pumps are switched on

The emergency off is not activated (this condition
depends on parameter setting)
Any pump related alarms/faults displayed on the
control panel of COU 1 are reset.
Parameter 35.01 CW1 PUMPS AMOUNT is set to
TWO.
(If not familiar with checking and changing
parameters, see Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel,
section 7.4 Parameter Mode of the User's Manual of
the converter.)
12 Check the water level in the expansion vessel. Add water if the level
is below 80 %.
2.4
Starting up
Proceed as follows:
1
Check that valves of the heat exchanger which will be taken into operation are in the correct position (see also section 2.5 Changing over
the Heat Exchangers During Operation)
Check that valve V51 is open.
Check that:
The auxiliary power supply is switched on.
The motor starters of both pumps are switched on.
The emergency off is not activated (this condition
depends on parameter setting).
Any pump related alarms/faults displayed on the
control panel of COU 1 are reset.
Parameter 35.01 CW1 PUMPS AMOUNT is set to
TWO.
(If not familiar with checking and changing
parameters, see Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel,
section 7.4 Parameter Mode of the User's Manual of
the converter).
If the above conditions are fulfilled, pump 1 will start to run automatically.
Circulate the water until the conductivity meter indicates a value

below 0.5 S/cm.
The conductivity will rise if the water is not continuously circulated.
Only for cooling units with flow regulating valve (B5523):
To decrease the conductivity value faster, the flow in the water treat-
2-6 (12)
ABB
ment circuit can be increased. While pump 1 is running adjust the flow
in the water treatment circuit to a maximum of 15 l/min at the flow
regulating valve. When adjusting the flow, the alarm message CW1
IntCoolWtrFlow will appear on the display of the control panel on
COU 1 indicating that the water flow is low.
Adjust the flow in the water treatment circuit to approximately 5 l/min
at the flow regulating valve (B5523).
5
Switch off the motor starter of the running pump.

After switching off the pump, an alarm (CW1 Pump1Overload) will
come up on the control panel and pump 2 will start to run.
Do not reset the alarm.
Keep pump 2 running for 1 minute to improve the water conductivity

in this circuit as well.
Switch off the motor starter of pump 2.
After switching off the pump, the fault message CW1 NoWaterPumpOn will come up on the display of the control panel.
Switch on both motor starters and then reset the alarms and faults.
Close valve V51.
When all the above steps have been carried out in the correct manner, the
water cooling system is fully operational.
2-7 (12)
ABB
2.5
2.5.1
Changing over the Heat Exchangers During Operation
Overview
F3
F2
V75
V61
V63
V60
V62
V11
V13
Pure water
from converter
V32
V76
V18
V16
E1
E2
Pure water
to converter
V19
V12
V14
V85
V84
V86
V15
V83
Raw water outlet

Note:
V17
Raw water inlet
V20
F2 and F3 are safety valves. The opening pressure

of each valve is 9 bar.
Valve V60 and V62 are padlocked in the open
position.
Figure 2-4
2-8 (12)
Z2
Heat Exchanger E1 and E2 and Location of Valves
ABB
The heat exchanger unit is equipped with two heat exchangers. One heat
exchanger is always in operation whereas the other unit is on standby.
Most of the pure water flows through the heat exchanger in operation.
Only a small part of the pure water is directed through the standby unit via
valve V32 to ensure that the water conductivity in the standby unit stays at
a low level.
The raw-water side of the standby heat exchanger should be drained to
prevent fouling. A bypass circuit as used on the pure-water side to allow a
small water flow, is not recommended. The small flow would lead to an
accumulation of slurry and particles inside the heat exchanger, which
could decrease the cooling capacity of the heat exchanger over time. The
standby heat exchanger shall therefore only be filled when a changeover
of the heat exchangers is required.
The changeover from one heat exchanger to the other is done manually.
2.5.2

The proposed sequence to shut down unit E1 and to take unit E2 into
operation (refer also to the flow diagram) is as follows:
2.5.3
Close the bleed and drain valves V78/V86 on the raw-water side.
Partly open valve V18.
Bleed heat exchanger E2 through valve V78.
Fully open valves V18 and V17.
Open valve V13.
Close valve V11.
Drain the heat exchanger on the raw-water side through valve V85 to
prevent fouling.

The proposed sequence to shut down unit E2 and to take unit E1 into
operation (refer to the flow diagram) is as follows:
1
Close the bleed and drain valves V77/V85 on the raw-water side.
Partly open valve V16.
Bleed heat exchanger E1 through valve V77.
Fully open valves V15 and V16.
Open valve V11.
Close valve V13.
Drain the heat exchanger E2 on the raw-water side through valve V86
to prevent fouling.
2-9 (12)
ABB
2.6
2.6.1
Shutting down a Heat Exchanger and Putting It on Standby

To service heat exchanger E1, the converter must be shut down or heat
exchanger E2 must be in operation.
2.6.2
Close valves V11, V12 and V32 on the pure-water side.
Close valves V15, V16 on the raw-water side.
Open valves V83, V85, V75 and V77 to drain the heat exchanger.
Putting Heat Exchanger E1 on Standby/ into Operation

In order to prevent a water level alarm or low pressure in the pure-water
circuit, the pure-water cooling circuit must have sufficient water inside the
expansion vessel. It is required to fill up the cooling system through valve
V55 until the max. level of the expansion vessel is reached prior to taking
the heat exchanger back into operation. By adding water through valve
V55, the added water which has a high conductivity value passes first
through the deioniser and then enters the main cooling circuit.
When putting the heat exchanger back on stand-by, only the pure-water
side is to be bled. The raw-water side remains dry until the heat exchanger
is required for operation.
1
Close valves V83, V85, V75 and V77.
Slowly open valveV32.
Bleed the pure-water side through V75.
Open valve V12.
Heat exchanger E1 is now ready for operation.
Heat exchanger E1 is now on standby. The valve V11 shall only be

openend when the heat exchanger E1 is required for operation. This is to
ensure that the pure water flows only in one heat exchanger and the
standby heat exchanger only receives a small amount of pure water to
maintain the low conductivity of the water inside the standby heat
exchanger.
2.6.3

To service heat exchanger E2, the converter must be shut down or heat
exchanger E1 must be in operation.
2-10 (12)
Close valves V13, V14 and V32 on the pure-water side.
Close valves V17, V18 on the raw-water side.
Open valves V84, V86, V76 and V78 to drain the heat exchanger.
ABB
2.6.4
Putting Heat Exchanger E2 on Standby/ into Operation

In order to prevent a water level alarm or low pressure in the pure-water
circuit, the pure-water cooling circuit must have sufficient water inside the
expansion vessel. It is required to fill up the cooling system through valve
V55 until the max. level of the expansion vessel is reached prior to taking
the heat exchanger back into operation. By adding water through valve
V55, the added water which has a high conductivity value passes first
through the deioniser and then enters the main cooling circuit.
When putting the heat exchanger back on standby, only the pure-water
side is to be bled. The raw-water side remains dry until the heat exchanger
is required for operation.
1
Close valves V84, V86, V76 and V78.
Slowly open valve V32.
Bleed the pure-water side through V76.
Open valve V14.
Heat exchanger E2 is now on standby. The valve V13 shall only be

openend when the heat exchanger E2 is required for opration. This is to
ensure that the pure water flows only in one heat exchanger and the
standby heat exchangers only receives a small amount of pure water to
maintain the low conductivity of the water inside the standby heat
exchanger.
2.7
Adding Water to the Cooling System

Use cooling water as specified in section 2.2 Filling the Cooling System.
Cooling water can be added, while the converter is in operation, provided
the conductivity is below 0.4 S/cm.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
When the drive is in operation, voltages are present in the control section.
Do not touch any live circuitry.
Proceed as follows:
1
Connect the filling hose to the ISO-R1/2" connector of valve V55.

A pressure of approx. 2 to 3 bar is required for filling water into the
circuit. Using a small pump is necessary.
Close valve V50.
Open valve V55 and start filling the unit.
2-11 (12)
ABB
IMPORTANT!
When filling cooling water while the converter is in operation, the drive may
trip on a conductivity fault. Fill the water in slowly to avoid a trip. Filling rate:
less or equal 2 l/min.
4
Stop the filling after about 5 l of water have been added.
Close valve V55.
Open valve V50.
After the conductivity is down to 0.4 S/cm again, repeat steps 2 to 6

until the static pressure is at its nominal value.
Only for cooling units with flow regulating valve (B5523):
To decrease the conductivity value faster, the flow in the water treatment circuit can be increased. Adjust the flow in the water treatment
circuit to a maximum of 15 l/min at the flow regulating valve. When
adjusting the flow, the alarm message CW1 IntCoolWtrFlow will
appear on the display of the control panel on COU 1 indicating that
the water flow is low.
2-12 (12)
Remove the hose.
ABB
3.1
Draining for Service Purposes
IMPORTANT!
When draining the cooling system according to section 3.1.1, 3.1.2 and
3.1.3, water remains in the deionizer vessel, the pumps and the filter. See
section 3.2 if the colling system has to be emptied completely.
Proceed as follows:
1
Deenergize the converter according to the Operating Instructions of

the converter.
Switch-off and lock the motor starters of the pumps.

Q5002 is assigned to pump 1
Q5003 is assigned to pump 2
Take appropriate measures to catch the water.

Information on the filling capacity of the cooling system can be found
on the rating plate of the converter.
3.1.1
Drain the cooling system according to one of the following

procedures.

Proceed as follows:
1
Open drain valve V82 and drain the cooling system through the
factory mounted water hose.
Draining takes about 1 to 2 hours depending on the filling quantity.
3.1.2
Close valve V82 when draining has been finished.

Proceed as follows:
1
Connect the suction side of the filling pump to the make-up water
valve V55.
Open valve V55.
Switch on the pump to drain the cooling system.
Close valve V55 after draining has been finished.
3-1 (4)
ABB
3.1.3

The cooling system can also be drained through valve V30 if a watercooled Excitation Unit (EXU) is part of the line-up.
Proceed as follows:
3.1.4
Connect a suitable hose to the hose nipple (diameter: 26.5 mm) of

valve V30.
Open valve V30.
Close valve V30 when draining has been finished.
Open drain valve V81 and drain the cooling system through the
factory mounted water hose.
Draining Water-cooled Resistors

Water-cooled resistors must be drained separately. Depending on the
rating and the configuration of the converter, water-cooled resistors can be
present in the following units of the converter:
Active Rectifier Unit (ARU)
Inverter Unit (INU)
Braking Chopper Unit (BCU), if present in the
converter
The filling quantity of a resistor is approximately 2 l.
Do the following to drain a water-cooled resistor:
1
Before opening the drain plug take measures to catch the water.
Wrap a cloth around the drain plug to prevent water from spraying into
the cabinet.
Remove the drain plug of the resistor (required spanner size: 19 mm)
and catch the water with a suitable vessel.
Drain plug
Figure 3-1
3
3-2 (4)
Water-cooled Resistor
Remount the drain plug after draining has been finished.
ABB
3.1.5
Carefully wipe off any spilled water.
Draining Heat Exchangers

See Chapter 2.6 Shutting down a Heat Exchanger and Putting It on
Standby .
3.2
Complete Draining of the Cooling System

Additionally to the procedures described before, do the following if the
cooling system has to be drained completely.
3.2.1
Draining through a Pipe Joint

Proceed as follows:
3.2.2
Loosen and slide aside the pipe joint which connects the water
cooling unit to the feeding pipe of the adjoining cabinet. Slide the pipe
joint into the adjoining cabinet to force the escaping water to run into
the water cooling unit.
Refit the pipe joint after draining has been finished.
Draining the Pumps

Proceed as follows:
1
Before opening the drain plugs take measures to catch the water.
Open the drain plug of the pump 1/(2).
Use a suction device to remove the remaining water.
Drain plugs
Figure 3-2
Location of Drain Plugs
3-3 (4)
ABB
3.2.3
Close the drain plug after draining has been finished.
Draining the Filter and Deionizer Vessel

Compressed air (1bar) is necessary to drain the deionizer vessel.
Proceed as follows:
3-4 (4)
Check that valve V50 and V52 are closed.
Unscrew and empty the housing of filter Z2.
Connect a compressed air hose to valve V55.
Open valve V55 and press air through the deionizer vessel until the
water stops running out of filter Z2.
Turn off and disconnect the air supply.
Open valves V50 and V52.
Close valve V55.
Assemble filter Z2.
ABB
It is recommended to record the values of conductivity, water temperature
and pressure regularly to determine when water has to be added or the
ion exchange resin renewed.
Actual values can be monitored while the converter is in operation.
Water conductivity and pressure depend on the water temperature. Only
values registered at the same temperature should be compared.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltage!
When the drive is in operation, voltages are present in the control units.
Do not touch any live ciruitry.
4.1
Water Conductivity
The actual value of the water conductivity (displayed in S/cm) can be
read
on the conductivity meter B5503 in the WCU 1 or
on the control panel of COU 1.
Proceed as follows:
Reading the
Conductivity on the
Control Panel
Select the Actual Display mode on the control panel (see ACS 6000
User's Manual, Chapter 7 - CDP Control Panel, section 7.3 Actual
Signal Display Mode).
Select parameter group 34 WCU1 ACTUAL SIGNALS. In group 34,

select actual signal 34.12 CW1 CONDUCTIVITY. The conductivity
should be below 0.5 S/cm.
If the conductivity exceeds the alarm threshold (see
parameter 36.23), the control panel will display the
alarm CW1 WaterConductHigh.
If the conductivity exceeds the trip threshold (see
parameter 36.22), the converter will shut down and
the panel displays the message CW1
WaterConductHigh.
4-1 (2)
ABB
4.2
Water Pressure
The actual value of the water pressure (displayed in bar) can be read
on the pressure transmitter B5501 (output pressure)
in WCU 1 or
Proceed as follows:
Reading the Water

Pressure on the
Control Panel

select actual signal 34.14 CW1 PUMP OUTPUT PRESSURE.
The reaction of the converter, if the water pressure decreases is as
follows:
The control panel will display the alarm CW1 WaterOutpPreLow and
the 2nd pump will be switched on. If the water pressure does not
increase above the trip threshold (see parameter 36.17) after a preset
time, the drive will trip.
4.3
Water Temperature
The actual value of the water temperature (displayed in C) can be read
Proceed as follows:
Reading the Water

Temperature on the
Control Panel

select actual signal 34.16 CW1 INTERNAL TEMPERATURE.
If the temperature exceeds the alarm threshold (see
parameter 36.05), the control panel will display the
alarm message CW1 IntCoolWtrTemp.
If the temperature exceeds the trip threshold (see
parameter 36.04), the converter will trip and the
control panel will display the trip message CW1
IntCoolWtrTemp.
4-2 (2)
ABB
Table 5-1
Hexagon
Screw
Nut
Washer
(D x d x t)
Gasket
(D x d x t)
25
M12-55
M12
24 x 13 x 2
73 x 40 x 1.5
24 - 33 Nm
32
M16-65
M16
30 x 73 x 3
84 x 48 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
40
M16-65
M16
30 x 73 x 3
92 x 57 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
50
M16-70
M16
30 x 73 x 3
107 x 66 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
65
M16-70
M16
30 x 73 x 3
128 x 23 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
80
M16-75
M16
30 x 73 x 3
144 x 97 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
100
M16-80
M16
30 x 73 x 3
162 x 125 x 1.5
60 - 80 Nm
DN
5.1
Tightening Torque for Flanges

Tightening
Torque
Sealing off Threaded Connections without O-rings and Gaskets

A sealant such as Loctite 755 and Loctite 401 activator spray is
recommended to ensure a leak proof joint between stainless steel to
stainless steel connections.
Thread tape is recommended to seal off:
stainless steel to plastic connections,
plastic to plastic connections.
5-1 (2)
5-2 (2)
ABB
ABB
Appendices
1 (2)
ABB
2 (2)
No.
Design change
V78 MOVED
Date
Design
Appr.
2007-05-02
EN
TI
F2
HEAT EXCHANGER UNIT
V61
FINE WATER
INLET ANSI 2"
V11
V75
V77
V60
V19
V16
RAW WATER
OUTLET
COUNTER
FLANGE
ANSI 3"
E1
V12
V83
DRAIN
HOSE 12
V15
V85
V13
V76
F3
V63
V32
V62
V78
V18
RAW WATER
INLET
COUNTER
FLANGE
ANSI 3"
E2
FINE WATER
OUTLET
ANSI 2"
V14
V17
V84
V86
Z2
V20
DRAIN
HOSE 12
This document must not be copied without

our written permission and the contents
thereof must not be imparted to third party
nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
ABB Power Technologies AB
DIMENSION TOLERANCE ACCORDING TO

SWEDEWATER STANDARD 9-3001
Appr.
Design
Drawn
TI
EN
EN
Date
2007-03-06
AXELTOFTAVGEN 170
BOX 265
ABB SCHWEIZ AG
ACS 6000 029SG
HEAT EXCHANGER
FLOW DIAGRAM
S-261 23 LANDSKRONA
SWEDEN
Issue
Date
2007-05-02
2
Scale
Project No.
1: 1
3617
Drawing No.
3-3617-001
PHONE: +46 418-45 07 00
FAX: +46 418-120 19
ABB
ACS 6000
3 to 27 MVA
Data Sheet
Water Cooling Units
Closed to Atmospheric Pressure
ABB
Document No.:
3BHS124234 ZAB E01 Rev. B
Issued:
29-06-2005
ACS 6000 Water Cooling Units
ABB
Table of Contents
1
2
2.1
2.2
3
Cooling Circuit Specification

Determining Pressure Drop in External Water Circuit
Type WCU-S-029SG, WCU-M-029SG
Industrial Water Specification
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1 (2)
ABB
2 (2)
ABB
1
Cooling Circuit Specification

WCU-S-029SG
WCU-M-029SG
Industrial water
Deionized water
137 kW
270 kW
250 l/min
490 l/min
290 l/min
520 l/min
400 l/min
700 l/min
nominal 1
32C
32C
min.
10C
10C
37C
37C
min.
10C
10C
nominal
<0,3 S
<0,3 S
alarm
0,5 S
0,5 S
trip
0,7 S
0,7 S
40%
40%
40%
40%
70 kPa
140 kPa
350 kPa
350 kPa
650 kPa
650 kPa
1000 kPa
1000 kPa
nominal
max.
Inlet temperature
Outlet temperature
Conductivity
WCU-S-052SG
WCU-M-052SG
Internal Cooling Circuit
nominal 1
Flow
WCU-S-029SG
WCU-M-029SG
External Water Circuit

Coolant type
Cooling capacity
WCU-S-052SG
WCU-M-052SG
nominal
Glycol content 2
max.
Pressure drop 1
nominal
1000 kPa 1
Design pressure
Test pressure
1500 kPa
1000 kPa 1
1500 kPa
WCU-S-029SG
WCU-M-029SG
Pump motor power3
WCU-S-052SG
WCU-M-052SG
5.5 kW
50 Hz
6.3 kW
60 Hz
7.5 kW
50 Hz
8.6 kW
60 Hz
380 V
10.6 A
440 V
10.4 A
380 V
14.1 A
440 V
14.4 A
400 V
10.3 A
460 V
10.1 A
400 V
13.8 A
460 V
13.8 A
415 V
10.4 A
480 V
10.2 A
415 V
13.8 A
480 V
13.2 A
1 Nominal values, vary depending on application

1, 2 See Rating Plate for project specific values
3 Not included in cooling capacity
1 (4)
ABB
2

Pressure drop (kPa)
2.1
Determining Pressure Drop in External Water Circuit
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Raw water flow (l/min)

Pressure drop (kPa)
2.2
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Raw water flow (l/min)
2 (4)
ABB
3
Industrial Water Specification

Parameter
Value
pH
79
Specific conductivity
< 500 S / cm
Hardness
3 15 dH
Cloride (Cl)
< 300 mg/l
Total dissolved salt
< 1000 mg/l
Undissolved particles*
< 1000 mg/l
Total M - alkalinity (TAC)
0 - 300 mg CaCO3/l
* Valid for non-adhesive particles with a size of less than1 mm
The materials used in the external cooling system on the raw water side
are stainless steel (AISI 316 and AISI 304L) and NBR rubber. Any
chemicals compatible with these materials may be used as additives.
3 (4)
ABB
4 (4)
NO
PAGE
DESIGN CHANGE
DATE
SIGN
APPR
1 UNITS
Appr
This document must not be copied without our

written permission and the contents thereof
must not be imparted to third party nor be
used for any unauthorised purpose.
Design
TI
EN
Drawn
EN
Date
2007-03-06
Issue
ABB SWITZERLAND LTD

ACS 6000 029SG AND 052SG
Date
1
Project No.
3617
2007-03-06
No. of pages
1(3)
Dwg No.
ABB Power Technologies Products AB

LIST OF COMPONENTS
4-3617-050
AXELTOFTAVGEN 170 BOX 265 S-261 23 LANDSKRONA, SWEDEN PHONE: +46 418-45 07 00 FAX: +46 418-120 19
LIST OF COMPONENTS
ITEM QTY
DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER
TYPE
DATA
CONNEC
Dwg No.:
4-3617-050
Issue:
MATERIAL
REM
ART:NO AS
E1
HEAT EXCHANGER
TRANTER
GC-16M-34
140 kW, 34 PLATES
VICT 60,3 EN 1.4401
2100027 3
E2
HEAT EXCHANGER
TRANTER
GC-16M-34
140 kW, 34 PLATES
VICT 60,3 EN 1.4401
2100027 3
F2
SAFTEY VALVE
ARMATEC
AT4587-D4-9,0-20NPT
OPENING PRESSURE 9,0 BAR NPT 3/4"
STAINLESS STEEL
F3
SAFTEY VALVE
ARMATEC
AT4587-D4-9,0-20NPT
OPENING PRESSURE 9,0 BAR NPT 3/4"
STAINLESS STEEL
V11
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V12
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V13
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V14
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V15
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V16
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V17
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V18
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V19
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V20
BALL VALVE
VENTIM
VM 4492
DN50
AISI316L
3120179 3
V32
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4357
ISO-Rp 1/4 AISI304/316
V60
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp3/4
AISI316/304
V61
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp3/4
AISI316/304
V62
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp3/4
AISI316/304
V63
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp3/4
AISI316/304
V75
DEAERATION VALVE
WHITEY
SS-4P-4RT
ISO-R 1/4
AISI316
3120139
V76
DEAERATION VALVE
WHITEY
SS-4P-4RT
ISO-R 1/4
AISI316
3120139
V77
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp 1
AISI304/316
3120149 3
V78
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp 1
AISI304/316
3120149 3
V83
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4357
3120138 3
V84
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4357
3120138 3
V85
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp 1
AISI304/316
3120149 3
V86
BALL VALVE
DIE ERSTE
VM 4359
ISO-Rp 1
AISI304/316
3120149 3
Z2
FILTER
KROMBACH
VM6303
DN50
GG25
2560011 4
MESH SIZE 0,6MM
3120138 3
1
3120148 3
3120148 3
3120148 3
3120148 3
2(3)
LIST OF COMPONENTS
ITEM QTY
DESCRIPTION
MANUFACTURER
TYPE
DATA
CONNEC
Dwg No.:
4-3617-050
Issue:
MATERIAL
REM
ART:NO AS
REMARKS
1)
INCL. PADLOCK
3(3)
ABB Drives
Installation and
Start-up Guide
PROFIBUS Adapter Module
NPBA-12
PROFIBUS Adapter Module

NPBA-12
Installation and
Start-up Guide
3BFE 64341588 R0125 REV B

EFFECTIVE: 06.10.2003
2003 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Instructions
Overview
This chapter states the safety instructions that must be followed when
installing and operating the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module.
The material in this chapter must be studied before attempting any
work on, or with, the unit.
Warnings and Notes
This manual distinguishes two sorts of safety instructions. Warnings

are used to inform of conditions which can, if proper steps are not
taken, lead to a serious fault condition, physical injury and death. Notes
are used when the reader is required to pay special attention or when
there is additional information available on the subject. Notes are less
crucial than Warnings, but should not be disregarded.
Warnings
Readers are informed of situations that can result in serious physical

injury and/or serious damage to equipment with the following symbols:
Dangerous Voltage Warning: warns of situations
in which a high voltage can cause physical injury
and/or damage equipment. The text next to this
symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.
General Warning: warns of situations which can
cause physical injury and/or damage equipment by
means other than electrical. The text next to this
Electrostatic Discharge Warning: warns of
situations in which an electrostatic discharge can
damage equipment. The text next to this symbol
describes ways to avoid the danger.
Notes
Readers are notified of the need for special attention or additional

information available on the subject with the following symbols:
CAUTION!
Note:
NPBA-12 Installation and Start-up Guide
Caution aims to draw special attention to a

particular issue.
Note gives additional information or points out
more information available on the subject.
Safety Instructions
General Safety
Instructions
WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the

drive should be carried out by qualified electricians.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After switching off the
mains, always allow the intermediate circuit capacitors 5 minutes to
discharge before working on the frequency converter, the motor or the
motor cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage indicating
instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a dangerously high
voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from external control
circuits even when the drive mains power is shut off. Exercise
appropriate care when working with the unit. Neglecting these
instructions can cause physical injury and death.
WARNING! There are several automatic reset functions in the
drive. If selected, they reset the unit and resume operation after a fault.
These functions should not be selected if other equipment is not
compatible with this kind of operation, or dangerous situations can be
caused by such action.
More Warnings and Notes are printed at appropriate instances along
the text.
ii
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-i
Warnings and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-i
General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction to This Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What This Guide Contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used in This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
Chapter 2 Overview
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Delivery Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Warranty and Liability Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Mounting Outside the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Mounting Inside the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General Cabling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Earthing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
DIP Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
NPBA-12 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Drive Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
PROFIBUS and Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Programming
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Connection Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-5
Chapter 6 Communication
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
PROFIBUS-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Communication Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
PPO Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
The Control Word and the Status Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Actual Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Parameters in Cyclic Communication (DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Parameters in Acyclic Communication (DPV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chapter 7 Fault Tracing
Status LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Appendix A PROFIBUS Parameters
Appendix B Definitions and Abbreviations
PROFIBUS Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
PROFIBUS Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Appendix C Technical Data
DDCS Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Fieldbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
NPBA-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Appendix D Ambient Conditions
Ambient Conditions, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Ambient Conditions, Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Ambient Conditions, Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
iv
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the Installation and Start-up

Guide for the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module.
Intended Audience
The Guide is intended for the people who are responsible for installing,
commissioning and using a PROFIBUS Adapter Module with an ABB
drive. The reader is expected to have a basic knowledge of electrical
fundamentals, electrical wiring practices, the drive, the use of the drive
control panel, and the PROFIBUS protocol family.
What This Guide

Contains
The installation and start-up of the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter

Module are introduced in this Guide.
It is assumed that the drive is installed and ready to operate before
starting the installation of the adapter module. For more information on
the installation and start-up procedures of the drive, please refer to its
user documentation.
Safety Instructions are featured in the first few pages of this Guide.
Safety Instructions describe the formats for various warnings and
notations used within this Guide. This chapter also states the safety
instructions which apply to the installation and operation of the
NPBA-12 Module.
Chapter 1 Introduction to This Guide contains a short description
of the Guide.
Chapter 2 Overview contains a short description of the PROFIBUS
protocol and the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module, a delivery
checklist, and information on the manufacturers warranty.
Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation contains placing and mounting
instructions for the module.
Chapter 4 Electrical Installation contains wiring, bus termination
and earthing instructions.
Chapter 5 Programming explains how to program the master
station and the drive before the communication through the adapter
module can be started.
Chapter 6 Communication contains a description of how data is
transmitted through the NPBA-12 Module.
Chapter 7 Fault Tracing explains how to trace faults with the Status
LEDs on the NPBA-12 Module.
1-1
Appendix A presents the PROFIBUS Profile-specific parameters.

Appendix B explains definitions and abbreviations concerning the
PROFIBUS protocol family.
Appendix C contains Technical Data.
Appendix D contains a specification of the ambient conditions allowed
during transportation, storage and use of the NPBA-12.
Conventions Used in
This Guide
Communication Module
Data Sets and

Data Words
Data sets are clusters of data sent through the DDCS link between the
NPBA-12 Adapter Module and the drive. Each data set consists of
three 16-bit words, ie. data words. The Control Word (sometimes called
the Command Word) and the Status Word, References and Actual
Values (see Chapter 6) are types of data words; the contents of some
data words are user-definable.
NPBA-12 PROFIBUS
Adapter Module
The NPBA-12 Adapter Module is one of the optional fieldbus adapter

modules available for ABB drives. The NPBA-12 is a device through
which an ABB drive is connected to a PROFIBUS serial
communication bus.
Parameter
A parameter is an operating instruction for the drive. Parameters can

be read and programmed with the drive control panel, or through the
NPBA-12 Module.
Further Information
1-2
Communication Module is a parameter name/parameter selection

name for a device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter) through which the drive is
connected to an external serial communication network (e.g. a
fieldbus). The communication with the communication module is
activated with a drive parameter.
Further information is available on the World Wide Web from

www.profibus.com.
Chapter 2 Overview
Overview
This chapter contains a short description of the PROFIBUS standard

and the NPBA-12 Adapter Module, a delivery checklist, and warranty
information.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS is an open serial communication standard that enables

data exchange between all kinds of automation components. There are
three main variations of PROFIBUS: PROFIBUS-FMS (Fieldbus
Message Specification), PROFIBUS-DP (Decentralised Periphery) and
PROFIBUS-PA (Process Automation). The NPBA-12 PROFIBUS
Adapter Module supports the PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-DPV1
protocols.
The physical transmission medium of the bus is a twisted pair cable
(according to the RS-485 standard). The maximum length of the bus
cable is 100 to 1200 metres, depending on the selected transmission
rate (see Appendix C). Up to 31 stations can be connected to the same
PROFIBUS system without the use of repeaters. With repeaters, it is
possible to connect 127 stations (including the repeaters, and the
master station) to the system.
In PROFIBUS communication, the master station usually a
programmable logic controller (PLC) polls the slaves which respond
and take the actions requested by the master. It is also possible to
send a command to several slaves at the same time; in this case the
slaves send no response message to the master. Communication
between the slaves is not possible on a PROFIBUS link.
The PROFIBUS protocol family is specified in the EN 50170 Standard.
The communication with a drive is discussed in PROFIDRIVEPROFILE The PROFIBUS Profile for Adjustable Speed Drives. For
further information on PROFIBUS, refer to the above-mentioned
standards.
2-1
Chapter 2 Overview
The NPBA-12
PROFIBUS Adapter
Module
The NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module is an optional device for

ABB drives which enables the connection of the drive to a PROFIBUS
system. The drive is considered as a slave in the PROFIBUS network.
Through the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module it is possible to:
Give control commands to the drive
(Start, Stop, Run enable, etc.)
Feed a motor speed or torque reference to the drive
Give a process actual value or a process reference to the
PID controller of the drive
Read status information and actual values from the drive
Change drive parameter values
Reset a drive fault.
The PROFIBUS commands and services supported by the NPBA-12
PROFIBUS Adapter Module are discussed in Chapter 6. Please refer
to the user documentation of the drive as to which commands are
supported by the drive.
The adapter module is mounted onto a standard mounting rail inside or
outside the drive unit, depending on drive type and configuration. See
the users manual of the drive for module placement options.
PROFIBUS
Master
Slave Stations
NPBA-12
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
TXD
Fibre optic connectors for

connection to the drive:
RXD = Receiver
TXD = Transmitter
ABB Drive
RXD
Reset button for initialisation of module
RESET
MASTER
MSG
DDCS
Status LEDs
(For descriptions see Chapter 7)
ABB Drive
+24V
0V
DG
SH
Screw terminal blocks for the bus cable

connection and for power supply
connection (see Chapter 4)
Figure 2-1 The construction of the PROFIBUS link and the NPBA-12 Adapter Module.
2-2
Chapter 2 Overview
Compatibility
The NPBA-12 is compatible with:

ABB Drives (see Chapter 5, Parameter no. 8, COMM PROFILE)
All master stations that support the PROFIBUS-DP and -DPV1
protocols.
Delivery Check
The option package for the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module

contains:
PROFIBUS Adapter Module, Type NPBA-12
Two pairs (four pieces) of fibre optic cables for connecting the
adapter to the drive
Mounting rail
This manual, the NPBA-12 Installation and Start-up Guide.
Warranty and Liability

Information
The warranty for your ABB drive and options covers manufacturing
defects. The manufacturer carries no responsibility for damage due to
transport or unpacking.
In no event and under no circumstances shall the manufacturer be liable for damages and failures due to misuse, abuse, improper installation, or abnormal conditions of temperature, dust, or corrosives, or
failures due to operation above rated capacities. Nor shall the manufacturer ever be liable for consequential and incidental damages.
The period of manufacturer's warranty is 12 months, and not more than
18 months, from the date of delivery. Extended warranty may be available with certified start-up. Contact your local distributor for details.
Your local ABB Drives company or distributor may have a different warranty period, which is specified in their sales terms, conditions, and
warranty terms.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, contact your
local distributor or ABB Drives office.
The technical data and specifications are valid at the time of printing.
ABB reserves the right to subsequent alterations.
2-3
Chapter 2 Overview
2-4
Overview
This chapter contains module mounting instructions. Depending on the

drive, the module can be installed either inside or outside the drive
housing or cabinet. See the users manual of the drive for module
placement options.
Mounting Outside
the Drive
Choose the location for the module. Note the following:

The cabling instructions in Chapter 4 must be followed.
The ambient conditions should be taken into account (see
Appendix D). The degree of protection of the module is IP 20.
Observe the free space requirements for the module (see the figure
below) and the drive (see the drive documentation).
Module earth is connected to the mounting rail by means of an
earthing tab (see the figure below). The mounting rail onto which the
option module is to be mounted must be earthed to a noiseless
earth. If the rail is not mounted on a properly earthed base, a
separate earthing conductor must be used. The conductor must be
as short as possible and its cross-sectional area must be 6 mm2 at
least. Note: No solid copper conductor may be used (stranded wire
allowed only).
Mounting instructions:
1. Switch off all dangerous voltages in the enclosure that the module
is to be mounted in.
2. Fasten the rail and ensure the proper earthing as described above.
3. Push the module onto the rail. The module can be released by
pulling the locking spring with a screwdriver (see below).
10 mm
Earthing
Tab
10 mm
3-1
Mounting Inside
the Drive
The work inside the drive should be carried out by a qualified

electrician only.
WARNING! Pay attention to the slowly discharging voltage of the
capacitor bank and the voltages that are connected from external
control circuits to the inputs and outputs of the drive.
WARNING! Do not touch the printed circuit boards. The integrated

circuits are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
Mounting instructions:
1. Stop the drive.
2. Switch off the power supply of the drive and all dangerous voltages
connected to the inputs and outputs.
3. Wait for five minutes to ensure that the capacitors in the
intermediate circuit have discharged.
4. Remove the front cover of the drive.
5. Ensure that the mains cable, motor cable and capacitor bank
(UDC+ and UDC) are not powered.
6. Locate the position for the module (see the drive documentation).
Fasten the mounting rail to its place if not already installed.
Observe the free space requirements for the module (see the
figure above).
7. Push the module onto the rail. The module can be released by
pulling the locking spring with a screwdriver (see the figure above).
3-2
Overview
This chapter contains:

general cabling instructions
module earthing instructions
bus termination instructions
instructions for connecting the module to the drive and to the
PROFIBUS bus.
WARNING! Before installation, switch off the drive power supply. Wait
five minutes to ensure that the capacitor bank of the drive is
discharged. Switch off all dangerous voltages connected from external
control circuits to the inputs and outputs of the drive.
General Cabling
Instructions
Arrange the bus cables as far away from the motor cables as possible.
Avoid parallel runs. Use bushings at cable entries.
Handle fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables,
always grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends
of the fibres with bare hands as the fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt.
The maximum long term tensile load for the fibre optic cables is 1 N.
The minimum short term bend radius is 25 mm.
Earthing the Module
The NPBA-12 module earth is connected to the rail onto which the
module is mounted. If the rail is fastened to an earthed metallic
assembly plate, the module is automatically earthed, and no external
earthing wire is needed. If the rail is fastened to a base that is not
earthed, the rail must be connected to the nearest earthing terminal.
However, the earthing wire should not be connected to the same
terminal as the power cable screens. (See the mounting instructions in
Chapter 3.)
4-1
DIP Switch Settings
DIP switch SW1 on the printed circuit board of the NPBA-12 is used to
switch on bus termination. Bus termination prevents signal reflections
from the cable ends. SW1 should be set to ON if the module is installed
at the end of the bus.
Note: The built-in termination circuitry of the NPBA-12 is of the active
type, so the module has to be powered for the termination to work. If
the module needs to be switched off during operation of the network,
the bus can be terminated by connecting a 220 ohm, 1/4 W resistor
between the A and B lines.
The DIP switch on the circuit board can be accessed as shown below.
Press down the clips

on top and bottom of
the module.
Bottom View
Pull the PCB outwards.

(Stoppers prevent the PCB from
being completely removed.)
Side View
Close the module by sliding

the PCB back until the clips
lock into their recesses.
SW
Set the termination

switch to the
required position.
4-2
OF
ON
NPBA-12 Connections
Drive Connection
The NPBA-12 module is connected to the drive using a fibre optic

cable link. Consult the drive documentation as to the corresponding
terminals inside the drive.
ABB Drive
NPBA-12
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
TXD
RXD
DDCS
RESET
MASTER
MSG
DDCS
+24V
0V
DG
SH
Figure 4-2 Fibre optic link connecting the NPBA-12 to the drive.
PROFIBUS and Power
Connections
The bus cable and the external power supply are connected to terminal
blocks X1 and X2 on the NPBA-12.
The terminal blocks are described below.
X1
Description
Data Negative (Conductor 2 in twisted pair).
Data Positive (Conductor 1 in twisted pair).
X2
Description
+24V
0V
DG
PROFIBUS cable data ground (optional 3rd conductor).

Connected to module earth via a 1 M/15 nF RC network.
SH
PROFIBUS cable shield. Internally connected to module earth.
Power supply for the module (24 V d.c. 10%).

The power can be taken from the drives internal power supply
(see drive manuals), or an external power supply.
On-board power supply shuts off if the voltage drops below 11 V.
4-3
PROFIBUS Wiring
Examples
There are two wiring examples below for standard PROFIBUS cable
consisting of a twisted pair and screen.
A
PROFIBUS
MASTER
NPBA-12
A
NPBA-12
X1 1 2 3 4
X1 1 2 3 4
X2
SH
DG
0V
SH
DG
5 6 7 8
+24V
X2
0V
GND
+24V
A
B
5 6 7 8
B
PROFIBUS
MASTER
NPBA-12
A
NPBA-12
X1 1 2 3 4
X1 1 2 3 4
X2
SH
DG
0V
SH
DG
5 6 7 8
+24V
X2
0V
GND
+24V
A
B
5 6 7 8
Figure 4-3 Connection diagram for the standard PROFIBUS cable. Only connection (B) enables the
removal of the intermediate module without disturbing the bus.
4-4
Overview
This chapter gives information on configuring the PROFIBUS master

station and the drive for communication through the NPBA-12
PROFIBUS Adapter Module.
Configuring the
System
After the NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Module has been mechanically

and electrically installed according to the instructions in Chapters 3
and 4, the master station and the drive must be prepared for
communication with the module.
The type definition (GSD) file required for configuration of the master
station is available from www.profibus.com or your local ABB
representative. The filename is ABB_6012.GSD.
Please refer to the master station documentation for more information.
PROFIBUS Connection
Configuration
The detailed procedure of activating the module for communication

with the drive is dependent on drive type. (Normally, a parameter must
be adjusted to activate the communication. See the drive
documentation.)
As communication between the drive and the NPBA-12 is established,
several configuration parameters are copied to the drive. These
parameters shown below in Table 5-1 must be checked first and
adjusted if necessary. The alternative selections for these parameters
are discussed in more detail below the table.
Note: The new settings take effect only when the module is powered
up or the RESET button pressed for the next time.
Note: In case the fibre optic cables are transferred from one drive to
another without powering down the module, press the RESET button to
refresh the configuration parameters in the module.
Note: The grouping, numbering, and adjustment procedure of
parameters vary from drive to drive. See the drive documentation for
information.
Data Transfer Rates

Supported
The NPBA-12 supports the following PROFIBUS communication

speeds: 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 45.45 kbit/s, 93.75 kbit/s, 187.5 kbit/s,
500 kbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s, 3 Mbit/s, 6 Mbit/s, 12 Mbit/s.
The NPBA-12 automatically detects the communication speed used.
5-1
Table 5-1 The NPBA-12 configuration parameters.

Fieldbus
Par. No.
Parameter Name
Default
Setting
Alternative Settings
MODULE TYPE
(Read-only)
NPBA-12 Vx.x
PROTOCOL
(0) DP; (1) DPV1; (2) NPBA-02 MODE
(0) DP
PPO TYPE
(0) PPO 1; (1) PPO 2; (2) PPO 3; (3) PPO 4; (4) PPO 5
(0) PPO 1
NODE NUMBER
2 to 126
NO. OF DATA SETS
1 to 4
DATA SET INDEX
(0) FBA DSET 1; (1) FBA DSET 10
(0) FBA DSET 1
CUT-OFF TIMEOUT
0 to 255
30
COMM PROFILE
(0) ABB DRIVES; (1) CSA 2.8/3.0
(0) ABB DRIVES
CONTROL ZERO MODE
(0) STOP; (1) FREEZE
(0) STOP
MODULE TYPE
This parameter shows the module type and software version as

detected by the drive. The value cannot be adjusted by the user.
If this parameter is undefined, the communication between the drive
and the module has not been established.
PROTOCOL
This parameter selects the protocol used.

DP
This setting can be used with PROFIBUS masters that support the DP
or DPV1 protocol.
DPV1
This setting must be used with DPV1-only PROFIBUS masters.
NPBA-02 MODE
When an NPBA-01 or NPBA-02 module is replaced with an NPBA-12
module in an existing network, this setting can be used in order to
avoid the reconfiguration of the PROFIBUS master.
PPO TYPE
NODE NUMBER
5-2
This parameter selects the PPO message type for the PROFIBUS
connection. See Figure 6-1 for available PPO message types.
Each device on the PROFIBUS link must have a unique node number.
This parameter is used to define a node number for the drive it is
connected to.
NO. OF DATA SETS
DATA SET INDEX
This parameter defines the number of data sets sent in each direction
in PPO messages; e.g.. if this parameter is set to 1, only data sets 1
(master to drive) and 2 (drive to master) are used. Setting this
parameter to 4 enables all eight data sets shown in Figure 6-1: data
sets with odd numbers (1,3,5,7) are sent by the master to the drive and
those with even numbers (2,4,6,8) are sent by the drive to the master
(providing DATA SET INDEX is set to FBA DSET 1). Please note that
different drive types support different numbers of data sets; see the
drive documentation.
Defines the offset for data set indexes (numbers). See the drive
documentation for information.
FBA DSET 1 (no offset)
The first data set sent from the master to the drive (the Control Word) is
Data Set 1 (DS1).
FBA DSET 10 (offset 9)
The first data set sent from the master to the drive (the Control Word) is
Data Set 10 (DS10).
CUT-OFF TIMEOUT
This parameter defines the behaviour of the NPBA module in the event
that no messages are received from the PROFIBUS controller.
0
The NPBA cyclically sends the last valid Control Word and References
to the drive until new values are received from the controller.
1 255
The NPBA stops communicating with the drive after a timeout, the
actual length of which equals the setting multiplied by 20 milliseconds.
The behaviour of the drive in case the DDCS communication stops
depends on its parameter settings; consult the drive documentation.
Normal operation is resumed after valid messages are again received
from the controller.
5-3
COMM PROFILE
This parameter selects the communication profile used in the DDCS

link between the drive and the NPBA-12. The setting to use is
dependent on drive type and software version as indicated below. (The
drive software version can be checked by viewing a parameter; see the
drive documentation.)
Drive Type
Drive SW Version
Setting to Use
ACS 400
1.0.5.6 or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 600 SingleDrive
CSA 2.8x to CSA 3.0x
ACS 600 SingleDrive
ACxA5000 or later
ACS 600 SingleDrive with PFC
AHxA2000
ACS 600 SingleDrive with PFC
AHxA5000 or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 600 MultiDrive
AMxM103a or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 600 MotionControl (ACP 600)
APxA1100 or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 600 Pump & Fan Drive (ACF 600)
AF0A1020 or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 600 CraneDrive (ACC 600)
ACxA2000 or later
ABB DRIVES
ACS 800
ASXR7000 or later
ABB DRIVES
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES
CSA 2.8/3.0
ACS 1000
ABB DRIVES
ACS 6000
ABB DRIVES
DCS 400
ABB DRIVES
DCS 500
DC21x226 or later
ABB DRIVES
ABB DRIVES
The NPBA-12 relays the Control Word as is from the PROFIBUS
master to the drive. The Status Word is relayed to the master as
received from the drive, except bit 15 which is used as a DDCS
communication error indicator. The Control and Status Word bits are
assigned as defined by the ABB Drives Profile (based on the
PROFIBUS standard).
CSA 2.8/3.0
The Control Word and the Status Word are altered in order to match
the drive Control and Status Words to those defined by the PROFIBUS
profile.
CONTROL ZERO MODE
This parameter defines the operation of the NPBA module in the event
that only messages consisting of zeros are received from the
PROFIBUS controller. This is the case e.g. when the controller is
switched from RUN to STOP mode.
STOP
The messages are forwarded to the drive as such. This will usually
cause the drive to stop; for more information, consult the drive
documentation.
FREEZE
The last-received valid Control Word and References are sent to the
drive until new values are received from the PROFIBUS controller.
5-4
Control Locations
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources

including digital inputs, analogue inputs, the drive control panel and a
communication module (e.g. NPBA-12). ABB drives allow the user to
separately determine the source for each type of control information
(Start, Stop, Direction, Reference, Fault Reset, etc.). In order to give
the fieldbus master station the most complete control over the drive,
the communication module must be selected as source for this
information. See the user documentation of the drive for information on
the selection parameters.
5-5
5-6
Overview
This chapter describes the PROFIBUS messaging used in the

communication with the drive.
PROFIBUS-DP
The NPBA-12 module supports the PROFIBUS-DP protocol, including

the DPV1 Extensions to the EN 50170 standard. PROFIBUS-DP is a
distributed I/O system which enables the master to use a large number
of peripheral modules and field devices. The data transfer is mainly
cyclic: the master reads the input information from the slaves and
sends the output information back to the slaves.
The PROFIBUS-DP protocol uses so-called PPOs (Parameter/Process
Data Objects) in cyclic communication. See Figure 6-1 for the different
PPO types and their composition.
Service Access Points
The services of the PROFIBUS Data Link Layer (Layer 2) are used by
PROFIBUS-DP through Service Access Points (SAPs). Precisely
defined functions are assigned to individual SAPs.
For further information on Service Access Points, refer to the manual of
the PROFIBUS master, PROFIDRIVE The PROFIBUS Profile for
Adjustable Speed Drives, or the EN 50170 standard.
Communication
Start-up
The following Service Access Points (SAPs) are used to initiate DP

communication:
SAP No.
Short Name
61
Set_Prm
Send Parameter Data
62
Chk_Cfg
Check Configuration Data
60
Slave_Diag
Read Slave Diagnostic Information
128 (Default)
Data_Exch
Transfer Input and Output Data
Name
6-1
SAP 61 (Set_Prm)
This SAP is used in the parameterisation of the drive.

Prm_Data (Parameter Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 7
Byte
Hex
Value
B8
Description
Station_Status
1
0
Reserved
WD_On
0 = Watchdog on
Freeze_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in freeze mode
Sync_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in SYNC mode
Unlock_Req
Lock_Req
2 to 3
00 = Min TSDR and slave-related parameters

may be overwritten
10 = Slave locked for other masters. All
parameters can be carried over
x1 = Slave released for other masters
Watchdog Factors 1 and 2 (set by the PROFIBUS master)

WdFactor1 WdFactor2 10 ms = monitoring time of the slave to verify that the master
is still active.
0B
5 to 6
6012
00
SAP 62 (Chk_Cfg)
Minimum Station Delay Respond Time

Time after which a slave station is allowed to send response frames to the master.
Calculated by multiplying the Hex value with tBit (time required for transmitting one bit)
Identification Number (for the NPBA-12: 6012h)
Group Identification
SAP 62 selects the PPO type to be used. (The same type must be
selected with both SAP 62 and NPBA-12 Configuration Parameter
PROFIBUS MODE.) The table below gives the Hex frame that must be
sent to the drive to select the PPO type.
Cfg_Data (Configuration Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 1 to 32
6-2
PPO Type
Hex Frame
F3 F1
F3 F5
F1
F5
F3 F9
SAP 60 (Slave_Diag)
This SAP gives diagnostic information on the slave station.

Diag_Data (Diagnostic Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 6 (Standard) + 2 (Extended Diagnosis)
Byte
1
Description
Station_Status_1
x
Diag.Station_Non_Existent (Set by Master, reset by Slave)

Slave not found
Diag.Station_Not_Ready (Set by Slave)
Slave not ready for data exchange
Diag.Cfg_Fault (Set by Slave)
Received configuration data does not match original configuration data
Diag.Ext_Diag (Set by Slave)
Diagnostic entry present in slave-specific diagnostic area
Diag.Not_Supported (Set by Slave)
Service not supported by slave
Diag.Invalid_Slave_Response (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Invalid response by slave
Diag.Prm_Fault (Set by Slave)
Invalid parameter or parameter value
Diag.Master_Lock (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is parameterised by another master
Station_Status_2
x
Diag.Prm_Req (Set by Slave)

Slave requires re-configuration and re-parameterisation
Diag.Stat_Diag (Set by Slave)
Static diagnosis. Slave (temporarily) unable to provide valid data
Always set to 1 by Slave
Diag.WD_On (Set by Slave)
Watchdog on
Diag.Freeze_Mode (Set by Slave)
Freeze command received by slave
Diag.Sync_Mode (Set by Slave)
Sync command received by slave
Reserved
Diag.Deactivated (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is inactive
Station_Status_3
x
0
Reserved
Diag.Ext_Diag_Overflow (Set by Slave)
4
5 to 6
Diag.Master_Add
The address of the master that parameterised this slave
Ident_Number (for NPBA-12: 6012h)
6-3
Diag_Data (Diagnostic Data)

Type: Octet String - Length: 6 (Standard) + 2 (Extended Diagnosis)
Byte
Description
Ext_Diag_Data
The number of bytes reserved for Extended Diagnosis (including this byte)
Fixed to 2
Ext_Diag_Data
0 = OK
4 = Actual value channel is not updated (last value retained)
SAP 128
(Data_Exchange)
Allows the master to send output data to a slave station and to

simultaneously request input data from the same station.
Outp_Data (Output Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 0 to 32 (depending on the selected PPO Type)
Inp_Data (Input Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 0 to 32 (depending on the selected PPO Type)
6-4
PPO Message Types
Parameter
Identification
Control data
Actual data
ID
IND
VALUE
Process Data
DS 1
DS 3
CW
SW
REF PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD8

ACT PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD8
DW 2.1
DW 2.2
DW 2.3
DW 3.1
DW 4.1
DW 3.2
DW 4.2
DS 4
DW 3.3
DW 4.3
DW 5.1
DW 6.1
DW 5.2
DS 7
DW 1.2
DS 2
DW 1.3
DS 5
DW 1.1
DW 6.2
DS 6
DW 5.3
DW 6.3
DW 7.1
DW 8.1
DS 8
Type 1*
Type 2
Type 3*
Type 4
Type 5
* With ACS 600 using the

CSA 2.8/3.0 communication
profile, the contents of DW
1.2 and DW 2.2 (shaded)
are determined by the active
drive control location:
EXT1 selects REF1 / ACT1,
EXT2 selects REF2 / ACT2.
Parameter Identification:
ID Parameter Identification
IND Index for Arrays
VALUE Parameter Value (Max. 4 bytes)
Process Data:
CW Control Word (from Master to Slave; see Table 6-2)
SW Status Word (from Slave to Master; see Table 6-3)
REF Reference (from Master to Slave)
ACT Actual Value (from Slave to Master)
PD Process Data (application-specific)
DS Data Set
DW Data Word
Figure 6-1 PPO Message Types.
6-5
The Control Word and

the Status Word
The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967) is the principal means

for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is sent by the fieldbus
master station to the drive, the adapter module acting as a link. The
drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded
instructions on the Control Word, and returns status information to the
master in the Status Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 968).
The contents of the Control Word and the Status Word are detailed in
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 respectively; see the drive documentation for
information on the drive-specific bits. The drive states are presented in
the PROFIBUS State Machine (Figure 6-2).
References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is
formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding
positive reference.
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources
including analogue and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a
communication module (e.g. NPBA-12). In order to have the drive
controlled through PROFIBUS, the communication module must be
defined as the source for control information, e.g. Reference. The
scaling of the integer received from the master as Reference is drivespecific. See its Programming Manual for available control source
selections and Reference scaling factors.
Actual Values
6-6
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on the operation

of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with a drive
parameter. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual
Values depends on the selected function. Please refer to the drive
documentation.
Table 6-2 The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967). The upper case boldface text refers to the
states shown in Figure 6-2.
Bit
0
Name
Value
Proceed to STATE/Description
ON
Proceed to READY TO OPERATE
OFF1
Emergency OFF, stop by the selected deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1

ACTIVE; proceed further to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks
(OFF2, OFF3) are active
OFF2
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
Emergency OFF, coast to stop.

Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed further to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
Emergency stop, stop according to fastest possible deceleration mode. Proceed to

OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed further to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Warning: Ensure
motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
OPERATION_
ENABLE
Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED
Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED
RAMP_OUT_
ZERO
Normal operation.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED
Stop according to selected stop type
Normal operation.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held)
Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING
Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero
OFF3
RAMP_HOLD
RAMP_IN_
ZERO
RESET
0 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED

0
(Continue normal operation)
INCHING_1
Inching 1. (See the drive documentation for information)
INCHING_2
Inching 2. (See the drive documentation for information)
10
REMOTE_CMD
11 to 15
Fieldbus (DDCS) control enabled
Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus (DDCS) control enabled
Drive-specific. (See the drive documentation for information)
6-7
Table 6-3 The Status Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 968). The upper case boldface text refers to the
states shown in Figure 6-2.
Bit
0
Name
RDY_ON
RDY_RUN
RDY_REF
Value
STATE/Description
READY TO SWITCH ON
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO OPERATE
OFF1 ACTIVE
OPERATION ENABLED
0
3
TRIPPED
OFF_2_STA
OFF_3_STA
SWC_ON_INHIB
FAULT
No fault
OFF2 inactive
OFF2 ACTIVE
OFF3 inactive
OFF3 ACTIVE
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
0
7
10
ALARM
AT_SETPOINT
REMOTE
ABOVE_LIMIT
Warning/Alarm
No Warning/Alarm
OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits)
Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits)
Drive control location: REMOTE
Drive control location: LOCAL
Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit
Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit
11 to 14
15
6-8
Drive-specific
DDCS_ERROR
Error in DDCS communication (between fieldbus adapter module and drive).

Adapter ceases to communicate with the master
DDCS communication OK
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
MAINS OFF
Power ON
(SW Bit6=1)
PROFIBUS
State Machine
(CW Bit0=0)
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON
A B C D
(SW Bit0=0)
(CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x110)

(CW Bit3=0)
READY TO
SWITCH ON
OPERATION
INHIBITED
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
(SW Bit0=1)
(SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation
inhibited
(CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)

Fault
READY TO
OPERATE
FAULT
(SW Bit1=1)
from any state
(SW Bit3=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

OFF1
ACTIVE
from any state

(SW Bit1=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
B C D
from any state
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
(CW Bit3=1
and
SW Bit12=1)
OFF3
ACTIVE
(SW Bit5=0)
Emergency Stop
OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
(SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
OPERATION
ENABLED
C D
(SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0)
(CW Bit4=1)
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
D
B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW Bit5=1)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
C
(CW Bit6=1)
OPERATING
(SW Bit8=1)
Figure 6-2 The PROFIBUS State Machine.
6-9
Parameters in Cyclic
Communication (DP)
In cyclic PROFIBUS-DP communication, parameter data is transferred

in PPO message types 1, 2 and 5 (see Figure 6-1). The Parameter
Identification part consists of eight bytes (see below).
Parameter
Identification
ID
IND
Process Data
CW REF
SW ACT (PD1, PD2...)
VALUE
15 14 13 12 11 10
Request Label
Response Label
Parameter Number
*Request Signal
*Not used (=0)
The Request Label is used by the master when transmitting data to the
slave, while the Response Label is used by the slave as a positive or
negative acknowledgement. The tables below show the Request/
Response functions.
Request Labels (from Master to Slave)
Request
Response Labels
Function
Ackn. (+)
Ackn. (-)
1, 2
No task
Request parameter value
Change parameter value (word)
7, 8
Change parameter value (double word)
7, 8
*4
Request description element
*5
Change description element
7, 8
*6
Request parameter value (array)
4, 5
7, 8
*7
Change parameter value (array word)
7, 8
*8
Change parameter value (array double word)
7,8
*9
Request number of array elements
*Not supported by NPBA-12 SW version V1.0
6-10
Response Label (Acknowledgement from Slave to Master)

Ackn.
Function
No response
Transfer parameter value (word)
Transfer parameter value (double word)
Transfer description element
Transfer parameter value (array word)
Transfer parameter value (array double word)
Transfer number of array elements
Task cannot be executed, followed by error number

0 = Illegal PNU
1 = Parameter value cannot be changed
2 = Lower or upper limit violated
3 = Erroneous sub-index
4 = No array
5 = Incorrect data type
6 = Setting not allowed (can only be reset)
7 = Descriptive element cannot be changed
8 = PPO write, requested in the IR, not available
9 = Descriptive data not available
10 = Access group incorrect
11 = No parameter change rights
12 = Password incorrect
13 = Text cannot be read in cyclic data transmission
14 = Name cannot be read in cyclic data transmission
15 = Text array not available
16 = PPO write missing
17 = Task cannot be executed due to operating status
18 = Other error
19 = Data cannot be read in cyclic data transfer
103 = Request not supported
301 = Internal communication (DDCS) fault
No parameter change rights for PKW interface
Parameter data signal (word)
10
Parameter data signal (double word)
6-11
Example: Write
In this example, current parameter settings are saved to the FLASH

memory of the drive. This is done by setting the value of PROFIBUS
Parameter No. 971 (3CBh) to 1.
Note that the drive always observes the Control Word (CW) and
Reference (REF) bytes. The values shown below are examples.
Request (Parameter value write)
Param. Number (971 Dec)
IND
Write:
CW
Param. Value
REF
Request
23
CB
00
00
00
00
00
01
04
7F
34
15
Response
13
CB
00
00
00
00
00
00
03
37
34
15
IND
Param. Value
SW
ACT

Response (Parameter value updated)
Example: Read
In this example, PROFIBUS Parameter No. 918 is used to read the

station number of the slave.
Request (Parameter value read)
IND
Read:
CW
Param. Value
REF
Request
13
96
00
00
00
00
00
00
04
7F
34
15
Response
13
96
00
00
00
00
00
02
03
37
34
15
IND
Param. Value
SW
ACT

Response (Parameter value updated)
The slave returns its station number (2).
Parameters in Acyclic
Communication
(DPV1)
6-12
At the time of publishing, acyclic communication is not implemented in

the NPBA-12.
Status LED Indications
The tables below describe the Status LED indications during both the
start-up sequence and operation.
Table 7-1 LED indications during the NPBA-12 start-up sequence.

Start-up Stage
MASTER
Power-on
MSG
DDCS
OFF
OFF
GREEN then RED then OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DDCS link
initialisation
OFF
OFF
FLASHING GREEN (in

progress)
then GREEN
Transfer rate
detection
FLASHING GREEN (in

progress)
then GREEN
OFF
GREEN
PROFIBUS
communication
establishment
GREEN
FLASHING GREEN (in

progress)
then GREEN
GREEN
Operation
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
7-1
Table 7-2 Error indications.

Cause
Remedy
Try resetting module.

Contact ABB service representative.
MASTER
MSG
DDCS
RED
RED
OFF
RAM test failure
OFF
RED
RED
ROM test failure
(Last valid
state)
(Last valid
state)
RED
*DDCS link failure
Check that drive is powered.

Check fibre optic cables visually for dirt
or flaws.
Ensure connectors are properly
inserted.
Try new cables.
Contact ABB service representative.
GREEN
FLASHING
RED
FLASHING
GREEN
PROFIBUS
communication failure
(no data exchange)
Check state of PROFIBUS master.
FLASHING
RED
RED
FLASHING
GREEN
PROFIBUS link failure Check state of PROFIBUS master.

Check PROFIBUS cable wiring (see
Chapter 4).
*All errors that occur on the DDCS link between the NPBA-12 and the drive are reported to the PROFIBUS master
(bit 15 of the Status Word is turned on).
7-2
The table below shows the PROFIBUS Profile-specific Parameters.

PROFIBUS
Par. No.
Parameter Name
Data
Type
R/W
918
NODE ADDRESS
UINT16
Node address of the device

Allowable values: 2, ..., 126
947
FAULT NUMBER
UINT16
The last fault occurred in the drive

0h = No fault
1000h = Generic fault
963
CURRENT BAUD RATE
UINT16
Detected baud rate

0 = 12 Mbit/s
1 = 6 Mbit/s
2 = 3 Mbit/s
3 = 1.5 Mbit/s
4 = 500 kbit/s
5 = 187.5 kbit/s
6 = 93.75 kbit/s
7 = 45.45 kbit/s
8 = 19.2 kbit/s
9 = 9.6 kbit/s
255 = Invalid baud rate
964
DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
UINT16
Identification number of this device (6012h)
Description
965
PROFILE NUMBER
UINT16
Profile number of this device (0302h)
967
CONTROL WORD
UINT16
16-bit word for controlling the drive
968
STATUS WORD
UINT16
16-bit word indicating drive status
971
STORE
UINT16
R/W
996*
SET DAY COUNTER
UINT16
Sets the day counter of the real-time clock of the drive. Day 1
corresponds to 1 January 1980.
997*
SET TIME COUNTER
UINT32
Sets the time counter of the real-time clock of the drive. The value
corresponds to the number of 100 s ticks since midnight.
0 = No action
1 = Save drive parameters to non-volatile memory
*The values of Parameters 996 and 997 are sent to the drive when parameter 997 is written.
A-1
A-2
PROFIBUS Definitions
Acyclic Communication
Communication in which messages are sent only once on request
Array
Parameter consisting of data fields of equal data type
Broadcast
Non-acknowledged message from master to all bus participants

(compare Multicast)
Command Word
See Control Word
Communication Object
Any object of a real device that can be communicated with (variable,

program, data range, etc.). Stored locally in the Object Dictionary
Control Word
16-bit word from master to slave with bit-coded control signals.

(Sometimes called the Command Word)
Cyclic Communication
Communication in which Parameter-/Process Data-Objects are sent

cyclically at pre-defined intervals
Device Class
Classification according to the number of profile functions included in

the device
Drivecast
Broad- and Multicast, a special message frame for drives
Fault
Event that leads to tripping of the device
GSD File
ASCII-format device description file in a specified form. Each device

(active & passive stations) on PROFIBUS has to have its own GSD
File. GSD Files for various master stations are available from your local
ABB representative.
Index
Access reference for Objects in PROFIBUS
Information Report
Non-acknowledged message from master to one or all groups of bus

participants
Master
Control system with bus initiative. In PROFIBUS terminology, master

stations are also called active stations
Multicast
Non-acknowledged message from master to one group of bus

participants (compare Broadcast)
Name
Symbolic name of a parameter
Nibble
Set of 4 bits
Object Dictionary
Local storage of all Communication Objects recognised by a device
Object List
List of all accessible objects
Parameter
Value that can be accessed as Object, e.g. variable, constant, signal
B-1
Parameter Description
Specification of a parameter
Parameter Number
Parameter address
Parameter/Process
Data Object
Special object that contains Parameter and Process Data
Process Data
Data that contains Control Word and Reference value or Status Word
and Actual value. May also contain other (user-definable) control
information
Profile
Adaptation of the protocol for certain application field, e.g. drives
Request Label
Coded information specifying the required service for the parameter

part sent from master to slave
Response Label
Coded information specifying the required service for the parameter

part sent from slave to master
Slave
Passive bus participant. In PROFIBUS terminology, slave stations (or

slaves) are also called passive stations
Status Word
16-bit word from slave to master with bit-coded status messages
Warning
Signal caused by an existing alarm which does not lead to tripping of

the device
B-2
PROFIBUS Abbreviations
The text in italics is the original German term.
.con
Confirmation
.ind
Indication
.req
Request
.res
Response
ACT
Actual Value
Istwert
AK
Request Label/Response Label

Auftragskennung/Antwortkennung
ALI
Application Layer Interface
CR
Communication Reference
Kommunikationsreferenz (Kommunikationsbeziehung)
DP
Decentralised Periphery
Dezentrale Peripherie
DP-ALI
DPV1
Application Layer Interface for DP

PROFIBUS-DP Extensions to the EN 50170 standard,
including e.g. acyclic data exchange
FDL
Fieldbus Data Link
FMS
Fieldbus Message Specification
FSU
Manufacturer Specific Interface

Firmenspezifischer Umsetzer
HIW
Main Actual Value

Hauptistwert
HSW
ISW
KR (KB)
Main Reference
Hauptsollwert
see ACT
see CR
PA
Process Automation
Prozessautomatisierung
PD
Process Data
Prozessdaten
PKE
Parameter Identification
Parameter-Kennung
PKW
Parameter Identification Value

Parameter-Kennung-Wert
B-3
B-4
PNU
Parameter Number
Parameternummer
PPO
Parameter/Process Data Object

Parameter-/Prozessdaten-Objekt
PWE
Parameter Value
Parameter-Wert
PZD
see PD
PZDO
Process Data Object

Prozessdatenobjekt
SAP
Service Access Point
SOW
Reference
Sollwert
SPM
Request Signal
Spontanmeldung
STW
Control Word
Steuerwort
ZSW
Status Word
Zustandswort
DDCS Link
Compatible Devices: ABB drives equipped with a DDCS link

Size of the Link: 2 stations
Medium: Fibre optic cable
Construction: Plastic core, diameter 1 mm, sheathed with
plastic jacket
Attenuation: 0.31 dB/m
Maximum Length between Stations: 10 m
Specifications:
Parameter
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Storage Temperature
-55
+85
Installation Temperature
-20
+70
50
Short Term Tensile Force

Short Term Bend Radius
25
mm
Long Term Bend Radius
35
mm
Long Term Tensile Load

Flexing
1000
cycles
Topology: Point-to-point
Serial Communication Type: Asynchronous, half Duplex
Transfer Rate: 4 Mbit/s
Protocol: Distributed Drives Communication System (DDCS)
Connectors: Blue receiver; grey transmitter
C-1
Fieldbus Link
Compatible Devices: All devices compatible with the PROFIBUS-DP

and PROFIBUS-DPV1 protocols
Size of the Link: 127 stations including repeaters (31 stations and 1
repeater per segment)
Medium: Shielded, twisted pair RS485 cable
Termination: of active type, built in the NPBA-12 Module
Specifications:
Line A
PROFIBUS-DP
Line B
DIN 19245 Part 1
Impedance
135 to 165
(3 to 20 MHz)
100 to 130
(f > 100 kHz)
Capacitance
< 30
< 60
pF/m
Resistance
< 110
/km
Wire gauge
> 0.64
> 0.53
mm
Conductor area
> 0.34
> 0.22
mm2
Parameter
Unit
Maximum Bus Length (m):

Transfer Rate (kbit/s)
93.75
187.5
500
1500
3000
6000
12000
Line A
1200
1000
400
200
100
100
100
Line B
1200
600
200
Topology: Multi-drop
Serial Communication Type: Asynchronous, half Duplex
Transfer Rate: 9.6, 19.2, 44.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000, 6000,
or 12000 kbit/s
Protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, PROFIBUS-DPV1
C-2
NPBA-12
Enclosure: Plastic, dimensions 100 22.5 115 mm (HWD);

degree of protection IP 20
Mounting: Onto a standard mounting rail
Settings: Via drive interface (control panel)
Current Consumption: 70 mA at 24 V d.c.
Connectors:
Light transmitter (grey) and receiver (blue) (Hewlett-Packard
Versatile Link) for connection to the drive
Two Combicon MSTBT 2,5/4-ST (4-pole, cross-section
2.5 mm2 max.) screw terminal blocks for the fieldbus and power
supply connections:
X1
Description
X2
Description
+24V
Power supply for the module (24 V d.c. 10%).

The power can be taken from the drives internal power supply
(see drive manuals), or an external power supply.
On-board power supply shuts off if the voltage drops below 11 V.
0V
DG
PROFIBUS cable data ground (optional 3rd conductor).

Connected to module earth via a 1 M/15 nF RC network.
SH
PROFIBUS cable shield. Internally connected to module earth.
General:
All materials are UL/CSA approved
Complies with EMC Standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
C-3
C-4
Ambient Conditions,
Operation
Ambient operating conditions refer to the conditions the option module

is subjected to when installed for stationary use.
Air Temperature: 0 to +50 C
Relative Humidity: 5 to 95%, no condensation allowed. Maximum
allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of corrosive gases.
Contamination Levels:
Chemical gases: IEC 721-3-3, Class 3C2
Solid particles: IEC 721-3-3, Class 3S2
Installation Site Altitude: 0 to 2000 m. If the installation site is above
2000 m, contact local ABB representative.
Vibration: Max 0.3 mm (2 to 9 Hz), max 1 m/s2 (9 to 200 Hz)
sinusoidal (IEC 68-2-6)
Shock: Max 70 m/s2, 22 ms (IEC 68-2-27)
Ambient Conditions,
Storage
Ambient storage conditions refer to the conditions the option module is

subjected to during storage in the protective package.
Temperature: -40 to +70 C.
Relative Humidity: Less than 95%, no condensation allowed
Atmospheric Pressure: 70 to 106 kPa
Ambient Conditions,
Transportation
Ambient transportation conditions refer to the conditions the option

module is subjected to during transportation in the protective package.
Temperature: -40 to +70 C
Relative Humidity: Less than 95%, no condensation allowed.
Atmospheric Pressure: 60 to 106 kPa
Bump: Max 300 m/s2, 6 ms (IEC 68-2-29)
Free Fall: 250 mm
D-1
D-2
NPBA-12/EN
3BFE 64341588 R0125 REV B
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O.Box 184
FIN-00381 Helsinki
FINLAND
Telephone: +358 10 222 000
Fax:
+358 10 222 2681
Internet:
www.abb.com/automation
ABB Inc.
Automation Technologies
Drives & Motors
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone: 262 785-3416
800-HELP-365
Fax:
262 785-8525
Gray Encoder Board
LD GRB - 01
Data sheet
SHORT DESCRIPTION
The LD GRB-01 is a Gray-coded absolute encoder interface, used for fast and accurate
measurement of the absolute position of a rotor via a position encoder terminal.
The communication with the encoding terminal is done over a 24V electrical interface. This
interface can be either parallel or serial. The LD GRB-01 can also deliver analog signals to
a speed monitoring instrument and a pulse encoder.
The communication with the controller platform AMC-3 is done over an optical DDCS
interface with one sender (Tx) and one receiver (Rx).
The node address of the LD GRB-01 can be set with a micro switch
Rev.
04-09-10
A.Greuter
04-10-20
O.Olsson
Department 1
Department 2
ATDR
Rev.
Issued:
04-10-19 O. Olsson
Check 1:
04-10-20 T. Baechle
Check 2:
Der. from / Repla.:

Replaced by:
Format
A4
Language
Page
No. of
pages
Released:
ZAB 3BHS205451 E01
-2-
LD GRB - 01
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHORT DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................1
1
APPLICATION EXAMPLE ............................................................................................3
LED DISPLAYS.............................................................................................................3
3.1
3.2
CONNECTORS .............................................................................................................3
Electrical Connector X1 .................................................................................................3
Optical fiber connectors .................................................................................................3
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
ELECTRICAL RATINGS ...............................................................................................4

Power supply input ........................................................................................................4
Power supply output ......................................................................................................4
Digital parallel inputs......................................................................................................4
Digital serial SSI inputs..................................................................................................5
Optical outputs and node address .................................................................................5
Pulse signal outputs.......................................................................................................5
Speedometer output ......................................................................................................6
CONNECTION EXAMPLE ............................................................................................6
PINNING TABLE SUMMARY FOR TERMINAL X1.......................................................7
MECHANICAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................8
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................8
ORDER INFORMATION................................................................................................8
ZAB 3BHS205451 E01 Rev B
-3-
LD GRB - 01
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
A frequently used example of an application for the Grey encoder is when it is connected between
a SCYC 55830 (Tacho terminal board) and an AMC-3 (Application & Motor control board). In some
applications also NTAC (Pulse encoder interface) is connected to pulse outputs. See the block
diagram below:
GRAY CODED
ENCODER
OPTIONAL
SCYC
55830
Tacho
terminal
board
External
24VDC
power
supply
F
R
W
P
10 ..16 BIT PARALLEL
OPTIONAL
24 VDC SUPPLY
Power
Supply
output
24 VDC
LD GRB - 01
PULSE
OUTPUT
SPEEDOMETER
OUTPUT
Tx
NTAC
Pulse
encoder
interface
Speed
monitoring
Instrument
Optical
DDCS 10Mbit
AMC-3
controller
board
Rx
Node Address
selector swith
M
SSI -GRAY
CODED
ENCODER
SSI
Encoder
Terminal
board
SERIAL RS-422
Power Supply
input 24 VDC
LED DISPLAYS
On the front panel are 4 LEDs located which are used as a status display.
3
3.1
Meaning
FAULT
LED colour
RED
Abbr
F
CONF_FAIL
WARNING
RED / GREEN
YELLOW
R
W
POWER_ON
GREEN
Explanation
ON after power-up.
ON after DDCS time-out.
ON when power failure signal activated
ON if SSI link in not OK
OFF after first accepted DDCS telegram.
RED if configuration has failed, GREEN if O.K.
ON when last received SSI-telegram has failed.
OFF when last received SSI-telegr. O.K.
ON when internal 5V level O.K. (hardware)
CONNECTORS
Electrical Connector X1
The electrical connector X1 contains of three rows of screw terminals. These rows are named A, B
and C. Each row has 18 screw terminals and therefore totally 54 connectors are available on the
connector X1.
3.2
Optical fiber connectors
There is one optical transmitter and one optical sender on the LD GRB-01. These optical
components are connecting the LD GRB to the AMC-3 controller. The sender (Tx) is light grey or
light blue. The receiver (Rx) is dark grey.
-4-
4
4.1
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Power supply input
24 VDC 10%
maximum 1.3 A
Input voltage:
Input current:
Row and pin
in terminal X1
4.2
LD GRB - 01
Signal
C1
C2
24VDC input
24VDC input
C3
0V for 24VDC input
C4
0V for 24VDC input
Power supply output

Output voltage for encoder +24 V_E 10%
Load:
maximum 700 mA
Row and pin Signal
in terminal X1
C5
C6
4.3
+24V_E Encoder power supply

0V Encoder power supply
Digital parallel inputs

Row and
Signal name
Row and
pin in X1
Signal name
A1
Bit 0-
B1
Bit 0+
A2
Bit 1-
B2
Bit 1+
A3
Bit 2-
B3
Bit 2+
A4
Bit 3-
B4
Bit 3+
A5
Bit 4-
B5
Bit 4+
A6
Bit 5-
B6
Bit 5+
A7
Bit 6-
B7
Bit 6+
A8
Bit 7-
B8
Bit 7+
A9
Bit 8-
B9
Bit 8+
A10
Bit 9-
B10
Bit 9+
A11
Bit 10-
B11
Bit 10+
A12
Bit 11-
B12
Bit 11+
A13
Bit 12-
B13
Bit 12+
A14
Bit 13-
B14
Bit 13+
A15
Bit 14-
B15
Bit 14+
A16
Bit 15-
B16
Bit 15+
Pin in X1
The GRB board has 16 galvanically opto isolated digital inputs for parallel Gray interface
connection. The signal resolution of this parallel interface is selectable in the range10 to 16
bits. The order of the bits could be inverted by the software via an AMC-table parameter.
Nominal voltage
Inputs ON level
Inputs OFF level
24VDC
+18...+24 V
0...+13 V
(DI0...DI15)
-5-
4.4
LD GRB - 01
Digital serial SSI inputs

Row and Pin
in terminal X1
Signal
C13
CLK+
C14
CLK-
C15
DATA+
C16
DATA-
Alternatively to parallel signals from the grey encoder terminal, a pattern called SSI
(Synchronous Serial Interface) can be used as transfer protocol for data to the LD GRB-01.
Number of bits selectable:
Parity check selectable:
Physical link
4.5
10 bit ... 16 bit.

No/Even/Odd
RS-422
(EIA standard EIA RS-485)
Optical outputs and node address

The optical output uses the DDCS protocol and the node address is set by a selector
switch. The selector switch is coded hexadecimal and can be set in sixteen positions
ranging from 0 to F (equals four bits). The optical fiber components are of type HewlettPackard, with maximal data rate of 10 Mbit.
4.6
Pulse signal outputs

Row and Pin
in terminal X1
Signal
name
C7
CHA+
C8
CHA-
C9
CHB+
C10
CHB-
C11
CHZ+
C12
CHZ-
Pulse signals are driven from RS422 drivers on the LD GRB-01. These pulses can for
example be received by a NTAC Pulse encoder interface which can be connected to the LD
GRB-01. Signal isolation must be done in the pulse receiving equipment.
CHA
CHB
CHZ
is set when input Gray bit #0 is true

is set when internally formed binary code bit #1 is true
is set when input Gray equals 000000
-6-
4.7
LD GRB - 01
Speedometer output
Row and Pin
in terminal X1
Signal
name
C17
SO+
A17
SO-
A18
SO-
B17
SO-
Remarks
Only one of these four

terminal has to be
connected
B18
SOThe actual motor speed can be monitored via this output interface delivered by the
LD GRB-01. The interface is a low voltage analog output for a high impedance panel
instrument. The instrument can be connected between the SO and DGND terminals. The
analog output is generated by an operation amplifier, thus signal isolation must be done in
the signal-receiving instrument.
CONNECTION EXAMPLE
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
POWER SUPPLY
OUTPUT TO
ENCODER
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
C5
C6
LD GRB - 01
C7
A+
C8
AC9
B+
C10
B-
C17
B18
NTAC-02
OUTPUT
SPEEDOMETER
OUTPUT
DDCS 10Mbit
24 VDC
0 VDC
24 VDC
0 VDC
C1=C2
C3=C4
POWER
SUPPLY INPUT
TO LD GRB
SWI = 3
-7-
LD GRB - 01
PINNING TABLE SUMMARY FOR TERMINAL X1

Row
Pin
a
a
1
2
a
a
Signal
Row
Pin
Signal
Row
Pin
Bit 0 Bit 1 -
B
B
1
2
Bit 0 +
Bit 1 +
c
c
1
2
24VDC input
24VDC input
Bit 2 -
Bit 2 +
0V for 24VDC input
Bit 3 -
Bit 3 +
0V for 24VDC input
a
a
5
6
Bit 4 Bit 5 -
b
b
5
6
Bit 4 +
Bit 5 +
c
c
5
6
+24V_E Encoder power supply

0V Encoder power supply
Bit 6 -
Bit 6 +
A+ Tacho output signal
Bit 7 -
Bit 7 +
A- Tacho output signal
Bit 8 -
Bit 8 +
B+ Tacho output signal
10
Bit 9 -
10
Bit 9 +
10
B- Tacho output signal
11
Bit 10 -
11
Bit 10 +
11
Z+ Tacho output signal
12
Bit 11 -
12
Bit 11 +
12
Z- Tacho output signal
13
Bit 12 -
13
Bit 12 +
13
CLK+ Clock for SSI encoder
14
Bit 13 -
14
Bit 13 +
14
CLK- Clock for SSI encoder
15
Bit 14 -
15
Bit 14 +
15
DATA+ Data for SSI encoder
16
Bit 15 -
16
Bit 15 +
16
DATA- Data for SSI encoder
17
DGND
17
DGND
17
SO
18
DGND
18
DGND
18
N.C.
Signal
-8-
MECHANICAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
118
RX
F
R
W
P
120
B1
A1
C1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
A4
C4
B5
A5
C5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
A8
C8
B9
A9
C9
B10
C10
A10
B11
C11
A11
B12
A12
C12
B13
A13
C13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
B17
A17
C17
B18
C18
A18
NODE ADDRESS SEL SWITCH
TX
110
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operation:
Storage:
0 +70 C
-25 +85 C
ORDER INFORMATION
Ordering number for spare part:

3AFE61320954P0001
LD GRB - 01
ABB Drives
Users Manual
DDCS Branching Units

NDBU-85
NDBU-95
DDCS Branching Units

NDBU-85
NDBU-95
Users Manual
3BFE 64285513 R0125

SUPERSEDES: NONE
2000 ABB Industry Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Instructions
Overview
This chapter states the safety instructions that must be followed when
installing and operating the NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Unit. The
material in this chapter must be studied before attempting any work on,
or with, the unit.
Warnings and Notes
This manual distinguishes two sorts of safety instructions. Warnings

are used to inform of conditions which can, if proper steps are not
taken, lead to a serious fault condition, physical injury and death. Notes
are used when the reader is required to pay special attention or when
there is additional information available on the subject. Notes are less
crucial than Warnings, but should not be disregarded.
Warnings
Readers are informed of situations that can result in serious physical

injury and/or serious damage to equipment with the following symbols:
Dangerous Voltage Warning: warns of situations
in which a high voltage can cause physical injury
and/or damage equipment. The text next to this
General Warning: warns of situations which can
cause physical injury and/or damage equipment by
means other than electrical. The text next to this
Electrostatic Discharge Warning: warns of
situations in which an electrostatic discharge can
damage equipment. The text next to this symbol
describes ways to avoid the danger.
Notes
Readers are notified of the need for special attention or additional

information available on the subject with the following symbols:
CAUTION!
Note:
NDBU-85/95 Users Manual
Caution aims to draw special attention to a

particular issue.
Note gives additional information or points out
more information available on the subject.
Safety Instructions
General Safety
Instructions
WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the

drive should be carried out by qualified electricians.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After switching off the
mains, always allow the intermediate circuit capacitors 5 minutes to
discharge before working on the frequency converter, the motor or the
motor cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage indicating
instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a dangerously high
voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from external control
circuits even when the drive mains power is shut off. Exercise
appropriate care when working with the unit. Neglecting these
instructions can cause physical injury and death.
WARNING! There are several automatic reset functions in the

drive. If selected, they reset the unit and resume operation after a fault.
These functions should not be selected if other equipment is not
compatible with this kind of operation, or dangerous situations can be
caused by such action.
More Warnings and Notes are printed at appropriate instances along
the text.
ii
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Warnings and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Table of Contents
NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Units
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
NDBU-85C, NDBU-95C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Optical Component Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Cable Length and Optical Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Setting the Optical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Address (S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Communication Mode (X13; NDBU-95 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Transmission Speed (X12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Optical Power (X2X11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Power Supply (X1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
NDBU-85 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
NDBU-95 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Technical Data, NDBU-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Technical Data, NDBU-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Optical Component Types in ABB Drive Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Overview
The NDBU-85 and NDBU-95 branching units are used for distributing a
DDCS-protocol control link to several drives. The controlling unit can be
e.g. a PC equipped with DriveWindow and a DDCS interface; an
Advant application controller (such as an AC 80); or a Fieldbus
Communication Interface (FCI, type CI810) equipped with a TB810/
TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port.
Note: NDBU branching units cannot be used on DDCS links for which
the data rate is selected through software.
Using NDBU branching units, the usual ring topology of a DDCS link
can be replaced with a star topology, which is useful to ensure
uninterrupted communication in case one unit on the ring fails or must
be shut down for maintenance.
The NDBU-85 is able to handle conventional DDCS-protocol input
only; the NDBU-95 supports DDCS and DriveBus. The NDBU-95 has
an additional jumper-selectable regeneration mode in which any
message received from one follower unit is forwarded to all follower
units.
Both the NDBU-85 and the NDBU-95 have one input channel (MSTR)
and nine output channels (CH0 to CH8). When chaining branching
units, it is recommended to use CH0 as the forwarding output to the
slave unit.
NDBU-85C, NDBU-95C
Optical Component
Types
NDBU-85 and NDBU-95 are also available as conformally-coated

versions. These are identifiable by the suffix C, i.e. NDBU-85C,
NDBU-95C.
ABB drive products in general utilise 5 and 10 MBd (megabaud) optical
components from Agilent Technologies (Hewlett-Packard) Versatile
Link range. Please note that the optical component type is not directly
related to the actual communication speed. On the NDBU-85, the
MSTR and CH0 channels have 10 MBd components, CH1 to CH8 have
5 MBd components. All channels on the NDBU-95 have 10 MBd
components.
Note: The optical components (transmitter and receiver) on a fibre
optic link must be of the same type.
HCS is a registered trademark of SpecTran Corporation.
Plastic optical fibre (POF) cables can be used with both 5 MBd and
10 MBd optical components. 10 MBd components also enable the use
of Hard Clad Silica (HCS) cables, which allow longer connection
distances thanks to their lower attenuation. HCS cables cannot be
used with 5 MBd optical components.
The optical component types used in ABB drive equipment are
presented on page 12.
Cable Length and
Optical Power Setting
Because of the narrow optical dynamic operating area of 5 MBd

components, the optical power (light intensity) of the transmitters must
be set in accordance to the cable attenuation, which in turn depends on
cable type and length. Incorrect optical power can either underdrive or
overdrive the receiver, resulting in a disturbed signal. It should also be
noted that if the optical power is set too low or high, an initially working
link may cause problems later, e.g. when the ambient temperature
changes and the optical components age.
The wider dynamic range of 10 MBd components allows the use of
maximum optical power regardless of cable length. However, this is not
recommended since high transmitter current shortens its lifetime, and
the additional heat generation in the driver components may lead to
reduced reliability.
Setting the Optical Power
Each optical channel on the NDBU-85 and NDBU-95 has an individual

jumper for the transmitter power setting. The jumpers should be set
depending on the cable type and length as explained under Settings
and Connections below.
For most fibre optic equipment used with ABB drives, the optical power
can be set through software. Refer to the relevant documentation for
information.
Settings and
Connections
The NDBU units are configured using the jumpers and DIP switches on
the circuit board, which can be accessed by removing the cover of the
metal housing. This is done by loosening the two screws on top, then
sliding the cover sideways until released.
The following figure shows the locations of the configuration jumpers

and switches (default settings shown) on the NDBU-85/95 circuit
board.
C H
C H
T X D 2
8
V 1 9
R X D
V 1 8
T X D
V 1 7
R X D
V 1 6
T X D
8
1
8
1
C H
V 1 5
R X D
V 1 4
T X D
2
8
1
X 8
V 1 2
T X D 2
8
1
8
1
R X D
V 1 0
T X D
X 1 2
4
1
M O D E
X 1 3
NDBU-95
only
8
1
M B IT /S
R X D
C H
X 9
V 1 3
V 1 1
S 1
X 1 0
A D D R E S S
C H
X 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
DIP
C H
ON
V 2 0
X 7
X 6
V 9
R X D
V 8
C H
C H
C H
T X D
2
X 5
7
V 7
R X D
V 6
T X D
2
X 4
7
V 5
R X D
V 4
T X D
2
X 3
7
V 3
R X D
V 2
T X D
M A S T E R
V 1
8
1
7
X 2
R X D
+ 5 V O K
X 1
S U P P L Y
V O L T A G E
+ 2 4 V
F 1
T 5 0 0 m A
0 V
Address (S1)
This switch represents the address as a binary number. With Advant

Controllers such as the AC 70, AC 80, AC 410, or AC 450, the default
address 124 (shown below) should be used.
ON
DIP
(1)
(2)
(4)
(8)
(16)
(32)
(64)
(128)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
When using NDBU branching units with the DriveWindow PC tool,

each unit must have an individual address in the range of 76 to 124.
Notes:
In DriveWindow configurations, NDBU units closer to the PC must
have higher addresses than those on lower levels.
Each NDBU branching unit reserves two successive addresses.
Do not use addresses outside of the range 76124.
S1 Setting (1 = ON)
Address
Usage
(125)
124
NDBU 1
(123)
122
NDBU 2
(121)
120
NDBU 3
(1)
(2)
(4)
(8)
(16)
(32)
(64)
(128)
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF OFF OFF
ON
(77)
76
NDBU 25
OFF OFF
ON
ON
Communication Mode
(X13; NDBU-95 only)
2
1
Jumper X13 (MODE) on the NDBU-95 is set according to the

communication mode used. The default setting is DDCS/DRIVEBUS.
The setting REGEN selects the regeneration mode in which any
message received from one follower unit is forwarded to all follower
units.
MODE
X13
4
3
2
1
4
3
MODE
X13
DDCS/DriveBus
(Default)
REGEN
Master
Master
MSTR
MSTR
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH0
Follower Follower Follower
Transmission Speed
(X12)
CH1
CH2
Follower Follower Follower
Jumper X12 sets the transmission speed of the NDBU unit. The setting
must match the transmission speed of the connected equipment. The
settings for some commonly used equipment are as follows:
PC with DriveWindow: 1 Mbit/s
ModuleBus (AC 70, AC 80, FCI [CI810]): 4 Mbit/s
DriveBus (AC 80): 4 Mbit/s (provisionally 8 Mbit/s)
The NDBU-85 can be set to 1, 2 or 4 Mbit/s; the NDBU-95 can be set to
1, 2, 4 or 8 Mbit/s.
2
1
8
7
2
1
8
7
2
1
8
7
2
1
8
7
MBIT/S
MBIT/S
MBIT/S
MBIT/S
1 Mbit/s
(Default)
2 Mbit/s
4 Mbit/s
8 Mbit/s
(NDBU-95 only)
Optical Power (X2X11)
Each fibre optic channel has an optical power/disable jumper selector

on the circuit board of the NDBU. The jumper should be set according
to the length (or attenuation) of the cable as shown below.
Note: Set the jumper to the Disabled (DIS) position on all unused
channels to reduce heat generation.
2
1
8
7
X_
2
1
8
7
2
1
X_
Short
8
7
2
1
8
7
X_
Medium
(Default)
X_
Long
Disabled
Recommended settings:
Optical
Component
Type
Transmission
Speed
1 MBit/s
Cable
Type
POF
Cable Length
[m]
Optical
Power
Setting
0.1 5
Short
(2) 5 10
Medium
(5) 10 15
Long
0.1 4
Short
(2) 4 7
Medium
(5) 7 10
Long
0.1 5
Short
(0.1) 5 20
Medium
(0.1) 5 30
Long
0.1 50
Medium
(0.1) 50 200
Long
5 MBd
2 or 4 MBit/s
POF
POF
10 MBd
HCS
Power Supply (X1)
The NDBU-85/95 requires a supply voltage of 24 V d.c. 10%. The

connection is protected by means of fuse F1 and is galvanically
isolated from earth and the logic circuitry.
Diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs on the circuit board of the NDBU unit can be
viewed through the holes in the metal housing.
Each fibre optic channel has two LEDs labelled TXD and RXD. These
indicate messages being transmitted (TXD) or received (RXD). In
normal operation, these LEDs should be flashing continuously on all
channels that are in use.
The +5V OK LED indicates that the logic circuitry of the NDBU is
receiving its supply voltage of 5 V. This LED should be illuminated
when the NDBU is powered.
Mechanical
Installation
The housing of the NDBU-85/95 unit has two spring-loaded fasteners

for 35 7.5 mm DIN rail mounting. The unit mounts on a vertical or
horizontal rail.
The unit should be mounted so that air can freely pass through the
ventilation holes in the housing. Mounting directly above heatgenerating equipment should be avoided.
NDBU-85 Dimensions
1 0
8 4
N D B U -8 5
4 1
N D B U -8 5
D D C S
B R A N C H IN G
U N IT , 8 + 1 C H
T X D
V 1 2 0
C H 8
R X D
V 1 1 9
T X D
A D D R E S S
V 1 1 8
C H 7
R X D
S 1
V 1 1 7
V 1 1 6
T X D
0
1
C H 6
R X D
V 1 1 5
T X D
V 1 1 4
C H 5
M B IT /S
+ + + +
+ + + +
R X D
V 1 1 3
1
X 1 2
T X D
V 1 1 2
C H 4
R X D
V 1 1 1
T X D
2 6 4
V 1 1 0
C H 3
R X D
V 1 0 9
V 1 0 8
T X D
C H 2
R X D
V 1 0 7
V 1 0 6
T R A N S M
S E T T IN G
+ + + + X 2 + + + + X 1 1
T X D
C H 1
R X D
D
L O N
M E D IU
S H O R
V 1 0 5
IS
G
M
T
T X D
V 1 0 4
C H 0
R X D
V 1 0 3
T X D
V 1 0 2
M S T R
R X D
V 1 0 1
+ 5 V O K
X 1
1
2
2 4 V D C
0 V
6 3 9 8 5 3 6 8
NDBU-95 Dimensions
8 4
1 0
N D B U -9 5
4 1
N D B U -9 5
T X D
V 1 2 0
C H 8
D D C S
B R A N C H IN G
U N IT , 9 C H
R X D
V 1 1 9
T X D
V 1 1 8
C H 7
A D D R E S S
8
V 1 1 7
R X D
S 1
T X D
V 1 1 6
C H 6
D D C S /
D R IV E B U S
R E G E N
R X D
V 1 1 5
T X D
V 1 1 4
C H 5
M O D E
X 1 3
M B IT /S
+ + +
+ + +
1 2 4 8
R X D
V 1 1 3
1
0
X 1 2
T X D
V 1 1 2
C H 4
R X D
V 1 1 1
T X D
V 1 1 0
C H 3
2 6 4
V 1 0 9
R X D
T X D
V 1 0 8
C H 2
R X D
V 1 0 7
T R A
S E T
+ +
+ +
T X D
V 1 0 6
C H 1
R X D
V 1 0 5
N S
T IN
+
+
M
+
G
X 2 X 1 1
D
L O N
M E D IU
S H O R
IS
G
M
T
V 1 0 4
T X D
C H 0
R X D
V 1 0 3
T X D
V 1 0 2
M S T R
R X D
V 1 0 1
+ 5 V O K
X 1
2 4 V D C
2
0 V
6 3 9 8 5 3 4 1
Technical Data,
NDBU-85
Housing: Zinc-plated sheet steel

Dimensions:
Housing: 94 264 41 mm
Circuit board: 75.8 243.5 mm
Mounting: Onto a 35 7.5 mm DIN rail
Operating Temperature: +0 +50 C
Power Supply Connection:
Voltage: 24 V d.c. 10%
Current consumption: 150 mA (typical), 200 mA (maximum)
Fuse: TR5, T500 mA (anti-surge)
Connectors:
MSTR, CH0: Agilent Technologies (Hewlett-Packard) Versatile Link
Series (10 MBd)
CH1 CH8: Agilent Technologies (Hewlett-Packard) Versatile Link
Series (5 MBd)
Power supply: Detachable screw terminal block (Phoenix Contact
MSTBA 2.5/2-G-5.08)
LEDs:
One TXD (data transmitted) for each channel, one RXD (data received)
for each channel, +5V OK (logic voltage OK)
Technical Data,
NDBU-95
Housing: Zinc-plated sheet steel

Dimensions:
Housing: 94 264 41 mm
Circuit board: 75.8 243.5 mm
Mounting: Onto a 35 7.5 mm DIN rail
Operating Temperature: +0 +50 C
Power Supply Connection:
Voltage: 24 V d.c. 10%
Current consumption: 250 mA (typical), 320 mA (maximum)
Fuse: TR5, T500 mA (anti-surge)
Connectors:
MSTR, CH0 CH8: Agilent Technologies (Hewlett-Packard) Versatile
Link Series (10 MBd)
Power supply: Detachable screw terminal block (Phoenix Contact
MSTBA 2.5/2-G-5.08)
LEDs:
One TXD (data transmitted) for each channel, one RXD (data received)
for each channel, +5V OK (logic voltage OK)
10
Block Diagrams
M A S T E R
O R A P P L IC A T IO N
C O N T R O L L E R )
(P C
D D C S
1 , 2 o r 4 M b it/s
N D B U -8 5
R
T
M
2 4 V
5 V
A D D R . S E T T IN G
D IP S W IT C H
T X D S IG N A L
R E G E N E R A T IO N
T R A N S M .
D R IV E R
IN T E N S . C N T R L
J U M P E R S
T X D
D D C S R E C E IV E R
9
S P E E D S E L E C T .
J U M P E R S
R X D
C H E N A B L E
J U M P E R S
R X D S IG N A L
O U T P U T M A S K IN G A N D
T R A N S M IT T E R D R IV E S
T
8
T
7
...
6
IN P U T M A S K IN G A N D
L O G IC O R F U N C T IO N
9
T
2
T
1
R
0
R
8
R
7
...
T O
R
2
R
1
...
T O
S U B
N D B U -8 5 /-9 5
D R IV E
F R O M
F R O M S U B
N D B U -8 5 /-9 5
D R IV E
. . .
D R IV E 7
D R IV E 8
...
(P C
D R IV E 1
M A S T E R
O R A P P L IC A T IO N
C O N T R O L L E R )
D D C S : 1 ,2 o r 4 M b it/s
D R IV E B U S : 4 o r 8 M b it/s
N D B U -9 5
R
T
M
2 4 V
5 V
A D D R . S E T T IN G
S W IT C H
T X D S IG N A L
D D C S R E C E IV E R
9
T R A N S M .
D R IV E R
J U M P E R S
T X D
S P E E D S E L E C T .
J U M P E R S
R X D
C H E N A B L E
J U M P E R S
R X D S IG N A L
M O D E S E L E C T .
J U M P E R
O R
1 8
O U T P U T M A S K IN G A N D
T R A N S M IT T E R D R IV E S
T
8
T
7
...
6
T
2
IN P U T M A S K IN G A N D
L O G IC O R F U N C T IO N
T
1
R
8
...
T O
D R IV E 8
D R IV E
D R IV E 7
R
7
R
6
...
R
R
1
R
0
...
T O
S U B
N D B U -8 5 /-9 5
F R O M
. . .
F R O M S U B
N D B U -8 5 /-9 5
D R IV E
D R IV E 1
11
Optical Component
Types in ABB Drive
Equipment
The following table provides the types of the optical components used
in ABB drive equipment.
Unit
NAMC-03 Controller
Channel
5 MBd
30 mA max
CH0 CH3
CH0, CH2
10 MBd
30 mA
10 MBd
50 mA max
NAMC-04 Controller
NAMC-11 Controller
NAMC-51 Controller
NDCO-01 DDCS Communication Option
(for NAMC-11 and NAMC-51)
CH1, CH3
CH1
CH0, CH2, CH3

CH0
+
+
CH2, CH3
CH0, CH2, CH3
+
+
CH0, CH2, CH3
NAMC-21 Controller
CH1
CH0, CH1
NAMC-22 Controller
CH2, CH3
CH0
+
+
NISA-03 ISA/DDCS Adapter

CH1
NDPC-02 DDCS Cable (for PCMCIA)
+
+
NDPC-12 DDCS Cable (for PCMCIA)
+
MSTR, CH0
NDBU-85 DDCS Branching Unit

CH1 CH8
NDBU-95 DDCS Branching Unit
MSTR, CH0 CH8
TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port

(for AC 70, AC 80, CI627A [FCI])
TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port

(for AC 70, AC 80, CI627A [FCI])
AC 80 Advant Controller
+
CH0 (DriveBus),
CH3
CH1, CH2
12
+
+
NDBU-85/95 EN
3BFE 64285513 R0125
SUPERSEDES: NONE
ABB Industry Oy
Drives
P.O.Box 184
FIN-00381 Helsinki
FINLAND
Telephone: +358 10 22 2000
Fax:
+358 10 22 22681
Internet:
www.abb.com/automation
ABB Automation Inc.

Drives
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone: 262 785-3416
800 243-4384
Fax:
262 785-8525
Internet:
www.abb-drives.com
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB Switzerland Ltd.
Layout drawing
Project:
Coperion Tasnee
Item:
Extruder 4.4 MW
Order/Tender No.:
Coperion W&P
Converter Type:
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
Converter S/N:
403
Issued
Hartmut Wiebe
Check / rel.
Resp. dept.
2006-07-13
Final
DEAPR/AVLD
Document Number.
ABB Switzerland Ltd.
No. of pages
Coperion Tasnee
Layout Drawing
ATB06003DE R1
7
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Sheet index
Cover sheet ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Sheet index ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
Layout drawing / Converter line up ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Unit designation / Cable entry / Cable exit / Water entry / Attachments .......................................................................................................... 4
Unit designation / Weight / Amount of water / Watercirquit ............................................................................................................................... 5
Transportation unit / Cabinet enclosure ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Revision history.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Document Number.
ATB06003DE R1
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Unit designation
Cable entry
Cable exit
Water entry
Attachments
Document No.
+A01
+A02
+A03
+A04
+A05
Bottom
Bottom
Cable entry and H.V. cable termination

Cable entry and cooling water connection
3BHS196575
3BHS234225
Fixing and lifting details
3BHS199089
= LSU1
= COU1
= INU1
= CBU1
= WCU1
Base Frame(s)
Document Number.
ATB06003DE R1
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Unit designation
Weight [kg]
Amount of water [l]
Watercirquit
+A01
+A02
+A03
+A04
+A05
600
700
1450
1000
60
20
10
40
25
100
WCU1
WCU1
WCU1
WCU1
WCU1
Total:
= LSU1
= COU1
= INU1
= CBU1
= WCU1
195
Document Number.
ATB06003DE R1
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Transportation unit
Weight [kg]
Unit 1
4700
Converter
4700
Cabinet enclosure
Installation:
Degree of protection:
Surface of cable termination bars:
Color of cabinets:
Indoor
IP 32 (standard)
to be specified
RAL 7032 / light gray
(only doors, side walls and roof)
Note: Complete cabinet zinc coating, inside not painted
Color of bottom frame(s):
RAL 9005 / black (standard)
Document Number.
ATB06003DE R1
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Revision history
Revision
Description
Revision 1 / 2007-07-13 / Hartmut Wiebe
Document Number.
ATB06003DE R1
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Water connections
Cable connections
Option:
Plate undrilled
Front view
Cooling water connection(1:5)
Fig. 1
20 Flange DN50
269
entry for control and

24 Top
aux. power supply cables
4x18
Converter interface:
23 terminals for
Aux. power supply
2x82.5 86 2x82.5 192
125
165
Converter interface:
22 terminals for Standard
and Optional I/O Signals
20 Flange ANSI 2"
1-3pcs EMC Rox frame

cable transit(s) for
external cables
25
4x19.1
120.7
152.4
Converter base frame
122 5
C
325
A-A
164
100 5
21
240 5
*Cooling water outlet 15
85
554 5
14
300.5
36
125.5
*: - With external heat exchanger: pure water

- With heat exchanger in WCU: raw water
720
19 Floor cut-out
*Cooling water inlet
Fig. 2
Profiles for fixation
of external cables
17
16
27 Cable routing
Prepared:
07.02.2007
O.Ackermann
Reviewed:
150.5
170
J.Rees
Approved:
450
40
18 Drain connection
W.Kpfer
Bottom entry for control and

26 aux. power supply cables
28
Dervd. from:
Sep. PL same no:
Resp. dep:
Water cooling unit, Cable entry
Take over dep:
and Cooling water connections
3BHS196601
07.02.2007
ATDCK
07.02.2007
ATDC
Revision:
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained

therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express
authority is strictly forbidden.
c ABB Schweiz AG 1994
50
Scale:
Doc-type:
ZAB
en
No.of sh:
100
Sheet no:
3BHS234225_E01
Schweiz AG
A3
Language:
WCU 0.8m ,Water connection from bottom
A) 16.02.2007 R. Sacher
anoth. no:
5
Pressure
5 relief vent
Cable duct 1
Front view
4 Cable termination bar

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
95
3 Phase designation
depends on the
converter line up
(Fig. 1 or Fig. 2)
800
935
Fig. 1
=INU L3
left
Power ground (PG) 9

L1
L2
2L2
1L1 1L3
2L3 2L1
1L2
184
Fig. 2
=LSU 1L1
left
900
120.5
50
113.5
1L3
2L2
1L2
2L3 2L1
L1
L3
L2
=LSU
right
Protective
earth (PE) 11
=INU
right
Connecting point 12
for earthing set
Detail (1:5): Cable termination bar
18
213.5
40
42
1000
720
219
7 Power cable entry
13
13 Cable termination section
Connection point
for grounding
10 cable (PE)
hole: D=13mm
thickness: 5mm
610
19 Floor cut-out
160
A-A
50
6 Roxtec frame
2 Undrilled plate
8 Cable entry for
serial communication,
position and speed encoder
14 Thickness 10mm
225
170
190
1000
Prepared:
Dervd. from:
S.Rheinegger 04-02-04
Reviewed:
Resp. dep:
R.Sacher
417,5
04-02-04
Sep. PL same no:
04-02-04
50
TEU/COU 1m, LSU_INU, Cable entry bottom
100
A3
Language:
en
No.of sh:
1
Sheet no:
3BHS196575
Switzerland Ltd
Doc-type: Format:
Terminal unit, Cable entry

and HV cable termination
ATDMP
Revision:
c ABB Switzerland Ltd 1994
Scale:
ZAB
Take over dep:
Approved:
W.Kpfer
anoth. no:
ACS6000_Settings_SN 403.xls
ABB Switzerland Ltd

CH-5300 Turgi
ACS 6000 MEDIUM

VOLTAGE DRIVE
Will be done during commisioning!
Installation: Coperion W&P/ Tasnee

Order number: 0011042645
Type code: ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
Converter S/N: 403
Converter HW diagram: 3BHS227357E01
Setting of protective devices
valid for CONVERTER S/N
403
Remarks
=LSU1+A01
Device
-B3201
-B3151
=COU1+A02
Device
-A2451
-A2501
-A2511
-A2521
-A2531
-A2541
-B2911
-B2981
-F1021
-F1021
-F1021
-K2812
-K2814
-K2831
-K2832
-K2833
-Q1001
-Q1003
-Q1003
-Q1004
-Q1004
Description
Cabinet temp. Monitoring
Air / air heat exch. ON
Description
Profibus / INU
Bus termination
Module Bus
CLUSTER ADDRESS
Module Bus
KEY CODE
Module Bus
KEY CODE
Module Bus
KEY CODE
Module Bus
KEY CODE
Cooling fans in swingfame ON
Undervoltage relay
Undervoltage relay / 380V Connected
Undervoltage relay / 380V Connected
Door release deenergized
Doors closed control
Emergency stop
Emergency stop
Emergency stop
Aux. Power supply 3x400VAC
(Transformer 2,5kVA)
Charging voltage CBU (Transformer
400V/3900V, 3,3kVA)
Irm =15 x Ir
Aux. Power supply (Transformer
400V/230V, 1,5kVA for air/air heat
exchanger)
Aux. Power supply (Transformer
400V/230V, 2,8kVA for air/air heat
exchanger)
HW-Diagram No.
Used type
KTO1140
KTS1141
3BHS119885E01
HW-Diagram No.
Used type
NPBA-12
3BHS227955e01
Setting range
0...60C
0...60C
Setting range
ON / OFF
0..9
1
AA
DO810
AA
DI810
AA
DO820
AD
55C
0...60C
45C
Time delay Symbol [] 0.2s
Umin.
335V
Umax..
455V
fix
4s
fix
4s
0,15s...600s
10s
0,15s...600s
10s
2s
KTO1140
KTO1141
EMR4
EMR4
EMR4
Time relay
Time relay
Time relay
Time relay
Time relay
0...60C
3,6A
PKZM
PKZ2
PKZ2
......
......
8.2A
123A
PKZM
3,8 A
PKZM
7,0 A
HW-Diagram No.
Used type
KTO1140
KTS1141
3BHS119662E01
=CBU1+A04
Device
-B7201
-B7151
HW-Diagram No.
Used type
KTO1140
KTS1141
3BHS119828E01
Description
HW-Diagram No.
Used type
TB820V2
3BHS227354e01
Template: No.Typ Part:3BHS130986 ZAB E01 Rev: B
Sign:
Setting Test field
DI810
Description
Description
Module Bus
CLUSTER ADDRESS
Test field
TB820V2
=INU1+A03
Device
-B4201
-B4151
=WCU1+A05
Device
-A5201
Sign:
Setting
60C
50C
Setting range
0...60C
0...60C
Setting range
0...60C
0...60C
Setting range
0..9
Date: 2007-07-06
Page
1 of 2
Sign:
Setting
60C
50C
Test field
Sign:
Setting
60C
50C
Test field
Sign:
Setting Test field
Documnet No.:
3BHS227347D01_Rev_ -
ACS6000_Settings_SN 403.xls
Installation: Coperion W&P/ Tasnee
Order number: 0011042645
Type code: ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
Converter S/N: 403
Converter HW diagram: 3BHS227357E01
Setting of protective devices

-A5211
-A5221
-A5231
-B5741
-B5451
-Q5002
-Q5002
-Q5003
-Q5003
-Q5002
/Q5003
-Q5004
Module Bus
DI810
KEY CODE
Module Bus
DO820
KEY CODE
Module Bus
AI810
KEY CODE
Cooling fans in swingfame ON
KTO1141
KTO1140
Cooling pump 1
PKZ2/ZM
Irm =15xIr
PKZ2/ZM
Cooling pump 2
PKZ2/ZM
Irm =15xIr
PKZ2/ZM
*) pls. compare nominal current on the
name plate of the pump motor, setting have
to be readjusted
Power supply COU / Converter with air/air
heatexchanger
PKZM
Template: No.Typ Part:3BHS130986 ZAB E01 Rev: B
Date: 2007-07-06
0...60C
0...60C
valid for CONVERTER S/N
403
AA
AD
AE
45C
55C
10,3A *)
.......... A
10,3A *)
.......... A
15,7A
Page
2 of 2
Documnet No.:
3BHS227347D01_Rev_ -
Side view left
Front view
**
**
**
**
160
6.3
65 / 2.56
1000 / 39.4
1176 / 46.3
*
29 Shipping split
A-A
940 / 37
30 Lifting
42 / 1.65
30 / 1.18
30
/ 1. 1
8
75 / 2.95
150 / 5.9
31 Hole for floor fixing
32
* : Dimensions see Converter layout drawing

** : Number of units depends on drive configuration
Sep. PL same no:
Dervd. from:
Prepared:
O.Ackermann
30.09.04
.
Resp. dep:
Reviewed:
H.U.Lscher
30.09.04
30.09.04
Scale:
Doc-type: Format:
1:20
ZAB
Base frame
Fixing and lifting details
ATCK
Take over dep:
Approved:
W.Kpfer
anoth. no:
50
Language:
en
No.of sh:
Revision:
c ABB Schweiz AG 1994
A3
B) 13.11.2006 O.Ackermann
3BHS199089
Switzerland Ltd
100
Sheet no:
Utility consumption list
Project:
Item:
Extruder 4.4 MW
Customer:
ODP Helsinki
Order/Tender No.: 11042645

Converter Type:
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
Converter S/N:
403
Issued
Check / rel.
Resp. dept.
J. Stutz
D. Frei
/
No. of pages
2007-07-06 Coperion W&P/ Tasnee

final Utility consumption list
S1-C1920 / S1-Q4758
Document Number.
3BH227361
5
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Sheet index
Cover sheet ............................................................................................................................. 1
Sheet index ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.) Auxiliary supplies converter ............................................................................................ 3
2.) Converter cooling / raw water consumption / losses into air ..................................... 4
3.) Converter cooling / internal water cirquit ...................................................................... 4
4.) Converter cooling / losses into air.................................................................................. 4
Revision history....................................................................................................................... 5
Document Number.
3BH227361
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
1.) Auxiliary supplies converter (common supply), approx. values

Consumption
3 x 400 V / 60 Hz
Aux. Power 3 phase AC
Description
=WCU1 pump
=CBU1 charging transformer
[kVA] continuous
7.1
-
[kVA] peak value

7.1
3.3
(300s)
Air to air heat exchanger

Control voltage (no safe line)
Total:
0.9
0.9
8.9
0.9
0.9
12.2
Consumption
1 x 230 V / 60 Hz
Description
=WCU1 space heater
Space heater total:
Space heater
[kW] continuous
0.49
0.5
Document Number.
3BH227361
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
2.) Converter Cooling / Raw water consumption / Losses into water, approx. values
Consumption
Description
(size)
=WCU1 (W1)
Losses
Diff. pressure of the

outer cirquit with
3-way valve [bar]
0.3
min. required
flow rate
[l/min]
150
Power losses
into water
[kW]
69.8
3.) Converter cooling / internal water circuit, approx. values

Consumption
Description
ACS 6000 Converter
ACS 6000 Converter total:
Amount of pure water [l]

195
195
(to be supplied by customer)
4.) Converter cooling / Losses into air, approx. values

Description
ACS6000 Converter
ACS6000 Converter total:
Power losses into air [kW]

5.2
5.2
Document Number.
3BH227361
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
Revision history
Revision
-
Description
first issue / 2007-07-06 / J. Stutz
Document Number.
3BH227361
Lang.
en
Rev. ind.
Page
PROJECT :
ORDER NO. :
0011042645
CUSTOMER :
ODP Helsinki
EQUIPMENT :
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
CONVERTER TYPE :
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
S/N: 403
DOCUMENT :
CONVERTER HW DIAGRAM
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
35
001
002
page
4
title 2
title 1
006
007
008
009
DESIGNATION BLOCK
CROSS REFERENCES
DESIGNATION BLOCK
DESIGNATION BLOCK

101
102
103
104
105
134
141
161
168
171
178
184
190
192
201
207
261
262
271
275
277
278
304
371
375
391
411
441
454
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
-
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
001
002
FOR
OF SIGNALS
"FUNCTION OF ITEM"
"FUNCTION OF ITEM"
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
AUX POWER SUPPLY
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
STANDARD I/O
AUX POWER
CONVERTER
OVERVIEW
CONTROL
GUSP / CONTROL
EARTH FLT DETECTION
AUX POWER
CHARGING UNIT
DISCHARGING UNIT
DOOR MONITORING
DOOR MONITORING
COOLING
COOLING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
CABINET TEMPERATURE
MOTOR SIDE
LINE SIDE
MOTOR SIDE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER INTERFACE
INTERNAL SIGNALS
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
INTERNAL SIGNALS
CAPACITORS
CAPACITORS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INT-BOARD
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
AMC BOARD
PINT-BOARD
INT-BOARD

DIN 40719
DIN 40719
=LSU1 +A01
=COU1 +A02
=INU1 +A03
=CBU1 +A04
=WCU1 +A05
=WCU1
=WCU1
SPACE HEATER
=COU1
=LSU1
=INU1
=LSU
=COU / =WCU
=CBU1
DOOR INTERLOCKING
DOOR INTERLOCKING
CABINET
INT-BOARD
=COU / =INU
FT-LINK
FSCD BOARD
CONTROL
=COU1
=LSU1
=INU1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
006
Not used on
Converter level
Classification of units
Numbering
BCU
CBU
COU
EXU
IFU
INU
IRU
ISU
LSU
RBU
TEU
VLU
WCU
1 2 3 4 5
6
+ NN AA NN AA NN .A...N...
+A 01
Cubicle No.
High voltage/group
Qualifying
Symbol
1 2 3
- A NNN AN
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
Braking Chopper Unit

Capacitor Bank Unit
Control Unit
Excitation Unit
Input Filter Unit
Inverter Unit
Input Reactor Unit
Isolator Unit
Line Supply Unit
Resistor Braking Unit
Terminal Unit
Voltage Limiter Unit
Water Cooling Unit
Section
Not used on
Converter level
E
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Designation Block "Location"
Qualifying
Symbol
Rev. ind.
Qualifying
Symbol
1 2 3
4 5
= N AA NN . AAA N
= ARU 1
Designation Block "higher Level"

Legend
= Active Recitifier Unit
Section
Section
In ACS6000 Standard wiring diagrams:
Number (extension)
Number
Kind
Page No.: where the master symbol is placed

Exampel: -Q7121
Master symbol
placed on Page 712
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DESIGNATION BLOCK FOR
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
006
007
EXAMPLE : Signal DC+ ON SHEET 111 TO SHEET 112

SHEET 111
=TEU2+A02
-TEU1
DC+
NP
DC-
DC+
NP
DC-
INTERNAL WIRING:
DOCUMENT NR.
SHEET 112
3BHS119827E01
111.B8
111.B8
111.B8
112.B1
112.B1
112.B1
=INU2+A09
-INU2
3BHS119827E01
/191.A4
DC+
NP
DC-
SHEET
COORDINATE
/191.A4
SLAVE ELEMENT CAN
BE FOUND ON PAGE 191.A4
SHEET NUMBER
AND COORDINATE
WIRE NR OR NAME
-A4061
-A4011
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
006
007
008
KIND OF ITEM
KIND OF ITEM
COMBINATION OF APPARATUS; ASSEMBLIES AND SUBASSEMBLIES

REPRESENTING A CONSTRUCTIONAL UNIT WHICH CANNOT BE CLEARLY
CLASSIFIED UNDER ANOTHER CODE LETTER, SUCH AS PLUG-IN MODULES,
FRAMES, INSERTS, PLUG-IN CARDS, LOW-PROFILE ASSEMBLIES,
LOCAL CONTROL UNITS etc.
RELAYS,
MEASURING TRANSDUCERS; THERMO-ELECTRIC CELLS; RESISTANCE

THERMOMETERS; PHOTOELECTRIC CELLS; PHOTOCONDUCTIVE CELLS;
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS; RESISTANCE STRAIN GAUGES;
TRANSDUCERS; REVOLUTION GAUGES; SPEED GAUGES; PULSE GENERATORS
TACHOMETER GENERATORS; LINEAR AND ANGULAR DEFLECTION
TRANSDUCERS; PROXIMITY INITIATORS; HALL-CURRENT GENERATORS;
FIELDEFFECT-ELEMENT POTENTIOMETERS; GAUGES FOR PRESSURE,
QUANTITY, DENSITY, LEVEL, TEMPERATURE; MICROPHONES; PICK-UPS;
LOUDSPEAKERS; LASER.
MOTORS
MEASURING EQUIPMENT,
TESTING EQUIPMENT
CAPACITORS
CAPACITORS OF ALL KIND.
DELAY DEVICES,
STORAGE DEVICES,
BINARY ELEMANTS
DEVICES FOR BINARY AND DIGITAL CONTROLLING; REGULATING AND

COMPUTING SYSTEMS. INTEGRATED CIRCUITS WITH BINARY AND DIGITAL
FUNCTIONS; DELAY ELEMENTS; SIGNAL BLOCKING ELEMENTS;
TIME-DELAY DEVICES; STORAGE AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS, i.e.CORE,
DISK AND MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE DEVICES. SHIFT REGISTERS,
COMBINATIVE ELEMENTS, i.e.AND and OR GATES. DIGITAL DEVICES,
PULSE COUNTERS, DIGITAL CONTROLLERS AND COMPUTERS.
PROTECTIVE
DEVICES
EXAMPLES
MISCELLANEOUS
LETTER
CODE
TRANSDUCERS FROM
NON-ELECTRICAL
QUANTITY TO
ELECTRICAL QUANTITY
AND VICE-VERSA
RESISTORS
FUSES (EQUIPMENT FUSES FOR FEEBLE CURRENTS, SCREW PLUG FUSES,

HH FUSES); OVERVOLTAGE DISCHARGE DEVICES; PROTECTIVE SWITCHES
FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS; PROTECTIVE RELAYS; BIMETALLIC
TRIPPING DEVICES; MAGNETIC TRIPPING DEVICES; PRESSURE SUPERVISING DEVICES; AIR FLOW SWITCHES; CENTRIFUGAL SWITCHES;
BUCHHOLZ PROTECTION DEVICES; ELECTRONIC DEVICES FOR SIGNAL
SUPERVISION; SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICES; LINE SUPERVISION EQUIPMENT; OPERATIONAL SAFETY DEVICES.
ROTATING AND STATIC GENERATORS AND CONVERTERS; BATTERIES;

CHARGING DEVICES; SUPPLY DEVICES;
CLOCK GENERATORS,OSCILLATORS.
SIGNALLING
DEVICES
OPTICAL AND ACOUSTICAL ANNUNCIATORS; SIGNAL LAMPS, DANGER AND

TIME SIGNALLING DEVICES; CLOCKS; TIME SEQUENCE INDICATORS;
DEVICES FOR MANEUVER REGISTRATION; DROP INDICATOR RELAYS.
NOT USED
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
AMPLIFIERS,
REGULATORS
LETTER
CODE
K
L
M
N
P
Q
EXAMPLES
HEAVY DUTY CONTACTORS; AUXILIARY CONTACTORS; AUXILIARY
RELAYS; TIME DELAY RELAYS; FLASHING RELAYS AND REED RELAYS.
CHOKES, INDUCTION COILS.
DC MOTORS, AC SINGLE PHASE AND 3 PHASE MOTORS
DEVICES FOR ANALOG CONTROL, REGULATION AND COMPUTING;
ELECTRONIC AND ELECTROMECHANICAL REGULATORS; OPERATIONAL
AMPLIFIERS; INVERTING AMPLIFIERS; ISOLATING AMPLIFIERS;
IMPEDANCE BUFFERS; CONTROL EQUIPMENT SETS; MASTER ANALOG
CONTROLLERS; ANALOG COMPUTERS, INTEGRATED CIRCUITS WITH
ANALOG FUNCTIONS.
ANALOG, BINARY AND DIGITAL INDICATING AND RECORDING
MEASURING DEVICES (INDICATORS, RECORDERS, COUNTERS);
OSCILLOSCOPES; DATA DISPLAY DEVICES; SIMULATORS; TEST
ADAPTERS; POINTS FOR MEASURING,
TESTING AND SUPPLY.
MAIN CIRCUIT SWITCHES; SWITCHES WITH PROTECTIVE DEVICES;
CIRCUIT BREAKERS; HIGH-SPEED CIRCUIT BREAKERS; ISOLATORS;
ON-LOAD ISOLATORS; STAR-DELTA SWITCHES; POLE CHANGING
SWITCHES; CONTROLLER DRUMS; DISCONNECTING LINKS; CELL
SWITCHES; PROTECTIVE ISOLATORS; PROTECTIVE ON-LOAD
ISOLATORS; HOUSE-WIRING SWITCHES; PROTECTIVE MOTOR
SWITCHES
OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WHICH ARE NOT LISTED

ELSEWHERE IN THIS TABLE OR CANNOT BE CLASSIFIED UNDER OTHER
GROUPS,i.e.LIGHTING DEVICES, ELECTRICAL FILTERS, ELECTRICAL
FENCES, VENTILATORS, HEATING DEVICES; EQUIPMENT BARRIERS FOR
INDUCTORS
SWITCHING DEVICES
FOR POWER CIRCUITS
GENERATORS,
SUPPLIES
Rev. ind.
ASSEMBLIES
SUBASSEMBLIES
SWITCHES
SELECTORS
TRANSFORMERS
Date
Date
R
S
FIXED RESISTORS; ADJUSTABLE RESISTORS; RHEOSTATS; STARTING

RESISTORS; BRAKING RESISTORS; POTENTIOMETERS; NTC RESISTORS;
PTC RESISTORS; RESISTORS FOR MEASURING; SHUNTS;
HEATING RESISTORS.
CONTROLLERS; SWITCHING INSERTS; PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES;
PIVOTED LEVER SWITCHES; ILLUMINATED PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES;
CONTROL SWITCHES; LIMIT SWITCHES; CONTROL DISCREPANCY
SWITCHES; TEST POINT SELECTOR SWITCHES; CONTROL CYLINDERS;
COPYING SETS; DECADE SELECTOR SWITCHES; CODING SWITCHES;
CONTROL KEYS; DIAL SELECTORS; ROTARY LINE SWITCHES.
MAINS, ISOLATING AND CONTROL TRANSFORMERS; CURRENT AND
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS FOR ALTERNATING CURRENT; TRANSDUCTORS.

2006-09-29
DIN 40719
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
007
008
009
KIND OF ITEM
LETTER
CODE
EXAMPLES
KIND OF ITEM
MODULATORS,
TRANSDUCERS FROM ONE
ELECTRICAL QUANTITY
TO ANOTHER
FREQUENCY MODULATORS; (-DEMODULATORS); (CURRENT-), VOLTAGETO- FREQUENCY CONVERTERS; FREQUENCY- TO- VOLTAGE (CURRENT)
CONVERTERS; ANALOG- TO- DIGITAL CONVERTERS; DIGITAL- TOANALOG CONVERTERS; SIGNAL BUFFER STAGES; DIRECT CURRENT AND
DIRECT VOLTAGE CONVERTERS; DISCRIMINATORS, PARALLEL- TOSERIES CONVERTERS; SERIES- TO- PARALLEL CONVERTERS;
CODING DEVICES; DECODING DEVICES; OPTOCOUPLERS; REMOTE CONTROL
EQUIPMENT.
EQUIPMENT.
TUBES,
SEMI- CONDUCTORS
DISPLAY TUBES; AMPLIFIER TUBES; GAS- DISCHARGE TUBES;

THYRATRONS; MERCURY- VAPOUR RECTIFIERS; DIODES; ZENER DIODES;
TUNNEL DIODES; VARACTOR DIODES; TRANSISTORS; THYRISTORS;
TRIACS,LEDS.
TRANSMISSION PATHS,
WAVE- GUIDES
LINES; CABLES; HOOK- UP WIRES; BUSBARS; WAVEGUIDES; LIGHT

TRANSMISSION CONDUCTORS, COAXIAL LINES; RF- TRANSMISSION PATHS
AND RF- TRANSMISSION LINES; AERIALS; TELECOMMUNICATION LINES.
TERMINALS,
PLUGS, SOCKETS
DISCONNECTING AND TEST PLUGS; COAXIAL CONNECTORS; SOCKETS;

TEST CONNECTORS; MULTIPOLE CONNECTORS; DISTRIBUTING CONNECTORS;
CROSS- CONNECTING BOARDS; TERMINAL BOARDS; SOLDER TERMINAL
STRIPS; JACKS.
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
MECHANICAL DEVICES
BRAKES; CLUTCHES; VALVES; SERVOMOTOR DRIVES; HOISTING DEVICES;

BRAKE LIFTING MAGNETS; AUTOMATIC CONTROL DRIVES; LOCKING
MAGNETS; MECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES; MOTOR- ACTUATED POTENTIOMETERS; PERMANENT MAGNETS; TELETYPE APPARATUS; ELECTRICAL
TYPEWRITERS; PRINTERS; PLOTTERS; OPERATORS PAGE PRINTERS.
TERMINATIONS,
EQUALIZING DEVICES,
FILTERS, LIMITERS,
CABLE TERMINATIONS
RC AND LC- FILTERS; DEVICES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF RADIO

INTERFERENCE AND FOR SPARK QUENCHING; ACTIVE FILTERS; HIGHPASS,
LOWPASS AND BANDPASS FILTERS; FREQUENCY DIVIDING NETWORKS;
ATTENUATING DEVICES.
6
LETTER
CODE
EXAMPLES
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
DIN 40719
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
008
009
101
=LSU1+A01
-LSU1
DC+
DC+_A01 102.B1
NP_A01 102.B1
DC-_A01 102.B1
DC-
-E3151
=ACS6000/271.B1
COOLING
=ACS6000/261.B2
Door
supervis
-B3201
=ACS6000/277.D1
CABINET
TEMP.
-W412104 1
BOARD
-A3101
=ACS6000/441.B2
PINT-BOARD
C779
=ACS6000/178.B6
COU
INTERFACE
-S3201_02
-R3023
CONTROL
-G3101
-F3111
=ACS6000/190.D4
BOARD
UF C765
1L1
1L2
1L3
2L3
2L2
2L1
PE
F
Rev. ind.

A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
1L1_A01
1L2_A01
1L3_A01
2L3_A01
102.C1
102.D1
102.D1
102.D1
2L2_A01 102.D1
2L1_A01 102.D1
PE_A01 102.E1
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=LSU1 +A01
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
009
101
102
=COU1+A02
-COU1
101.B8
101.B8
DC+_A01
NP_A01
DC+
DC-_A01
NP
DC-
DC+_A02
NP_A02
DC-_A02
103.B1
103.B1
103.B1
L1_A02
103.D1
-DOOR_INT
=ACS6000/261.A2
-K281...
-A2451
101.C8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
101.D8
1L1_A01
1L2_A01
-A2501
=ACS6000/134.C2
NPBA12
ProfiB
=ACS6000/391.D6
TB820
-A2951
=ACS6000/391.A6
XV C 769
CONTROL
-A2401
=ACS6000/411.B2
AMC
BOARD
1L3_A01
2L3_A01
2L2_A01
2L1_A01
=INU:L1
=INU:L2
=INU:L3
=LSU:1L1
=LSU:1L2
=LSU:1L3
=LSU:2L3
=LSU:2L2
=LSU:2L1
-Q1001_1073
=ACS6000/171.A1
AUX POWER
-TERM_X1_2 -X131_132
=ACS6000/141.B2
PROCESS
INTERFACE
-TERM_X4
L2_A02
L3_A02
=ACS6000/201.A1
CBU
INTERFACE
=ACS6000/141.C7
MCB
INTERFACE
101.E8
PG
PE
PE_A01
PG_A02
PE_A02
103.D1
103.D1
103.E1
103.E1
150 mm
F
Rev. ind.
101.B8

A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=COU1 +A02
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
101
102
103
=INU1+A03
-INU1
102.B8
102.B8
DC+_A02
NP_A02
DC+
DC-_A02
=ACS6000/184.B6
GUSP
CONTROL
=ACS6000/261.D2
DOOR
MONITORING
-E4161
-B4201
=ACS6000/275.B2
COOLING
102.D8
L1_A02
L2_A02
L3_A02
102.E8
102.E8
PG_A02
PE_A02
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
104.B1
104.B1
104.B1
PG_A03
104.E1
=ACS6000/454.B1
INT-BOARD
=ACS6000/278.D1
CABINET
TEMP.
-A4132
-F4011
-A4133
-F4012
=ACS6000/454.E1
SVA
XVC 767
-A4051
=ACS6000/271.B2
COOLING
DC-
DC+_A03
NP_A03
DC-_A03
BOARD
-A4121
-E4151_53
102.D8
102.D8
NP
AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION ,CONTROL

-G4101_13
-S4201_03
Rev. ind.
102.B8

=ACS6000/454.E1
SCA
XVC 768
=ACS6000/375.B5
FSCD BOARD
=ACS6000/375.B5
FSCD BOARD
PG
PE
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
PE_A03
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=INU1 +A03
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
104.E1
102
103
104
=CBU1+A04
-CBU1
103.B8
103.B8
DC+_A03
NP_A03
DC+
NP
DC-_A03
DC-
INTERFACE =INU1
-A7101
-V7101
-F7101
-V7102
-F7102
=ACS6000/207.C4
IGCT
INTERFACE CONTROL
-A7091
-S7201_03
D
=ACS6000/201.D4
CHARGING
UNIT
=ACS6000/262.B2
DOOR
MONITORING
-E7151
-B7201
=ACS6000/271.C2
COOLING
103.E8
103.E8
F
Rev. ind.
103.B8

A
B
C
D
Date
=ACS6000/277.D8
CABINET
TEMP.
/201.A4
/201.A6
=ACS6000/207.D4
IGCT
=ACS6000/207.D5
VLSCD
BOARD
-Z7081
PG
PE
PG_A03
PE_A03
Name
0
-Q7121
=ACS6000/207.C5
VLSCD
BOARD
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
PE_A04
2006-09-29 Title
MAIN CIRCUIT
2006-09-29
=CBU1 +A04
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105.E1
103
104
105

-TERM_X1
-TERM_X17
-TERM_X2
-TERM_X18
=ACS6000/161.A2
AUX POWER
400V,60Hz
=ACS6000/141.B1
STANDARD
I/O
=ACS6000/161.C2
SP. HEATER
230VAC
=ACS6000/141.C8
STANDARD
I/O
-TERM-X512
=ACS6000/192.B6
AUX POWER
230VAC
-TERM_X513
=ACS6000/161.A5
AUX POWER
400V_60Hz
-TERM_X515
=ACS6000/161.B5
SP. HEATER
1~ 230V
104.E8
F
Rev. ind.
=WCU1+A05
-WCU1
A
B
C
D
Date
=ACS6000/192.D6
AUX POWER
-G5021
-A5201
=ACS6000/391.D2
TB820
PE
PE_A04
Name
0
-TERM-X511
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER SUPPLY
2006-09-29
=WCU1 +A05
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
104
105
134
=COU1
+A02
-A2451
CUSTOMER
INTERFACE
NPBA_A
NPBA_B
/102.C3
NPBA-12
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
Data
Data
Data
Data
A
B
A
B
N
P
N
P
X2:8 SH
X2:7 DG
TXD
RXD
X2:5 +24V
X2:6 0V
DC
DC
GND
BUS
TERMINATION
ON
OFF
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

PROFIBUS ADAPTER
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105
134
141
*) PROCESS INTERFACE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
-W14102
**) MCB INTERFACE
=WCU1+A05
=COU1+A02
-TERM_X17
/105.B5
-X17 -W14101
1
1
DIGITAL INPUT
=COU1+A02
TERM_X17
-X17 -W04102
1
19
-TERM_X1_2
/102.D4
-X1
3 24VDC
2
4
PROCESS STOP INU1
3
5
4
6
OPERATION
PREVENTED INU1
5
15
6
16
OPERATION
1
17
18
2
EMERGENCY STOP
3
19
20
4
-X2 EMERGENCY STOP
5
71
6
72
EMERGENCY-OFF
7
73
74
8
EMERGENCY-OFF
75
9
10 76
EMERGENCY
11 77
RESET
12 78
EMERGENCY
20
21
22
23
24
2
3
4
5
6
DIGITAL INPUT
TERM_X1_2
-X2
79 24VDC
80
MCB STATUS CLOSED
81
82
MCB STATUS OPEN
31
32
MCB PRE-TRIP
DIGITAL OUTPUT
-TERM_X4
MCB ORDER CLOSE

COMMAND
MCB ORDER CLOSE
RELEASE
MCB ORDER OPEN 1
(OPENING COIL 1)
RESET
DIGITAL OUTPUT
TERM_X4
INU1 OPERATION
PREVENTED
-X4
55
TERM_X18
-X18
-W14105 1/BN
15
56
3/BK16
MCB ORDER OPEN 2

(OPENING COIL 2)
MCB ORDER TRIP
UNDERVOLTAGE COIL
/102.E4
-X4
1
2
3
4
5
***) 7
***) 8
6
9
***) 51
***) 52
10
53
54
***) For trip circuit supervision

if applicable
*) Details
**) Details
F
Rev. ind.
=WCU1+A05
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-TERM_X18
/105.C5
-W14103 1 -X181
2
3
4
5
7
2
3
4
5
7
8
6
9
11
8
6
9
11
12 12
10 10
1/BN13
3/BK14
-W14104
for process connection see document 3BHS123187, Chapter 1.1

for MCB connection see document 3BHS125149
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

STANDARD I/O
2006-09-29
=WCU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
134
141
161
AUX POWER
3x400V / 60HZ
-X1
=WCU1+A05
-TERM_X1
/105.B3
-X1
1
2
3
PE
-Q5003
-TERM_X2
/105.C3
-X2
1
2
PE
-W16101 1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
WCU1_L1 171.A5
WCU1_L2 171.A5
WCU1_L3 171.A5
-Q5004
-Z5001
-X554
-M5541 M -M5542 M
PUMP 1
PUMP 2
-Q5011
-K5451
-TERM_X515
/105.E5
-X515
PE
1
3
SHC_L
168.E7
2
4
PE
F
Rev. ind.
/105.D5
-X513
1
2
3
-Q5001
-TERM_X513
-Q5002
SPACE HEATER
CONVERTER
230VAC
-X2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER
2006-09-29
=WCU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
141
161
168
TRANSP_UNIT 1
-E5011
161.C5
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CONVERTER
2006-09-29
SPACE HEATER
SHC_L
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
161
168
171
5
161.A6 WCU1_L1
161.A6 WCU1_L2
161.A6 WCU1_L3
=COU1+A02
-Q1001_1073
/102.D5
-X20
-Q1004
-T1012
.../230V
3
L3
-Q1003
-T1021
-V1021
-Z1021
-Z1022
WCU
Date
178.C3 Q1061
LSU1
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
-Q1041
-C1026
...28
-C1021
...25
-R1022
-Q2981
24V
271.A1 A02_Q1014
A
B
C
D
-Q1073
-X24_P
I/O Ext. 24VDC
-X24_P2
24VDC
-X24_P1
24VDC
Name
CONTROL
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
GUSP
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title AUX POWER DISTRIBUTION

OVERVIEW
2006-09-29
=COU1
275.A1 A02_Q2981
WCU
-G1211
184.B3 Q1041
I/O
Ext.
-G1201
COOLING
-Q1051
-Q1061
-Q1071
Control PUMP
&
Regul. Valves
192.D2 Q1071
-X230V
Control
184.D3 Q1051_1
-Q1011
-Q1012
-E1011
192.C2 Q1012
-Q1013
-Q1014
L2
-Q1001
-V1022
Rev. ind.
L1
201.E2 Q1003
CBU1
COOLING
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
168
171
178
=LSU1+A01
-G3101
=COU1+A02
C
171.E2
Q1061
/101.C2
CONTROL VOLTAGE
-X3
21
-W17801 BN
22
BU
-X311
1
2
PE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CONTROL
2006-09-29
=LSU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
171
178
184
=INU1+A03
-G4101_13
=COU1+A02
171.E5
Q1041
/103.C2
-X3
65
-W18401 BN
66
BU
-X411
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
171.E3
Q1051_1
-X3
15
-W18402 BN
16
BU
GUSP
G4101
-G4111
G4102
-G4112
G4103
-G4113
~
~
/207.C2
/207.B2
/207.D2
/207.E2
/190.E2
/190.D2
CONTROL VOLTAGE
G4104
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

GUSP / CONTROL
2006-09-29
=INU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
178
184
190
=LSU1
+A01
-F3111
/101.C6
=INU1
+A03
-G4113
/184.C6
X3.12
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
EAF
X3.11
X3.51
-W19001 A1
X3.52
SH
/454.B1
X1
X2
Sig-In
Sig-Gnd
X3:2 5AF
X3:1
Pwr_In
Pwr_Gnd
A1
TX
-W19002
FO
INT-BOARD
A818
POWER ON
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

EARTH FLT DETECTION
2006-09-29
=LSU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
184
190
192
=WCU1+A05
-TERM-X512
AC
/105.C5
171.C1
Q1012
WCU
-X3
7
-W19201 1/BN
2/BU
-X512
1
2
WCU
230VAC
=WCU1+A05
-TERM-X511
D
AC / DC
/105.D5
171.C2
Date
Name
Q1071
-X3
71
-W19202
WCU 72
1/BN
-X511
1
2/BU
-G5021/(22)
F
Rev. ind.
=COU1+A02
CONTROL VOLTAGE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

AUX POWER
2006-09-29
=COU / =WCU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
190
192
201
=CBU1+A04
-CBU1
=ACS6000/104.A2
=COU1+A02
-X131_132
=CBU1+A04
-Q7121
/102.D5
=ACS6000/104.A4
-X715
1
2
OPEN
3
4
OPEN
3
4
5
6
CLOSED
11
7
8
9
CLOSED
12
10
-W20101 1
-X2
53
54
55
56
-C7011
-C7031
-C7051
-C7012
-A7091
-X2
13
-W20103
14
-X20
4
Q1003
171.E7
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
-W20104
Rev. ind.
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
Name
/104.D2
-X714
1
1/BN
-X710
6
400V
2/BU
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
7
PE
0V
PE
Date
Date

CHARGING UNIT
2006-09-29
=CBU1
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
192
201
207
=INU1
+A03
-G4111
DC_+
/184.B6
-V7101
X3.11
X3.51
-W20701 SH
X1.1 (-)
X3.52
A1
X1.2 (+)
/104.C6
/454.B1
-W20703
FO
-W20704
FO
INT-BOARD
A722
A211
DC_NP
=INU1
+A03
-G4112
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
-V7102
/104.D6
A1
/184.C6
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
-F7101
/104.C6
A1
X3.12
X3.51
-W20702
X3.52
SH
X1.1 (-)
A1
X1.2 (+)
-F7102
/104.D6
/454.B1
-W20705
FO
-W20706
FO
INT-BOARD
A723
A212
X3.11
DC_-
X3.12
F
Rev. ind.
=CBU1+A04
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DISCHARGING UNIT
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
201
207
261
=COU1+A02
DOOR MONITORING
-DOOR_INT
/102.B5
230V
-K2814
-X3
10
-W26101 1
=LSU1+A01
DOOR INTERLOCKING
-K2811
-S3201_02
+24V
-X1 9
-W26102
-X312 1
-K2812
1
4/BU
3/BN
10
/101.C3
A2
A1
-X312
-W26105
=INU1+A03
-S4201_03
-W26106
-X412 1
4/BU
3/BN
10
/103.C3
A2
A1
-X412 4
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DOOR MONITORING
2006-09-29
DOOR INTERLOCKING
DOOR_LOCK_1
262.A6
DOOR_LOCK
262.A6
LOOP2_1
262.A5
LOOP2
262.A5
LOOP3_1
262.A5
LOOP3
LOOP1_1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
262.A4
262.A3
262.A3
LOOP1
Rev. ind.
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
207
261
262
-S7201_03
-X712 1
DOOR_LOCK_1
261.F6
261.F6
261.F5
LOOP2_1
261.F5
LOOP2
261.F5
LOOP3_1
DOOR_LOCK
-W26202
4/BU
3/BN
10
/104.D3
A2
A1
-X712 4
-W26207
-W26208
8
BN
BU
F
Rev. ind.
-W26201 1
=CBU1+A04
LOOP3
LOOP1_1
LOOP1
4
261.F4
261.F3
3
261.F3
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

DOOR MONITORING
2006-09-29
DOOR INTERLOCKING
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
261
262
271
=COU1+A02
N
L1
/103.D2
-X312
11
2/BU
-W27104
=INU1+A03
-E4151_53
56
2/BU
55
1/BN
54
1/BN
-W27101
=LSU1+A01
-E3151
B /101.C2
-X412
11
12
12
-W27105
=CBU1+A04
-E7151
/104.D2
-X712
11
12
F
Rev. ind.
-X3 53
1/BN
A02_Q1014
171.E1
2/BU
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

COOLING
2006-09-29
CABINET
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
262
271
275
=COU1+A02
A02_Q2981
0V
24VDC
68
63
-W27504
=INU1+A03
-E4161
64
/103.C2
-X413
3
F
Rev. ind.
-X1 67
2/BU
171.E7
1/BN
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

COOLING
2006-09-29
INT-BOARD
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
271
275
277
=COU1+A02
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_LS1
-X1 1
=COU1+A02
+24V
-X2 51
-W27701 1
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_CBU
+24V
-W27717
52
1
=LSU1+A01 -X313 1
-B3201
/101.C3
=CBU1+A04 -X713 1
-B7201
/104.D3
-X313 2
-X713 2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CABINET TEMPERATURE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
275
277
278
=COU1+A02
CABINET
TEMP.
-TEMP_INU
+24V
-X155
56
-W27801 1
=INU1+A03 -X413 1
-B4201
/103.C3
T
F
Rev. ind.
-X413 2
Date
A0
B
C
D
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

CABINET TEMPERATURE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
277
278
304
=INU1 INT-BOARD
A304
+A03
A303
-A4121
/454.B1
=INU1 INT-BOARD
A404
+A03
A403
-A4121
-W30401
FO
-W30402
FO
-W30405
-W30406
/454.B1
FO
FO
AMC-BOARD =COU1
+A02
-A2401
A704
A703
/411.B2
AMC-BOARD =COU1
+A02
-A2401
A702
A701
/411.B2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title INT-BOARD

2006-09-29
=COU / =INU
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
278
304
371
=INU1 INT-BOARD
+A03
A209
-A4121
/454.B1
INT-BOARD
-W37101 FO
-W37102
FO
=LSU1 PINT-BOARD
+A01
RX2
-A3101
/441.B2
PINT-BOARD
TX2
F
Rev. ind.
A724
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
FT-LINK
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
304
371
375
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
PINT-BOARD
TX0
PINT-BOARD
TX1
-W37501 FO
INT-BOARD
A202
-W37502
INT-BOARD
A201
FO
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
/454.B1
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
/454.B1
/441.B2
=INU1
+A03
-F4011
FSCD
/103.C6
=INU1
+A03
-F4012
FSCD
A2
A2
-W37513
-W37514
FO
PINT-BOARD
RX0
FO
PINT-BOARD
RX1
/103.D6
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/441.B2
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
FSCD BOARD
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
371
375
391
=COU1
+A02
-A2951
/102.C5
=INU1 INT-BOARD
+A03
A594
-A4121
XV C769 AE101
/454.B1
-W39103
FO
0V
X1.3
24V
X1.2
SIG
X1.1
A1
C
=WCU1
+A05
-A5201
=COU1
+A02
-A2501
/105.E5
TB820
TX2
RX2
/102.C5
-X4
-W39101 FO
-W39102
-X5
TX1
RX1
FO
-X4
-X5
TB820
RX2
TX2
RX1
TX1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
CONTROL
Doc. des.
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
375
391
411
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
/102.D4
=COU1
+A02
-A2401
E
F
G
H
RX CH1
TX
A709
A710
RX CH2
TX
A711
A712
RX CH3
TX
A707
A708
RX CH0
TX
AMC BOARD
A705
A706
DSP56311
RX INT0
TX
PANEL &
BUS
INTERFACE
A701
A702
6 X17
RS485
R P T2 S1 S0
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
Name
F M T1 S3 S2
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
chwekue
W.Kpfer
ICMC0-ASIC
ACS 6000
/304.A6
Date
Date
X1
64
2006-09-29 Title AMC BOARD

MOTOR SIDE
2006-09-29
=COU1
EXTENSION
PORT
/304.A6
A715
A716
RX CH5
TX
A717
A718
RX CH6
TX
A719
A720
RX CH7
TX
X501
FLASH
MEMORY
SUBPRINT
X502
RX CH4
TX
A713
A714
PROM, SRAM
3BHS227357E01
RX INT1
TX
ICMC1-ASIC
Doc. des.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A703
A704
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
391
411
441
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
=LSU1
+A01
-A3101
/101.C6
E
F
G
H
Date
chwekue
W.Kpfer
RX0
RX1
CHANNEL 1+2
RX2
CHANNEL 2
RX3
RX4
/375.B7
/375.B7
/371.D4
3
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/371.D4
TX0
TX1
CHANNEL 1+2
TX2
CHANNEL 2
TX3
TX4
PINT-BOARD
Name
/375.A2
/375.A2
X11:1
X11:2
X12:1
X12:2
X13:1
X13:2
Date
Date
X14:1
X14:2
X16:1
X16:2
2006-09-29 Title PINT-BOARD

LINE SIDE
2006-09-29
=LSU1
X15:1
X15:2
X21:1
X21:2
X22:1
X22:2
X23:1
X23:2
X24:1
X24:2
3BHS227357E01
X1:1
X1:2
X26:1
X26:2
X2:1
X2:2
Doc. des.
ATD
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
X25:1
X25:2
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
411
441
454
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
INT-BOARD
3300V
=INU1
+A03
-A4121
/103.C6
/103.C6
=INU1
+A03 SVA, XVC767..
-A4132
9MVA
Date
/103.D6
Name
0
Name
A812
A704
V568
V567
V566
V565
V564
V563
V562
V561
A816
A641
A205
A206
Prepared
Approved
Project name
A208
A705
A203
A805
A204
A804
A210
A814
A202
/375.A3
A815
A201
/375.A3
A715
A714
A531
A592
A541
A302
A551
A402
/207.D7
A212
A723
Doc. des.
A303
/391.A3
A593
A594
A304
/371.B4
/371.A4
A724
A209
A403
/304.A3
7
3BHS227357E01
ATD
3BHS227357E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A712
A713
A211
A722
/207.B7
A813
Date
Date
A207
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
chwekue
W.Kpfer
A803
INT-BOARD
MOTOR SIDE
=INU1
ACS 6000
A703
V591
=INU1
+A03 SCA, XVC768..
-A4133
Date
E
F
G
H
A802
/190.E7
A818
A817
A702
/304.A3
A404
= ACS6000
+
Lang. EN
+24V 2
0V
+24V 1
X1:3
X1:2
X1:1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
V103
V113
441
454
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 CONTROL UNIT

S/N: 403
DOCUMENT :
WIRING DIAGRAM
=COU1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
0
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
29.09.2006
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
30
001
002
page
title 1
100
101
102
104
105
106
107
120
121
230
240
245
250
251
252
253
254
281
282
283
285
287
290
291
295
296
298
800
4
title 2
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
001
002
AUX POWER SUPPLY

AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
AUX POWER SUPPLY
INU CONTROL
INU CONTROL
INU CONTROL
INTERFACE AMC-BOARD
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER MONITORING
CONVERTER INTERFACE
CONVERTER CONTROL
AUX POWER SUPPLY
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
CONVERTER CONTROL
MAIN CIRCUIT
AC AUX DISTRIBUTION
CONTROL
PANEL
AMC-BOARD
PROCESS INTERFACE
COUPLING DEVICE
DOORLOCK
EMERGENCY STOP
EMERGENCY-OFF
MONITORING
MCB INTERFACE
MCB INTERFACE
COOLING FAN`S
FUNCTION EARTH
PULSE INTERFACE
POWER STAGE CONTROL
WATER COOLING UNIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
EXTERNAL I/O
FRONTDOOR
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
TB820
DI810 + TU830
DO810 + TU830
DI810 + TU830
DO820 + TU831
CONTROL
PROTECTION EARTH
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
100
AUX POWER SUPPLY

3~400VAC
60HZ
3
PE
1
-W004
-PE 1
-W637 1
-W022 1
-W009 1
-Q1003
1.14
1.22
-Q1001
1
3
5
1
3
5
-W018
-W019
13
21
A1
A2
-W024 1
1
-W636
1
-W025
2
4
6
/290.D8
14
22
2
4
6
-Q1004
1.13 /287.B4
1.21
-W001 1
1
-W002
1
-W003
1.14
1.22
1
3
5
2
4
6
1.13 /290.D4
1.21
-W873 1
-W871 1
-X20 1
-W872 1
T1012_1
NO SAFE LINE
CHARGING
VOLTAGE CBU
TRAFO
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
101.A1
-X20 4
102.A3
102.A3
102.A3
Date
Date

AC AUX DISTRIBUTION
2006-09-29
T1012_2
T1021_U
T1021_V
T1021_W
-W020 1
-W021
101.A1
-W005 1
1
-W006
1
-W007
Rev. ind.
230VAC
DISTRIBUTION
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
100
101
PE
2_0V
-W034 1
-W029 1
-W044 1
-W045 1
11 12 13 14
-PE1 1
-XN
.D1
-W047 1
-W048
-W049 1
A
B
C
D
Date
-PE1 4
-PE1 3
.E1
-W032 1
-PE 4
.E1
-W033 1
-X3 7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
-W050 1
-E1011
-W780 1
-X3 53
WCU
CONTROL
230VAC
1.14
1.22
1.13/287.C4
1.21
FAZ-C
-W046 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/120.A2
/120.D2
/120.F3
/121.A4
/121.D5
1 2 3 4
.B1
.B1
/281.E1
.E6
/290.E8
.E3
/102.D4 /281.E4
/102.E8
-XN
-Q1014
FAZ-C
PE
/102.A2
.D3
.C1
1.13/287.D2
1.21
-Q1013
/281.A4
/290.D8
-W043 1
-X230V
-W039 1
-W040 1
11 12 13 14
FAZ-C
1.14
1.22
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
-Q1012
-W037 1
-W038 1
1 2 3 4
FAZ-C
-W035 1
-W036 1
-X230V
-Q1011
1.14
1.22
/102.A1
.D2
-W030 1
-W031 1
.E1
1.13/287.C2
1.21
-PE1 1
Rev. ind.
0V
110V
120V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V
-T1012
2_230V
100.E7
100.E7
T1012_1
T1012_2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
-W781 1
55
54
56
AIR COOLING
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
100
101
102
A
B
C
D
3
4
5
.E4
-W150 1
-X1021 2C
-W152 1
-W153
.E4
-X1021 3B
3C
-C1021
-X1021 3D
CU
.E4
5D
CU
-W154 1
2
4
105.B1
-X1021 5B
1
3
-R1022
CTRL_-DC
-C1029
-R1021
CTRL_+DC
-W156 1
105.B1
.E4
-W155 1
5E
-W157 1
2
4
101
102
104
Al
5F
4F
3 1
5C
-W161 1
1
3
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
CU
-C1026
5A
-PE1 6
-W158 1
/101.E1
= COU1
+
Al
2
GSP_-DC -W162 1
100.E4
100.E4
100.E4
.E4
.E4
104.B1
T1021_U
T1021_V
T1021_W
-X1021 2F
-X1021 1F
9 7
6 5 4
2A
Doc. des.
-X1021 2B
.E4
-W159 1
GSP_+DC -W160 1
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
104.B1
-Z1021
-Z1022
-V1022
VUO 60-12NO3
-XN
-W144 1
.E7
.B8
.D7
-W141 1
-PE1 5
/101.E1
5D 5A
5E 5B
5F 5C
-X230V
4 5 6
7 9

CONTROL
2006-09-29
.C8
.D8
.B5
4D 4A
4E 4B
4F 4C
1V8
1V7
1V6
1V5
1V4
1V3
1V2
1V1
2N
PE
.B7
.C6
/101.C1 /101.D1
-W581 1 -W582 1
-W140
1 3
-W143 1
4E
-X1021
Date
Date
.E3
.C5
3D 3A
3E 3B
3F 3C
.E6
.D6
.C6
A2
15 /287.C7
25
-W139 1
-V1021
.E4
-W142 1
-X1021 1E
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
.B5
.C8
2D 2A
2E 2B
2F 2C
L3
A1
18
16
28
26
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
.E3
.C5
1D 1A
1E 1B
1F 1C
L1
L2
-W138 1
-W137 1
2W 200V
380V 1W8
400V 1W7
415V 1W6
440V 1W5
460V 1W4
480V 1W3
500V 1W2
690V 1W1
-W136 1
DT
2V 200V
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V
690V
Name
E
F
G
H
VUO 60-12NO3
-T1021
Date
2U 200V
380V 1U8
400V 1U7
415V 1U6
440V 1U5
460V 1U4
480V 1U3
500V 1U2
690V 1U1
-F1021 EMR4-W500-2-C
Rev. ind.
-Q1041
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
1.13/287.C2
1.21
GSP_+DC
GSP_-DC
1+
3-
102.F6
102.F7
24+
-W060 1
-W061 1
-X3
65
66
INVERTER 1
GUSP
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
PULSE INTERFACE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
102
104
105
-W072 1
-W073 1
-Q1051
106.B1
106.B1
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
+DC
-DC
1.13/287.A3
1.21
CTRL_+DC
CTRL_-DC
1+
3-
102.C8
102.C8
24+
-W066 1
-W067
16
-X3
15
INVERTER 1
CONTROL
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
POWER STAGE CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
104
105
106
-W078 1
-W079 1
-Q1061
24+
107.B1
107.B1
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
+DC
-DC
1.13/287.A3
1.21
+DC
-DC
1+
3-
105.B8
105.B8
-W074 1
-W075
22
-X3
21
LSU 1
CONTROL
300VDC
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
105
106
107
-Q1071
1.13/287.B3
1.21
FAZ-2-DC
24+
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
-Q1073
1+
3-
-W092 1
-W093 1
+DC
-DC
1+
3-
106.B8
106.B8
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
120.A2
120.A2
WCU
CONTROL
300VDC
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
SUPPLY48V_P1
SUPPLY48V_N1
71
72
-X3
121.A5
121.A5
SUPPLY24V_P1
SUPPLY24V_N1
-W080 1
-W081 1
Rev. ind.

2006-09-29
WATER COOLING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
106
107
120
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_P2.1 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/240.C2
/251.A2
/298.A2
.E2
/283.A6
/245.D3
/281.A2
-X24_P2
2 3 4 5 6 7
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.B8
-X24_N2.1 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/240.C2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_P2
13
.B5
-W864 1
-X24_P2.1 13
.B7
-X24_N2
.C5
13
-W865 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.D8
/251.A2
/298.A2
/250.E4
.B8
.E2
-X24_N2
.C8
.E3
/250.E4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
/290.C2
14
2 3 4 5 6 7
/290.E5
/285.E7
.D2
/295.C4
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
/281.E1
U02
/283.E5
/245.D3
/295.C4
/281.A6
/290.B1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
-X24_P1 4
.B4
-X24_N1 4
2 3 4 5 6 7
-X24_N1 1
-W114 1
-W115
.D2
SUPPLY24V_P1 107.E6
-X24_P1 1
.D2
U01
/290.B5
250W
LWN
2660-6
N 2
-G1201
PE 1
-W109 1
-W110
-W111
-X24_N2.1 13
.C7
.C4
-W116 1
-PE1 9
/101.E1
-W117 1
-W118
-X24_P2 4
.B5
-X24_N2
4 14
.C5
-W119 1
-PE1 10
/101.E1
F
Rev. ind.
/101.E1
L 3
-PE1 8
3
SUPPLY24V_N1 107.E6
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
107
120
121
LWN
2660-6
U01
-W124 1
1
-W125
1 2 3 4
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14
-X24_N
1 2 3 4
.B8
-X24_N
.C8
-W123 1
CLAMP
DISTRIBUTOR
11 12 13 14
/285.F1
/282.C2
/283.F1
-X24_P
D
-X24_P
U02
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
/285.D1
/282.B2
/283.D1
-G1211
N 2
PE 1
-W120 1
-W121
-W122
.D5
SUPPLY48V_N1
/101.E1
.D5
-PE1 11
-PE1 12
/101.E1
F
Rev. ind.
5
107.E6
SUPPLY48V_P1
L 3
107.E6
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
EXTERNAL I/O
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
120
121
230
ON - LED ACTIVATION
-H2301
EMERGENCY STOP
-W218 1
SUPPLY ON
-W217 1
X1
FAULT/ALARM
240.C2
-A2511
/251.B2
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
X1
X2
-H2302
-W222 1
-W223 1
-W220 1
CDP312_2
-W213 1
X1
X2
X1
X2
-W221 1
-S2304
24
/285.A4 23
NDPI_02
-S2303
14
/283.C2 13
V2
-S2302
14
13
14
/285.A1 22
X2
V1
Name
-W216 1
14
13
-S2301
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
33
41
REF
34
42
RES
13
21
LOC
REM
-A2301
Date
EMERGENCY RESET
DRIVE
-W212 1
A
B
C
D
-W224 1
-W225 1
-W219 1
SUPPLY OFF
X1
X2
FUNC
ENTER
ALARM / FAULT
LED ACTIVATION
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO06
-A2521
/252.E2
-A2511
/251.B2
L1+ 24V B5
C5
L1- 0V A5
PAR
CDP 312R
ACT
B5 L1+ 24V
C5
A5 L1- 0V
B4 L1+ 24V
C4
A4 L1- 0V
PANEL
7
EMERGENCY OFF
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO07
-A2521
/252.E2
C1_P2_DO05
-A2521
/252.E2
-W214 1
-W215 1
FRONTDOOR
Rev. ind.

C1_P2_DO04
-A2521
/252.E2
B6 L1+ 24V
C6
A6 L1- 0V
B7 L1+ 24V
C7
A7 L1- 0V
C1_P1_DI04
C1_P1_DI05
LOCAL ON - ORDER
(PUSH BUTTON)
LOCAL OFF - ORDER

(PUSH BUTTON)
Date
Date

PANEL
2006-09-29
FRONTDOOR
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
121
230
240
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
230.E2
/120.B7
A709
A710
RX CH2
TX
A711
A712
RX CH3
TX
RX CH1
TX
A707
A708
DSP56311
RX CH0
TX
A705
A706
X17 PANEL & BUS

INTERFACE
RX INT0
TX
RS485
-W589 FO
-W590 FO
R P T2 S1 S0
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
FB_INU_RX
FB_INU_TX
F M T1 S3 S2
X14:1
X14:2
X14:3
X14:4
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
245.C7
245.C7
A701
A702
-A2401 AMC-BOARD
CDP312_2
Name
-W585 1
-W586 1
Date
-X24_P2.1 4
/120.C7
-X24_N2.1 4
Name
E
F
G
H
CONNECTED TO
=INU
ICMC0-ASIC
Date
Date
X1
64

AMC-BOARD
2006-09-29
EXTENSION
PORT
RX CH4
TX
A715
A716
RX CH5
TX
A717
A718
RX CH6
TX
A719
A720
RX CH7
TX
X501
FLASH
MEMORY
SUBPRINT
X502
-W605 FO
-W606 FO
A713
A714
PROM,SRAM
= COU1
+
TB820_RX
TB820_TX
RX INT1
TX
ICMC1-ASIC
Doc. des.
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
250.C7
250.D7
A703
A704
CONNECTED TO
=INU
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
230
240
245
-A2451
NPBA_A
NPBA_B
CUSTOMER
INTERFACE
NPBA-12
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
A
B
A
B
Data
Data
Data
Data
N
P
N
P
X2:8 SH
X2:7 DG
-X24_P2
-X24_N2
/120.B5
/120.C5
-W624 1
-W625 1
X2:5 +24V
X2:6 0V
DC
DC
GND
TXD
FB_INU_RX
240.E4
RXD
FB_INU_TX
240.E4
BUS
TERMINATION
ON
OFF
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

PROCESS INTERFACE
2006-09-29
PROFIBUS ADAPTER
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
240
245
250
-A2501 TB820V2
CLUSTER ADRESS
4 5 6
3
7
2
8
1 0 9
F
R
P
Rx1
Rx2
ERx
C
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
BUS
X4
X5
CONNECTED TO
WCU
TB820_RX
TB820_TX
240.E8
240.E8
A2511 251.E1
OUT
SB
L-
SA
L+
-W238 1 -W239 1
-X24_P2 15
/120.B5
-X24_N2
/120.C5
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
15
2006-09-29 Title INTERFACE AMC-BOARD

COUPLING DEVICE
2006-09-29
TB820
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
245
250
251
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
ALARM
C1_P1_DI11
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
TRIP
C1_P1_DI12
/PROCESS STOP
C1_P1_DI13
FEEDBACK STATUS
CLOSED
C1_P1_DI14
/INU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P1_DI15
/COU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C1_P1_DI16
C1_P1_DI09
C1_P1_DI10
/287.E4
/287.E2
/282.E3
C1_P1_DI08
/230.E5

EXTERNAL CTRL SEL
EXT1 / EXT2
/230.E4
C1_P1_DI07
/285.E6
STATUS
INU ISOLATOR2 OPEN
GROUNDING SWITCH2 CLOSED
C1_P1_DI06
STATUS
INU ISOLATOR2 CLOSED
GROUNDING SWITCH2 OPEN
C1_P1_DI05
-X24_N2
LOCAL OFF - ORDER

(PUSH BUTTON)
C1_P1_DI04
/120.C5
LOCAL ON - ORDER
(PUSH BUTTON)
/287.E7
-W242 1
-W243 1
Doc. des.
C1_P1_DI03
/120.B5

2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
/INU OPERATION PREVENTED
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B1
B10
C1
C10
A10
A1
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
BUS
Date
Date
C1_P1_DI02
L1+
L1L1-
-W240 1
-W241
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
/291.E8
/291.E2
6.3A L2+
L2+
L2L2-
-W244 1
-W245 1
OUT
A2521
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
24V_P2_1
24V_N2_1
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
C1_P1_DI01
6.3A L1+
-X24_P2
A2511
Name
E
F
G
H
-A2511 TU830
Date
250.D7
A
B
C
D
SUPERVISION
SUPERVISION
Rev. ind.
252.F1
252.F1
252.B1
250
251
252
C1_P2_DO03
C1_P2_DO04
ON - LED ACTIVATION
C1_P2_DO05

C1_P2_DO06
ALARM / FAULT
LED ACTIVATION
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO07
EMERGENCY OFF
(INDICATION LAMP)
C1_P2_DO08

ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
C1_P2_DO09
C1_P2_DO10
UPS ORDER TO ONLINE MODE

( /SHUT DOWN UPS)
C1_P2_DO12
ESTOP IN PROGRESS
(ACTIVATED)
C1_P2_DO11

2006-09-29
DO810 + TU830
C1_P2_DO13
C1_P2_DO14
ORDER ON COMMAND
Doc. des.
C1_P2_DO15
C1_P2_DO16
SUPERVISION
OUT
-W248 1
-W249 1
A2531
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
24V_P2_2
24V_N2_2
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
L2+
6.3A
L2+
L2L2-
C1_P2_DO02

ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER CLOSE COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
ORDER OPEN COMMAND
RESET - COMMAND
BUS
-W246 1
-W247 1
Date
Date
/283.B8
C1_P2_DO01
/230.B7
SUPERVISION
/230.B8
IN
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
/230.B5
A2521
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/230.B4
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
C10
A10
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AA
TU830
24V_P2_1
24V_N2_1
Name
E
F
G
H
L1+
6.3A
L1+
L1L1-
-A2521 DO810
Date
251.E8
A
B
C
D
251.A8
251.A8
Rev. ind.
253.E1
253.A1
253.A1
251
252
253
C1_P3_DI04
/CBU CHARGING
OVERLOAD
C1_P3_DI05
C1_P3_DI06
C1_P3_DI07
/EMERGENCY STOP
C1_P3_DI08
BUS
Date
Date
C1_P3_DI09
C1_P3_DI11
/EARTH FAULT
MAIN CIRCUIT ALARM2
C1_P3_DI12
C1_P3_DI13
A.) MCB STATUS OPEN

B.) /MCB1 OK
C1_P3_DI14

C1_P3_DI15
A.) MCB OK
B.) /MCB2 OK
C1_P3_DI16
/291.E3
/291.E7
/290.E4
/290.E1
/290.E2
/283.E8
/281.E8
/282.E5
Doc. des.
/282.E4
/282.E7
6.3A L2+
L2+
L2L2-
OUT
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
/EARTH FAULT
MAIN CIRCUIT ALARM1
/291.E4

2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
C1_P3_DI10
/291.E5
/CBU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B1
B10
C1
C10
A10
A1
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
C1_P3_DI03
L1+
L1L1-
/LSU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
6.3A L1+
-W250 1
-W251 1
C1_P3_DI02
Name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer

TEMPERATURE HIGH
24V_P2_2
24V_N2_2
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
Date
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
C1_P3_DI01
252.F8
252.F8
A2531
Name
E
F
G
H
/ARU3 CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
-A2531 TU830
Date
252.B8
A
B
C
D
SUPERVISION
SUPERVISION
Rev. ind.
A2541
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
254.B2
252
253
254
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
253.E8
Date
A2541
Name
Date
Date
A3
B4
/295.B6
A5
B6
/295.B7
A6
B7
/290.B5
A7
B8
/296.B1
A8
C1_P4_DO03
C1_P4_DO04
MCB -ORDER
CLOSE COMMAND
C1_P4_DO05
/MCB -ORDER
OPEN COMMAND
C1_P4_DO06
/MCB ORDER
TRIP
C1_P4_DO07

C1_P4_DO08
DRIVE CHARGED
(DC LINK VOLTAGE >
MCB CLOSING LEVEL)
A4
B5

(HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE)
BUS

2006-09-29
DO820 + TU831
/295.B5
C1_P4_DO02
A2
B3

(LOW VOLTAGE SIDE)
/290.B6
C1_P4_DO01
-A2541 DO820
A1
B2
IN
/290.B8
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AD
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
TU831
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
B1
OUT
-R2541
Doc. des.
TB807
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
IN
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
253
254
281
DOORS
CLOSED
DOORS
RELEASE
DEENERGIZE
-X24_P1 6
-X230V
/120.B4
-W316 1
22
24
-K2902
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
15
.E2
-W308 1
LOOP 2
-X3 6
-W310 1
4s
-W312 1
-W311 1
A1
A2
A2
-K2812
-W309 1
4s
11 .D6
21 .D8
31
E
F
G
H
Date
18 15 .C6
16
28 25 .D8
26
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
18
16
-K2813
/101.D1
26
28
25
-K2811
.E2
-W314 1
-XN
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
-W325 1
A2
18 15 .C6
16
28 25 .C8
26
GROUND
SWITCH
OPEN
-K2901
/290.B2
.E3
-W323 1
A1
-W313 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
10
LOOP 3
-K2814
-K2814
22
24
21
12
14
A1
A2
-W327 1
-W326 1
DOOR
CLOSED
-W322 1
11
A1
-K2811
.E3
25
10
-K2812
-W324 1
A1
-A2531
/253.B2
A2
14
14
12
24
22
34
32
Date
Date
28
26
A2
22
/290.B2
11 /290.B8
21 /285.C7
31 /285.A6
2006-09-29 Title CONVERTER MONITORING

DOORLOCK
2006-09-29
21
-K2902
-W321 1
11
15
.E3
14
12
21
12
DOOR
RELEASE
DEENERGIZE
-K2812
-W329 1
L2+ 24VB13
C13
L2- 0V A13
32
34
22
-W328 1
-W320 1
31
12
LOOP 1
11
.E3
11
DOOR 1
-XN
/101.D1
-K2814
A1
DOOR N
/120.C4
11
-K2811
-X24_N1 6
-W303 1
16
18
-X3 5
-X1 10
-W307 1
K3
-W318 1
285.A7
K2
/285.D1
-W306 1
-W304 1
24V_P1
14
-W300 1
-F2851
RELEASE
CLOSED
21
14
22
/290.B2
-X1 8
-W301 1
-X1 9
Rev. ind.
-W317 1
K1
13
21
-S2811
-X24_P1 16
11
/101.C1
-W305 1
-W299 1
SWINGFRAME
MONITORING
13
/120.B4
-W298 1
-X1 7
DOORS
CLOSED
CONTROL
C1_P3_DI13
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
254
281
282
PROCESS STOP
MCB STATUS
CLOSED
MCB STATUS
OPEN
/MCB
( PRESIGNAL &
TRIPPED )
-X24_P
-X2 79
-W331 1
80
81
-W333 1
82
31
-W334 1
32
EMERG_STOP
-X1 3
-W330 1
283.C4
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
-A2531
/253.B2
A1
12
14
-A2531
/253.B2
11
L2- 0V
/253.B2
-W354 1
L2+ 24VB16
C16
A16
-A2531
.C7
L2- 0V
L2- 0V
/251.B2
-W352
11 .D7
21
31
-K2825
L2+ 24VB14
C14
A14
11
-A2511
-W350
L2+ 24VB13
C13
A13
-W346
-K2824
.C6
14
12
24
22
34
32
-W355 1
11
-K2823
.C4
11 .D5
21
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
-W353 1
12
14
12
14
-K2821
-W341 1
12
14
-W351 1
-W347 1
.C3
-W340 1
11 .D4
21
31 /285.B6
14
12
24
22
34
32
-K2825
A2
-W338 1
11 .D3
21
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
A2
-W337 1
L2- 0V
12
11
/121.C8
-K2824
L2+ 24VB15
C15
A15
-X24_N
-K2823
A2
-K2821
-W345 1
A2
A1
A1
-W344 1
A1
-W343 1
-W336 1
Rev. ind.
/121.B8
12
C1_P1_DI13
C1_P3_DI15
C1_P3_DI14
C1_P3_DI16
/PROCESS STOP

A.) MCB STATUS OPEN

B.) /MCB1 OK
A.) MCB OK
B.) /MCB2 OK
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
281
282
283
EMERGENCY-STOP
LOOP (I>> -HW)
/EMERGENCY-STOP
-X24_P2
/120.B5
-X2 75
285.A4
76
-X2 59
60
-X2 17
18
-W367 1
26
28
-W361
-W370 1
-K2833
ESTOP IN PROGRESS
(ACTIVATED)
-A2521 A2521 DO12
19
20
/252.E2
-W366 1
-W368 1
-W369 1
-W866 1
25
.E7
-W363 1
14
/230.C7
-W360 1
-W365 1
K1
K3
K1
K1
K2
K2
K2
0,15s..10min
-W357 1
Date
Name
13
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
-W867 1
/120.C5
42
34
24
A2
PE
14
-X24_N2
A
B
C
D
33
K3
34
K3
-W377 1
-W379 1
-W374 1
-K2831
K2
.D1
24
K1
K2
K2
-F2831
41
.C7
K1
K3
K3
/121.C8
K2
.D1
-W373 1
.C8
33
13
T22
T12
T12
K3
K1
24V
-X24_N
-F2831
14
K2
T34
.C6
S1
X1
X2
T11
BN5930
24VDC
A1
-F2831
K2
.D1
K1
K1
K3
/121.B8
-W356 1
-F2831
13
23
-X24_P
25
.E5
K1
282.B7
-K2831
-W380 1
23
26
28
13
-S2304
-W372 1
13
-W364 1
-W358 1
28
26
.E6
-W378 1
EMERG_STOP
25
-K2832
Rev. ind.
-W359 1
-W371 1
-W362 1
A1
-K2832
A2 0,15s..10min
-W375 1
18 15 /285.C1
16
28 25 .C3
26

EMERGENCY STOP
2006-09-29
A1
A2
A1
-K2833
2s
A2
-W376 1
18 15 /285.C2
16
28 25 .C3
26
-A2531
/253.B2
18 15 /285.C1
16
28 25 .B3
26
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
L1-
ESR
/EMERGENCY-STOP
C8
0V A8
L1+ 24V B8
2
EMERGENCY-STOP
RESET
B12L2+ 24V
C12
A12 L2- 0V
A2531 DI08
/EMERGENCY STOP
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
282
283
285
-F2851
.D1
-W389 1
A
B
C
D
Date
/121.C8
Name
24
41
42
-A2511
/251.B2
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
42
Date
Date

EMERGENCY-OFF
2006-09-29
-Z2852
/120.C4

E
F
G
H
A1
-X24_N1 13
C1_P1_DI02
11
A2
K2
-W421 1
K2
34
K2
K1
.D1
K2
24
K1
14
K1
PE
A2
K3
22
24
A2
-K2851
A1
-F2851
K1
K2
K2
-W427 1
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
K1
-W425 1
-W422 1
K3
-X24_N
-W424 1
.D8
41 .D6
/290.C8
33
23
13
T22
K1
K3
K1
24V
T12
T12
K3
.B7
/281.A6
K2
T34
X2
S1
X1
-W388 1
BN5930
24VDC
-K2852
62
18
16
16
18
15
-W387 1
T11
-F2851
-W401 1
-W406 1
11
A1
D -X24_P
/121.B8
-K2813
/281.E6
61
15
/283.E6
-W386 1
-K2833
/283.E7
61
15
-K2832
-W426 1
-W423 1
.D7
-W409 1
-W385 1
62
16
18
-K2851
K2
K3
-W408 1
-K2831
/283.E5
295.B4
K1
31
-K2823
/282.C4
EMERG_LOOP_OK
/281.E6
-W407 1
-W398 1
-K2852
-K2813
-Z2851
2
1
24
/230.C7
-W399 1
-W395 1
23 24V_P1 281.A7
78
32
34
23
-W394 1
21
77
-S2304
ESR
-W397 1
-W396 1
Rev. ind.
22
/230.C3
EMERG. OFF 1
-W382
-X2 71 72 73 74
-W393 1
-S2301
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
-W390 1 -W391 1
-W392 1
21
-W383 1
-W840 1
-X1 51 52-X2 21
-W381 1
34
32
283.A2
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY RESET
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
31
2
EMERGENCY-OFF
CUBICLES
-W400 1
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
13
21
31
43
53
61
14
22
32
44
54
62
/296.B7 13
/296.C3 21
/296.C6 31
43
53
61
.C6
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
14
22
32
44
54
62
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
/296.C7
/296.C4
/296.C6
.C6
283
285
287
1.13
-Q1051
1.14
/105.C3
-W283 1
-W295 1
1.13
1.13
-W284 1
-Q1061
-Q2981
/298.A2
-W285 1
1.13
-W294 1
1.13
-Q1071
-Q1004
1.14
/100.C7
1.14
/107.C2
1.13
1.13
-W293 1
-Q1041
-Q1014
/104.C3
1.14
1.14
/101.C7
-W280 1
-W297 1
16
18
1.13
-W292 1
-Q1012
-F1021
/101.C4
1.14
/102.A1
15
-W296 1
1.13
-W279 1
-Q1011
1.14
/101.C2
C1_P1_DI12
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
TRIP
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
/251.B2
C1_P1_DI11
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
/AUXILIARIES SUPPLY
PROTECTION SWITCH
ALARM
Date
MONITORING
2006-09-29
Date
L1- 0V
-A2511
L1+ 24V B1
C1
A1
L2- 0V
/251.B2
C11
A11
-A2511
L2- 0V
/251.B2
C12
A12
-A2511
L2+ 24VB12
L2+ 24V B11
-W289 1
-W278 1
Rev. ind.
1.14
1.14
/106.C4
C1_P1_DI01
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
285
287
290
CBU GROUNDING
SWITCH CLOSED
CBU - HV
CHARGING ORDER
CBU - LV
CHARGING ORDER


(HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE)

(LOW VOLTAGE SIDE)
-A2541 C1_P4_DO07 -A2541 C1_P4_DO02

/254.E3
A1
/120.B4
-K2902
A1
B1
A2
-W441 1
/281.E6
-W448 1
33
-X24_N1 17
K1
A
B
C
D
Date
C1_P3_DI07
C1_P3_DI05
/CBU CHARGING
OVERLOAD
Name
/253.B2
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
/253.B2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-X24_N1 12
/120.C4
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
-XN
-W443 1
-X2 11
24V
L1-
L1+ 24V B7
C7
L1- 0V A7
-A2531
1
2
-W451 1
-W442 1
-W439
-Z2901
/100.C5
L1-
C6
0V A6
-A2531
A1
1.13
/100.C5
12
-Q1003
-Q1003
-W437 1
L1+ 24V B6
/101.C1
C1_P3_DI06
/253.B2
-X230V
C5
0V A5
-W436
-A2531
-W449 1
-K2902
.B2
K2
/285.D1
-W438 1
24
22
.B2
-F2851
-W445 1
K3
L1+ 24V B5
-K2901
-W444 1
-W435 1
21
11 .D3
21 /281.B4
31 /281.C7
11
-W434 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
1.14
11 /281.D6
21 .D2
31
14
12
24
22
34
32
34
/120.C4
14
12
A2
-W432 1
-W433 1
-K2813
A2
A2
-K2901
B2
-X24_P1 12
-W431 1
-W447 1
-W450
12
14
/120.B4
-W430 1
Rev. ind.
-X24_P1 17
A7
-W428 1
/254.E3
56
B7
54
55
-W429 1
-A2541 C1_P4_DO01
/254.E3
-W440 1
-X2 53
RELEASE CBU
GROUNDING SWITCH
ELECTRICAL LOCKING
A1
CBU GROUNDING
SWITCH OPEN
11
/101.D1
12
13
12
14
24V
TO CBU
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
287
290
291
LINE SIDE
CONTROL
LINE SIDE
-X1 1
1
2
61
DC LINK
(CBU)
LSU1
-W463 1
MOTOR SIDE
CBU
2
INU1
-W465 1
62
65
-W458 1
66
-X2 51
52
-X1 55
56
-W459 1
-W456 1
-B2911 KTO 1140

0...60C
C >
-W457 1 -W461 1
-W455 1
-W462 1
-W464 1
-W466 1 -W467 1
-W468 1
-W460 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
-A2511
/251.B2
L2+ 24VB15
C15
L2- 0V A15
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
-A2531
/253.B2
L1+ 24V B3
C3
L1- 0V A3
-A2531
/253.B2
L2+ 24VB16
C16
L2- 0V A16
-A2511
/251.B2
L1+ 24V B1
C1
L1- 0V A1
Rev. ind.
6
LINE SIDE
C1_P1_DI16
C1_P3_DI03
C1_P3_DI02
C1_P3_DI01
C1_P3_DI04
C1_P1_DI15
/COU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/LSU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH

TEMPERATURE HIGH
/ARU3 CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/CBU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
/INU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date

2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
290
291
295
A
MCB -ORDER
CLOSE COMMAND
/MCB -ORDER
OPEN COMMAND
/MCB ORDER
TRIP
-A2541 C1_P4_DO04 -A2541 C1_P4_DO05 -A2541 C1_P4_DO06
285.A8
-W516 1
-X24_P1 15
A6
A5
A4
-W520 1
EMERG_LOOP_OK
B6
/254.E3
B5
/254.E3
B4
-W521 1
-W517 1
-W518 1
/120.B4
-X24_N1 15
/120.C4
CONNECTED TO
INU
MCB
-K2952
-K2953
-W526 1
-W527 1
A1
-K2954
A2
-W525 1
A1
-K2951
A2
SIG X1.1 -W524
-K2950
A1
A2
24V X1.2 -W523
A2
A1
0V X1.3 -W522
A2
-W519 1
A1
-W801 1
-A2951 XV C769 AE101
-W528 1
A1
E
14
24
34
F
Rev. ind.
/254.E3
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
11 /296.C2
21 /296.D2
31 /296.D2
14
24
34
11 /296.C1
21 /296.D1
31 /296.D1

MCB INTERFACE
2006-09-29
CONTROL
14
12
24
22
34
32
11 /296.E3
21 /296.D3
31 /296.C3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
14
24
34
11 /296.D7
21 /296.D7
31 /296.C7
14
12
24
22
34
32
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
11 /296.E5
21 /296.D5
31 /296.C5
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
291
295
296
MCB
ORDER CLOSE
A
MCB
ORDER OPEN 1
COIL : (+)
MCB
ORDER OPEN 2
MCB
ORDER TRIP
(-)
DRIVE CHARGED
(DC LINK VOLTAGE >
MCB CLOSING LEVEL)
-A2541 C1_P4_DO08
/254.E3
-K2851
A8
B8
/285.D7
14
-W532 1
14
-W554 1
-W905 1
-K2852
-W533
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
34
31
31
/295.D7
32
-W544 1
-W552 1
-K2953
/295.D7
24
-W551 1
-W908 1
14
11
-K2954
/295.D7
11
-W550 1
-W542 1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-K2953
14
12
14
12
/295.D8
-W534 1
-W902 1
-K2953
/285.D8
-W545 1 -W543 1
-W906 1
11
34
31
/295.D6
-K2852
21
21
24
/295.D8
-W553 1
21
-W546 1
-K2952
/295.D5
/285.D7
-K2954
-W537 1 -W535 1
-K2950
-K2851
32
22
-W536 1
/295.D8
34
32
/285.D8
-W549 1 -W909 1
31
31
21
21
22
-K2954
-K2852
-X4 2
/295.D6
-W903 1
-W529 1
/285.D7
-W548 1
22
24
21
21
24
31
/295.D6
-K2851
-K2952
/295.D5
34
-K2951
-W547 1
-W541 1 -W907 1
-W538 1
-W904 1
-W530 1
/295.D6
-K2950
/295.D6
31
14
/295.D5
-W531 1
-K2951
-K2952
-K2950
34
32
11
/295.D6
-W540 1
22
24
-K2951
11
14
-W539 1
13
/285.D8
Rev. ind.
13
-W555 1
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
10

MCB INTERFACE
2006-09-29
52 51
53
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
54
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
295
296
298
-X24_N2
/120.C5
-X24_P2 7
1+
3-
-Q2981
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ-2-DC
>
0..60C
-W570 1
-W576 1
-B2981 KTS 01141
-W574 1
-W579 1
-W571 1
-X1 57
-W575 1
-W580 1
58
63 64
67 68
-W578 1
-W573 1
INU
-W577 1
-W572 1
CONNECTED TO
M
=
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
M
=
Name
M
=
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
M
=
Date
Date
-M1
M
=

COOLING FAN`S
2006-09-29
-M2
-M3
M
=
-M4
M
=
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
RD
BU
-M4
RD
BU
-M3
RD
BU
-M2
-E2982
RD
BU
RD
BU
RD
BU
-M1
RD
BU
RD
BU
-E2981
Rev. ind.
/120.B5
-W568 1
-W569 1
1.13/287.A4
1.21
M
=
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
296
298
800
=COU1
DC+
DC-
=INU:L1
=INU:L2
=INU:L3
=LSU:1L1
=LSU:1L2
=LSU:1L3
=LSU:2L3
=LSU:2L2
=LSU:2L1
PG
PE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad_403
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title MAIN CIRCUIT

FUNCTION EARTH
2006-09-29
PROTECTION EARTH
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= COU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227955E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
298
800
COMPONENT :
E
DOCUMENT :
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
ACS 6000 WATER COOLING UNIT

S/N: 403
WIRING DIAGRAM
=WCU1
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
FRONT PAGE
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
22.09.2006
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATD
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
No. of sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
16
001
002
title 1
4
title 2
001
002
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
500
501
502
520
521
522
523
540
541
545
554
571
573
574
SPACE HEATER
POWER SUPPLY
COUPLING DEVICE
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
WATER COOLING PUMP
THERMOSTAT
COOLING FAN`S
6
title 3
rev.
ind.
-
COOLING CONTROL
CONTROL
TB820
DI810 + TU830
DO820 + TU831
AI810 + TU830
3 - WAY VALVE
HEATING
F
Rev. ind.
page
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
INDEX SHEET
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
001
002
500
AUX POWER SUPPLY

3~400VAC
60Hz
COOLING PUMP 1
COOLING PUMP 2
POWER SUPPLY
COU
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
1
3
5
1
3
5
2
4
6
FN258-16/29
Cy
R1
Cx
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
L3_OUT
CONNECTED TO
COU
554.A4
554.A4
554.A4
554.A2
554.A3
554.A3
R2
R1
-W017 1/BN 2/BU 3/BK

-W020 1
-X513 1
2
3 -PE1 1
/502.C7
MOT2_U
MOT2_V
MOT2_W
MOT1_U
MOT1_V
MOT1_W
Cy
L2_OUT
L1_OUT
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
1/BN
2/BU
3/BK
-W010
Cx
Cx
-W006
E_IN
3*480VAC/16A
-Z5001
E_OUT
-W014 1
-W015
-W016
L3_IN
1.13 /540.A3
1.21
1.14
1.22
A2
2
4
6
A2
A1
L2_IN
/541.D4
L1_IN
13
21
A1
2
4
6
/541.D3
-Q5004
13
21
-Q5003
/540.A6 14
22
1.14
1.22
-Q5002
-W011 1
-W012 1
-W013 1
1
3
5
-W007 1
-W008 1
-W009 1
1.13 /540.A1
1.21
-W003 1
-W004 1
-W005 1
1
3
5
/540.A5 14
22
-F5001..3
2
4
6
-Q5001
Rev. ind.
-X1 1 2 3 PE
-W001
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
COOLING CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
002
500
501
230VAC
50/60Hz
A
-Q5011?
1/BN
2/BU
-PE1 2
/502.C7
2
4
-W031
1
3
FAZ
32
34
12
14
-W033 1
1
-W034
31
/545.D6
11
-K5451
-W035 1/BN
2/BU
GNYE
-X515 1 2
3 4
PE
CONNECTION
BOX
-E5011
SPACE HEATER
CONVERTER
F
Rev. ind.
-X2 1 2 PE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
SPACE HEATER
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
500
501
502
WCU CONTROL
300VDC
-
-PE1 5
.C7
2/BU
GNYE
-W043
1/BN
-PE1 3 -X511 1
.C7
-W059 1
-PE 2
.D7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
U02
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
U01
-PE1 1
250W
24V
LWN
2660-6
-G5021
PE
/500.E6
/501.B4
.B2
.B8
-W046 1
-W047
-W048 1
-W049
-W050
-W051
1
1
-PE
1
.B8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUNDING BAR
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
24V_N2
574.B2
574.B2
24V_P2
24V_N1
520.E4
520.E4
24V_P1
Rev. ind.
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
POWER SUPPLY
2006-09-29
CONTROL
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
501
502
520
TB820V2
CLUSTER ADRESS
4 5 6
3
7
2
8
1 0 9
F
R
P
Rx1
Rx2
ERx
X4
Tx2
Rx2
X5
CONNECTED TO
COU
Tx1
Rx1
BUS
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
521.E1
24V_P1
-W064 1
24V_N1
521.A1
521.A1
24V_N1
-W063 1
502.E2
502.E2
24V_P1
A5211
OUT
SB
L-
SA
L+
Rev. ind.
-A5201
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
COUPLING DEVICE
2006-09-29
TB820
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
502
520
521
-W065
-W068
-W067
24V_N1
24V_P1
L1+
L1+
L1-
Name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
C2_P1_DI02
WCU PUMP 1
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
C2_P1_DI03
WCU PUMP 2
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
C2_P1_DI04
WCU EXPANSION TANK L

(COOLING LIQUID
LOWLEVEL)
C2_P1_DI05
WCU EXPANSION TANK LL

(COOLING LIQUID
LOWLOWLEVEL)
C2_P1_DI06
WCU COOLING LIQUID

C2_P1_DI07
WCU COOLING LIQUID

LEAKAGE DETECTION
C2_P1_DI08
BUS
C2_P1_DI09
WCU CHILLER FAULT
C2_P1_DI11
WCU CHILLER ALARM
C2_P1_DI12
/WCU PROTECTION
SWITCH ALARM
C2_P1_DI13
/WCU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
C2_P1_DI14
C2_P1_DI15
Doc. des.
6.3A
/540.D6
/554.C7
/554.D7
/540.D8
/545.D2
L2+
L2+
L2L2-
OUT
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
A5221
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
C2_P1_DI16
/540.D5
C2_P1_DI10
/540.D3
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
DI810 + TU830
WCU CHILLER CONTACTOR

FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
/540.D1
Date
Date
WCU PUMP 2
STATUS CLOSED
B1
C1
A1
B2
C2
A2
B3
C3
A3
B4
C4
A4
B5
C5
A5
B6
C6
A6
B7
C7
A7
B8
C8
A8
B9
C9
A9
B10
C1
A1
B11
C11
A11
B12
C12
A12
B13
C13
A13
B14
C14
A14
B15
C15
A15
B16
C16
A16
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
WCU PUMP 1
STATUS CLOSED
L1-
C2_P1_DI01
SUPERVISION
24V_P1
-W066
TU830
DI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AA
IN
Date
24V_N1
-A5211
A5211
Name
E
F
G
H
6.3A
SUPERVISION
520.E7
Date
520.E7
A
B
C
D
520.D7
Rev. ind.
523.A1
523.A1
522.B2
520
521
522
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
521.E8
Date
A5221
Name
/541.B7
A5
B6
/541.B8
A6
B7
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
DO820 + TU831
A7
B8
A8
C2_P2_DO03
WCU COOLING PUMP 1

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO04
WCU COOLING PUMP 2

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO05
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

ORDER OPEN
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO06
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

ORDER CLOSE
COMMAND
A4
B5
MOTOR SPACE HEATER

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
/541.B4
C2_P2_DO02
BUS
A3
B4
Date
Date
/541.B3

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
A2
B3
C2_P2_DO01
-A5221 DO820
A1
B2
IN
/545.B6
F
R
W
O
KEY CODE
AD
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
TU831
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
B1
C2_P2_DO07
C2_P2_DO08
WCU CHILLER
ORDER ON
COMMAND
OUT
A5231
Doc. des.
523.E1
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
521
522
523
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
521.A8
521.A8
522.B7
Date
WCU COOLING WATER

C2_P3_AI05
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
C2_P3_AI06
C2_P3_AI07
Doc. des.
C2_P3_AI08
TB807
522
523
540
-W073 1 24V_P1
545.C5
-W074 1 24V_N1 545.E5
OUT
-R5231
= WCU1
+
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
IN
L2+
L2+
L2L2-
/545.D3
6.3A
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
FAIL SAFE E-OFF SUPERVISION
/554.E7
C2P3 SIGNAL AI7
/554.E5
C2_P3_AI04
/554.E4
MUX.
BUS
2006-09-29 Title
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
2006-09-29
AI810 + TU830
WCU COOLING WATER

TEMPERATURE (INTERNAL)TRANSDUCER
/554.E3
-W071 1
-W072 1
Date
Date
C2_P3_AI03
/554.E2
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer

OUTPUT SIDE PRESSURETRANSDUCER
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
C2_P3_AI02
L1+
L1+
L1L1-
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
B3
B4
C3
C4
A3
A4
B5
B6
C5
C6
A5
A6
B7
B8
C7
C8
A7
A8
B9
B10
C9
C10
A9
A10
B11
B12
C11
C12
A11
A12
B13
B14
C13
C14
A13
A14
B15
B16
C15
C16
A15
A16
C2_P3_AI01

24V_P1
24V_N1
TU830
AI810
F
R
W
KEY CODE
AE
IN
Date
WCU COOLING WATER

-A5231
A5231
Name
E
F
G
H
6.3A
-Q5002
1.13
13
-Q5741
/574.B4
-Q5003
/500.C4
14
/500.C2
1.14
1.14
/500.C4
1.14
-Q5003
/500.C2
14
-Q5002
13
1.13
1.13
1.13
-Q5011
1.14
-W095 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
-A5211
/521.B2
-W092 1
-W093 1
-A5211
/521.B2
-W097
-A5211
/521.B2
L2+ 24VB13
C13
L2- 0V A13
-W090 1
-W091 1
L1+ 24V B4
C4
L1- 0V A4
-A5211
/521.B2
L1+ 24V B1
C1
L1- 0V A1
-A5211
/521.B2
-W088 1
-W089 1
L1+ 24V B3
C3
L1- 0V A3
-W086 1
-W087 1
L1+ 24V B2
C2
L1- 0V A2
Rev. ind.
-W162 1
C2_P1_DI01
C2_P1_DI02
C2_P1_DI03
C2_P1_DI04
C2_P1_DI13
WCU PUMP 1
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 2
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 1
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
WCU PUMP 2
CONTACTOR-FEEDBACK
STATUS CLOSED
/WCU PROTECTION
SWITCH ALARM
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
523
540
541
WCU CONTROL
230VAC
60Hz
A6
B6
A5
B5
WCU 3-WAY VALVE

WCU 3-WAY VALVE
ORDER OPEN
ORDER CLOSE
COMMAND
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO05 -A5221 C2_P2_DO06
-A5221
/522.E3
/522.E3
A4
B4
-W160 1
WCU COOLING PUMP 2

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO04
-A5221
/522.E3
A3
2
230V~_N
230V~_L
-X512 1
WCU COOLING PUMP 1

CONTACTOR ORDER ON
COMMAND
C2_P2_DO03
-A5221
/522.E3
B3
-W101 1
-W102 1
-W103 1
C
-W100 1
-W106 1
-W108 1
-W107 1
-W109 1
14
12
24
22
34
32
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
WATER COOLING PUMP
2006-09-29
3 - WAY VALVE
11 .D7
21 .D8
31
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
21
22
24
-W110 1
554.A1 CLOSE_230V~_L
-K5542
.D6
554.A1 230V~_N
-W105 1
11
-K5542
.D6
554.A1 OPEN_230V~_L
-W104 1
-K5542
A2
-Z5412
12
14
A1
A1
-Q5003
/500.C4
A2
-Z5411
A2
-Q5002
/500.C2
A1
Rev. ind.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
540
541
545
B1
zero span
I
523.A8
24V_P1
-W158 1
-W159
-W116 1
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
C2_P3_AI06
/WCU CUBICLE
TEMPERATURE HIGH
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Date
A2
U I
MUX
C2_P1_DI14
E
F
G
H
-K5451
B11
B12
L2+ 24V
C11
C12
L2- 0V A11
A12
-A5231
/523.B2
L2+ 24VB14
C14
L2- 0V A14
A1
-W113 1
-W114 1
-A5211
/521.B2
Rev. ind.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4-20mA
-50-100C
2
3
-B5631
-B5451 KTO 1140

0..60C
>
A1

ORDER OFF
COMMAND
-A5221 C2_P2_DO01
/522.E3
PT100
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
523.A8
24V_N1
14
12
34
32
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
THERMOSTAT
2006-09-29
HEATING
11 /501.D3
31 /501.D3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
541
545
554
PE
-X554 U1
V1
W1
PE
-X554 U2
500.E4
MOT2_W
500.E4
MOT2_V
500.E4
MOT2_U
500.E2
MOT1_W
500.E2
MOT1_V
500.E2
MOT1_U
541.F7
541.F7
3
V2
W2
PE
-M5542
-B5523
Ref. to SW Doc. No. 3-9556-901

-B5503
-B5502
-B5501
bar
4...20
mA
4...20
mA
C2_P3_AI01
WCU COOLING WATER
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
5 6
7 8
9 10
U I
MUX
C2_P3_AI02
script_ecscad
Prepared
W.Kpfer
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
/523.B2
U I
MUX
-A5231
/523.B2
U I
MUX
L1- 0V
-A5231
L1+ 24V
/523.B2
L1- 0V
-A5231
B7
B8
C7
C8
A7
A8
3 4
B5
B6
C5
C6
A5
A6
9 10
L1+ 24V
U I
MUX
7 8
L1- 0V
L1+ 24V
/523.B2
1 2
L1+ 24V
-A5231
L1- 0V
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
-W122 1 2
3 4
B3
B4
C3
C4
A3
A4
-X551 5 6
C2_P3_AI03
C2_P3_AI04
WCU COOLING WATER
OUTPUT SIDE PRESSURETEMPERATURE (INTERNAL)TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
2006-09-29 Title
Date
2006-09-29
Date
L1+ 24V
L1- 0V
WCU COOLING LIQUID

WCU COOLING LIQUID

LEAKAGE DETECTION
-A5211
-X552
24VDC 10
LS 11
0V 12
5
/521.B2
4...20
mA
-X553 1
-A5211
2
3
-B5504 -B5524 -B5525
bar
4...20
mA
-W161 1
/521.B2
A8 C8B8
-X552
24VDC 7
LF
8
0V
9
C2_P1_DI07
-M5541
C2_P1_DI08
A7 C7B7
4
5
6
-A5231
/523.B2
L1+ 24V
L1- 0V
B9
L2+ 24V B10
C9
C10
L2- 0V A9
A10
-K5541
Rev. ind.
-X553 4
OPEN_230V~_L
CLOSE_230V~_L
230V~_N
541.F8
U I
MUX
C2_P3_AI05
WCU COOLING WATER
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
545
554
571
PROCESS STOP
NOT USED
/EMERGENCY-STOP
/EMERGENCY-STOP
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
/EXTERNAL
EMERGENCY-OFF
6
EMERGENCY-STOP
RESET
( OPTIONAL )
EMERGENCY-OFF
RESET
( OPTIONAL )
MCB STATUS
CLOSED
8
MCB STATUS
OPEN
/MCB
( PRESIGNAL &
TRIPPED )
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
CONNECTED TO
COU
F
Rev. ind.
-X17
PE
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
554
571
573
CONNECTED TO
COU
CONNECTED TO
COU
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
-X18
PE
MCB
ORDER CLOSE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
MCB
ORDER OPEN 1
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
MCB
ORDER OPEN 2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
INU OPERATION
PREVENTED
MOTOR 1
MCB
ORDER TRIP
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
571
573
574
-Q5741
24+
1.14
1.22
FAZ_DC
1.13/540.A8
1.21
1+
3-
>
M
=
-M2
M
=
-M3
-M4
M
=
RD
BU
RD
BU
RD
BU
-M1
2/BU
-E5741
RD
BU
-W156
1/BN
-B5741
-W155 1
M
=
F
Rev. ind.
502.E2 24V_P2
502.E2 24V_N2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
script_ecscad
W.Kpfer
ACS 6000
Date
Date
2006-09-29 Title
COOLING FAN`S
2006-09-29
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
= WCU1
+
Lang. EN
3BHS227354E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
573
574
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 INVERTER UNIT
DOCUMENT :
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-25
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R. SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-24
03-10-14
07.05.04
06-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
No. of sh.
17
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
1
2
4
5
400
401
402
403
404
405
410
411
412
413
415
416
420
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
LOCAL DC LINK
PHASE-LEG L1
PHASE-LEG L2
PHASE-LEG L3
EMC FILTER
AUX POWER SUPPLY
PULSE CONTROL AND
AC CURRENT AND DC VOLTAGE
DOOR MONITORING
H
H
E
E
F
E
E
E
H
E
E
H
H
G
G
DC - MEASUREMENT
CURRENT MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-24
03-10-14
07.05.04
06-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
DC+
DC_NP
DCDC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
UNIT BEFORE

C
*)
L1
L1
*)
L2
L2
UNIT BEFORE
*)
L3
L3
TERMINAL UNIT
SEE CONVERTER
HW DIAGRAM
OPTION
PG
NEXT UNIT
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
=COU or TEU
PG
PE
PE
*)
F
Rev. ind.
NEXT UNIT
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-24
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
4
5
-VC1
-C1
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-C2
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Prepared
Approved
Project name
-L4051
XDC_+
-G4021
-VC2
-L4011
-R4022/3
-R4024/5
-R4001
-A4001
Option
-C4001.1
-C4001
-R4053
-C4001.2
Phase Frame
-L4012 XDC_-
-R4052
-C4053
Date
Name
F
G
H
-C4052
-R4002
DC_+
DC_-
-R4051
-C4051
Name
Date
A
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
DC_NP
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
-R4034/5
Phase L1
-RS1
-R4032/3
-G4031
01-03-05
01-04-02
-VC2
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-RS1
Doc. des.
-R4042/3
-G4041
-VC2
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
-R4044/5
Phase L2
-C1
Title
-L4052
-VC1
-C2
-VC1
-C1
-VF4
-VF3
-VF2
-VF1
-VR4
-VR3
-VR2
-VR1
-VN2
-VN1
-L4053
Phase Frame
L1
L2
L3
Last sh.
4
5
400
-RS1
Phase L3
Phase Frame
= INU
+
Lang. E
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
-C2
A
DC_+
HVD
-U4001 XV C770 AE01
X2_1
-A4001
X2
DC_NP
X2_3
-W40008 UDC 413.B2
DC_NP
402.C1
DC_-
401.D1
OPTION LOCAL DC LINK

-W40004
DC_-
-R4001
X2_5
-C4001
-W40002 BK
C4001.1
DC_NP
C4001.2
-W40003 BK
-W40005
BK
-R4002
DC_-
F
Rev. ind.
DC_+
401.A1
BK
-W40001 BK
DC_+
Name
Date
A
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
LOCAL DC LINK
DC - MEASUREMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
5
400
401
-W40101 BK
A
400.A8
DC_+
-L4011
XDC_+
402.A1
-F4011 FSCD
S2
402.A7
Tx
Tx
5V
20V
50V
100V
110V
A1
CL_+
S1
A2
BK
-W40106
FSCD_EXT_+
-W40102 FO
D
400.F8
DC_-
-L4012
FSCD_+
=NEXT_UNIT
412.A4
XDC_-
402.F1
-F4012 FSCD
BK
-W40109
5V
20V
50V
100V
110V
402.F7
S1
A1
CL_-
S2
A2
-W40103 BK
Tx
Tx
-W40108 BK
FSCD_EXT_-
-W40104 FO
F
Rev. ind.
-W40105 BK
Name
Date
A
Date
Name
F 03-10-14 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
FSCD_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
=NEXT_UNIT
412.A5
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
400
401
402
X1:1 (-)
411.E2
GU_VF1U_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4022
-VC1
CL_+
403.A7
U
DC_NP
405.A1
403.C1
CL_XDC_-
403.F7
403.F1
-W40203
1
VF1.1
403.A1
-R4023
-W40202
GU_VF1U_1
411.E2
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
a
VF1U
XDC_+
412.E2
-W40204
411.E2
GU_VF2U_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
400.C8
DC_NP
412.E2
VF3U
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
411.E2
GU_VF3U_1
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E2
GU_VF3U_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR2
-VN1
-RS1
-C1
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2U_1
411.E2
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2U
412.E2
XCL+
XPH
DC_NP
-VN2
-C2
-VR3
CL_+
-W40201
c
-G4021
401.B4
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4U_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR4
-VC2
-R4024
-W40205
XDC_401.D8
401.E4
XDC_-
Name
Date
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L1
-W40208
2
411.E3
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4U_1
411.E3
412.E3
VF4.A1
-R4025
-W40206
-VF4 A1
VF4U
Rev. ind.
401.A8
-W40207
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
401
403
402
411.E4
GU_VF1V_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4032
-VC1
X1:1 (-)
VF1.1
XDC_+
404.A1
CL_+
404.A7
V
DC_NP
405.C1
404.C1
CL_XDC_-
404.F7
404.F1
-W40303
-R4033
GU_VF1V_1
411.E4
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
VF1V
CL_+
-W40301
-G4031
412.E3
-W40302
-W40304
XCL+
GU_VF2V_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
-VN1
-RS1
-C1
411.E5
-VR2
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2V_1
411.E5
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2V
412.E3
XPH
DC_NP
GU_VF3V_1
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E5
GU_VF3V_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR3
-VN2
-C2
411.E5
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
c
VF3V
412.E4
DC_NP
402.C8
402.A8
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4V_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR4
-VC2
-R4034
-W40305
XDC_402.F8
402.F8
XDC_-
Name
Date
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L2
-W40308
2
411.E5
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4V_1
411.E5
412.E4
VF4.A1
-R4035
-W40306
-VF4 A1
VF4V
Rev. ind.
402.A8
-W40307
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
402
404
403
X1:1 (-)
411.E7
GU_VF1W_2
VF1.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR1
-R4042
-VC1
VF1.1
-R4043
-W40402
GU_VF1W_1
411.E7
VF1.A1 -VF1 A1
a
VF1W
-W40403
412.E4
CL_+
-W40401
c
-G4041
403.A8
XDC_+
-W40404
XCL+
GU_VF2W_2
VF2.2
X1:2 (+)
403.C8
DC_NP
412.E5
VF3W
VF3.A1-VF3 A1
411.E8
GU_VF3W_1
VF3.1
X1:1 (-)
411.E8
GU_VF3W_2
VF3.2
X1:2 (+)
-VN1
-RS1
-C1
411.E7
-VR2
X1:1 (-)
VF2.1
GU_VF2W_1
411.E7
VF2.A1-VF2 A1
c
VF2W
412.E5
XPH
W
DC_NP
DC_NP
-VN2
405.D1
405.F1
-C2
-VR3
8
XDC_+
XDC_+
XCL-
GU_VF4W_2
VF4.2
X1:2 (+)
-VR4
-VC2
-R4044
-W40405
XDC_403.F8
403.F8
XDC_-
Name
Date
B 01-07-25 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
PHASE-LEG L3
-W40408
2
411.E8
X1:1 (-)
VF4.1
GU_VF4W_1
411.E8
412.E5
VF4.A1
-R4045
-W40406
-VF4 A1
VF4W
Rev. ind.
403.A8
-W40407
CL_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
XDC_-
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
403
405
404
1
402.C8
-L4051
-T4051
L1
=TEU OR COU *)
IU_IU_M
IU_+
413.C2
413.C2
413.C2
+
M
-
-Z4051
3
2
-W40501 1
B
403.C8
-L4052
-T4052
L2
=TEU OR COU *)
+
M
-
3
2
-W40502 1
-W40511
-L4053
IV_IV_M
IV_+
-T4053
-C4051
-W40512
-C4052
-C4053
413.D2
413.C2
413.C2
L3
=TEU OR COU *)
2
1
BK
3
2
-W40503 1
-R4053
DC_NP
Name
Date
A
C
DC_NP
Date
Name
F
G
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
-W40540
Title
BK
-W40509
BK
-W40508
-W40506
IW_IW_M
IW_+
Phase Module Frame
404.C8
BK
-W40507
BK
-R4052
-R4051
-W40505
BK
-W40504
BK
+
M
-
404.C8
Rev. ind.
-W40510
EMC FILTER
CURRENT MEASUREMENT
413.C2
413.C2
413.C2
*) SEE CONVERTER HW DIAGRAM
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
404
410
405
411.A7
GUSP3_0V_2
-W41027
BK
Prepared
Approved
Project name
U0
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
GNYE
BU
BN
GUSP3_+27V_2 -W41019 BK
L 3
411.A8
GUSP3_0V_1
411.A7
N 2
PHASE L2
GUSP3_+27V_1 -W41017 BK
PHASE L1
411.A8
-W41016 BK
411.A5
GUSP2_0V_2
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
411.A5
GUSP2_+27V_2 -W41015 BK
-W41014 BK
=COU
PE
GUSP2_0V_1
=COU
411.A5
BN
GUSP2_+27V_1 -W41013 BK
L 3
BU
-X411 PE
411.A5
-W41012 BK
GNYE
-W41002
GUSP1_0V_2
N 2
-W41001
411.A2
LXN
1604-6
411.A2
GUSP1_+27V_2 -W41011 BK
-W41010 BK
-G4102
GUSP1_0V_1
LXN
1604-6
411.A2
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
U0
Date
Name
F
G
H
GUSP1_+27V_1 -W41009 BK
-G4101
-W41026
BK
Name
Date
A
C
411.A2
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
-G4103
5
PE
BU
BN
PHASE L3
GNYE
6
7
BN
=COU
=COU
CONTROL
BU
L 3
GNYE
N 2
PE
PE 1
-W41004
-W41023 BK
-W41024 BK
-W41025 BK
U02
413.E2
412.A8
412.A8
ADCVI_+24V
INT_+24V
INT_0V
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
U01
-W41021 BK
-W41022 BK
L 3
LWN
2660-6
-W41029
BK
= INU
+
Lang. E
ADCVI_0V
ADCVI_-24V
N 2
-G4104
Doc. des.
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
413.E2
413.E2
-W41003
U0
AUX POWER SUPPLY
-W41020 BK
LXN
1604-6
Title
-W41028
BK
01-03-05
01-04-02
-W41018 BK
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX1
11 AUX2
12
PE
405
410
411
-W41030
PE
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
PHASE L3
PHASE L2
410.F5
410.F6
410.F5
410.F6
3
5
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP2 -W41110
X1.1 GUSP2_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP2_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP2_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP2_+27V_2
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
DC
AC
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
0V
+27V
FO
412.A3
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
Title
GU_VF2V_1 -W41109
GU_VF2V_2 -W41109
=VLU_RBU/BCU/3
2) =VLU_RBU/BCU/4
GU_VF3V_1 -W41106
403.D1
GU_VF3V_2 -W41106
403.D1
GU_VF4V_1 -W41107
403.E1
GU_VF4V_2 -W41107
403.E1
403.C1
403.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
=CBU_DIU/3
1) =CBU_DIU/4
GU_VF1V_1 -W41108 SH
403.B1
GU_VF1V_2 -W41108 COAX
403.B1
1 2
01-03-05
01-04-02
410.F3
410.F4
410.F3
410.F4
-G4112
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
Date
Date
410.F1
410.F2
410.F1
410.F2
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP1-W41105
X1.1 GUSP1_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP1_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP1_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP1_+27V_2
PHASE L1
DC
AC
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
0V
+27V
FO
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
412.A3
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
Date
Name
F
G
H
GU_VF2U_1 -W41104
GU_VF2U_2 -W41104
=VLU_RBU/BCU/1
2) =VLU_RBU/BCU/2
GU_VF3U_1 -W41101
402.D1
GU_VF3U_2 -W41101
402.D1
GU_VF4U_1
-W41102
402.E1
GU_VF4U_2 -W41102
402.E1
402.C1
402.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
Only used for INU1

=CBU_DIU/1
1) =CBU_DIU/2
GU_VF1U_1 -W41103 SH
402.B1
GU_VF1U_2 -W41103 COAX
402.B1
2) In case of VLU/RBU/BCU
-G4111
3) In case of one or two LSU

4) In case of two LSU
1 2
Name
Date
A
1) In case of DIU
F
Rev. ind.
-G4113
0V
+27V
X1.1 GUSP3_0V_1
X1.2 GUSP3_0V_2
X1.3 GUSP3_+27V_1
X1.4 GUSP3_+27V_2
GUSP
KU C755 AE105 /
AE106
DC
Subprint:
1: 3BHB003688R0101
2: 3BHB005245R0101
A1
PWF_GUSP3 -W41115
AC
410
411
Last sh.
412
SH
COAX
SH
COAX
2 2 2 2
= INU
+
Lang. E
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
FO
412.A3
SH
COAX
1 2
GU_VF2W_1 -W41114
GU_VF2W_2 -W41114
=LSU1_EAF/1
3)=LSU1_EAF/2
GU_VF3W_1 -W41111
404.D1
GU_VF3W_2 -W41111
404.D1
GU_VF4W_1 -W41112
404.E1
GU_VF4W_2 -W41112
404.E1
404.C1
404.C1
X3.11
X3.12
X3.21
X3.22
X3.31
X3.32
X3.41
X3.42
X3.51
X3.52
X3.61
X3.62
X3.71
X3.72
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
Doc. des.
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
=LSU2_EAF/1
4)=LSU2_EAF/2
GU_VF1W_1 -W41113 SH
404.B1
GU_VF1W_2 -W41113 COAX
404.B1
402.E1
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
403.B1
403.D1
Date
Date
404.A1
01-03-05
01-04-02
404.B1
VF4U
-W41204 FO
VF1V
-W41205 FO
VF2V
-W41206 FO
VF3V
-W41207 FO
VF4V
-W41208 FO
VF1W
-W41209 FO
VF2W
-W41210 FO
VF3W
-W41211 FO
VF4W
-W41212 FO
A812
A704
A703
V568
V567
V566
V565
V564
V563
V562
V561
A816
A641
A205
PWF_GUSP3
411.E8
A206
PWF_GUSP2
411.E6
411.E3
A803
A207
PWF_GUSP1
A813
A208
IOC1
A705
A203
IOC2
413.B7
A805
A204
FSCD_+
401.C7
A804
A210
FSCD_-
401.F7
A814
A202
VLSCD/FSCD_EXT_+ =UNIT_BEFORE
A815
A201
VLSCD/FSCD_EXT_- =UNIT_BEFORE
413.B7
If pos. 34 =2
In case of double VLU
for INU1 & INU2
A715
A714
1) FB+
1) CTRL+
1) FB1) CTRL-
A531
A592
A541
A302
A551
A402
A211
A722
A212
A723
Doc. des.
ATDD
MCB
=COU
2) FT_LINK_TX
=NEXT_UNIT FT_LINK_RX
=UNIT_BEFORE
2)
VLU_LINK_TX
ADCVI_D_RX
ADCVI_D_TX
ADCVI_C_RX
ADCVI_C_TX
AMC3_B_RX
A303
A593
A594
A304
A724
A209
A403
AMC3_B_TX
AMC3_A_RX
AMC3_A_TX
A404
413.C7
413.C7
413.C7
413.C7
=COU
=COU
=COU
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
A712
A713
VLU_LINK_RX
only for INU1 or

If pos. 34 = 2
In case of double VLU for INU1 & INU2
PULSE CONTROL AND

404.E1
-W41203 FO
V591
Title
404.D1
VF3U
A802
403.E1
-W41202 FO

Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
403.A1
VF2U
A818
A817
A702
402.D1
-W41201 FO
only for INU1
INT-BOARD
UFC760BE42
/ BE142
Date
Name
F
G 04-05-10 P.OBERLE
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
402.B1
VF1U
-A4121
2) In case of semi-redundant INU connected to INU-PUB/PFF
If you have a
Double INU + LSU,
make this conection
Name
Date
A
1) Connected to VLU/CBU (DIU), RBU or BCU
402.A1
F
Rev. ind.
=COU
= INU
+
Lang. E
+24V 2
0V
+24V 1
X1:3
X1:2
X1:1
INT_+24V
INT_0V
-W41213
410.F8
410.F8
411
412
Last sh.
413
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
V103
V113
A4
A6
-W41311 FO
-W41301 FO
IOC2
IOC1
A8
A1
-W41302 FO
-W41303 FO
ADCVI_C_RX
ADCVI_C_TX
A9
A2
-W41304 FO
-W41305 FO
ADCVI_D_RX
ADCVI_D_TX
400.B5
405.B7
405.B7
405.B7
405.E7
405.E7
405.E7
405.C7
405.C7
405.C7
UDC
UF C762 AE101
-A4132
X21
9
IU_+
IU_M
IU_-
X3:1
X3:2
X3:3
IW_+
IW_M
IW_-
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
IV_+
IV_M
IV_-
X6:1
X6:2
X6:3
SVA
XV C767
FOR VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT
sub-D
-A4133
SCA
+24V XV C768
FOR CURRENT
-24V ADJUSTMENT
X7:1
X7:2
X7:3
412.A4
412.A4
412.A6
412.A6
412.A6
412.A6
A10
A3
X8:1
X8:2
X8:3
410.F8
410.F7
410.F7
F
Rev. ind.
-A4131
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
ADCVI_+24V
ADCVI_0V
ADCVI_-24V
Date
Name
F
G
H 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
Prepared
Approved
Project name
+15V
-15V
+5V
GND
+24V
0V POWER
-24V SUPPLY
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
Doc. des.
MEASUREMENT
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
412
413
415
Rev. ind.
Name
2
3
PE
14
1) 2)
21
1) 2)
GNYE
PE
-W41505
BN
BU
13
-W41503 BK
GNYE
20
-X412
M
-M2 1~
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41504
BN
BU
-X412
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X412
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
M
-M1 1~
-X4151
230VAC
-X412
-W41502
12
11
BK
BK
-X4152
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-W41501
>
-E4151
Date
Name
E
F
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
OPTION
0...60C
Date
-B4151 KTS 01141
A
B
C
D
4
-E4152
Date
Date
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X4154
M
-M2 1~
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41506
BN
BU
GNYE
-W41507
BN
BU
GNYE
22
15
PE
23
16
PE
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
Title
M
-M1 1~
03-10-10
03-10-14
-X4153
-E4153
Doc. des.
M
-M2 1~
= INU
+
Lang. E
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-X4156
1
1
2
2
3
3
PE PE
-W41508
BN
BU
GNYE
-W41509
BN
BU
GNYE
24
17
PE
25
PE
18
Last sh.
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
2L1
L
N BN 2L2
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-X4155
M
-M1 1~
ATDD
3BHS119662E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
1L1
L
N BN 1L2
BU 1PE
YE/GN
413
415
416
OPTION
A
24VDC
4
RD
BU
1
2
-X4161

1
2
-W41601
1) 2)
1
2
-X413
-E4161
RD
BU
M
=
F
Rev. ind.
1) 2)
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-10
03-10-14
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
415
Cont.sh.
420
Sh.no.
416
DOOR 1
MONITORING
DOOR 2
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
MONITORING
>
32
BK
BK
-W42005
-X413
10
5
9
DOOR_LOCK
4
8
LOOP 2
-W42004
22
21
0..60C
-B4201 KTO 1140
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
A2
11
2
6
-W42003
2
2
-X412
-W42002
ACTUATOR
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
C
-W42001
A1
14
22
-S4203
13
21
14
22
-S4202
13
21
-S4201
12
=COU
1)
=COU
DOOR_LOCK
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
1)
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 2
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
LOOP 3
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 3
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
LOOP 1
FROM COU OR
UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR
NEXT UNIT
LOOP 1
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
13.03.01
01-07-26
01-08-07
01-08-09
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R. SEILER
P. OBERLE
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
E 03-06-24
F 03-10-14
G 07.05.04
H
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-05
01-04-02
Title
DOOR MONITORING
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= INU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119662E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
416
420
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 LINE SUPPLY UNIT, 12 PULSE
DOCUMENT :
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
01-07-23
01-08-10
02-07-09
02-10-23
Name
R. SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-25
03-10-30
07.05.04
05-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
No. of sh.
12
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
POWER STAGE
300
PHASE-LEG 1L1/2L1
301
PHASE-LEG 1L2/2L2
302
PHASE-LEG 1L3/2L3
302A
RECTIFIER SNUBBER CIRCUIT & CROWBAR
E
HOKES
310
PULSE INTERFACE
311
315
320
DOOR MONITORING
G
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
01-07-24
01-08-10
02-07-09
02-10-23
Name
R. SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
E
F
G
H
Date
03-06-25
03-10-30
07.05.04
05-07-06
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
ST.DUSS
P.OBERLE
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
1
2
4
DC BUS middle
DC+
UNIT BEFORE
DC+
DC-
DC-
DC BUS front
OPTION
DC+
DC+
DC_-
DC_+
DCDC_-
DCDC_+
CABLE
DC_NP

C
=COU or TEU
-1L1 *)
2L2
-2L3
UNIT BEFORE
F
A
B
C
D
Date
2L3
YE/GN
2L3
TERMINAL UNIT
SEE CONVERTER
HW DIAGRAM
-W401
OPTION
Name
-W402
PG
PG
PE
PE
Date
Name
E
F
G
H 05-07-06 P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ST.DUSS
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-25
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
NEXT UNIT
2L1
-2L2
Pipe behind -T3018
2L2
-2L1
YE/GN
2L1
1L3
Pipe behind -T3008
1L3
DC_NP
1L2
-1L3
DC_-
1L2
1L1
-1L2
DC_+
1L1
Rev. ind.
NEXT UNIT
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
2
4
5
XDC_+
-V3006
-V3007
-V3016
-V3017
-V3026
-V3027
-C3021
-V3005
-V3008
-V3015
-V3018
-V3025
-V3028
-R3021
-L3021
DC_+
1L1
1L2
1L3
C
XDC_NP
-V3004
-V3001
-V3014
-V3011
-V3024
-V3021
-R3022
-V3003
-V3002
-V3013
-V3012
-V3023
-V3022
-C3022
-R3023
DC_NP
D
2L1
2L2
2L3
XDC_-
F
Rev. ind.
Date
A 19.07.01
B 01-08-10
C
D 02-10-23
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
POWER STAGE
-L3022
DC_-
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
300
XDC_+
XDC_+
-W30013 BK
310.F5
310.F5
T3007_2
T3007_1
wt
-T3008
c
a
-V3005
-V3007
rd
302A.C4
310.F6
310.F6
T3008_2
T3008_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
rd
-V3008
-W30007 BK
-W30008 BK
RC_+_0P
XDC_NP
310.F3
310.F3
T3001_2
T3001_1
wt
XDC_NP_C1
-W30012 BK
XDC_NP_C2
-T3002
c
a
-V3003
XDC_NP
310.F4
310.F4
T3002_2
T3002_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
wt
rd
-V3002
XDC_-_C
XDC_-
301.F2
XDC_-
Date
Name
F
G
H
301.C1
301.C2
-V3001
rd
-W30010 BK
Name
Date
A
301.C2
-W30003 BK
-W30004 BK
2L1
8
7
6
5
-V3004
4
3
2
1
-T3001
-W30011 BK
-W30001 BK
-W30002 BK
301.A2
-W30005 BK
-W30006 BK
1L1
8
7
6
5
Rev. ind.
-V3006
4
3
2
1
-T3007
XDC_+_C
RC_+
302A.B4
301.A1
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L1/2L1
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
301.F1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
300
301
-W30113 BK
-T3018
c
a
-V3015
310.F7
310.F6
T3018_2
T3018_1
XDC_NP_C1
XDC_NP_C2
wt
rd
-V3018
-W30101 BK
-W30102 BK
-V3014
-T3011
310.F4
310.F4
T3011_2
T3011_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
-W30111 BK
XDC_NP_C1
-W30112 BK
XDC_NP_C2
-T3012
-V3013
XDC_NP
302.C1
302.C2
-V3011
rd
310.F5
310.F5
T3012_2
T3012_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
wt
rd
-V3012
-W30110 BK
XDC_-_C
XDC_-_C
302.F2
XDC_-
XDC_-
Name
Date
A
302.C2
-W30103 BK
-W30104 BK
2L2
300.F7
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-W30107 BK
-W30108 BK
300.C7
rd
300.C7
302.A2
-V3017
XDC_NP
XDC_+_C
302.A1
-W30105 BK
-W30106 BK
1L2
wt
T3017_2
T3017_1
8
7
6
5
310.F6
310.F6
4
3
2
1
-T3017
c
a
Rev. ind.
XDC_+_C
-V3016
7
XDC_+
300.A7
300.F8
XDC_+
300.C8
300.A8
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L2/2L2
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
302.F1
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
300
301
302
-T3028
c
310.F6
310.F6
T3028_2
T3028_1
8
7
6
5
wt
rd
-V3028
-W30207 BK
-W30208 BK
XDC_NP_C1
XDC_NP
XDC_NP_C2
-V3024
-T3021
310.F4
310.F3
T3021_2
T3021_1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
wt
-V3021
rd
wt
rd
-W30203 BK
-W30204 BK
2L3
-T3022
-V3023
302A.E4
RC_-
310.F4
310.F4
T3022_2
T3022_1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
-V3022
-W30220 BK
XDC_-_C
XDC_-
XDC_-
Name
Date
A
302A.C2
-W30201 BK
-W30202 BK
RC_-_0P
302A.C4
301.F7
4
3
2
1
301.C7
rd
301.C7
-V3027
XDC_NP
302A.B2
-W30205 BK
-W30206 BK
wt
T3027_2
T3027_1
8
7
6
5
310.F5
310.F5
4
3
2
1
-T3027
1L3
-V3025
Rev. ind.
XDC_+_C
-V3026
7
XDC_+
301.A7
301.F8
XDC_+
301.C8
301.A8
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
PHASE-LEG 1L3/2L3
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
302A.E2
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
301
302
302A
IF LSU 14MVA
DC+
DC+
DC+
DC+
XDC_+
302.A8
-W30209 BK
RC_+
300.A3
RC_+_0P
300.C3
RC_-_0P
302.D3
-L3021
-C3021
-W30210 BK
-R3021
C
-W30211 BK
XDC_NP
302.C8
XDC_NP
-R3023
-W30212 BK
-W412104 BK
-W30213 BK
-R3022
DC_NP
CABLE TO NEAREST
UNIT EQUIPPED WITH
NP-BAR
-W30217 BK
EAF2
311.A5
-W30216 BK
EAF1
311.A5
-W30214 BK
-C3022
XDC_-
OPTION
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
302.E3
-L3022
IF LSU 14MVA
IF LSU1
302.F8
RC_-
IF LSU2
-W30215 BK
Rev. ind.
IF LSU2
IF LSU1
OPTION
DC-
DC-
DC-
DCE
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-05-07
03-06-25
Title
RECTIFIER SNUBBER CIRCUIT

& CROWBAR CHOKES
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
302
302A
310
Rev. ind.
Name
Date
C
-A3101
= NEXT_UNIT FT_LINK
X23:1
X23:2
X24:1
X24:2
X26:1
X26:2
X1:1
X1:2
X2:1
X2:2
-W31016 BK
BK
1
N
L
X25:1
X25:2
-W31015
1
2 +
3 +
4 5 6 +
7 +
8 9 10 AUX
11
X22:1
X22:2
11
T3018_1
T3018_2
10
12
Doc. des.
301.C4
301.C4
X21:1
X21:2
-W31001 BN
BU
GNYE
PULSE INTERFACE
ATDD
3BHS119885E01
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
302.C4
302.C4
T3028_1
T3028_2
=COUx
=COUx
T3008_1
T3008_2
X16:1
X16:2
-X311 1
2
PE
PE
300.C4
300.C4
X15:1
X15:2
LWN
1902-6
T3017_1
T3017_2
X14:1
X14:2
-G3101
301.B4
301.B4
X13:1
X13:2
-W31030
T3027_1
T3027_2
X12:1
X12:2
U0
302.B4
302.B4
X11:1
X11:2
PE
T3007_1
T3007_2
FT_LINK= UNIT_BEFORE
-W31014 BK
Title
300.B4
300.B4
-W31002
1
2
-W31003
1
2
-W31004
1
2
-W31005
1
2
-W31006
1
2
-W31007
1
2
-W31008
1
2
-W31009
1
2
-W31010
1
2
-W31011
1
2
-W31012
1
2
-W31013
1
2
FSCD+= UNIT_BEFORE
FSCD-= UNIT_BEFORE
LOGIC
T3012_1
T3012_2
01-03-06
01-08-07
301.E4
301.E4
T3022_1
T3022_2
Date
Date
302.E4
302.E4
T3002_1
T3002_2
300.E4
300.E4
T3011_1
T3011_2
301.D4
301.D4
T3021_1
T3021_2
302.D4
302.D4
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
T3001_1
T3001_2
CHANNEL 1
RX0
RX1
CHANNEL 1+2
RX2
CHANNEL 2
RX3
RX4
CHANNEL 1
TX0
TX1
CHANNEL 1+2
TX2
CHANNEL 2
TX3
TX4
Prepared
Approved
Project name
ACS 6000
300.D4
300.D4
PINT
DD C779 BE02
Date
Name
F
G
H
= NEXT_UNIT FSCD+
= NEXT_UNIT FSCD-
= LSU
+
Lang. E
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
302A
310
311
302A.D7
302A.D7
CONFIGURATION
WITH
3/5MVA
IF
NO
DC
SAFE
LINE
VOLTAGE
-V3111
VUO 60-12NO3
C
-T3111
EES 50
X230:1
X40:1
OR
SUPPLY
1
3
-W31103
BK
4
5
6
-W31105
BK
7
9
-F3111
EAF
UF C765 AE102
BK
-W31104
BK
-W31106
Sig_In
Sig_Gnd
X1
X2
COAX
X40:2
X3:2 5AF
X3:1
SH
X230:2
OTHER
DRIVE
TX
=INUx
(to
Master
Int-Board)
Pwr_In
Pwr_Gnd
S1
ON
OFF
SH
ALL
A1
1234
1150V
825V
660V
500V
2 PE
-W31102
COAX
-W31101
INU
230V
-X314 1
OPTION
-X173
BN
BU
YEGN
POWER ON
CONFIGURATION
E
=INUx
=INUx
F
Rev. ind.
=INU
DRIVE
SINGLE
EAF1
EAF2
-C3111
IF
Name
Date
A 01-07-24 R.SEILER
C
Date
Name
E
F 03-10-30 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
310
311
315
OPTION
A
230VAC
1) 2)
1) 2)
12
M
-M1 1~
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
Date
E
F
G 07.05.04
H
Name
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
14
PE
GNYE
BN
BU
-W31505
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
-X3152
-X3151
-E3151
1L1
L
BN 1L2
N
BU 1PE
YE/GN
BN
BU
-W31504
>
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
KTS 01141
0...60C
-B3151
PE
-X312
21
-X312
2L1
L
BN 2L2
N
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-X312
13
BK
GNYE
-W31502
BK
-W31501
BK
-W31503
20
-X312
11
Rev. ind.
M
-M2 1~
ST.DUSS
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-30
03-10-31
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
311
Cont.sh.
320
Sh.no.
315
DOOR
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
MONITORING
-B3201 KTO 1140

0..60C
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
21
A2
11
>
ACTUATOR
32
22
A1
14
22
-S3202
13
21
-S3201
12
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
BK
-W32006
-X313
BK
-W32005
6
10
3
7
2
6
TO COU OR LOOP 3
NEXT UNIT
TO COU OR LOOP 1
NEXT UNIT
-W32003
FROM COU OR LOOP 3

UNITBEFORE
-X312
FROM COU OR LOOP 1

UNIT BEFORE
-W32001
=COU
=COU

UNIT BEFORE
1) DOOR_LOCK
FROM COU OR LOOP 2

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 2
NEXT UNIT
UNIT BEFORE
1) DOOR_LOCK
Rev. ind.
Name
Date
C
Date
Name
F
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
S.SCHLEGEL
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-06
01-08-07
Title
DOOR MONITORING
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= LSU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119885E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
315
320
F
Rev. ind.
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
COMPONENT :
ACS 6000 CAPACITOR BANK UNIT
DOCUMENT :
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
FRONT PAGE
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
No. of sh.
16
Cont.sh.
Sh.no.
page
title 1
title 2
1
2
4
5
6
700
701
703
705
708
709
710
712
713
715
720
rev.
ind.
title 3
FRONT PAGE
INDEX SHEET
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
BALANCING RESISTORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
DC LINK CAPACITORS
GROUNDING NETWORK
CHARGING UNIT
DISCHARGING UNIT
EARTHING ISOLATOR
DOOR MONITORING
I
I
I
F
G
F
F
F
E
F
F
E
H
I
G
AUXILIARIES
F
Rev. ind.
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
INDEX SHEET
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
2
4
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DCDC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
NEXT UNIT
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
DC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
=CBU
Additional CBU
depends on
drive configuration
UNIT BEFORE
DC_+1
DC_NP1
DC_-1
DC_+1
DC_NP1
DC_-1
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
PG
PG
PE
PE
Date
Name
I 06-07-06 P.OBERLE
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
W.KPFER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-06-25
03-06-26
Title
BUS BAR ARRANGEMENT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
NEXT UNIT
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_-
Rev. ind.
UNIT BEFORE
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
4
5
DC_+
-A7091
OPTION
OPTION
-K7201
-A7101
OPTION
-R7001
-V7091
-V7095
-V7092
-R7003
In case
of 3 rows
CBU
-C7011/...
-V7096
-R7101
-V7101
-C7101
AUX.
DC_NP
-T7091
-Z7081
OPTION
-R7002
-V7093
-C7102
-L7081
-R7081/2
-V7097
-Q7121
-C7081/2
PG
-V7098
-V7102
-R7102
In case
of 3 rows
CBU
-R7004
-V7094
PE
-R710B1/...6
DC_-
F
Rev. ind.
-R710A1/...6
Name
Date
A
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
4
5
6
<= row 1
<= row 3
<= row 1
<= row 3
=CBU right
<= row 2
=CBU left
B
*)
*)
page 701 =>
-C7011
-C7012
-C7013
-C7013
-C7012
-C7011
<= page 701
page 703 =>
-C7031
-C7032
-C7033
-C7033
-C7032
-C7031
<= page 703
page 705 =>
-C7051
-C7052
-C7053
-C7053
-C7052
-C7051
<= page 705
2 rows CBU
2 rows CBU
3 rows CBU
3 rows CBU
- CBU left, right, 2 rows or 3 rows depends on drive configuration

- Quantity of capacitors see converter HW diagram
*) Fill up direction: The CBU is filled up with capacitors starting with -C7011, then following the arrows
F
Rev. ind.
<= row 2
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
E
F
G
H
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-20
03-10-24
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
700
DC+
DC_NP
DCOPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS back
DC_+
DC_NP
DC_DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS middle
NEXT UNIT
OPTION
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC+
DC_NP
DC-
DC BUS front
In case of
2 rows CBU
DC+
DC_NP
DC-W70001
BK
-R7001
2
-W70003
-W70002
BK
-R7002
1
-W70004
BK
BK
-W70005
BK
-R7003
1
2
-W70003
-W70002
BK
-R7002
2
1
-W70006
BK
-R7004
1
2
-W70004
BK
BK
DC_+1 701.A2
DC_NP1 701.C2
DC_-1 701.E2
CHARGING
UNIT
E
709.A8
DC_+
709.E8
DC_-
Date
A 28.03.01
B
C 01-07-26
D 01-08-10
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
703.A2
703.C2
703.E2
DC_+3
DC_NP3
DC_-3
705.A2
705.C2
705.E2
DC_+4
DC_NP4
DC_-4
710.A1
710.C3
710.F1
DC_NP7
DC_NP8
708.A2
708.A6
DC_+6
DC_NP6
DC_-6
712.B3
712.B3
712.B3
OPTION
TO LSU IF CBU IS NEAREST TO LSU
DC_+2
DC_NP2
DC_-2
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G 07.05.04 P.OBERLE
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
CAPACITOR
BK
-R7001
2
1
DIU
-W70001
EARTH
GND
ISOLATOR NETWORK
In case of
3 rows CBU
Rev. ind.
UNIT BEFORE
DC_NP
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
BALANCING RESISTORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
700
701
A
DC_+1
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+1
700.C8
-C7011
-C7012
-C7013
C7011.1
C7012.1
C7013.1
DC_NP1
DC_NP1
C7011.2
C7012.2
C7013.2
E
700.C8
DC_-1
DC_-1
F
Rev. ind.
700.C8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
700
Cont.sh.
703
Sh.no.
701
A
DC_+2
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+2
700.D8
-C7031
-C7032
-C7033
C7031.1
C7032.1
C7033.1
DC_NP2
DC_NP2
C7031.2
C7032.2
C7033.2
E
700.D8
DC_-2
DC_-2
F
Rev. ind.
700.D8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
701
703
705
A
DC_+3
Row 1
*)
*)
*)
Row 2
Row 3
OPTION
DC_+3
700.D8
-C7051
-C7052
-C7053
C7051.1
C7052.1
C7053.1
DC_NP3
DC_NP3
C7051.2
C7052.2
C7053.2
E
700.D8
DC_-3
DC_-3
F
Rev. ind.
700.D8
Name
Date
B
C
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DC LINK CAPACITORS
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
703
705
708
1
A
-Z7081
OPTION
OPTION
DC_NP7
700.E8
DC_NP8
BK
700.E8
BK
GNYE
-W70811
GNYE
-W70810
BK
-W70807
-C7082
-X716 1
-C7081
-W70809
BK
-W70806
-W70804 BK
=COU
BK
-W70805
BK
-R7082
-R7081
-L7081
-F7081
-W70803 BK
-W70808
BK
-W70802
Rev. ind.
-W70801
PG
PG
PE
PE
Name
Date
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
GROUNDING NETWORK
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
705
709
708
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
-W70908
-W70907
-W70906
700.F1
a
a
c
c
a
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
DC_-
-V7098
-W70909
Name
700.E1
-V7097
-V7094
E
DC_+
-V7093
a
*) used for 400V
-X2 2
-X710 1
2
3
=COU
4
(depends
on supply
5
voltage)
6
7
=COU
PE
-W70902 GNYE
PU180/63/E 3.3kVA
5kVA
690V
3900V
575V
500V
460V
415V
380V *)
0V
0V
PE
/720.E8
A2
A1
-W70904
-W70901
BK1
BK2
BK3
BK4
BK5
BK6
BK7
-X2 1
-K7201
-V7096
-W70903
a
-V7092
-T7091
Date
A
B 02.04.01
C 01-07-26
D 01-08-10
-V7095
Rev. ind.
-V7091
OPTION
-W70905
-A7091
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
CHARGING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
708
709
710
-W71024
VLSCD
XV C724 BE
B1
A1
OF1
A2
OF2
B2
-R710A6
-W71034
-W71041
-R710A5
-W71033
-W71032
-R710A2
-W71003
-F7101
-W71023
-R710A4
-W71031
-R710A3
-W71022
-W71021
-W71001
DC_+4
-R710A1
-W71042
-W71007
FB+/3
=INU
-X7 1
-W71010
-W71011
=INU
OPTION 1, 2 NOT USED

=> -R710A1,-R710A2
=> -R710B1,-R710B2
(-)
CBU_DIU/2
X1.2
(+)
-W71012
X1.1
=INU
=INU
OPTION = Option1+Option2
=> -R710A1...-R710A6
=> -R710B1...-R710B6
=INU
-W71013
-C7102
-V7102 A1
CTRL-/3
-W71014
DC_NP4 -W71008 -X7 2
CBU_DIU/3
X1.1
(-)
CBU_DIU/4
X1.2
(+)
700.E8
-C7101
-W71040 GNYE
-W71015
1
=INU
OPTION = Option1
=> -R710A1...-R710A4
=> -R710B1...-R710B4
CBU_DIU/1
-R7102
-W71016
-W71017
=INU
-R7101
-V7101 A1
CTRL+/3
OPTIONS Discharging resistor:
PE
PE
-X7 3
-W71009
700.E8
-R710B2
-W71006
DC_-4
Name
Date
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
-R710B6
-W71038
VLSCD
XV C724 BE
B1
A1
OF1
A2
OF2
B2
-W71043
-R710B5
-W71037
-W71036
-R710B4
-W71028
-W71035
-R710B3
-W71027
-W71026
-R710B1
-W71025
-F7102
-W71005
Option 2
Option 1
Rev. ind.
Option 2
Option 1
700.E8
5
-W71002
OPTION
-A7101
-W71044
FB-/3
=INU
-W71004
Date
Name
F 03-10-20 ST.DUSS
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DISCHARGING UNIT
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
709
710
712
DC_+6
DC_NP6
DC_-6
-W71201 BK
-W71202 BK
-W71203 BK
-W71204
GNYE
PE
A1 A2
1
3
5
7
2
4
A
B
C
-Q7121
6
8
/713.D2
/713.D3
/713.D4
/713.D5
700.E8
700.E8
700.F8
/713.E7
PE
F
Rev. ind.
A
B
C
D
Date
28.03.01
02.04.01
01-07-26
01-08-10
Name
S.SCHLEGEL
S.SCHLEGEL
R.SEILER
S.SCHLEGEL
Date
Name
F
G
H
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
EARTHING ISOLATOR
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
710
713
712
COU1
290.B3
COU1
290.D6
-W71308
10
-F7131
2
-W71315
BK
-W71307
-W71306
BK
BK
BK
-W71305
-W71304
-W71303
BK
BK
BK
-W71302
-W71301
BK
(+)
-W71316 BK
(+)
-X715 1
-S7131 S1
E
GROUNDING
SWITCH
OPEN 1
Name
Date
A
B
C 01-07-26 R.SEILER
Date
Name
F
G
H 05-12-01 P.OBERLE
GROUNDING
SWITCH
OPEN 2
Prepared
Approved
Project name
GROUNDING
SWITCH
CLOSED 1
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
GROUNDING
SWITCH
CLOSED 2
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
S2 H1
BK
BK
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71310
X2
-Q7121
/712.C5
21
-W71309
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71314 BK
22
-W71313 BK
X1
13
-Q7121
/712.C5
-W71311
BK
-W71312
BK
14
Rev. ind.
COU1
290.B2
BK
A1 A2
-Q7121
/712.C5
LAMP TEST
UNLOCK
GROUNDING
SWITCH
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
712
715
713
OPTION
A
230VAC
1) 2)
1) 2)
12
BK
M
-M1 1~
F
A
B
C
D
Date
Name
Date
E
F
G 07.05.04
H
Name
P.OBERLE
Prepared
Approved
Project name
14
PE
GNYE
BN
BU
-W71505
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
-X7152
-X7151
-E7151
1L1
L
BN 1L2
N
BU 1PE
YE/GN
BN
BU
-W71504
>
1
1
2 2
3 3
PE PE
KTS 01141
0...60C
-B7151
PE
-X712
2L1
L
BN 2L2
N
BU 2PE
YE/GN
-X712
21
13
-X712
GNYE
-W71502
BK
-W71501
BK
-W71503
20
-X712
11
Rev. ind.
M
-M2 1~
P.OBERLE
M.BRNNIMANN
ACS 6000
Date
Date
03-10-30
03-10-31
Title
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
713
Cont.sh.
720
Sh.no.
715
DOOR
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
HIGH VOLTAGE
RELAIS
0..60C
I
J
K
L
Date
Name
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
BK
X2
=COU OR CBU
=COU OR CBU
A1 A2 /709.A6
-W72007
BK
X1
-W72006
-W72031
PE
-X714
-K7201
1)

UNIT BEFORE
1)
TO COU OR LOOP 2
NEXT UNIT
UNIT BEFORE
FROM COU OR LOOP 2

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 3
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 3

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 1
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 1

UNIT BEFORE
Option:
1 door cubicle
PE
BU
-X713
6
10
3
7
-W72004
BN
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
21
A2
11
2
6
-W72003
32
22
A1
12
14
22
>
-W72002
-X712
-W72001
KTO 1140
ACTUATOR
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
13
21
13
21
-B7201
-S7203
-S7202
14
22
-S7201
-W72004
BK
-A7091
Option:
2 doors cubicle
-W72030 PE
OPTION
CHARGING UNIT
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DOOR MONITORING
AUXILIARIES
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
715
720
DOOR
MONITORING
DOORLOCK
MONITORING
CABINET TEMPERATURE
HIGH VOLTAGE
RELAIS
32
Date
Name
M
N
O
P
Date
Name
Prepared
Approved
Project name
P.OBERLE
E.SUTER
ACS 6000
BK
X2
=COU OR CBU
A1 A2 /709.A7

I
J
K
L
-W72007
BK
1
X1
PE
-X714
-K7201
=COU OR CBU
TO COU OR LOOP 2
NEXT UNIT
UNIT BEFORE
1)
UNIT BEFORE
1)
FROM COU OR LOOP 2

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 3
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 3

UNIT BEFORE
TO COU OR LOOP 1
NEXT UNIT
FROM COU OR LOOP 1

UNIT BEFORE
PE
-W72006
-X713
6
10
4
8
3
7
-W72004
BN
21
A2
11
2
6
-W72003
-W72031
22
A1
12
14
22
1
TRIANGULAR KEY
FOR MANUAL RELEASE
Option:
1 door cubicle
-X712
0..60C
-W72002
-W72001
ACTUATOR
ALL CONTACTS
IN LOCKED
POSITION
13
21
13
21
-B7201
KTO 1140
>
-S7203
BU
-S7202
14
22
-S7201
-W72004
BK
-A7091
Option:
2 doors cubicle
2
-W72030 PE
OPTION
CHARGING UNIT
Rev. ind.
Date
Date
01-03-02
01-04-02
Title
DOOR MONITORING
AUXILIARIES
Doc. des.
Resp. dept.
Doc.No.
ATDD
= CBU
+
Lang. E
3BHS119828E01
Last sh.
Sh.no.
Cont.sh.
715
720
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB Switzerland Ltd
INSTALLATION
Tasnee Cop
ORDER NO
11042645
COMPONENT
ACS 6105_L12_1a9_C24_W1a
SERIAL NO.
SN 403
DOCUMENT
Electrical Part List
Based on
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Ackermann O.
14.12.06
Doc. kind
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14.12.06
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3BHS227358
Lang.
Rev. ind.
en
Page
No. of p.
1
14
Sheet index
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Identification of electrical equipment......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

Electrical part list = Converter (Position 1220) .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Electrical part list = LSU1 (Position 1251)................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Electrical part list = CBU1 (Position 1261) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Electrical part list = INU1 (Position 1301) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Electrical part list = COU1 (Position 1311)................................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Electrical part list = WCU1 (Position 1341) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
2
14
1. Identification of electrical equipment
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
3
14
Row
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
Quantity
Unit
HEATCABLE 50TTC2BO 50W/M 230V L=9M(9.6M)
PC
DD C779 BE02:PULSTANSFORMER INTERF. PINT

THERMOSTAT_KTS01141*250V AC
THERMOSTAT KTO1140 (NORMAL CLOSED CONT.)
CAPACITOR 10UF, 3300V, FILM
HEAT EXCHANGER SK 3248.000
UF C765 AE102: EARTH-FAULT MONIT. EAF
AC-DC CONV. 27V 250W TYPE LWN 1902-6
REACTOR 0,005MH, 2200A, AIR
RESISTOR WATERCOOLED 2.5 OHM
RESISTOR 200W, 10K, 5%
DOOR-POSITION SWITCH SZ2586+SZ2587
SAFETY LOCK AZM 170 230VAC
PULSE TRANSFORMER T60407-B4803-X010 10KV
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
2. Electrical part list = Converter (Position 1220)

1
-E5011/12
3BHB016006R2900
3. Electrical part list = LSU1 (Position 1251)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
-A3101
-B3151
-B3201
-C3021
-C3022
-E3151
-F3111
-G3101
-L3021
-L3022
-R3021
-R3022
-R3023
-S3201
-S3202
-T3001
-T3002
-T3007
-T3008
-T3011
-T3012
-T3017
-T3018
-T3021
-T3022
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
3BHE006805R0002
3BHE007154R0010
3BHL000986P8000
3BHB009946R0001
3BHB009946R0001
3BHB014038R2007
3BHE003604R0102
3BHL000986P7001
3BHB009181P0001
3BHB009181P0001
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
3BHL000406P0101
3BHB001306R0002
3BHB006872P0002
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
4
14
Row
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
Quantity
Unit
-T3027
-T3028
-V3001
-V3002
-V3003
-V3004
-V3005
-V3006
-V3007
-V3008
-V3011
-V3012
-V3013
-V3014
-V3015
-V3016
-V3017
-V3018
-V3021
-V3022
-V3023
-V3024
-V3025
-V3026
-V3027
-V3028
3BHB004719R0001
3BHB004719R0001
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3011
3BHL000986P3016
3BHL000986P3016

5STP 1752H0002 THYRISTOR 5.2KV
5SDD 1945H0001 RECTIFIERDIODE 4.5KV
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
CAPACITOR 2*1600UF, 2866V, FILM
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
4. Electrical part list = CBU1 (Position 1261)

1
2
3
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
-B7151
-B7201
-C7011
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
3BHE007154R0010
3BHL000986P8000
3BHB015651P0001
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
5
14
Row
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
-C7012
-C7031
-C7051
-C7081
-C7082
-C7101
-C7102
-E7151
-F7101
-F7102
-F71531
-F71531
-H7131
-K7201
-L7081
-Q7121
-R7001
-R7002
-R7081
-R7082
-R7101
-R7102
-R710A1
-R710A2
-R710B1
-R710B2
-S7131
-S7131
-S7131
-S7201
-S7203
3BHB015651P0001
3BHB015651P0001
3BHB015651P0001
3BHL000986P0006
3BHL000986P0006
3BHL000606P0002
3BHL000606P0002
3BHB014038R2007
3BHE009017R0102
3BHE009017R0102
3BHB019265R0405
3BHE010837R0000
3BHB018266R0001
3BHL000986P4000
3BHL000734P0003
3BHL000259P0003
3BHB010662R0500
3BHB010662R0500
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
3BHL000406P0002
3BHL000406P0002
HIES308461R0001
HIES308461R0001
HIES308461R0001
HIES308461R0001
3BHB012871R0001
3BHB012873R0004
3BHB018252R0001
3BHB001306R0002
3BHB006872P0002

CAPACITOR 2.0UF, 4950V, FILM
CAPACITOR 2.0UF, 4950V, FILM
XV C724 BE, VLSCD-BOARD SMD KOMPL. LACK.
XV C724 BE, VLSCD-BOARD SMD KOMPL. LACK.
FU_LINK:32V 500MA TYPE FKS
FLAT-TYPE FUSE TERMINAL BLOCK UK6-FSI/C
LAMPENTEST CBU
HIGH VOLTAGE RELAIS K81A B47, 10KV,10A
EARTHING ISOLATOR 3 POL 2O+2C (A3-12739)
RESISTOR 200W, 0.004K, 5%
RESISTOR 200W, 0.004K, 5%
RESISTOR 12 OHM (WATER COOLED)
LED-ELEMENT WHITE M22-LED-W
ILLUMINATION PUSHBUTTON YELLOW M22-DL-Y
M22-AK11 BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
6
14
Row
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
Quantity
Unit
-T7091
-V7091
-V7092
-V7093
-V7094
-V7095
-V7096
-V7097
-V7098
-V7101
-V7102
3BHL000986P2102
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000986P3001
3BHL000385P0101
3BHL000385P0101
TRANSFORMER: PU180/63/E, 3.3KVA

HIGH VOLTAGE DIODE UGE 0221AY4
IGCT RC, 4500V, 51MM, 5SHX0845F0001 LACK
IGCT RC, 4500V, 51MM, 5SHX0845F0001 LACK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
UF C760 BE42: INU-INTERFACE COMPLETE

UF C762 AE101: CURR.VOLT.MEASUR.INT:CVMI
XV C767 AE102: SUBPRINT VOLT.ADJUST, SVA
XV C768 AE101:SUBPRINTCURR.ADJ.:SCA 9MVA
CAPACITOR 250NF / 7400 VDC
DC-AXIAL FAN TYPE 614NN 42M3/H PAPST
UF C789 AE101: FSCD-BOARD VARNISHED
UF C789 AE101: FSCD-BOARD VARNISHED
PHASE S-093N
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
5. Electrical part list = INU1 (Position 1301)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
-A4121
-A4131
-A4132
-A4133
-B4151
-B4201
-C1
-C2
-C4051
-C4052
-C4053
-E4151
-E4152
-E4153
-E4161
-F4011
-F4012
-G4021
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
3BHE004573R0042
3BHE006412R0101
3BHB007209R0102
3BHB007211R0101
3BHE007154R0010
3BHL000986P8000
3BHL000986P0006
3BHL000986P0006
3BHB009183P0001
3BHB009183P0001
3BHB009183P0001
3BHB014038R2007
3BHB014038R2007
3BHB014038R2007
3BHB014024R0010
3BHE014023R0101
3BHE014023R0101
3BHB009885R0021
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
7
14
Row
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
-G4031
-G4041
-G4101
-G4102
-G4103
-G4104
-G4111
-G4112
-G4113
-L4011
-L4012
-L4051
-L4052
-L4053
-R4022
-R4023
-R4024
-R4025
-R4032
-R4033
-R4034
-R4035
-R4042
-R4043
-R4044
-R4045
-R4051
-R4052
-R4053
-RS1
-S4201
3BHB009885R0021
3BHB009885R0021
3BHL000986P7000
3BHL000986P7000
3BHL000986P7000
3BHL000986P7002
3BHB005243R0105
3BHB005243R0105
3BHB005243R0105
3BHB009181P0001
3BHB009181P0001
3BHB009182P0001
3BHB009182P0001
3BHB009182P0001
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0012
HIES308461R0001
HIES308461R0001
HIES308461R0001
3BHB010662R0120
3BHB001306R0002
PHASE S-093N
PHASE S-093N
AC-DC CONV. 27V 500W TYPE LXN 1604-6
AC-DC CONV +/-24V DUAL250W TYPELWN2660-6
KU C755 AE105:GATEUNITPWRSUPL: GUSP VAR.
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
8
14
Row
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
Quantity
Unit
-S4202
-S4203
-T4051
-T4052
-T4053
-U4001
-VC1
-VC2
-VF1
-VF2
-VF3
-VF4
-VN1
-VN2
-VR1
-VR2
-VR3
-VR4
3BHB001306R0002
3BHB006872P0002
3BHB014827R0001
3BHB014827R0001
3BHB014827R0001
3BHE021083R0101
3BHL000397P0001
3BHL000397P0001
3BHB013085R0001
3BHB013085R0001
3BHB013085R0001
3BHB013085R0001
3BHL000986P3002
3BHL000986P3002
3BHL000986P3002
3BHL000986P3002
3BHL000986P3002
3BHL000986P3002

CURRENT TRANSFORMER LEM LT2005-S/SP19
XV C770 BE101: HVD BOARD LACK.
DIODE 68MM/6KV 5SDF0860H0003
DIODE 68MM/6KV 5SDF0860H0003
IGCT, 4500V, 91MM, 5SHY 3545L0009 VARNIS
DIODE TYPE 5SDF1045H0002
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE NDPI-02

PP C902 AE101: AMC33 PCBA, VARNISHED
PROFIBUS ADAPTER MODULE NPBA-12
TB820V2 MODULE BUS MODEM
DIGITAL INPUT 24V D.C. 2X8 CH. DI810
TU830V1 EXTENDED MTU, 2*16
DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 24VDC 2*8 CH DO810
DO820 DIGITAL OUTPUT, RELAY. NORMAL OPEN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
6. Electrical part list = COU1 (Position 1311)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
-A2301
-A2401
-A2451
-A2501
-A2511
-A2511
-A2521
-A2521
-A2531
-A2531
-A2541
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
3BHL000764P0001
3BHE010751R0101
3BHL000510P0012
3BSE013208R0001
3BSE008508R0001
3BSE013234R0001
3BSE008510R0001
3BSE013234R0001
3BSE008508R0001
3BSE013234R0001
3BSE008514R0001
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
9
14
Row
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
-A2541
-A2951
-B2911
-B2981
-C1021
-C1026
-C1029
-E1011
-E2981
-E2982
-F1021
-F2831
-F2851
-G1201
-G1211
-H2301
-H2302
-H2302
-H2302
-K2811
-K2812
-K2813
-K2814
-K2821
-K2823
-K2824
-K2825
-K2831
-K2832
-K2833
-K2851
3BSE013235R0001
3BHE006373R0101
3BHL000986P8000
3BHE007154R0010
3BHB010945R0001
3BHB010945R0001
3BHB001170P0001
3BHB018764R0001
3BHB014025R0010
3BHB014025R0010
3BHB010917R0001
3BHB011243R0001
3BHB011243R0001
3BHL000986P7002
3BHL000986P7002
3BHB015055R0001
3BHB012864R0002
3BHB012869R0001
3BHB012871R0002
3BHL001374P0001
3BHB001576P0240
3BHL001374P0001
3BHB001576P0240
3BHL001374P0001
3BHL001374P0001
3BHL001374P0001
3BHL001374P0001
3BHB001576P0240
3BHB001576P0240
3BHB001576P0240
3BHB006467P0004

XV C769 AE101: OEI-BOARD
CAPACITOR 12500UF, 400V, ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR 12500UF, 400V, ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR 0.47UF/1000V 10%
STECKDOSE SCHUKO 2P+E
ACS 6000 FAN ASSEMBLY
VOLTAGEMONITORING EMR4-W500-2-C
SAFETY RELAY BN5930.48 24VDC
SAFETY RELAY BN5930.48 24VDC
CONTROL PANEL, CDP312R
PILOT LAMP RED M22-L-R
FIXING ADAPTER M22-A
LED-ELEMENT RED M22-LED-R
RELAY FINDER SERIE 60.13 9024 0040
TIMERRELAY/FINDER SERIE 87.62 0 240 0000
AUX. CONTACTOR DILR22-G (24 VDC)
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
10
14
Row
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
-K2851
-K2852
-K2852
-K2901
-K2901
-K2902
-K2902
-K2950
-K2951
-K2952
-K2953
-K2954
-Q1001
-Q1003
-Q1003
-Q1004
-Q1004
-Q1011
-Q1011
-Q1011
-Q1012
-Q1012
-Q1012
-Q1013
-Q1013
-Q1014
-Q1014
-Q1014
-Q1041
-Q1041
-Q1051
3BHB006467P0010
3BHB006467P0004
3BHB006467P0010
3BHL001374P0001
3BHL001376P0001
3BHL001374P0001
3BHL001376P0001
3BHB010569R0001
3BHB010569R0001
3BHB010568R0001
3BHB010569R0001
3BHB010568R0001
3BHL000479P0004
3BHB000605P0107
3BHL000499P0003
3BHL000479P0006
3BHL000499P0002
3BHB000623P1006
3BHB000630P1001
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB000623P1003
3BHB000630P1001
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB000623P1003
3BHB000630P1001
3BHB000623P1007
3BHB000630P1001
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1005
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1004
AUXILIARY CONTACT 11 DIL

AUX. CONTACTOR DILR22-G (24 VDC)
AUXILIARY CONTACT 11 DIL
SREW TERMINAL SOCKET TYPE 90.21
RELAY RM 602024
RELAY RM 602024
RELAY RM 302024
RELAY RM 602024
RELAY RM 302024
MINI CIRCUIT BREAKER PKZM 0-4-T
KP-STARTER PKZ2/ZM-10/S(230V50/60HZ)
AUX. CONTACT (1NO & 1NC) NHI11-PKZ2
MINIATUR CIRCUIT BREAKER FAZ-C6/1
NEUTRAL LINE DISCONNECTOR Z-NTS
AUXILIARY CONTACT (1NO+1NC) FAZ-XHI11
MINIATUR CIRCUIT BREAKER FAZ-C10/2-DC
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
11
14
Row
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
-Q1051
-Q1061
-Q1061
-Q1071
-Q1071
-Q1073
-Q2981
-Q2981
-R1021
-R1022
-R2541
-S2301
-S2302
-S2302
-S2302
-S2302
-S2303
-S2303
-S2303
-S2303
-S2304
-S2304
-S2304
-S2304
-S2811
-T1012
-T1021
-V1021
-V1022
-Z1021
-Z1022
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1004
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1004
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1004
3BHB012515R1001
3BHL000629P1003
HUCD430225P0007
HUCD430225P0007
3BSE008538R0001
3BHB001869R0100
3BHB012865R0004
3BHB012869R0001
3BHB012870R0001
3BHB012871R0001
3BHB012865R0003
3BHB012869R0001
3BHB012870R0001
3BHB012871R0001
3BHB012869R0001
3BHB012870R0001
3BHB012871R0005
3BHB012873R0005
3BHB001306R0002
3BHB015647R0001
3BHB010944R0001
3BHB012331R0001
3BHB012331R0001
3BHB012330R0001
3BHB012330R0001

RESISTOR 25W 22K 10%
RESISTOR 25W 22K 10%
TB807 MODULEBUS TERMINATOR
EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH (2NC+2NO)
ILLUMINA. PUSHBUTTON WHITE(I) M22-DL-WX1
NORMAL OPEN CONTACT M22-K10
ILLUMINA. PUSHBUTTON WHITE(0) M22-DL-WX0
LED-ELEMENT BLUE M22-LED-B
ILLUMINATION PUSHBUTTON BLUE M22-DL-B
TRANSF.UJ168B/92 1PH 110-500/230V 2.8KVA
TRANSFORMER DT2500VA (2735VA) 3 PHASES
RECTIFIER BRIDGE VUO 60-12 NO3
RECTIFIER BRIDGE VUO 60-12 NO3
NTC RESISTOR 30A 1R SG405
NTC RESISTOR 30A 1R SG405
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
12
14
Row
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
Quantity
Unit
105
106
107
-Z2851
-Z2852
-Z2901
3BHB006541P0002
3BHB006541P0002
3BHB000606P0002
SNUBBER VARISTOR VGBDIL24

SNUBBER VARISTOR VGBDIL24
SURGE SUPPRESSOR VG SPKZ 250
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
TB820V2 MODULE BUS MODEM

DO820 DIGITAL OUTPUT, RELAY. NORMAL OPEN
AI810 ANALOG INPUT MODULE
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE PROBE / RTD PT100
NH00 25A/500 GL FUSE LINK
RELAIS RM 232 024
RELAY/FINDER SERIE 60.13 8230 0040
PE TERMINAL USLKG 5
LASTTRENNSCH OS 32D12 3P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
7. Electrical part list = WCU1 (Position 1341)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
-A5201
-A5211
-A5211
-A5221
-A5221
-A5231
-A5231
-B5451
-B5631
-B5741
-E5741
-F5001
-F5002
-F5003
-G5021
-K5451
-K5542
-K5542
-PE
-Q5001
-Q5002
-Q5002
-Q5003
-Q5003
-Q5004
-Q5011
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
3BSE013208R0001
3BSE008508R0001
3BSE013234R0001
3BSE008514R0001
3BSE013235R0001
3BSE008516R0001
3BSE013234R0001
3BHL000986P8000
3BHB015149R0001
3BHE007154R0010
3BHB014025R0010
GZN 640007P0007
GZN 640007P0007
GZN 640007P0007
3BHL000986P7002
3BHB011880R0001
3BHL001374P0230
3BHL001376P0001
3BHE004742R0001
1SCA022456R9710
3BHB000605P0108
3BHL000499P0003
3BHB000605P0108
3BHL000499P0003
3BHL000479P0007
3BHL000622P1005
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
13
14
Row
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Prep.
Appr.
Project
Order-No.:
Designation
Ident.-No
Description
-Q5011
-Q5741
-Q5741
-R5231
-Z5001
-Z5411
-Z5412
3BHL000629P1003
3BHB012515R1001
3BHL000629P1003
3BSE008538R0001
3BHB011317R0001
3BHB000606P0002
3BHB000606P0002

TB807 MODULEBUS TERMINATOR
FILTER EMC 3 PHASE 480V 16A FN258-16/29
Ackermann O.
J.Kappeler
Tasnee Coperion
1-1042645
14-12-06
14-12-06
Doc. kind
Title
Doc.
Item
des.
des.
Quantity
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Resp. dept.
Doc. No.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Lang.
3BHS227358
en
Rev. ind. Page
No. of p.
14
14

Abb PLC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abb PLC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abb PLC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document mainly about?

What is the document mainly about?

What components are listed on page 847?

What components are listed on page 847?

Tasnee Identification Code

FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602)

Tecnimont Identification Code

LDPE 400 KT/Y

Location: AL JUBAIL KSA

Client Ref.: TASNEE

FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602) DATA

COPERION WERNER & PFLEIDERER

FINAL ISSUED FOR

WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN

64019320 . 541 . 0015 . 4 . 03

Tasnee Identification Code

FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602)

Tecnimont Identification Code

Location: AL JUBAIL KSA

Client Ref.: TASNEE

GENERAL FEATURES ACCORDING TO:

GENERAL TESTING SPECIFICATION:

TYPE OF MACHINE FED BY VF DRIVE:

EXTRUDER MAIN MOTOR

VF DRIVE MAIN EQUIPMENT:

MV/MV POWER TRANSFORMER; VF CONVERTER UNIT; AC INDUCTION MOTOR.

AC THREE-PHASE MV MOTOR, OF CHARACTERISTICS AS PER 3276-NN-SE-020301

CONVERTER UNIT SCHEME:

VF OUTPUT UNIT TYPE:

ACS 6000 Inverter Unit,3 level MV-DTC inverter (IGCTs)

MV/LV POWER TRANSFORMER:

5200kVA(2600/2600) WITH TWO MULTI SECONDARY WINDINGS

SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS - Caratteristiche dellalimentazione

SYSTEM NEUTRAL POINT:

SHORT CIRCUIT POWER:

REQUIREMENTS ON SUPPLY SIDE - Requisiti lato rete di alimentazione

ACCORDING TO : IEEE 519

EFFICIENCY OF THE CONVERTER / INVERTER AT FULL LOAD:

Rendimento dellazionamento completo a pieno carico:

CONVERTER CHARACTERISTIC VALUES

Tasnee Identification Code

FREQUENCY CONVERTER (6-VFD-602)

Tecnimont Identification Code

Location: AL JUBAIL KSA

Client Ref.: TASNEE

MAX. PERMISSIBLE CURRENT : A

ROTATIONAL SPEED STABILITY : % +

0,1 at rated speed

RIPPLE OF OUTPUT CURRENT : %

CURRENT INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT : A DC

VOLTAGE INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT : V DC

POWER CONVERTER MAINS SIDE

3 TO 50 at constant torque; 50 to 65,4 at constant power

POWER CONVERTER MOTOR SIDE

INTERMEDIATE CIRCUIT MAKE

[X] THYRISTOR (IGCT)

CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) mm :

COOLING SYSTEM DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) mm :

854 External heat exchanger)

POWER DISSIPATION WITH NOMINAL OPERATION :